Univerge sv8500 PDF

FP85-104 S1E
Operations and Maintenance Manual
NWA-041693-001
ISSUE 2.0
Stock # 439TBA
To view the latest issue of this document go to NEC Knowledgebase @ http://www.kbase.cns.nec.com.au & search for NEC-10789
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC Australia Pty Ltd. reserves the right to change product specifications,
functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
Periodically changes are made to the information contained in this manual.
Although all efforts have been made to ensure that the contents are correct,
NEC shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential or incidental
damages resulting from the use of the equipment, manual or any related
materials.
Should you find any error, NEC welcomes your comments. Please contact
NEC on 1800 819 766.
NEC Australia Pty Ltd. has prepared this document for use by its
employees and customers. The information contained herein is the
property of NEC Australia Pty Ltd. and shall not be reproduced without
prior written approval from NEC Australia Pty Ltd.
REFERENCES
This document may contain references to models, features and specifications
marketed in other countries and may not be applicable to the Australian and
New Zealand markets. Please contact your system representative for details.
The related Service/Technical Information Bulletin should be read in

conjunction with this document.
TRADE MARKS
Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. ElectraMail and Electra
Elite are registered trademarks of NEC America, inc. PCPro is a trademark of
NEC Corporation. UNIVERGE is a trademark of NEC Corporation.
This document may include references to other brand and product names that
are trademarks or registered trademarks which belong to the respective
trademark owner.
Copyright © 2009
NEC Australia Pty Ltd.
Printed in Australia
Note: This disclaimer also applies to all related documents previously published.
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC Infrontia Corporation reserves the right to change the specifica-

tions, functions, or features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Infrontia Corporation has prepared this document for use by its
employees and customers. The information contained herein is the
property of NEC Infrontia Corporation, and shall not be reproduced
without prior written approval from NEC Infrontia Corporation.
All brand names and product names on this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 2008 - 2009
NEC Infrontia Corporation

PRODUCT LIABILITY
PRODUCT LIABILITY
1. USING THE EQUIPMENT SAFELY
The following safety information describes how to avoid injuries while working with the equipment and how to
prevent damage to the equipment. Learn the meaning of the following symbols and then read this section
carefully before using the equipment.
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
DANGER
Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or death.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or a serious
system fault.
ATTENTION
Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or
cause the system to fail.
The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries.
If a system-down, malfunction, defect or external factor such as an electrical failure indirectly causes a loss of profit, the
company (or affiliates) will not be held responsible.
The goal is to produce a comprehensive and accurate manual. However, if errors or omissions are found in this manual,
please notify NEC Infrontia Corporation.
If the system requires installation or repair, contact the dealer or its service technician.
Carefully read all the manuals that relate to the system.
PL- 1
PRODUCT LIABILITY
2. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
The following describes the safety considerations that must be observed before using the system, the power-
related equipment and the peripheral equipment, such as consoles, the Main Distribution Frame (MDF),
telephones, PCs, printers, etc.
DANGER
If the system emits smoke or a burning, acrid odor, immediately turn off the system power.
Operating the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure. After
turning off the power and confirming that the smoke has disappeared, contact the dealer.
If any equipment, such as the system, the main power source, a cabinet or peripheral equipment tips
over, turn off the power and contact the dealer.
If liquid reaches the inside of the system or the main power source, turn off the power. Operating
the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure.
Do not touch the internal parts of the main power source to disassemble or configure it. This action
may cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure.
R
PW
NEC Infrontia Corporation does not take any responsibility for disassembled or reconfigured
equipment.
Do not put any container objects (such as a vase or a cup) on the main power source or any
peripheral equipment. It might cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure.
Do not tamper with, modify, forcefully bend, forcefully remove or twist an electrical cord or any
wiring to or from the system, the main power source or any peripheral equipment. It might cause a
fire, an electrical shock, or a system failure. If the wiring is damaged, contact the dealer.
dust Correctly insert all of the electrical plugs into the electrical outlets. Before inserting a plug into an
electrical outlet, ensure that there is no dust on the plug’s blades. If there is dust on a blade, it might
cause a fire.
Do not use power other than the power that was designated for the system when it was installed.
PWR
PL- 2
PRODUCT LIABILITY
DANGER
Do not attempt to repair or move the main power source without assistance from the dealer.
PWR
Do not put any metal or combustible objects into a vent of the system, the main power source, or
any peripheral equipment. Operating the system in this state might cause a fire, an electrical shock,
or a system failure. If this occurs, turn off the power and contact the dealer.
Be careful when using any peripheral equipment’s Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). If the liquid
leaks, it can be harmful to the user and to the system.
Before connecting any non-NEC, customer-provided equipment, check with the supplier to ensure
? that the equipment is compatible. If the supplier cannot confirm the compatibility, do not connect
the equipment. Connecting incompatible equipment might cause a fire or an electrical shock.
PL- 3
PRODUCT LIABILITY
WARNING
Do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause
personal injury or damage to the equipment.
When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to
remove the plug could cause a fire or an electrical shock to occur.
If lightning causes a fault, contact the dealer.
Provide the appropriate temperature, humidity, and ventilation on an around-the-clock basis. For
example, at a height that is one meter (3.28 feet) above the floor, the temperature should be between
20° C and 25qC (68° F to 77° F) and the humidity should be approximately 50%.
Take appropriate anti-static measures so that the other end of the anti-static kit can be connected to
ATTENTION
Contents
the metal part of the frame.
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
PL- 4
PRODUCT LIABILITY
WARNING
Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries:

• The system’s emergency back-up battery may be a rechargeable lead battery. Check the
emergency battery for an electrical failure.
• Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful to human skin and eyes. If battery acid
contacts skin, wash the affected area with soap and water. If battery acid contacts the eyes,
flush the eyes with water. In either event, seek medical attention. If there is battery acid on a
cloth, use water to wash the battery acid from the cloth.
• Do not intentionally short batteries. Do not put the battery near a fire or in a fire. Do not
disassemble the battery, drop it or knock it against another object.
• The battery’s life expectancy is affected by its environment. The normal battery life is
approximately three years. If the battery is used in an outdoor setting and is exposed to high
temperatures, its life expectancy drops to approximately one year.
• Perform periodic diagnostic tests and maintenance procedures on the emergency battery and
its terminals to ensure their readiness. If there is a power failure and the emergency battery is
not ready, then the system will not work. Additionally, a damaged or dead battery, or terminals
that need replacement might cause battery acid to leak, which might cause smoke or a fire.
The battery and terminals are periodic replacement parts (the cost is chargeable to the
customer). A service contract, with the supplier or service technician, to perform routine
maintenance for the battery is recommended.
Do not touch peripheral equipment with wet hands. Do not allow any liquid to touch any of the
peripheral equipment.
Do not touch the printer’s internal components when replacing disposables such as a cartridge or a
ribbon. Ensure that the printer is turned off and that it is not hot in order to prevent burns from any
accidental contact with the internal components.
Do not drop the peripheral equipment or knock it against another object. These actions might cause
an equipment failure.
PL- 5
ATTENTION
Do not use benzine, thinner or alcohol for cleaning. When removing dust and dirt, put diluted, mild
detergent on a cloth and then wring out the cloth. Remove the dust and dirt with the cloth and then
Thinner
wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth.
Do not place any equipment in the following environments:

• Locations that are exposed to direct sunlight
• Locations where the moisture level exceeds the allowed level
• Locations where the equipment might be exposed to water, oil, and chemicals
• Locations with very low temperatures, such as in a walk-in cooler or freezer
• Locations that are exposed to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from devices such as
television sets and two-way radios
• Locations that receive illegal electric waves
The life expectancies of the system and the main power source will be shortened if placed in a
location that is affected by hydrogen sulfide or salt, such as a seaside area.
PL- 6
REGULATORY NOTICE (For North America)
1. CUSTOMER INFORMATION FOR TELEPHONE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (TTE)
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format:
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. When such changes af-
fect the compatibility or use of the UNIVERGE SV8500 system, the telephone company is required to give
adequate notice of the changes in order for you to maintain uninterrupted service.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive
RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but
not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may
be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products
approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is the product identifier in format:
US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN
of 0.3).
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utilities commission, public
service commission or corporation commission for information.
For single and two-line equipment that connects to the telephone network via a plug and jack, the plug and jack
used with this equipment must comply with FCC Part 68 rules.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply
with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord
and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack
that is also compliant.
1.1 TELEPHONE/SERVICE PROVIDER COMPANY NOTIFICATION
Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the following information must be provided
to the telephone company:
• Your telephone number.
• FCC registration number:
For SV8500 system, use the following number:
FCC Product Identifier: US:NIFMF21BSN8153, US:NIFPF21BSN8153, US:NIFKF21BSN8153
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 2.1B
USOC jacks required: RJ21X, RJ2EX, RJ2GX
REGULATORY
R-1
1.2 INCIDENCE OF HARM
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice is not practical, the telephone com-
pany will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could af-
fect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in or-
der for you to make necessary modifications to maintain interrupted service.
1.3 REPAIR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you dis-
connect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
If equipment malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by an authorized agent of NEC Unified Solutions,
Inc. or by NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. The user requiring service is responsible for reporting the need for ser-
vice to an NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. authorized agent or to NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
1.4 PRIVATE (LEASED) LINES
For Private (Leased) Line (Analog Data Format) equipment, type JM8 jack is required. Refer to ATIS Tech-
nical Report No. 5 for details on this connector.
The Facility Interface Code (FIC) associated with each private line application represents the type of service
that will be provided by the telephone company. The user instructions must contain a detailed list of private
line ports and the associated FICs for which the equipment has been approved. In addition, the Service Order
Code (SOC) must also be included for analog systems. The SOC indicates the degree of network protection
provided by the equipment,.
For Private (Leased) Line (Digital Format) equipment, in addition to the general requirements for all equip-
ment, certain digital connections require that an encoded analog content and billing protection affidavit be pro-
vided the telephone company. Customer instructions must contain information on the preparation and
submission of the affidavit.
To comply with state tariffs, the telephone company must be given notification prior to connection. In some
states, the state public utility commission, public service commission or corporation commission must give pri-
or approval of connection.
1.5 TOLL RESTRICTION AND LEAST COST ROUTING EQUIPMENT
The consumer/purchaser/supplier instructions accompanying this equipment and/or software features must
contain the following notice:
The software contained in the UNIVERGE SV8500 to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
REGULATORY
R-2
Failure to upgrade the premises systems or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are estab-
lished will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and these
codes.
1.6 DIRECT INWARD DIALING
Note: ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE

FOR PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS A VIOLATION OF PART 68 OF THE FCC RULES.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) must contain the following:
Proper Answer Supervision is when this equipment returns answer supervision to the Public Switched Tele-
phone Network (PSTN) when Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls are:
• Answered by the called station.
• Answered by the Attendant.
• Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE)
user.
• Routed to a dial prompt.
This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the Public Switched Telephone Net-
work (PSTN). Permissible exceptions are:
• A call is unanswered.
• A busy tone is received.
• A reorder tone is received.
1.7 VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING OVER DID LINES
When using voice announcement or monitoring over DID Lines, observe the following.
CAUTION
• Using the Voice Announcement feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the tele-
phone line may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Consult a legal advisor before imple-
menting any practice to monitor or record a telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require
a party monitoring or recording a telephone to use a beep-tone(s), notify all parties to the telephone con-
versation and/or obtain consent of all parties to the telephone conversation. In monitoring or recording
sound activities at the other end of the telephone line using the Voice Announcement feature, the sound of
the alert tone at the beginning of the Voice Announcement may or may not be considered sufficient under
applicable laws. Some of the applicable laws provide for strict penalties for illegal monitoring or record-
ing of telephone conversations.
REGULATORY
R-3
1.8 EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
If equipment such as Private Branch Exchanges (PBX), key systems or customer-owned coin/credit card tele-
phones is sold to a call aggregator, it must be capable of providing users access to interstate providers of op-
erator services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call aggregators to block
access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.
1.9 ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY
Parties responsible for equipment requiring AC power should consider including an advisory notice in their
customer information suggesting the customer use a surge arrestor. Telephone companies report that electrical
surges, typically lightening transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment connected to AC
power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem.
1.10 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY
NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing aid
compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of
hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible
telephones.
1.11 MUSIC ON HOLD
Note: "In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be required from the American Society of Com-
posers, Authors and Publishers, or other similar organization, if radio or TV broadcasts are transmit-
ted through the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication system. NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.,
hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license."
2. RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:
Note: “This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pur-
suant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of
this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Note: Modifying this equipment without an approval from NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. may void your author-
ity granted by the FCC to operate the equipment.”
3. SAFETY INFORMATION
This equipment has been certified by Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all applicable
requirements:
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M – General Requirements – Canadian Electrical Code, Part II
REGULATORY
R-4
• CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03 – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part l: General Re-
quirements
• UL 60950-1-SAFETY, 1st Edition – Safety of Information Technology Equipment – Part I: General Re-
quirements
4. INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS
Industry Canada has established rules that permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the tele-
phone network. Prior to the connection or disconnection of this telephone system to or from the telephone net-
work, the telephone company must be provided with the following information.
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada Technical Specifications/Le present material est conforme
aux specifications techniques applicables d’industrie Canada.
(1) Your telephone number.
(2) IC registration number: IC: 140L-SN8153
(3) Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment: 2.1
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of
the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degra-
dation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any re-
pairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommu-
nications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, tele-
phone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, when present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
• Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the applicable electri-
cal inspection authority or electrician.
• The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be
connected to the telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of RENs of all the devices does not exceed five/L’in-
dice d’equivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaus qui peuvent etre
raccordes a une interface telephonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinai-
son quelconque de dispositifs, a la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’equivalence de la sonnerie
de tous les dispositifs n’excede pas 5.
• This equipment has been certified by the Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all
applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment C 22.2 No. 225.
REGULATORY
R-5
• This equipment meets IC requirements CS03, PART II, PART III, PART VI.
• This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus
as set out in the radio interference regulations of Industry Canada/Le present appareil numerique n’emet
pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe A
prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par Industrie Canada.
5. BATTERY DISPOSAL
The UNIVERGE SV8500 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, Chas-
sis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal
procedures.
Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades
Unit Name Type of Battery Quantity
MH250 (WLPS3(E)-A) Lithium-ion 1
PSIII (PS3D) Lithium-ion 1
CT-12 Headset Cordless Nickel Metal-Hydride 1
DTH-4R-2 Nickel Metal-Hydride 1
DTL-8R-1 Nickel Metal-Hydride 1
DTR-1HM-1 TEL Lithium 1
DTR-1R-2 Nickel-Cadmium 1
DTR-4R-2 TEL Nickel-Cadmium 1
DTU-4R-1 TEL Lead Acid 1
Headset Cordless II Nickel Metal-Hydride 1
Bluetooth® Cordless Handset Lithium-ion 1
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
• DO NOT PLACE USED BATTERIES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH! THE PRODUCT YOU PUR-
CHASED CONTAINS LITHIUM, NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES. LITHIUM,
NICKEL-CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED, RECYCLED, OR DIS-
POSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER.
• The incineration, landfilling or mixing of nickel-cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal sol-
id waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas. Contact your local solid waste management of-
ficials for other information regarding the environmentally sound collection, recycling, and disposal of
the battery.
REGULATORY
R-6
• Nickel-Cadmium (or sealed lead) batteries must be returned to a federal or state approved nickel-cadmi-
um (or sealed lead) battery recycler. This may be where the batteries were originally sold or a local seller
of automotive batteries. Contact your local waste management officials for other information regarding
the environmentally sound collection, recycling and disposal of the battery contained in this product. For
Ni-Cd batteries, you can also call 1-800-8-BATTERYSM when further information is required.
• The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8500 system contains the following labels regarding proper dispos-
al.
PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING
CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.

BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR
DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE
DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-Cd
CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.

BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Pb
CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE

BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED
OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT
BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE.
Ni-MH
REGULATORY
R-7
REGULATORY NOTICE (For EU)
1. PREFACE
This manual is valid for the UNIVERGE SV8500 telephone system.
Some products described in this manual are not (yet) available for specific countries or markets. For this rea-
son, the related specifications, instructions for installation and use of these specific products are not valid for
these markets. Refer to NEC Philips for more details in case of any questions about these products.
1.1 CE Notice (European Union)
The equipment described in this manual is intended to be connected to local area networks (LAN) and supports
a wide range of peripheral equipment. Additional interfaces are available for connection to public analogue
and digital telecommunication networks which comply with:
• ETS 300 011 (PRI)
• ETS 300 012 (BRI)
• ETS 300 402 (PRI & BRI)
• ETS 300 403 (PRI & BRI)
• TBR3 :ISDN basic rate interface
• TBR4 :ISDN primary rate interface
• TBR21 :Analogue interface
To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country specific or network
specific features should match the supported features of the system. For an overview of the supported features,
refer to the detailed documentation that comes with this system, contact your local NEC Philips representative
or the support desk of NEC Philips Unified Solutions.
Hereby, “NEC Philips Unified Solutions”, declares that this product is in compliance with the essential require-
ments and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
For some of the SV8500 communication platform components the following warning is applicable:
WARNIG : This is a class A product.

In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which
case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
REGULATORY
R-8
Notice that this warning is only applicable to components of the SV8500 communication platform of which
the product type plate indicates “Complies with EN55022 Class A”.
2. PRODUCT DISPOSAL INFORMATION
2.1 For countries in the European Union
The symbol depicted here has been affixed to your product in order to inform you that electrical and elec-
tronic products should not be disposed of as municipal waste.
Electrical and electronic products including the cables, plugs and accessories should be disposed of separately
in order to allow proper treatment, recovery and recycling. These products should be taken to a designated fa-
cility where the best available treatment, recovery and recycling techniques are available. Separate disposal
has significant advantages: valuable materials can be re-used and it prevents the dispersion of unwanted sub-
stances into the municipal waste stream. This contributes to the protection of human health and the environ-
ment.
Please be informed that a fine may be imposed for illegal disposal of electrical and electronic products via the
general municipal waste stream.
To facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been made for local
collection and recycling. If you need to dispose of your electrical and electronic products, please refer to your
supplier or the contractual agreements that your company made when these products were acquired.
At www.nec-philips.com/weee you can find information about separate disposal and environmentally sound
recycling.
2.2 For countries outside the European Union
Disposal of electrical and electronic products in countries outside the European Union should be done in line
with the local regulations. If no arrangement has been made with your supplier, please contact the local author-
ities for further information.
3. Declaration of Conformity
• ýesky
“NEC Philips Unified Solutions” tímto prohlašuje, že tento “SV8500” je ve shodČ se základními
požadavky a dalšími pĜíslušnými ustanoveními smČrnice 1999/5/ES.
http://www.nec-philips.com/doc
• Dansk
Undertegnede “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr “SV8500” overhold-
er de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
• Deutsch
REGULATORY
R-9
Hiermit erklärt “NEC Philips Unified Solutions”, dass sich das Gerät “SV8500” in Übereinstimmung mit
den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EG befindet.
• Eesti
Käesolevaga kinnitab “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” seadme “SV8500” vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
• English
Hereby, “NEC Philips Unified Solutions”, declares that this “SV8500” is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
• Español
Por medio de la presente “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” declara que el “SV8500” cumple con los req-
uisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
• ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȒ
ȂǼ ȉǾȃ ȆǹȇȅȊȈǹ Ǿ NEC Philips ǼȃȅȆȅǿǾȂǼȃǼS ȁȊSǼǿS ǻǾȁȍȃǼǿ ȅȉǿ “SV8500”
ȈȊȂȂȅȇĭȍȃǼȉǹǿ ȆȇȅȈ ȉǿȈ ȅȊȈǿȍǻǼǿȈ ǹȆǹǿȉǾȈǼǿȈ Ȁǹǿ ȉǿȈ ȁȅǿȆǼȈ ȈȋǼȉǿȀǼȈ
ǻǿǹȉǹȄǼǿȈ ȉǾȈ ȅǻǾīǿǹȈ 1999/5/ǼȀ.
• Français
Par la présente “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” déclare que l'appareil “SV8500” est conforme aux exi-
gences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
• Íslenska
Hér með lýsir “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” yfir því að “SV8500” er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og
aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
• Italiano
Con la presente “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” dichiara che questo “SV8500” è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
• Latviski
REGULATORY
R-10
Ar šo “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” deklarƝ, ka “SV8500” atbilst DirektƯvas 1999/5/EK bǌtiskajƗm
prasƯbƗm un citiem ar to saistƯtajiem noteikumiem.
• Lietuviǐ
Šiuo “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” deklaruoja, kad šis “SV8500” atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir ki-
tas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
• Malti
Hawnhekk, “NEC Philips Unified Solutions”, jiddikjara li dan “SV8500” jikkonforma mal-ƫtiƥijiet es-
senzjali u ma provvedimenti oƫrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
• Magyar
Alulírott, “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” nyilatkozom, hogy a “SV8500” megfelel a vonatkozó
alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
• Nederlands
Hierbij verklaart “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” dat het toestel “SV8500” in overeenstemming is met
de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
• Norsk
“NEC Philips Unified Solutions” erklærer herved at utstyret “SV8500” er i samsvar med de grunn-
leggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
• Polski
Niniejszym, "NEC Philips Unified Solutions" deklaruje, ze “SV8500” jest zgodny z wymaganiami i in-
nymi warunkami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
• Português
“NEC Philips Unified Solutions” declara que este “SV8500” está conforme com os requisitos essenciais
e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
• Slovensko
REGULATORY
R-11
“NEC Philips Unified Solutions” izjavlja, da je ta “SV8500” v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi doloþili direktive 1999/5/ES.
• Slovensky
“NEC Philips Unified Solutions” týmto vyhlasuje, že “SV8500” spĎĖa základné požiadavky a všetky prís-
lušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
• Suomi
“NEC Philips Unified Solutions” vakuuttaa täten että “SV8500” tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY
oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
• Svenska
Härmed intygar “NEC Philips Unified Solutions” att denna “SV8500” står I överensstämmelse med de
väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
NEC PHILIPS Unified Solutions

Anton Philipsweg 1
1223 KZ Hilversum
The Netherlands
REGULATORY
R-12
TERMS IN THIS MANUAL
System Name
In this manual, the following are used unless the types of the Telephony Server and the PBX need to be identified.
TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL SYSTEM NAMES

SV8500, the system UNIVERGE SV8500
SV7000, the system UNIVERGE SV7000 Note 1
MPS, SV7000 MPS, the system UNIVERGE SV7000 MPS
IPX, 2400 IPX, NEAX 2400 IPX, the system NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange Note 2
IPS, 2000 IPS, NEAX 2000 IPS NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER Note 3
NEAX IMX, IMX NEAX2400 IMX
NEAX7400 IMX
NEAX7400 ICS (IMX)
NEAX IVS2, IVS2 NEAX2000 IVS2
NEAX2000 INTEGRATED VOICE SERVER
NEAX7400 ICS M100MX
NEAX IVS, IVS NEAX7400 ICS Model110
NEAX7400 ICS Model120
NEAX7400 ICS Model80VS
NEAX7400 ICS Model100
Note 1: UNIVERGE SV7000 Remote Node over IP is also included in the SV7000 series, which is migrated from
the existing IPX system. It is mentioned as “Remote Node over IP” or “the system” in this manual.
Note 2: In regard to China market, NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange has not been released but
NEAX2400 is released.
Note 3: In regard to China market, NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER has not been released but
NEAX2000 is released.
TERMS-1
Terminal Name
In this manual, the following terminals are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified.
GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL TERMINAL NAMES

Dterm Series E/Dterm 75
Dterm
Dterm Series i
Digital terminal
DT310
DT300 Series
DT330
Dterm Series E/Dterm 75
IP Enabled with IP adapter Note 4
Dterm Dterm Series i with IP
IP terminal adapter Note 4
DtermIP INASET Note 4
Desktop DtermIP
DtermIP
Terminal (Proprietary Protocol)
DtermSP20
Soft Phone (Propri-
IP etary Protocol) DtermSP30
Station Soft Phone DtermSP30 (Proprietary Protocol)
DtermSP30 (SIP)
Soft Phone (SIP)
Soft Client SP350
DtermIP DtermIP (SIP)
SIP
DT710
terminal SIP Multiple Line terminal
DT700 Series DT730
DT750
WLAN Handset (MH Series) MH250
Standard SIP terminal Third-party SIP terminal
PHS
PS
PCS
Note 4: This terminal provides users with all features currently available on DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol).
TERMS-2
Media Gateway (MG), Media Converter (MC), and Voice Conference Server (VS) Names
In this manual, the following are mentioned as each common term unless these types need to be identified.
GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL EQUIPMENT NAMES

MG(PRI) Card [SCA-24PRIA]
MG(PRI) Box [MG-24PRIA]
MG(PRI) MG(PRI) Card [SCA-30PRIA]
MG(PRI) Box [MG-30PRIA]
MG-PRI/MG-PRA
MG-T1(SIP) MG-T1(SIP) Card [SCA-24DTIA]
MG(BRI) Card [SCA-2BRIA]
MG(BRI) MG(BRI) Box [MG-2BRIA]
MG-BRI
MG-SIP16
MG(SIP) MG-SIP16 Card [SCA-16SIPMGA]
MG-SIP16 Box [MG-16SIPMGA]
MCMG Card [SCA-4LC2COTA]
MCMG Box [MG-4LC2COTA]
MC&MG-COT
MCMG Card [SCA-7COTA]
MC&MG-COT with PFT
MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTA]
MG-COT MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTB]
MG-COT Card [SCA-6COTC]
Analog 2MC
Analog MC 8LC Card [SCA-8LCA]
8LC Card [SCA-8LCA-EMEA]
VS-32
VS32 VS-32(Dual) Card [SCA-VS32VA]
VS-32(Dual) Box [MG-VS32VA]
TERMS-3
General Terms
• PIR on this manual is a term equivalent to GC (Gateway Chassis) in the North America.
• Automatic Number Identification (ANI) on this manual is a term equivalent to Calling Line Identification
(CLI) in Australia.
TERMS-4
NWA-041693-001
ISSUE 2.0
JANUARY, 2009
UNIVERGE SV8500
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-1
1. General Knowledge of SV8500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-1
1.1 About Release Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-1
1.2 Structure of Telephony Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-2
1.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-2
1.2.2 TP and SP for System Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-2
1.3 Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-3
1.4 Lan Interface Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-5
1.4.1 LAN1 Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-5
1.4.2 LAN2 Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-7
1.5 Trunking Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INT-9
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1 SV8500 Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2 PIR and TSWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3. GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . 7
4.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.1 Fault Reporting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7. BASIC KNOWLEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
7.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.2.1 Module Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.2.2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.2.3 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.4 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
7.3 Local Partition (LP) Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.4 Fault Detecting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.5 Range of Faults Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
CHAPTER 2 OPERATIONS OF SV8500 SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1. HOW TO SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.2 Programming to Specify How to Set Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
–i–
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
1.3 How to Adjust Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

2. ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.1 Kinds of Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.2 How to Stop Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.3 Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.4 Variable Alarm Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3. INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.2 Initialization by PCPro (SINZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.3 Initialization by PCPro Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.4 Initialization by INIT key Operation (EMA card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.5 Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.5.1 How to Start Up the System by Turning OFF/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.1 Related System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.2 Routine Diagnosis Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5. OFFICE DATA MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.1 Office Data Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.2 Office Data Maintenance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.3 Office Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.3.1 MEM_HDD / MEM_HDD_N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.3.2 PCPro Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.3.3 Explanations on Each Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.4 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF CF CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.4.1 Procedure For FP85-104 S1E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.4.2 Procedure For FP85-104 S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6. UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.1 CPU Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.3 EMA SUB Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.4 EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5 IOC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7. FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.1 Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.2 Test Procedure After the Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.1 Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.1.2 How to Check LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.1.3 How to Change over CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.1.4 How to Control Switching Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
8.1.5 Manual Changeover of Speech Path System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.1.6 Manual Changeover of PLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.1 Kind of Traffic Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.1.1 Description of Traffic Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
– ii –
Page
9.2 Operating Procedure for PCPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

10. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.1 Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.2 Details on Transmission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
10.2.1 Calling Party Information/Called Party Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
10.2.2 Call Start/Call End Time Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.2.3 Called Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.2.4 Account Code/Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.2.5 Route Advance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
10.2.6 Condition B Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.2.7 Call Metering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.2.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
10.2.9 Text Format of Centralized Billing - FCCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
11. REDUNDANT DATA MEMORY BACKUP FOR OFFICE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.2 Redundant Data Memory Backup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.2.1 Service condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
11.2.2 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12. RTP INFORMATION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12.1 How to Display Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
12.1.1 Use of Collected Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12.1.2 Examples of Using Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
13. DTERM IP CALL INFORMATION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
13.2 Examples of Using Logs for Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
14. IP DEVICE PC PORT REMOTE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.2 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.3 Service Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
15. LICENSE REGISTRATION INFORMATION DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.4 Data Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
16. FTP SERVER SUPPORT (LAN1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
16.3 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

1. Observation Method of System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
2. Collection of System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
3. System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
0-C Reset Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
0-D CPU Clock Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
0-E C-Level Infinite Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
0-F Memory Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
– iii –
Page
0-G B1-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

0-H B1-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
0-I Mate CPU Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
0-J Abnormal Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
1-A Both TSW Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
1-B TSW Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
1-C Both TSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
1-D TSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
1-E Both TSW Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
1-F TSW Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
1-O Both PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1-P PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
1-S Module Group Down Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
1-T TSW ACT Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
1-U DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
1-V DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
1-W PLO Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
3-B C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
3-C C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
3-D Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
3-E Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
3-F -48V Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
3-G Ground Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
3-H Digital Line Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
3-I Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
3-J Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
3-K Line Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
3-L Line Fault Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4-C Both TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4-D TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4-Q DLKC Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4-S MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4-T Both MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4-U PCI Card Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4-V PCI Card Failure Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
4-W TSW Ready Failure Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
6-A System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
6-B RGU & Howler Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6-C Line Load Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6-D Line Load Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6-H Bad Call Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
6-I STA-Test Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
6-J Emergency Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
6-L Emergency Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
6-M Emergency Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
6-N Abnormal Call Duration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
6-O SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
6-P SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7-A System Initialize With Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
– iv –
Page
7-B System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

7-C CPU MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7-D CPU MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7-E TSW MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7-F TSW MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7-G TSW PLO Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7-H TSW PLO Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
7-K PM MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7-L PM MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7-M NCU MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7-N NCU MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7-O Cyclic Diagnosis Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7-P Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7-Q PFT Key ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
7-R PFT Key OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
7-U PLO MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
7-V PLO MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
10-A Activation Code Request Notice (SUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
10-B Activation Code Request Notice (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
10-C Activation Code Request Notice (MJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
10-D IP License Excess Notice (SUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
10-E CPU Operation Mode Error Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
10-F Connection Failure between Telephony Server and SR-MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
10-G Connection Recovery between Telephony Server and SR-MGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
10-H Illegal Software Version Information Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10-I Software Version Information Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
10-J Software Version Information Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
10-K Software Version Information Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10-L SR-MGC State Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
13-A CCH Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
13-B CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
13-C CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
13-D CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
13-E CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
13-F CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
13-G CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
13-H CCS Link Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
13-I CCS Link Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
13-J Restoration From CCS Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
13-K CCH Reset Interrupt Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
13-N Digital Line Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
13-O Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
13-P Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
13-Q DRU Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
13-R DRU Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
13-Z Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
15-A VPS Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
15-B VPS Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
15-C VPS Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
–v–
Page
16-A Inside Trunk All Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393

16-B Virtual Tie Line Set Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
16-C Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
16-E Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16-F Sender Start Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
16-M Hard Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
16-N Hard Clock Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
17-A CCH MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
17-B CCH MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
17-C CCH MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
17-D CCH MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
17-H Day/Night Change Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
17-O IOC MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
17-P IOC MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
17-Q IOC MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
17-R IOC MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
23-P DCH Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
23-Q DCH Back-Up Manual Change Start/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
23-Y MUX Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
23-Z Both MUX Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
26-N MAT Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
26-R Call Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
26-V LAN Interface Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
26-W LAN Interface Release Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
33-A MUX Clock Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
33-B SDT Alarm Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
33-C SDT Alarm Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
33-D SDT Alarm Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
33-E SDT Interface Change Notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
33-F PKG Download Failure Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
33-G MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
33-H MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Recovery Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
33-R IP PKG Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
33-S IP PKG Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
33-T IP PKG Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
33-U H.323 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
35-A GK Operation Start Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
35-B GK Operation Stop Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
35-C SP Warning Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
35-D SP Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
35-E SP Failure Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
35-F SP Process Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
35-G SP Process Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
35-I SP Process Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
36-A Office Data Copy Status Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
36-E Registration Security Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
36-F Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
36-G Bandwidth Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
36-H Bandwidth Warning Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
– vi –
Page
36-I Bandwidth Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

36-J Bandwidth Fault Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
36-K Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
36-M IP Terminal Auto Assignment Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
36-N IP Equipment Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
36-O System Message Overflow Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
36-T Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
CHAPTER 4 FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

1. IP RELATED FAULT AND ITS REASON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
1.1 TCP/IP Link Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
1.1.1 Method of Checking and Repairing Each of “4-R”KIND=03ERRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
1.1.2 Method of Checking and Repairing Each of “26-V”ERRK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
1.2 LAN/WAN Communication Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
1.3 IP Related System Messages and the Reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
1.3.1 IP Related System Message and Its Reason (33-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
1.3.2 IP Related System Message and Its Reason (33-S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
1.4 System Down Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
1.4.1 When Cannot Define the Reason of Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
1.4.2 When Circuit Card With Failure Is Indicated on System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
1.4.3 Fault Repair/Localization Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
1.4.4 Details of Fault Repair/Localizing Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
1.5 Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
CHAPTER 5 OPERATION PROCEDURE FOR SYSTEM WITH PIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

1. PIR ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
1.1 PIR Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
1.2 Replacement Procedure of Line/Trunk Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
1.3 Replacement Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
1.3.1 How to Replace SDT (PS-SDTA/PA-SDTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
1.3.2 How to Replace Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
1.4 Replacement Procedure of IPPAD Circuit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
1.5 Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
1.5.1 MUX Replacement: 1-IMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
1.5.2 MUX Replacement: 4-IMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
1.6 Replacement Procedure of PWR (Power) Circuit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
1.7 Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
1.7.1 TSW Replacement: 1-IMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
2. TSWR ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (4-IMG ONLY) . . . . . 565
2.1 Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
2.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
2.3 GT Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
2.3.1 TSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
2.3.2 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
2.3.3 PLO Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
2.3.4 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
– vii –
Page
2.4Replacement Procedure of CF Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

2.5Replacement Procedure of FANC (PZ-M699) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
2.6Replacement Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
2.7Replacement Procedure of 1U–C/DC Power Unit on 9U–IR (DC Power Input Version) . . . . . . . 586
2.7.1 Procedure for Upgrading to Dual Power Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
2.7.2 Procedure for Replacing #0 Side of AC/DC Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
2.8 Replacement Procedure of Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
3. FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
3.1 LINE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
3.1.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
3.1.2 Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
3.1.3 Line Fault - When DT Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
3.1.4 Line Fault - When Dialing Results in Wrong Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
3.1.5 Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
3.1.6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
3.1.7 Line fault - Dterm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
3.2 TRUNK FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
3.2.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
3.2.2 Trunk Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
3.2.3 Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
3.2.4 Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
4. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
4.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
4.2 ATTCON/DESKCON Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
4.3 ATTCON/DESKCON Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
4.4 UNIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
4.4.1 Check Point (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
4.4.2 Check Point (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
4.4.3 Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
4.4.4 Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
4.4.5 Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over . . . . . . . . . . 626
4.5 SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
4.5.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
4.5.2 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
4.5.3 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
4.5.4 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
4.6 CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
4.7 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
4.7.1 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
4.8 Control System Fault - STBY Side Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
4.8.1 Fault That Cannot Be Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
4.9 Power Supply Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
4.9.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
4.9.2 Fuse Blown Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
4.9.3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
4.9.4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
– viii –
Page
4.10 Fan Unit Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

4.10.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
4.11 Tone Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
4.11.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
4.11.2 Tone Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
4.12 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) Line Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
4.12.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
4.12.2 CCIS Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
4.12.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
4.12.4 Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
4.13 Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) Line Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
4.13.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
4.13.2 ISDN Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
4.13.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
4.13.4 Fault of DCH, DTI, and Related Flat Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
5. SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
5.1 Indication of Lockout Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
5.2 Recovery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
5.3 Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
5.3.1 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
5.4 IOC LINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
5.5 Line Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
5.5.1 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
5.5.2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
5.5.3 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
5.5.4 Circuit Card Initialization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
5.6 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
5.6.1 Power ON/OFF Procedure for Telephony Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
5.6.2 SV8500 Server Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
5.6.3 PIR Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
5.6.4 TSWR Power ON/OFF Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
CHAPTER 6 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
2. FLOW OF PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
2.1 Test Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
2.2 Routine Maintenance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
2.2.1 Check the Temperature and Relative Humidity in the Switch Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
2.2.2 Check the Operating Status of PCPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
2.2.3 Check To See If a System Message Indicating a Fault is Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
2.2.4 Check To See If There Is Any Lockout Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
2.2.5 Check Whether the FANU Is Operating Normally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
2.3 Routine Maintenance Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
CHAPTER 7 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
– ix –
Page
AACT Assignment of Activation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
AONE Assignment of One Activation Password Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
ASECL Assignment of Security Data (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
ASSW Assignment of Soft SW Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
ATDL Assignment of Terminal for Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
AVERN Assignment of Software Version Information (NDM) For Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . 713
BOSD Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
CARR Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
CARRN Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
CBCN Control of Broadcasting for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
CBCV Control of Broadcasting for VNDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
CBKS Control Backup Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
CBND Calculate Bandwidth Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
CDBU Change of Dch Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
CFCS Control of Flash Card System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
CLPB Control of Local Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
CMNT Control of SR-MGC Maintenance Data (LDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
CMOD Change of System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
CMWL_T Control Message Waiting Lamps – Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
COSSL Control of SIP Server Data for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
COSSN Control of SIP Server Data for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
CPBKN Continuous Assignment of System Phone Book for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
CPCP Control of PC Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
CSPAL Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
CSPAN Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
DCBD Display of Call Block Entry Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
DCON Display of Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
DDMO Display of Data Memory Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
DEBUG General Purpose Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
DFLN Display Up of Location Free Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
DFTD Display of System Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
DHDF Display of HD File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
DICBD Display of Individual Call Block Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
DIMG Display Information of Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
–x–
Page
DIPI Display IP equipment Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

DISD Display of IP Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801
DISI Display of IP Statistics Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
DISS Display of Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
DLEN Display of LENS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
DLSL Display of Lockout Station - LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
DLSS Display of Lockout Station - Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
DLSS_T Display of Lock Out Station – Number – Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
DPHL Display of PHL Package Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
DPKG Display of Setting Port Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
DPSW Display Package Switch Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
DPTR Display of Capacity / License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
DSTN Display of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827
DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
DTF303 Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
DTF701 Display of IP Service Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
DTF702 Display of IP Service Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
DTF801 Display of SIP Service Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849
DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
DTF303N Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
FLINST File Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
HDFP HDD Format of SV8500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
IPAN Display of IP machine status display function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
– xi –
Page
MBCT Make-Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

MBCTC Make-Busy of Connection Trunk-Continuous for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
MBLE Make-Busy of LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
MBPH Make Busy of PHL Package for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
MBPM Make-Busy of Port Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
MBRT Make-Busy of Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
MBRT_LR Make-Busy of Route - Logical Route Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
MBSM Make-Busy of System Message Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
MBST Make-Busy of Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
MBST_T Make-Busy of Station – Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
MBTC Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
MBTC_LR Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous – Logical Route Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
MBTK Make-Busy of Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
MBTK_LR Make - Busy of Trunk – Logical Route Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
MEM_HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
MEM_HDD_N Data Control Between Memory and HDD for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
MFCH Make Busy of FCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
RALM Release Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
RALMN Release Alarm for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896
RDPD Removal of Dterm IP Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
RINZ Route Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
RLMG Release of Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
RLST Release Station/Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
RLST_T Release of Station/Trunk – Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
RPID Remove of Pad Lock ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
SCVT Setting / Change of Virtual Trunk Operation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
SINZ System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
SINZN System Initialize for the FCCS Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
SPTS Scanning of Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
SRTS Scanning of Route Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
SRTS_LR Scanning of Route Status - Logical Route Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
TOGC Test of Originating Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
APPENDIX A MINOR VERSION UPDATE FOR ONLINE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
2. PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
3. APPLYING THE PATCH FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
4. Deleting Patch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
5. Canceling Applied Patch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
XPAT On–line Patch Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
– xii –
INTRODUCTION
1. General Knowledge of SV8500
1.1 About Release Information
The table below shows the relationship between IPX/SV7000 and SV8500 for the release information.
IPX/SV7000 SV8500
R25 S1
R25E S1E
R26 S2
– INT-1 –
1.2 Structure of Telephony Server
1.2.1 General
This section explains the structure of Telephony Server, mainly about processors it has. Telephony Server has
TP and SP as processors on its CPU. Both TP and SP work together to provide various features. The following
are general description of TP and SP.
• TP: Telephony Processor, supports all the features provided in the system.
• SP: Signaling Processor, works as SIP server that handles call control signals using Session Initiation
Protocol (SIP). SP consists of two parts - one for SIP terminals using a particular feature called
SIP TERMINAL ACCOMMODATION [S-146] (hereinafter called “SP (for SIP terminal)”), and
the other for other devices/stations using SP (hereinafter called “SP (MPH)”).
Note: Each of IP devices/stations communicates with either of them (TP/SP) as registration destination. For in-
formation about it, refer to “Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations”.
1.2.2 TP and SP for System Changeover
In dual configuration, each processor may stay in active (ACT) or stand-by (STBY) state. ACT-side processors
handle each operation while STBY-side processors prepare for system changeover. Their states change when
system changeover is performed. The relationship between system changeover and the state of each processor
(TP/SP) is described below.
• TP: changes its state (ACT/STBY) according to the state of the system to which the TP belongs.
• SP: operates differently between two parts of SP.

• SP (for SIP terminal) Note 1: operates simultaneously with ACT-side TP.
• SP (MPH): is always in ACT (changeover is not executed).
System #1 (STBY) System #1 (ACT)

ACT
TP TP
STBY
SP SP System SP SP
(for SIP Terminal) (MPH) (for SIP Terminal) (MPH)
Note 1 Changeover Note 1
System #0 (ACT) System #0 (STBY)
TP TP
SP SP SP SP
(for SIP Terminal) (MPH) (for SIP Terminal) (MPH)
Note 1 Note 1
Note 1: “SIP terminal” here refers to ones using SIP TERMINAL ACCOMMODATION [S-146] feature. For infor-
mation about this feature, refer to the Data Programming Manual - Business.
– INT-2 –
1.3 Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations
Here lists IP addresses of Telephony Server to be assigned to each IP device/station as its registration destina-
tion. The IP address varies depending on several conditions, consisting of PH kind that handles the device/sta-
tion, protocol mode in which the device/terminal operates, and Telephony Server’s configuration. The table
below specifies the IP address necessary for each IP device/station, covering all the conditions.
IP Address of
Category
Registration Destination
Device/Station
CPU Protocol Single Dual
PH
Note 1 mode Configuration Configuration
Analog 2MC
Proprietary MC&MG-COT (MC part) LAN1 (ACT) LAN1 (ACT)
Internal PHE
Protocol mode IP-BS Note 4 Note 4
VS32
TP MC&MG-COT (MG part)
MG-COT
Proprietary LAN1 (ACT) LAN1 (ACT)
Internal PHI MG(BRI)
Protocol mode Note 4 Note 4
MG(PRI) Note 2
MG(SIP)
Proprietary LAN1 (ACT) LAN1 (ACT)
SP- IP terminal
Protocol mode Note 4 Note 4
PHD
SIP mode SIP terminal Note 3 LAN1 (ACT) LAN1 (ACT)
Proprietary MC&MG-COT (MG part) LAN1 (ACT) LAN1 (ACT)
Protocol mode MG(BRI) Note 4 Note 4
MPH
MG-COT
SP SP- MG(BRI)
PHI LAN1
MG(PRI)
SIP mode LAN1 (ACT) (System #0)
MG-T1(SIP)
/(System #1)
8LC Card
VS32
WLAN Handset (MH Series)
- SIP mode LAN1 (ACT) LAN1 (ACT)
Standard SIP Terminal
Note: Device/terminal names in the table are general terms. If you want to know formal names of them, refer to
“TERMS IN THIS MANUAL” at the top of this manual.
Note: In this manual, Telephony Server may be referred as “DRS” or “SIP server” depending on the registration
destination. IP address of DRS/SIP server is, however, same as that of Telephony Server. Therefore, IP ad-
dress of DRS/SIP server is also as the table above.
Note 1: Telephony Server has two parts of processors on its CPU, TP and SP. For the information about it, refer
to “Structure of Telephony Server”.
– INT-3 –
Note 2: MG(PRI) in Proprietary Protocol mode uses LAN1 as the registration destination while uses LAN2 as the
signaling control port. LAN interface for the signaling control port, however, can be changed to LAN1 by
ADTM command.
Note 3: “SIP terminal” excludes WLAN Handset (MH Series) here.
Note 4: When migrating from existing IPX/SV7000 to SV8500, LAN1/LAN2 can be selected as LAN interface for
IP equipment/terminals that use Proprietary Protocol mode. For the detail, refer to the Migration Manual.
– INT-4 –
1.4 Lan Interface Accommodation
There are four LAN ports on the front panel of Telephony Server, of which LAN1 and LAN2 play a central role
in managing the whole system. This section explains usage of them (LAN1/LAN2). Additional information
about the LAN ports is described in “Management by 4-LAN Port” of the Installation Manual.
1.4.1 LAN1 Accommodation
LAN1 mainly accommodates the devices/terminals for call controlling. They do not need to keep links with Te-
lephony Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system. In each case where the sys-
tem is in single configuration or dual configuration, IP address (ACT) is basically assigned to the devices/
terminals as Telephony Server address.
Note: When the system is in dual configuration, IP address (System #0/#1) is used instead of IP address (ACT)
in the following cases.
• Telephony Server address as FTP server
• Telephony Server address as registration destination for IP devices accommodated in SP-PHI and us-
ing SIP mode. (See Registration Destination of IP Devices/Stations)
SYS LINK OPE ALM MB SYS SYS PBI No.

(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2
SWO0 SWO1
LINE SPEED LINE SPEED

EMA MAIN
1 3
PWR
ACT 2 4
ALM LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
1 3
PWR 2 4
ACT LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
ALM
LAN3 LAN1
LAN4 LAN2
IP Terminal
PSTN SIP Terminal

FCCS
over IP
– INT-5 –
Each communication using LAN1 as its interface is listed in the table below, where relationships between each
application and socket are shown.
Application Protocol Port No. IP Address

Registration by Proprietary Protocol UDP 3456 ACT
Registration by SIP UDP 5060 ACT/System #0/System #1
Internal PHI Note 1 UDP 64000
NMS TCP 60060
Receiving Health Check from SR-MGC (Server) UDP 60110
Sending Health Check to SR-MGC (Client) UDP 60120
ACT
SR-MGC Charge MGC Side TCP 60140
SR-MGC Charge SR-MGC Side TCP 60150
Internal PHE UDP 60130
Internal PHF UDP 60180
FTP TCP 20/21
SSH TCP 22
System #0/System #1
Telnet TCP 23
HTTP TCP 80
Note 1: Internal PHI may use LAN2 for communication with MG(PRI), which depends on your setting.
– INT-6 –
1.4.2 LAN2 Accommodation
LAN2 mainly accommodates the devices for operation/administration and some for call controlling. They need
to keep links with Telephony Server when system changeover is performed in dual configuration system. In
each case where the system is in single configuration or dual configuration, IP address (ACT) is basically as-
signed to the devices as Telephony Server address.

(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2
SWO0 SWO1

EMA MAIN
1 3
PWR
ACT 2 4
ALM LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
1 3
PWR 2 4
ACT LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
ALM
LAN3 LAN1
LAN4 LAN2
Maintenance
Console Server
CCIS PWR ACT ALM LOAD
LAN1 LAN2
TxRx LINK TxRx LINK
over IP
Each communication using LAN2 as its interface is listed in the table below, where relationships between each
application and socket are shown.
– INT-7 –
Application Protocol Port No. IP Address
PCPro TCP 60000
CCIS Cluster TCP 60001
SMDR TCP 60010
MCI TCP 60020
OAI TCP 60030
MIS TCP 60040
PMS TCP 60050
CS Report TCP 60080
MCC TCP 60190
ACT
FCCS Cluster TCP 60210
DEBUG UDP 1024-65535
SNMP UDP 161/162
SMTP (Client) TCP 1024-65535
DNS UDP 53
SNTP UDP 123
Internal PHI (for MG(PRI)) TCP 64000
Internal PHC (Server) TCP 57000
Internal PHC (Client) TCP 65030
– INT-8 –
1.5 Trunking Diagram
The figure below shows the trunking diagram of SV8500 for overviewing the network configuration.
Telephony Server Note 1
NCU
MDF
Analog TEL LC ORT
Digital terminal ELC IRT
ISDN terminal ILC SND

BWT COT
CFT
DOD COT
Analog PSTN
DIT
COT
DID DID
EMT
ODT
Tie line
LDT
DTI
MUX/TSW
DTI
CCIS CCH
MODEM CCH
ISDN (PRI) DTI
DCH
ISDN (PRI) PRT
ISDN (BRI) BRT
ATT/Desk Console ATI Printer
PCPro
SIP terminal IOC

AP IP-BS Note 2
SV8500 Server
PS
IP terminal Router
GW IP network
Note 1: In this manual, the range blocked in dotted red is called Telephony Server.
Note 2: In this manual, the range blocked in dotted blue is called SV8500 server.
– INT-9 –
This table identifies the function name of each line/trunk interface and switching controller.
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
ATI Attendant Console Interface
BRT Basic Rate Interface Trunk
BWT Bothway Trunk
CCH Common Channel Handler
CFT Conference Trunk
COT Central Office Trunk
DCH D-Channel Handler
DID Direct Inward Dialing
DIT Direct-In Termination
DLC Digital Line Circuit
DOD Direct Outward Dialing
DTI Digital Interface
ELC Electronic Line Circuit
EMT E&M Trunk
IOC Input/Output Controller
IRT Incoming Register Trunk
LC Line Circuit
LDT Loop Dialing Trunk
LTST Line Test
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MUX Multiplexer
NCU Night Connection Unit
ODT Outband Dialing Trunk
ORT Outgoing Register Trunk
PRT Primary Rate Interface Trunk
SND Sender
TLT Tie Line Trunk
TSW Time Division Switch
– INT-10 –
CHAPTER 1 General
CHAPTER 1 General
1. ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This manual describes routine system maintenance procedures and fault repair procedures. This chapter explains
the system configuration as well as how to follow the manual and provides precautions pertaining to
maintenance jobs as a whole. Be sure to read this chapter thoroughly before starting the required maintenance
project.
2. SYSTEM ACCOMMODATION
SV8500 consists of the following components:
• SV8500 Server
• PIR
• TSWR
• FANU
The following shows a fully expanded system (DC-powered Model, 4-IMG) as an example.
PIR 3 PIR 7 PIR 11 PIR 15

FANU
TSWR FANU FANU FANU FANU

SV8500 Server
BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU
FRONT
2.1 SV8500 Server
SV8500 Server can accommodate the following cards and modules:
• CPU Card
• EMA Card
• IOC Card (option)
• EMA SUB-A (option: required for PIR)
• EMA SUB-B (option: required for TSWR)
• EXB (option: required for PIR/TSWR)
• Power Module
• System Cooling FAN Module
–1–
CHAPTER 1 General
CPU Card #1 EMA
IOC (Option)
CPU Card #0 Front View

Power Module
EMA SUB-A
EMA SUB-B System Cooling FAN Module
EXB #1
Power Module
EXB #0 Rear View
–2–
CHAPTER 1 General
2.2 PIR and TSWR
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the slot configuration and the condition of mounted circuit card types.
Figure 1-1 Slot Accommodation (PIR)
Slot number 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
TSW / MUX #0
TSW / MUX #1
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Line / Trunk
Type of circuit card
Number of ports 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32
Circuit card label color
Unieversal Slots Unieversal Slots

for Line/Trunk cards for Line/Trunk cards
Figure 1-2 Slot Accommodation (TSWR)

DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DLKC #00
DLKC #01
GT #00
GT #01
PLO #0
PLO #1
Type of circuit card

TSW #00
TSW #01
TSW #02
TSW #03
TSW #10
TSW #11
TSW #12
TSW #13
Slot number 00 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
–3–
CHAPTER 1 General
3. GLOSSARY
The following is a list of typical technical terms that are used in this document.
• C-Level Infinite Loop
• B-Level Infinite Loop
• Port Microprocessor (PM)
• Ready Error
• Parity Error
• Monitor Restart (Phase 0)
• Phase 1 Restart
• PM (Line/Trunk Card) Make-Busy Restart
• Data Copy Restart
• MEM (Memory)
–4–
CHAPTER 1 General
• C-Level Infinite Loop

A program repeatedly executes specific routines due to a fault of the main memory, data destruction,
etc. The program is not able to process normally. This faulty condition is referred to as Program Infinite
Loop. C-Level infinite loop is a state where a specific program is endlessly repeated, blocking period-
ical programs to be executed.
• B-Level Infinite Loop

This is a state where a program infinite loop has occurred during connection processing and the
connection for the next call is not able to process.
• Port Microprocessor (PM)

Each line/trunk card mounted in the PIR is equipped with a processor called Port Microprocessor (PM),
which continuously supervises the lines/trunks.
• Ready Error
For acknowledging the connection between the CPU and a circuit card, an interface signal called Ready
Signal is used. When the CPU has accessed a specific circuit card and the normality of the connection
is acknowledged, the Ready Signal is returned to the CPU within a certain time period. If the Ready
Signal is not returned to the CPU within the above time period after access, the situation is referred to
as Ready Error.
• Parity Error
For confirming the normality of data transfer between the CPU and the circuit card under the control
of the CPU, a parity check is made. When an error is detected in a parity check, it is referred to as Parity
Error. Parity check means to confirm the normality of data by adding an error detecting parity bit to a
set of data to transfer.
When a set of data is transferred, a parity bit is added to the data so that the data has an even-number
of “1” bits (referred to as Even Parity). When there is an odd-number of “1” bits in the received one set
of data, it is detected as an error.
• Monitor Restart (Phase 0)

Monitor Restart processing suspends current processing in progress without applying any hardware
controlling, allowing the system to restart its operations from the Monitor Program. The system aban-
dons only the processing of the calls being handled by the program, and maintains all the connections
that have already been established. In the case of CPU system fault such as out-of-memory fault, the
system executes the monitor restart after outputting the system message and setting the hidden memory
fault.
• Phase 1 Restart
The system is initialized. All connections except for two-way connections that have already been
established are forcibly released.
• PM (Line/Trunk Card) Make-Busy Restart
–5–
CHAPTER 1 General
In this processing, the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) is isolated from the system and, at the same time,
the calls associated with that faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) are released. No calls related to the faulty
PM (Line/Trunk Card) are processed and the system normally runs without the faulty PM (Line/Trunk
Card).
• Data Copy Restart

In a system of dual configuration, the RAM memory (including the data memory) is copied from the
ACT-side CPU into the STBY-side CPU, and ACT/STBY is changed over and monitor restart is exe-
cuted.
In the case of this restart processing, only the ACT-side CPU and the STBY-side CPU are changed over
without any effect on the current connections. However, no call processing is executed while the restart
processing is in progress (from copying until the end of the changeover).
• MEM (Memory)
A memory module that is mounted on the CPU Card.
–6–
CHAPTER 1 General
4. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION
4.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure
When performing diagnostic procedures/fault repair procedures, always adhere to the following actions:
(1) When replacing a circuit card with a spare, handle the circuit card using the Field Service Kit.
(a) To protect the circuit card from static electricity, wear a wrist strap before handling the circuit card.
(b) Before extracting the circuit card from its mounting slot, set its MB switch to the UP side (ON).
(2) When holding a circuit card by hand, wear gloves and be careful not to touch mounted parts, gold-plated
terminal, etc., on the circuit card.
The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 1-3, is recommended as an effective
countermeasure against static electricity.
Figure 1-3 How to Handle Circuit Cards
<How to handle circuit card>
Connector
Set MB key
to UP.
installer
432-P
S
Card puller tab

Connect ground wire to
wrist strap the frame. Note 1
)
U U
P P
(
Backboard
)
U U
P P
(
contact portion wrist strap

PWR ACT ALM
EMA
Place the circuit card on
a conductive sheet.
APEX SV7000 TP/S
LOAD LAN1 LAN2
TxRx
LINK TxRx
LINK
PWR ACT ALM
APEX SV7000 SP/S

LOAD LAN1 LAN2
TxRx
LINK TxRx
LINK
SP-234
SN1234
conductive sheet
Note 1: A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material.
–7–
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-4 How to Hold a Circuit Card
When holding a circuit card with bare hands, do not touch the component mounted side of the card or
the connector portion.
Note
Connector
(Contact)
Portion
Set MB switch
to UP.
Component-
Mounted Side
432-P SP-234
S
4321N SN1234
S
Card Puller
Tab
wrist strap
Note: Do not touch the Gold-Plated Terminal with bare hands.
(3) Be sure to take appropriate anti-static measures when handling a CF card.
Note: Do not insert or remove the CF card while the SV8500 server is in operation.
Figure 1-5 How to Handle a CF card
PW
R
LOA
D
ON
LIN
E
CF
CO
NS
OLE
OL E
LINE
SPE
ED
1 1 LINE
2
ON 3
4 SPE
ED
PW SYS
MO R
DE 2 ALM
3
US LIN
B LINE SYS K
1 OP
PW SPE E
R ED
LINE 4 SYS ALM
0
LOA
D EXPR SPE
ED MB
(SU
ON
LIN
E ESS B)
PFT
PF
CF GEA SYS
LOC SYS
K
CO
R 1 SEL
SE
wrist strap
NS 2
OLE
SWO
0
1
2
INIT
SWO
LINE 1 PBI
No.
SPE
ED
1 1 LINE
2
ON 3
4 SPE
ED
MO
DE 2
3 EM
US AM
B LINE
SPE
AIN
ED
LINE 4
EXPR SPE
ED
ESS
GEA
R
CF card
Connect ground wire to

the frame. Note 1
Note 1: A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material.
–8–
CHAPTER 1 General
(4) When a circuit card appears faulty, check the following items before replacing it with a spare:
(a) Poor connector contact at the circuit card may be responsible for the fault. Repeat insertion and ex-
traction of the circuit card a few times. Clean the connector portion, and recheck for proper operation.
(b) Check the lead wires of vertically-mounted parts (resistors, capacitors, etc.) to ensure they have not
shorted each other or broken.
(c) Check the back side of the circuit card to see if there is any short-circuited soldered portion, or mod-
ified cross connection wires erroneously left unconnected.
(d) Check the ROMs to ensure proper seating in the IC socket. Figure 1-6 shows a leg that is bent and not
set in the socket.
Figure 1-6 How to Set the ROM in IC Socket
A pin is bent, not

inserted in the socket.
ROM
SOCKET
(5) How to clean the connector portion (gold-plated terminal):
(a) Dip the gold-plated terminal portion in the cleaning fluid for three to five seconds (only PA-XX type
circuit card), as shown in Figure 1-7.
Figure 1-7 How to Clean the Connector Portion
Cleaning
Circuit
Container
Note 1: Some of the parts are subject to damage if they come in contact with the cleansing liquid. Be careful to
allow only the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) to contact the cleaning liquid.
Note 2: Be sure to use fresh cleaning fluid (FREON or isopropyl alcohol).
–9–
CHAPTER 1 General
(b) Using a soft cotton cloth, wipe both sides of the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) clean (only
PA-XX type circuit card), as shown in Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-8 How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal
gauze
Gold-plated terminal
Note 1: Use cloth (gauze, etc.) to clean.
Note 2: After wiping, be careful not to leave lint on the surface of the circuit card.
(6) When a check on the flat cable or LT cable is directed in the tree, check the following items:
(a) Make a visual check to see if the connector is properly connected.

(b) Poor connector contact may be responsible for the fault. Repeat connection and disconnection a few
times, and check again to see if the connector is properly connected.
(c) Perform continuity test on the flat cable.
(7) When replacing the circuit card is directed in the tree, replace the circuit card with a spare as per Chapter 5.
(8) When multiple circuit cards appear faulty, before replacing them with spares, remount them (one at a time)
into their slots, to determine which cards should be replaced.
– 10 –
CHAPTER 1 General
• The following is an example where the fault was recovered after the replacement of circuit cards:
START
Set the first circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
Set the second circuit card back into its mounting slot
Set the third circuit card back into its mounting slot
END
If a circuit card is found faulty, send the faulty circuit card for repair.
The fault may be a temporary one, or due to poor contact of the circuit card. Observe the
situation for a while.
(9) When a fault recovery is completed, use the RALM command to clear all the alarm indications and regis-
tered system messages. If required, restore temporary cross connections and transient data for testing to the
original ones.
4.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure
(a) Diagnostic Work

A fault diagnostic procedure by system message is explained in the TREE format on an individual sys-
tem message basis.
– 11 –
CHAPTER 1 General
• Proceed with judgment as to whether the fault status coincides with the indicated status, following
the sequence beginning from START.
• How to proceed with the diagnosis work is explained in Figure 1-9.
STEP 1 Determine whether the fault coincides with the fault status (1) in Figure 1-9.
STEP 2 If the fault status does coincide, the fault is indicated by (2). Repair the fault by referring to the
relevant section in Chapter 4. Otherwise, proceed to (3).
STEP 3 Perform the work indicated by (3). The result of the work (3) is broken down as indicated by (4).
STEP 4 Determine whether the result of work (3) coincides with the status indicated by (5). If so, the
fault(s) is/are indicated either by (6) or by (7). If not, proceed to the next Step.
STEP 5 Perform the work indicated by (8), and if the result of the work is the same as the status indicat-
ed, the fault is indicated by (9). If the fault repair work indicated by (9) affects another normal
line, recheck the work as indicated by (10).
(b) Fault Repair Procedure
A fault repair procedure is explained by means of TREE format in Chapter 4. The following explains
how to follow the TREE format and proceed with designated work. See Figure 1-10.
• Begin from START and proceed with the necessary repair work following the sequence.
• When a faulty circuit card (or circuit cards) is suspected, replace the faulty circuit card with a spare
in accordance with the work procedure pertaining to that specific circuit card.
STEP 6 Replace the circuit card indicated by (A) with a spare and check it. Perform the detailed work
as per (B). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.
STEP 7 If the range of the fault or the system configuration is as indicated by (C), perform a check as
indicated by (D). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.
STEP 8 Replace the circuit card indicated by (E) with a spare and check it. The detailed procedure indi-
cated by (G) varies with the system configuration indicated by (F).
– 12 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-9 Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example
(2)
START (1)
When FAULT : It is the fault of

Section No. (Chapter 5)
(3)
(11)
Perform (5)
When FAULT SUPERVISION (6)

(4)
(7)
(5)
When FAULT : It is the fault of

Section No. (Chapter 5)
(8) (11)
(9)
When with
performed FAULT :
CHECK OF WORK (10)
END Section No. (Chapter 5)
(11)
Note: (1): Judgment of fault status
(2),(6),(7),(9): When the fault status coincides with the indication, the cause of the fault is indicated.
(11): When repairing the fault, refer to the relevant section in Chapter 4.
(3): Operating items for diagnosis
(4): Branching of the result of the operation
(5): Judgment of the status of the result of the operation
(8): When operating method is unknown, refer to Chapter 5.
– 13 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-10 Recovery Procedure Example
START (A) (B)
Check
(C) (D)
When Check
(E)
Check
(F) (G)
When
(F)
(G)
When
END
– 14 –
CHAPTER 1 General
5. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC
When the cause of a fault is uncertain, make note of the situation involved and report it to NEC. When
forwarding faulty circuit cards to NEC, exercise caution to protect from static electricity.
5.1 Fault Reporting Method
The following three items must be included in the report without fail:
(1) Faulty situation (reports should be similar to “dial tone is not heard only on individual lines,” “incoming
C.O. line calls are not able to be terminated only to a specific ATTCON/DESKCON,” etc.)
• Faulty phenomena
On lifting the handset, dial tone is not heard but side tone is heard, etc.
• History of fault
When did the fault occur? What kind of repair procedure has been executed? Does the fault still exist
or not exist? etc.
• Range of fault
Range of fault should be reported: Single line?, Specific trunk?, Specific circuit card?, Specific PIR?,
Whole system?, etc.
– 15 –
CHAPTER 1 General
(2) Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number of the circuit card.
See Figure 1-11.
Figure 1-11 Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number
16LC
Circuit Card Name
Circuit Card Version Number
Program Name
SPA-
16LCBE
TR 5448
9A 91-03
SP 785
A 6A
Program Package
Version Number
Front Right View of Circuit Card
– 16 –
CHAPTER 1 General
5.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method
Send the faulty circuit card to the NEC agent to whom a request is made for a replacement card. Adhere to
the following procedure for sending the faulty circuit card:
(1) Insert connector covers onto the circuit card terminals.
(2) Put the circuit card into a static electricity protective bag.
(3) Pack the circuit card with air cap, etc.
(4) Set the circuit card into the cardboard box for that specific circuit card.
(5) If multiple circuit cards are sent, set each circuit card in a separate cardboard box and stuff the box with
shock absorbing material.
When sending a faulty circuit card, put it in a static guard bag. To prevent damage, never place the circuit card
in a vinyl bag or ship it without a protective bag.
– 17 –
CHAPTER 1 General
6. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE
This chapter explains the outline of fault diagnosis and duties necessary to maintain the system. Figure 1-
12 shows the workflow of the administrative management procedures.
Figure 1-12 Flow of Administrative Management Procedures
Administrative
Management Procedures
Administrative Procedures
Expansion and Change of Office Data Management and Office

Station Users Data Protection
See Chapter 6 See Chapter 2
Traffic Management See Chapter 2
Actions on Claims from

Station Users and/or Operators
(A)
Management Procedures
Station Message Detail

See Chapter 2
Recording System (SMDR)
Routine Diagnosis See Chapter 2
Diagnosis result, system message displays abnormality
Routine Maintenance See Chapter 7 (B)
System Status Monitor See Chapter 2
Line fault
Alarm Indications
Fault Analysis/
Circuit card fault
Test Operation/
Collection of System Messages Refer to
Changeover/ Terminal
Chapter 2,
Make-Busy/Circuit (Tel., etc.) fault
Chapter 6
Indication of Lockout Stations Card Change/
Fault cause not
Initialization
able to be localized
(A)
(B)
(Abnormal
Line Load Control See Chapter 6
Congestion)
– 18 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
This section identifies the information necessary for the system operations and maintenance procedures.
• System Configuration
• Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)
• Local Partition (LP) Number
• Fault Detecting Function
• Range of Faults Specification
– 19 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7.1 System Configuration
Figure 1-1 shows the system configuration of the fully expanded 1-IMG and 4-IMG type. For details on
each module accommodation, see Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-1 System Configuration
DC Powered Model:
1-IMG 4-IMG
4-PIR (maximum) IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 2 IMG 3
PIR 3

PIR 2

PIR 1
FANU
FANU
TSWR FANU FANU FANU FANU
PIR 0

SV8500 SV8500
server server
BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU BASEU
max. 1536 physical ports
AC-DC Powered Model:
1-IMG
4-PIR (maximum)
FANU
PIR 2
AC-DC
FANU
PIR 1
AC-DC
FANU
PIR 0 FANU
AC-DC PIR 3
SV8500 PIR: Port Interface Rack
server AC-DC FANU: FAN unit
BASEU: Base unit
max. 1536 physical ports
– 20 –
General
CHAPTER 1
IOC Card (Option)
IOC Card (Option)

EMA Card
Figure 1-2 Face Layout of 1-IMG System
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Line / Trunk 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Line / Trunk

Line / Trunk Line / Trunk
MUX #1 TSW #1
MUX #0 TSW #0
– 21 –
BASEU
FANU
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR) DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR) DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
CPU Card #1
CPU Card #0
SV8500 Server
PIR 3
PIR 0
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-3 Face Layout of 4-IMG System (SV8500 Server and TSWR)
FANU
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DLKC #00
DLKC #01
GT #00
GT #01
PLO #0
TSWR PLO #1
TSW #00
TSW #01
TSW #02
TSW #03
TSW #10
TSW #11
TSW #12
TSW #13
00 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
EMA Card
CPU Card #1
IOC Card (Option)
SV8500 Server
IOC Card (Option)
CPU Card #0
BASEU
– 22 –
General
CHAPTER 1
Figure 1-4 Face Layout of 4-IMG System (IMG)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Line / Trunk Line / Trunk Line / Trunk Line / Trunk
MUX #1 MUX #1 MUX #1 MUX #1
MUX #0 MUX #0 MUX #0 MUX #0
BASEU
FANU
– 23 –
DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR) DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR) DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR) DC-DC PWR #1 (DPWR)
DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR) DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR) DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR) DC-DC PWR #0 (PWR)
PIR 3
PIR 2
PIR 1
PIR 0
CHAPTER 1 General
7.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)
The Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) are used to specify the location of a circuit (trunk/port) in any of
the PIR universal slots. Refer to the figures in this section, and confirm the LENS format used in the system.
As shown in Figure 1-5, the LENs consists of six digits: two digits for Module Group (MG), one digit for
Unit (U), two digits for Group (G), and one digit for Level (LV).
Figure 1-5 LENS Format
LENS = XX X XX X
Level (LV) : 0 - 7
Group (G) : 00 - 23 Note
Unit (U) :0-3
Module Group (MG) : 00 - 07
Note: If an FCH (PA-FCHA) card is used, Line Groups 24-31 can be used as the extended group numbers.
7.2.1 Module Group
Figure 1-6 explains the Module Group (MG). In a fully expanded system, the MG number ranges from
00 to 07.
Figure 1-6 Module Group Allocations
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
MG01 MG03 MG05 MG07
MG00 MG02 MG04 MG06
FRONT VIEW
7.2.2 Unit
Figure 1-7, that represents a fully expanded system, explains the Unit (U) numbers. The numbers range
from 0 to 3, and each unit represents the PIR Universal Slot 04-12 (U 0/2) or 15-23 (U 1/3).
– 24 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-7 Unit Number Allocations
On each Module Group (MG: 00 - 07), a total of four Units (U0 - U3) can be assigned.
4-IMG
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PIR3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3
MG01 MG03 MG05 MG07
PIR2 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1
PIR1 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3
MG00 MG02 MG04 MG06
PIR0 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1
FRONT VIEW
Unit Number (U = 0/2) Unit Number (U = 1/3)
Slots No. 00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
MUX (PH-PC36) 0
MUX (PH-PC36) 1
192 TS 192 TS
PWR
PWR
Number PIR
of
Time Slots
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 (32)
(16) (16)
16 16 16 16 16 16
1-IMG
IMG0
TOPU Control Control TS : Time Slot
PIR3 U2 U3
MG01
PIR2 U0 U1
PIR1 U2 U3
MG00
PIR0 U0 U1
BASEU
– 25 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7.2.3 Group
The Group (G) numbers are allocated as shown in Figure 1-8. A total of two Groups are assigned on
each universal slot within the PIR. Slots 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 23 can contain a total of four Groups as an
exception.
Figure 1-8 Group Number Allocations
A total of two or four Groups (G) can be assigned on each PIR universal slot.
4-IMG Slot 10
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PIR3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3
MG01 MG03 MG05 MG07
PIR2 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 G = 15
PIR1 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3
MG00 MG02 MG04 MG06 Slot 05
PIR0 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1
PIR G = 03
00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 G = 14
16 ports total
32 ports total
MUX (PH-PC36) 0
MUX (PH-PC36) 1
PWR
PWR
G = 02
FRONT VIEW
G = 13
1-IMG
PIR3 U2 U3
MG01
PIR2 U0 U1
PIR1 U2 U3
MG00 G = 12
PIR0 U0 U1
BASEU
15 19 23 15 19 23
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
14 18 22 14 18 22
PIR
Group No. 13 17 21 13 17 21
(24) (25) 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
12 16 20 12 16 20
Extended 27 29 31 27 29 31
Group No.
26 28 30 26 28 30
Note
Slot No. 00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
U=0/2 U=1/3
Note: In addition to Group 00 - 19, the system can use 20 - 31 as theoretically valid numbers.
– 26 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7.2.4 Level
Figure 1-9 explains the Level (LV) numbers. There are a total of eight Levels (LV 0 - LV 7) on every
Group number, that ranges from 00 to 31.
Figure 1-9 Level Number Allocations
A total of eight Levels (LV 0 - LV 7) can be assigned on each Group.
4-IMG 1-IMG
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
U2 U3
PIR3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3
MG01
MG01 MG03 MG05 MG07
U0 U1
PIR2 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1
U2 U3
PIR1 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3 U2 U3
MG00
MG00 MG02 MG04 MG06
U0 U1
PIR0 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1 U0 U1
BASEU
FRONT VIEW
U=0/2 U=1/3
00 02 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
15 19 23 15 19 23 Level (LV)
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
14 18 22 14 18 22
PIR
Group No.
13 17 21 13 17 21
7
(24) (25)
00 02 04 06 08 10
12 16 20
00 02 04 06 08 10
12 16 20
6
27 29 31 27 29 31 5
26 28 30 26 28 30 4 Group
3 (G = 15/19/23)
2
1
0
Level (LV) 7
7 6
6 5
5 4 Group
3 (G = 14/18/22)
Group
4
3 2
(G = Odd No., < 11)
2 1
0
16-port Slot
32-port Slot
1
0 7
7
6
6 5
5 4 Group
4 3 (G = 13/17/21)
Group 2
(G = Even No., < 10) 3
2
1
1
0
0
7
6
5
4 Group
3 (G = 12/16/20)
2
1
0
– 27 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7.3 Local Partition (LP) Number
The Local Partition (LP) number refers to a logical local processor number, theoretically assigned for each
IMG that consists of four (or less) Port Interface Racks (PIR). Though the local processor does not actually
exist in any of the IMGs, the system can apply the two-digit LP number to each IMG (see Figure 1-10) on
its data memory program. The LP numbers are used primarily in the following cases:
• Display of system messages
• Assignment of line load control data (ALLC command)
• Backup for Call Forwarding/Speed Calling data, etc.

Figure 1-10 LP Number Allocations
The Local Partition number (two digits, even number) is assigned as follows.
1-IMG
PIR3
PIR2
PIR1
FANU
PIR0
BASEU
LP = 00
FRONT VIEW
4-IMG
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3
PIR3 PIR7 PIR11 PIR15

FANU FANU FANU FANU

LP = 00 LP = 02 LP = 04 LP = 06
FRONT VIEW
– 28 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7.4 Fault Detecting Function
The system finds a fault by its fault detecting circuit and the fault detecting program. Once a fault occurs,
the system initiates a remedial action such as system changeover, make-busy setting, or restart processing
by the automatic diagnosis function. This action reduces the influence of the fault so that system servicing
may be minimized. The result of the process taken and the fault situation are indicated for equipment
concerned.
Among the faults, those related to speech path (noise, one-way speech, speech inability, etc.) are not
detectable. Since these fault reports are obtained from a station or operator, periodic trunk tests must be
performed without failure to detect faults related to speech path.
Figure 1-11 shows an outline of fault detection. Figure 1-12 and Figure 1-13 show a block diagram of fault
detection.
Figure 1-11 Fault Detection General Diagram
Indication of Information
Fault Occurrence Collection and Diagnosis Example of Faults
System Messages
PCPro
Fault of line/trunk card
printer, etc.
CPU
card TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
ALM
Indication of
Alarm Lamp
on EMA card
EMA Abnormal temperature,
card power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
: Cards in SV8500 Server the equipment frame
– 29 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-12 Block Diagram of Fault Detection (1-IMG)
- Symbols -
Firmware
: Circuit Card in PIR/TSWR faults
: Card in SV8500 Server
: Faults to be detected
MUX LC/TRK
: Speech Path
Ready
: Fault Information flow Clock Howler,
Ringer fault
PWR
PCPro CPU EXB TSW

Printer, etc. (IOC)
Ready PWR
Clock
Howler,
Software abnormal Fault Ringer fault
behavior monitor Information
Power off,
(Note) blown fuse
(Note) Fault Information:
MJ, MN faults
Power OFF, blown fuse
CPU faults EMA
Speech Path faults
RGU, Howler faults
CPU Clock faults
SYMBOL MEANING SYMBOL MEANING

CPU Central Processing Unit EXB GT card
EMA Emergency Alarm Controller PWR Power Supply
IOC I/O Controller TSW Time Division Switch
LC/TRK Line/Trunk MUX Multiplexer
– 30 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-13 Fault Detection Block Diagram (4-IMG)
Firmware
faults
MUX LC/TRK
PWR
- Symbols -
: Circuit Card in PIR/TSWR
: Card in SV8500 Server TSWR
: Faults to be detected
TSW PWR
: Speech Path
: Fault Information flow
Ready
Clock
PCPro
CPU EXB GT PLO
Ready
(IOC) Clock
printer, etc.
Ready
Fault Clock
Software abnormal
behavior monitor Information
Power off,
blown fuse
(Note)
(Note) Fault Information:
MJ, MN faults EMA
Power OFF, blown fuse
CPU faults
Speech Path faults
RGU, Howler faults
CPU Clock faults
SYMBOL MEANING SYMBOL MEANING

CPU Central Processing Unit PWR Power Supply
EMA Emergency Alarm Controller DLKC Data Link Controller
IOC I/O Controller TSW Time Division Switch
LC/TRK Line/Trunk MUX Multiplexer
GT/EXB Gate card TSWM Time Division Switch Module
(a) Main Faults

Faults that may occur in the system can be generally categorized into Processor System Fault, Speech
Path System Fault, Line/Trunk Fault, etc.
• Processor System Fault
The CPU alarm detecting circuit continuously monitors whether the CPU is working normally. If a
fault is detected, the CPU calls up the diagnostic program, that identifies the cause of the fault and
determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent. When the fault affects system operations,
Active/Standby status of the CPU is changed over (provided that the system has dual configuration).
• Bus System Fault
– 31 –
CHAPTER 1 General
The CPU transfers line/trunk card control information to the associated peripheral circuits via IO
Bus. When a party error is detected in the transfer data or when the required information cannot be
transferred from a circuit card, the CPU identifies the cause of the fault, changes over the CPU so
that system operation is not affected, and executes restart processing.
• Speech Path Fault
The CPU monitors the operating status of the TSW card, the occurrence of errors in writing data to
the switch memory, and the basic clocks supplied to the speech path. Upon detecting a fault, the
CPU identifies the cause of the fault, determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent, and
executes required processing such as changeover of the TSW card.
• Others
The alarm detecting circuit on the EMA card continuously monitors the occurrence of faults in the
PWR supply cards, such as abnormal status within the equipment frame, and lights the alarm lamp
on the front when a fault is detected.
(b) Lamp Indications on the Front Cover

When a fault occurs, the corresponding lamp on the front of EMA card indicates the location of the
fault.
– 32 –
CHAPTER 1 General
7.5 Range of Faults Specification
(1) Upon receiving a fault report from a station user or an operator, the technician can assume a faulty card
exists if the range affected by the fault can be determined. For the detailed procedure, refer to Chapter 6.
Use the following actions to check the MDF:
(a) Check the LENS of the reporter (Station or ATTCON/DESKCON).

(b) Check other circuits of the circuit card in which the reporter (station line or ATTCON/DESKCON) is
located.
(c) Check the other groups (other circuit cards mounted in the same module) in the module in which the
reporter is located.
(d) Check lines in each of the other modules on the basis of multiple lines.
(2) If the fault cannot be detected by the system (a fault related to the speech path such as noise during speech,
one-way speech, speech inability), the range of (a) through (d) (itemized above) should be limited.
(3) When a major fault is detected in the dual systems, the CPU or TSW system automatically changes over if
the fault range is (c) and (d). In this case, the whole module involved is placed into make-busy status even
if the fault is partial, and the station lines currently operating normally become faulty status. Diagnose the
fault from the content of the system message displayed and repair the fault as required.
(4) To narrow down the range of faults, consider the system circuitry that consists of the control (see Figures
1-17 and Figure 1-18, where CPU 0 is active) and speech path systems (see Figure 1-14 and Figure 1-19).
(5) As seen from the block diagrams in Figure 1-14 through Figure 1-19, if a fault that affects the common
portions occurs, all other associated portions will be affected by this fault. When CPU and TSW are pro-
vided in dual configuration, they will be automatically changed over as far as the fault is detectable by the
system.
– 33 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-14 General System Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PM Bus
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR3
PM Bus
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR2
PM Bus
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR1
PM Bus
TSW MUX MUX TSW
MUX INT MUX INT
EXB INT LC/TRK LC/TRK EXB INT
Local I/O BUS BUS0 BUS1 Local I/O BUS
PIR0
SV8500 Server
EXB0 EXB1
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
IOC
(option)
IOC
(option)
PCI-Ex bus PCI-Ex bus
(PCI Express) (PCI Express)
TSW : PH-SW10-A, etc. : Circuit Card : Signal

MUX : PH-PC36 : CPU Control Routes : Cable
03/29/02
– 34 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-15 Speech Path Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PIR 3
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR 2
MUX MUX
PIR 1
MUX MUX
PIR 0
MUX MUX
TSW TSW
TSW TSW
[Symbols]
: Speech Path : Cable TSW : PH-SW10-A, etc.
: Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY) MUX : PH-PC36
– 35 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-16 Range of Speech Path Fault (1-IMG)
Faults within this range affects

these two slots.
LC/TRK Faults within this range affects

this module.
32ch
LC/TRK
PIR 3
MUX
512ch
Fault within this range

affects this circuit card.

these two slots.
LC/TRK
32ch this module.
LC/TRK
PIR 2
MUX
512ch


these two slots.
LC/TRK
32ch this module.
LC/TRK
PIR 1
MUX
512ch

these two slots. Faults within this range affects
the whole system.
LC/TRK
32ch MUX/INT
LC/TRK
PIR 0
TSW

[Symbols]
: Circuit Card :range that can be affected by this fault : Speech Path
– 36 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-17 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (4-IMG)
IMG0 IMG1
PIR 3 PM BUS PIR 3 PM BUS
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS

MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS

MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS

MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS
To IMG 2 To IMG 3 To IMG 2 To IMG 3
TSWR MUX MUX MUX MUX

M M M M M M M M /INT /INT M M M M M M M M /INT /INT
U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
003 002 001 000 013 012 011 010 TSW TSW 100 101 102 103 110 111 112 113 TSW TSW
02 03 12 13
CPU Board 0
MUX/INT MUX/INT MUX/INT MUX/INT

(PCI Express)
PCI-Ex bus
TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 10 TSW 11

SV8500 Server
Local I/O BUS Local I/O BUS

DLKC BUS DLKC BUS
EXB0
DLKC 0 DLKC 1
(option)
(option)
EMA
BUS0 DLKC BUS DLKC BUS

IOC
IOC
GT 0
Local I/O BUS
(Note 3)
EXB1
PLO 0 PLO 1
(PCI Express)
PCI-Ex bus
Local I/O BUS

GT 1
BUS1
CPU Board 1
[Symbols]
GT :PH-GT09
TSW :PH-SW12 : CPU Controlling Routes : Cable
DLKC:PH-PC20 : Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY)
PLO :PH-CK16-D : External Cable : Clock Oscillator
MUX :PH-PC36 : Signal
Note 1: Circuit cards shown in dotted line are in STBY mode.
Note 2: When the CPU ACT/STBY is changed over, GT will also be changed over in TSWR.
Note 3: IOC card is option.
– 37 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-18 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG) (1 of 2)
IMG0 IMG1
PIR3 PIR 3
MUX MUX MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR 2 PIR 2
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 1 PIR 1
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 0 PIR 0
MUX MUX MUX MUX
To IMG2 To IMG2 To IMG3 To IMG3
TSWR
TSW 00 TSW 01 MUX/ MUX/ MUX/ MUX/
INT INT INT INT
MUX 003 MUX 013
MUX 002 MUX 012 TSW TSW TSW TSW
02 12 03 13
MUX 001 MUX 011
MUX 000 MUX 010
MUX/INT MUX/INT
TSW 10 TSW 11
MUX 100 MUX 110
MUX 101 MUX 111
MUX 102 MUX 112
MUX 103 MUX 113
MUX/INT MUX/INT
[Symbols]
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Speech Path : External Cable TSW: PH-SW12
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY) MUX: PH-PC36
– 38 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-18 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG) (2 of 2)
IMG2 IMG3
PIR 3 PIR 3
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 2 PIR2
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 1 PIR1
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 0 PIR 0
MUX MUX MUX MUX
TSWR
INT INT INT INT
MUX 023 MUX 033
00 10 01 11
MUX 021 MUX 031
MUX 020 MUX 030
MUX/INT MUX/INT
TSW 12 TSW 13
MUX 120 MUX 130
MUX 121 MUX 131
MUX 122 MUX 132
MUX 123 MUX 133
MUX/INT MUX/INT
[Symbols]
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Speech Path : External Cable TSW: PH-SW12
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY) MUX: PH-PC36
– 39 –
CHAPTER 1 General
Figure 1-19 Range of Speech Path Fault (4-IMG)

these two slots.
LC/TRK Faults within this range affects

this module.
32ch
LC/TRK
PIR 3
MUX
512ch


these two slots.
LC/TRK
32ch this module.
LC/TRK
PIR 2
MUX
512ch

these two slots.
LC/TRK
32ch this module.
LC/TRK
PIR 1
MUX
512ch


these two slots. Faults within this range affects
the whole system.
LC/TRK
32ch
LC/TRK
PIR 0
MUX 512ch

TSW
MUX/INT
[Symbols]
: Circuit Card :range that can be affected by this fault : Speech Path
– 40 –
CHAPTER 2 Operations of SV8500 Server

This chapter covers the following topics in this order:
• 1. HOW TO SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME

• 2. ALARM INDICATIONS
• 3. INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM
• 4. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS
• 5. OFFICE DATA MAINTENANCE
• 6. UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
• 7. FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
• 8. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES
• 9. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
• 10. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR)
• 11. REDUNDANT DATA MEMORY BACKUP FOR OFFICE DATA
• 12. RTP INFORMATION OUTPUT
• 13. DTERM IP CALL INFORMATION DISPLAY
• 14. IP DEVICE PC PORT REMOTE CONTROL
• 15. LICENSE REGISTRATION INFORMATION DISPLAY
• 16. FTP SERVER SUPPORT (LAN1)
– 41 –
1. HOW TO SET THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
1.1 General
System clock can be manually or automatically adjusted as shown below. For automatic adjustment, an SNTP
server is required.
㪥㪦㪅㪪㪥㪫㪧㩷㪪㪜㪩㪭㪜㪩㪚㪦㪤㪤㪘㪥㪛㪜㪯㪧㪣㪘㪥㪘㪫㪠㪦㪥

㪙㫐㩷㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㵰㪪㪼㫋㵱㩷㪹㫌㫋㫋㫆㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㫀㫊㩷㪺㫆㫄㫄㪸㫅㪻㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫇㪼㪺㫀㪽㫀㪼㪻㩷㪻㪸㫋㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷
㪈㫅㫆㫋㩷㫌㫊㪼㪻㪘㪫㪠㪤㪆㪘㪫㪠㪤㪥
㫋㫀㫄㪼㩷㪸㫉㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫃㫀㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㪅
㪙㫐㩷㫊㫇㪼㪺㫀㪽㫐㫀㫅㪾㩷㪸㫅㩷㪪㪥㪫㪧㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㪼㫉㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋㩷㫋㫀㫄㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫆㪹㫋㪸㫀㫅㩷㫋㫀㫄㪼㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷
㪉㫌㫊㪼㪻㪘㪥㪫㪧㪣㪽㫉㫆㫄㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㪼㫉㪃㩷㫋㫀㫄㪼㩷㪸㪻㫁㫌㫊㫋㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪸㫌㫋㫆㫄㪸㫋㫀㪺㪸㫃㫃㫐㩷㫇㪼㫉㪽㫆㫉㫄㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㩷㪸㩷㪻㪸㫀㫃㫐㩷
㪹㪸㫊㫀㫊㪅
Figure 2-1 How to Set the Current Date and Time
ATIM/ATIMN manual adjustment automatic adjustment ANTPL
SNTP server
SV8500 server
time-synchronization
PCPro
1.2 Programming to Specify How to Set Date and Time
(1) When Not Using SNTP Server
STEP 1 ATIM/ATIMN
Date, Time, and Day Light Savings (Start/End) can be specified on this command. By pressing the “Set”
button on the command, the specified Date and Time will be applied to the system that is in operation.
(2) When Using SNTP Server
STEP 1 ATIM
When using Day Light Savings, set the data by using ATIM command.
STEP 2 ANTPL (SNTP Setting)

By this command, set time for time-synchronization (SNTP) service as well as an SNTP server by us-
ing the domain name or IP address. Time adjustment will be automatically performed on a daily basis.
IP Address of the DNS Server must be set using the ADTM command when SNTP server is specified
the domain name.
– 42 –
Note: For the details, refer to UNIVERGE SV8500 Data Programming Manual - Business.
Note: Activation of time-synchronization (SNTP) service is limited to once a day. Thus, if ANTPL command is
used to change the start time for SNTP service after SNTP service is already active for that day, the
change takes effect from the following day. Activate the SNTP service manually by pressing the Execute
button when immediate time adjustment is needed.
Example:
1) Existing start time for SNTP service is 01:00.
2) At 03:00, ANTPL command is used to change the start time from 01:00 to 05:00.
3) The next start time for SNTP service is 05:00 on the next day.
1.3 How to Adjust Date and Time
When the system is rebooted, the clock information will also be reset. Adjust the date and time by one of
the following procedures after system reboot.
(1) When Not Using SNTP Server
STEP 1 Execute ATIM/ATIMN command.
STEP 2 Set the current date and time.
STEP 3 Click on “Set” button to apply the date and time.
(2) When Using SNTP Server
STEP 1 Execute ANTPL command.
STEP 2 Click on “Execute” button to synchronize the date and time of the specified SNTP server.
– 43 –
2. ALARM INDICATIONS
If trouble occurs in the system, the system activates an appropriate remedial action such as system changeover,
make-busy of the circuit card, restart processing by executing the automatic diagnostic function. Results of the
action taken and the faulty situation are displayed by the alarm indication and system message (s). This section
describes the alarm indication. For the system messages, refer to Chapter 3.
2.1 Kinds of Alarm Indications
The system will alert the maintenance personnel of any failure occurred in the system by the following in-
dications.
(a) Alarm Lamps
• Front panel
• Each circuit card
• Each peripheral equipment
(b) System Messages
• Displayed on the PCPro
2.2 How to Stop Alarm Indications
To stop the alarm indication after the failure is solved, do the following.
STEP 1 Execute DFTD command from PCPro to collect the recorded system messages.
STEP 2 Execute the RALM command from PCPro.Note
Note: When RALM is executed, all system messages will be cleared. Be sure to collect the system messages
before using RALM.
– 44 –
2.3 Alarm Indications
The system has alarm lamps on EMA card as shown below. The table below lists the meaning of each lamp.
Alarm Indications on EMA card

SYS ALM lamp ALM lamp (SYS1: used for CPU #1)
LINK ACT ALM MB SYS SYS

SYS (SUB) PFT LOCK SEL PBI No.
PWR ALM SYS 1 ON 1 INIT
EMA Card
SYS 0 1 2 1 2 0
SW00 SW01
ALM lamp (SYS0: used for CPU #0)

(SUB) PFT LOCK SEL
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2
SWO0 SWO1
3 1
PWR
LOAD
4 2
ON
LINE LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
3 1
PWR
LOAD
ON 4 2
LINE
NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION REMARKS

MN (minor) alarm: One of the system cooling
Flashes in 1-second cycle.
fans is faulty, etc.
Red
SYS ALM lamp MJ (major) alarm: Two or more system cooling
Lights.
fans are faulty, etc.
OFF No failure is detected.
Lights when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #0
(software operation failure during the system is operating).
Red
SYS0 Flashes when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #0
(software operation failure on starting up the system).
OFF No failure is detected.
ALM lamp
Lights when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #1
(software operation failure during the system is operating).
Red
SYS1 Flashes when failure occurs on software operation in CPU #1
(software operation failure on starting up the system).
OFF No alarm is detected.
– 45 –
2.4 Variable Alarm Indication
This allows users to make a flexible change of system message output grades that range 0 to 3 and alarm
lamp grades that consist of MJ, MN, SUP and NONE. The maintenance personnel can give a proper alarm
grade to each system message according to their requirements. When assigning no data, the default alarm
grades are automatically applied.
Note 1: The alarm grade of System Message [6-A] cannot be changed.
Note 2: Use LLMG (Listup of Alarm Grade Data) command TYPE=3 to output the default value of alarm lamp
grade for system message.
COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME

ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data
ASYD SYS1 INDEX 91 b2 and b3
Figure 2-1 Variable Alarm Indication Data Assignment
Assign the following data for modifying the default alarm grade.
START
ALMG : Assign output grade and alarm lamp grade on a system message basis.
FK: Fault Message Kind (0-7, 10-17, 20-27, 30-37)

FI: Fault Message Index (A-Z)
LMP: Alarm Lamp Grade (0-3)
GRD: Output Grade (0-3)
SYSM GRD: System Alarm Lamp Output Grade (0-3) Note
Note: Indicates the setting status of output grade for System Alarm Lamp and System Message,
which can be assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 91, b2 and b3.
ASYD : Assign the output grade of System Alarm Lamp and System Message on a node basis.
SYS1, INDEX 91, b2 and b3

b3 b2
0 0 = Output all fault
0 1 = Output the fault higher than Grade 1 (SUP/MN/MJ)
1 0 = Output the fault higher than Grade 2 (MN/MJ)
1 1 = Output the fault higher than Grade 3 (MJ)
END
– 46 –
3. INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM
3.1 General
This section explains how to initialize the system. The following can be used:
• PCPro (SINZ)
• PCPro Tools (System Control - System Reboot)
• By INIT key Operation on EMA card
• By Turning OFF/ON the System
WARNING When the system is initialized, all calls in progress will be disconnected.
System initialization can be roughly divided to “Non Load Initial” and “Load Initial.” The former reboots the
system using the program and office data that are currently loaded in the memory. On the other hand, the latter
loads the office data (and program) into the memory before rebooting the system. After loading the data into the
memory, system initialization will take place. Available initialization types vary depending on type of
operations.
Non Load Initial Load Initial
MEM CF Card MEM
- Office Data Initialization - Office Data load - Office Data Initialization

- Program - Program - Program
– 47 –
The relationship of operation types and Initialization types is as follows.

Relationship between Initialization Types and Available Operations
X: Available -: Not Available
Available Operations
Initialization Type PCPro PCPro INIT key Operation
Tuning Off/On
(SINZ) Tools (EMA card)
Non Load Initial X - X -
Office Data Load Initial X - - -
Load Initial
Office Data Load & Program Load Initial X - - -

Office Data Load & Program Load (& OS Load) Initial X X - X
Figure 2-2 Office Data Load and Program Load
CF Card
Program - Basic Software

(Main Memory) Program Loading MEM
- Service Software
- IMAT Software
- TCP/IP Software - Program
Office Data - Data Memory - Office Data

- Call Forwarding Data
- Speed Calling Data
- Name Display Data Office Data Loading
etc.
Initialization
3.2 Initialization by PCPro (SINZ)
All initialization types shown below are available.
• Non Load Initial

• Office Data Load Initial
• Office Data Load & Program Load Initial
• Office Data Load & Program Load (& OS Load) Initial Note
Note: Use shutdown option on SINZ command.
STEP 1 Execute SINZ from the PCPro.
STEP 2 Select an appropriate initialization type, and then click “Execute” button.
• Initialization starts.
• PCPro is automatically placed in logout state.
– 48 –
Note: For the detail, refer to SINZ on page 906 in this manual.
STEP 3 Make sure that the SYS ALM lamp (red) lights on the EMA card.
STEP 4 Log into the system again from the PCPro.
STEP 5 Set the current date and time from the PCPro. (Refer to How to Adjust Date and Time.)
STEP 6 Release the indicated alarm. (Refer to How to Stop Alarm Indications.)
– 49 –
3.3 Initialization by PCPro Tools
The following initialization type is available.
• Office Data Load & Program Load (& OS Load) Initial
STEP 1 Run PCPro Tools on a PC.
STEP 2 Select “System Control” and then click “Execute” button.
STEP 3 Select “System Reboot” from the list box, and then click “Execute” button.
• Initialization starts.
• PCPro is automatically placed in logout state.
Note: For the detail, refer to “UNIVERGE SV8500 Command Manual“.
STEP 4 Make sure that the following lamps light green on the EMA card.
Lamp name Status

PWR Lights green
LINK Lights green
ACT Lights green
STEP 5 Log into the system again from the PCPro.
– 50 –
3.4 Initialization by INIT key Operation (EMA card)
The following initialization type is available.
• Non Load Initial

All on-going calls will be disconnected. The system will be rebooted by using program and office data that
are in the MEM.
[MEM]
- Program Initialization
- Office Data
STEP 1 Identify which system of CPU is in operation. The following shows an example when the system
is operating by CPU #0.
Lamp Layout on EMA Card (when CPU #0 is active) Lamp (Color) Status
PWR (Green) On
MB SYS SYS SYS ALM (Red) Off
SYS LINK ACT ALM (SUB) PFT LOCK SEL PBI No.
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1 ON 1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2
0
LINK (Green) On
SW00 SW01
ACT (Green) On
ALM (Red) Off
STEP 2 Press “INIT” key on the EMA card to start Non Load Initial.
MB SYS SYS
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1 ON 1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2
0
SW00 SW01
INIT key
STEP 3 Check the lamp indications on the EMA card.
Lamp (Color) Status

PWR (Green) On
LINK (Green) On
ACT (Green) On
SYS ALM (Red) On
– 51 –
3.5 Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System
This section explains how to start up the system that has been shut down for some reason. If the system
cannot be initialized by the SINZ/PCPro Tools/INIT key, shut down the system and restart the system by
this procedure. Available initialization type is as follows:
• Office Data Load & Program Load (& OS Load) Initial
3.5.1 How to Start Up the System by Turning OFF/ON
This procedure assumes that the system has been shut down for some reason.
STEP 1 Turn off the power of the system referring to Chapter 5 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System.
STEP 2 Turn on the power again referring to Chapter 5 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System.
STEP 3 Make sure that the system is in normal operation.
Lamp (Color) Status

PWR (Green) On
LINK (Green) On
ACT (Green) On
ALM (Red) On
– 52 –
4. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS
For confirming its own servicing status, the system automatically executes self diagnosis every day, and
displays the result of the diagnosis as a system message. By this function, possible causes for trouble can be
discovered in an early stage and possible trouble can be prevented from remaining undetected.
4.1 Related System Data
• ASYD, SYS1, INDEX86,

b0 – When routine diagnosis starts, and the result of the routine diagnosis is normal, the result
displays as System Message [7-O].
0/1: Not displayed/Displayed
b1 – When the result of the routine diagnosis is abnormal, it displays as System Message [7-P].
0/1: Not displayed/To display
b3, b2 – Processing at the time when Trunk Ineffective Hold is detected. Note 1
BIT The trunks being held at present are forcibly All trunks being held at LENS of the trunk detected
released, except the trunks being held on two- the present are forcibly display as System Message
way calls (station-to-station call, station-to- released [7-P]
b3 b2
trunk, external trunk-to-external trunk call).
0 0 X — X
0 1 — — X
1 0 — X X
Note 1: Trunk Ineffective Hold is a continuous state other than idle state within a predetermined duration while
routine diagnosis is in progress. Whether it is detected/not detected, it is assigned by ASYD, SYS1, IN-
DEX 89.
Note 2: When Trunk Ineffective Hold on the FCCS Network is detected, setting of ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 86,
b2·b3 and SYS1, INDEX 89, b4·b5 must be the same at all nodes on the network.
• SYS1, INDEX 87, 88 - Routine Diagnosis Start Time

Start time should be such a time which the traffic of the office is the lowest.
INDEX 87 0 2 (Hour) 2:00 a.m. is the start time.

INDEX 88 0 0 (Minute)
To stop the routine diagnosis, set FF respectively to INDEX87, 88.
– 53 –
• SYS1, INDEX 89, 90 — Routine Diagnosis Items: The item corresponding to each bit is to execute
once a day.
• Single System Configuration

INDEX89 b1 — DM Check (DM = Data Memory)
0/1 = No/Yes
b4 — Trunk Ineffective Hold Check Note 1
0/1= No/Yes
b5 — Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection Note 1
0/1 = No/Yes
INDEX90 b1 — Backup of Call Forwarding, Individual Speed Data, Name Display Data, User As-
sign Soft Key Data and Number Sharing Data to Flash Card (see Index 304)
0/1 = No/Yes
INDEX304 b0 — Individual Speed Calling Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX 90, b1=1)
b1 — Call Forwarding Data Saving
b3 — Name Display Data Saving
b4 — User Assign Soft Key Data Saving
b5 — Number Sharing Data Saving
b6 — Call Block Data Save
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
INDEX305 b1 — CFL (Call Forwarding-Logout) Data Save
0/1 = Out/In Service (Data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
b2 —Dterm IP SPD (One-Touch Speed Calling) Data Save
b3 — DM/LDM/NDM Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
INDEX306 b0 — Phone book Data Save
Note 1: When these features are executed while the bit 0 of ASYDL SYS1 INDEX1034 is set to 1, Virtual Reg-
ister Ineffective Check is also enabled.
– 54 –
4.2 Routine Diagnosis Result
The result of routine diagnosis displays as a system message.
Normally ended: [7-O]
Abnormality detected >7-P] Refer to Chapter 3 for more details.
In case an abnormality is detected, initiate necessary processing explained in Chapter 5.
– 55 –
5. OFFICE DATA MAINTENANCE
5.1 Office Data Maintenance

ATTENTION
Contents
(1) Office data that is stored in memory during the operation can be backed up to the CF card Static Sensitive
Handling
mounted on the SV8500 server. Also, office data stored in the CF card can be copied and
stored in other storage devices such as hard disk by using PCPro Tools.
Figure 2-3 PCPro Tools and PCPro Coverage
UNIVERGE SV8500 Server

Office Data, etc.
CF card Load
MEM_HDD MEM
other storage Office Data, etc.
upload/download (Memory)
devices.... Save
d
loa
o wn
PCPro Tools d/d
loa
up
PCPro
(2) Saving the office data

The system operates according to the office data, so make sure to save the latest office data to the CF card.
Otherwise, re-assignment of whole office data will be necessary if memory is corrupted for some reason.
In this case, all services will be stopped during the data assignment.
Viewing and confirming office data by the routine diagnosis is the best way to reduce possible system fail-
ures. Always keep the following at an easily accessible place.
(a) Configuration Sheets

Use a pencil to record the latest data in the configuration sheets.
(b) CF card for backup data
Prepare another CF card to store the office data as an backup data.
5.2 Office Data Maintenance Procedure
Procedures to maintain the office data are as listed below:
STEP 1 Make a plan for data modification - Write into the configuration sheets
STEP 2 Modify the data - Write into the configuration sheets
STEP 3 Make up the list - Write into the configuration sheets
STEP 4 Save the current data from MEM to CF card.
STEP 5 Verify the data in the MEM and the CF card
– 56 –
5.3 Office Data Backup
The office data of the SV8500 can be backed up in the CF card (s) or other storage de-
vices such as the hard disk of a PC. Use the following for each type of backup: ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
• MEM_HDD (MEM_HDD_N): Data transfer between MEM and CF card

• PCPro Tools: Data transfer between a PC and CF card.
Note: Do not extract the CF card while the SV8500 is in operation.
5.3.1 MEM_HDD / MEM_HDD_N
Current data that is loaded in MEM, can be saved to the CF card by using MEM_HDD/MEM_HDD_N.
Figure 2-4 How to Save the Office Data using MEM_HDD/MEM_HDD_N
MEM_HDD
(MEM_HDD_N) MEM (memory)
SV8500 Server
PCPro
CF card
The following data can be saved to the CF card from MEM.
• Data Memory
• Name Display Data
• Wireless Call Forwarding Data
• Call Forwarding Data
• Speed Calling Data
• User Assign Key Data
• Number Sharing Data
• ACD Data Memory
• Call Forwarding-Logout Data
• One-Touch Speed Calling Data for DtermIP
• MA-ID Data
• SR-MGC Data (Available only when PCPro logs into SR-MGC.)
• SIP Terminal Call Transfer
• Day/Night Data
• Local Phone book Data
• Soft Switch Data (Available for MEM_HDD only.)
– 57 –
5.3.2 PCPro Tools
The office data stored in the CF card of SV8500 can be saved (downloaded) in other storage device by
using PCPro Tools. Also, office data stored in other storage device can be loaded (uploaded) by using
this tool.
Figure 2-5 How to Save the Office Data using PCPro Tools
upload MEM (memory)
SV8500 Server
Office Data, etc.
other storage
download
devices....
CF card
PCPro Tools
The following data can be saved to other storage devices from the CF card.
• Data Memory
• Name Display Data
• Call Forwarding Data
• Speed Calling Data
• ACD Data Memory
• One-Touch Speed Calling Data for DtermIP
• MA-ID Data
• SR-MGC Data
• SIP Terminal Call Transfer
• Day/Night Data
• Local Phone book Data
• Soft Switch Data
– 58 –
<How to Download the Office Data>
STEP 1 Run PCPro Tools.
STEP 2 Select “Office Data” in frame labeled “Operation” on the initial screen.
STEP 3 Select an appropriate connection account from “Connect Account Name” list box.
STEP 4 Specify an appropriate CF card drive name and the system of CPU by using “Drive” and “Sys-
tem Side” radio buttons respectively.
STEP 5 Click on “Execute” button.
STEP 6 Select “Download” from “Operation” list box.
STEP 7 Select an appropriate item from “Install Data Registration Name” list box.
STEP 8 Select an appropriate item from “Office Data” combo box, where you can type arbitrary name
as required.
STEP 9 Click on “Execute” button. By doing this, the office data will be added to the specified data.
– 59 –
<How to Upload the Office Data>
To upload office data to the CF card of SV8500 server, you have to import the office data to upload in ad-
vance, so that PCPro Tools can control the data. And then, upload the data to the CF card of a specified
SV8500 server.
• How to Import the Office Data
STEP 1 Run PCPro Tools.
STEP 2 Select “Tool” - “Install Data Registration Setting” on the menu.
STEP 3 Select an appropriate “Install Data” from “Install Data List” and then click on “Detail” button.
STEP 4 Select “Office Data” from “Data Kind” list box, and then click on “Import” button.
STEP 5 Click on “Browse” button to select Import Data, and then click on “OK”.
STEP 6 Input name to “Install Data Name” text box.
STEP 7 Click on “Import” button. The specified data will be added to the data.
STEP 8 Return to the PCPro Tools initial screen.
• How to Upload the Imported Data
STEP 1 Select “Office Data” in frame labeled “Operation” on the initial screen.
STEP 2 Select an appropriate connection account from “Connect Account Name” list box.
STEP 3 Specify an appropriate CF card drive name and the system of CPU by using “Drive” and “Sys-
tem Side” radio buttons respectively.
STEP 4 Click on “Execute” button.
STEP 5 Select “Upload” from “Operation” list box.
STEP 6 Select an appropriate item from “Install Data Registration Name” list box.
STEP 7 Select an appropriate item from “Office Data” list box.
STEP 8 Click on “Execute” button. Uploading will start toward the specified CF card drive.
– 60 –
5.3.3 Explanations on Each Item
• Call Forwarding Data and One-Touch Speed Calling Data

The data for Call Forwarding and Speed Calling features can be saved.
You can check whether the backup has been executed properly by checking the Auto Verify Afterward
checkbox on MEM_HDD command.
Call Forwarding (All Calls, Busy, Don’t Answer) and Speed Calling features are set/canceled from each
station, and the data is written on the memory of the system. Therefore, on the occasion that the memory
data is changed after the data saving, an error message is detected when “Verify HDD against MEM” is
executed.

Call Forwarding data assigned on each PS can be saved in CF card.

Soft Key information assigned on each DtermIP can be saved in CF card.

Number Sharing data can be saved in CF card. Also, Dual Station Call data can be saved in CF card.
• Speed Calling Data for DtermIP

A maximum of 20 telephone numbers (40 telephone numbers when PAGE function for one-touch key
changeover is adapted) allocated to the Speed Dialing keys on Dterm and DtermIP can be saved.
Note: There is no compatibility between Speed Calling data between Dterm and DtermIP.
• SIP Terminal Transfer Information

SIP terminal (VoWLAN Dual/VoWLAN/Standard SIP) data is backed up.
• ACD Data Memory

When taking a backup of the ACD data memory, you can see the result by using “Auto Verify Afterward”
of MEM_HDD.
Note: The setting/deleting of the ACD data can be changed (written into the system memory) by using a MIS
or an external application. Therefore, if it is changed after taking the backup, “Verify HDD against
MEM” of MEM_HDD will end in an error.
• Soft Switch Data

Switch setting data that can be set by ASSW command is backed up.
– 61 –
5.4 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF CF CARD
5.4.1 Procedure For FP85-104 S1E
This section explains how to initialize CF card. Performing this procedure, all the contents on the card will
be initialized, leaving BASE System (OS) only installed. Any programs of the system, SVI files, or office
data settings are not to be installed on the card. To install these data to CF card, perform the initial instal-
lation by using PCPro Tools after this initialization procedure.
Note: Refer to the “Installation Manual”o”CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP”o“1.2 Program Install to CF

Card” for the initial installation procedures.
Initialization procedure deletes all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF
WARNING
card. Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 1: Keyboard can be selected whether Japanese keyboard layout or English keyboard layout.
Note 2: Initialization procedures delete all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF card.
Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 3: Performing the initial installation procedures and executing reboot, LAN1 becomes invalid. Set LAN1
by using PCPro Tools.
Note 4: During the initial installation procedure, the default IP address of LAN1 is set to 192.168.0.2. Check
the settings on your PC. After the initial installation process, the default IP address for LAN2 of
SV8500 becomes 172.16.253.0/16. Check the settings on your PC.
Note 5: Use DISS command to check the issue information of BASE System (OS). You can see the issue infor-
mation of the installer CD-ROM printed on the label as “BASE_SYS:xx.xx”. When you obtain the latest
installer CD-ROM, compare the version information and decide whether to update the OS or not.
Note 6: You do not have to specify a correct device of boot prompt in normal.
Note 7: You do not have to do mounting CD/DVD drive operation.
– 62 –
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn ON a PC to be used for CF card initialization.
STEP 2 Insert the installer CD-ROM (printed “BASIC SOFTWARE” on the label) to the CD/DVD drive
of the PC.
STEP 3 Set the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM; give the top priority to the CD/DVD drive.
Note: Refer to the PC’s manual for the BIOS setting information.
STEP 4 Reboot the PC from the CD-ROM.
• Linux is started from the CD-ROM.

• After a while, the following will be displayed.
Options are: usb ide
scd0 scd1 scd2 scde3
hda hdb hdc hdd
hde hdf hdg hdh
auto
none (test only)
The default is auto.
boot:
STEP 5 Boot prompt is displayed, and then press ENTER in order to detect the device name automati-
cally (command is not required).
Note: If automatic detection is not available, specify the correct device.
boot:
– 63 –
STEP 6 Select US English keymap for the keyboard of the PC.
• Enter “2” or “us” and press the Enter key.
Note: If wrong data or no data is entered, US English keymap is activated.
Please select a keymap from the following list by typ-

ing in the appropriate name or number. Hit Enter for
the default “us/2” US English keymap.
1 jp
2 us
<< Load keymap (Enter for default)
STEP 7 Login from the login prompt.
Use the login account “root”.
(none) login: root

Login as “root”.
root@(none):~#
STEP 8 Insert the CF card to be initialized to the PCMCIA card slot of the PC.
STEP 9 Execute the install command.
• Press “y” to the execution confirmation message for installation.

• Press the Enter key.
• Installation starts. (It takes approximately 20 minutes.)
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# INSTALLCF
......
......
......
do you continue the installation?(y/n): y Enter “y”, and press the Enter key.
STEP 10 “Installation finish!” is displayed.
• Remove the CF card.
STEP 11 Execute halt command.
installation finish!
Installation is finished.
root@(none):~#
– 64 –
root@(none):~# halt
Execute Shut Down.
......
Note: When halt command is executed, turning off the power of PC and ejecting CD-ROM from PC can be
performed automatically. Turning off the power of PC begins approximately 30 seconds later when halt
command is executed.
STEP 12 If you modified the BIOS setting (booting drive priority) at STEP 3, restore to the previous set-
ting as needed.
[End]
CF card initialization is now finished. Go on to the initial installation procedures with PCPro Tools. Refer
to the “Installation Manual” o”CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP”o “1.2 Program Install to CF Card”
for the initial installation procedures.
Note: If you use a PC whose writing speed to CF card is slow, an error may occur.
• If the process ends up showing error, the CD-ROM will not be ejected automatically; remove man-
ually.
• If “CF is NOT found...” is displayed, the PC is failed to recognize the card. Try this on other PC.
– 65 –
5.4.2 Procedure For FP85-104 S1
This section explains how to initialize CF card. Performing this procedure, all the contents on the card will
be initialized, leaving BASE System (OS) only installed. Any programs of the system, SVI files, or office
data settings are not to be installed on the card. To install these data to CF card, perform the initial instal-
lation by using PCPro Tools after this initialization procedure.
Note: Refer to the “Installation Manual”o”CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP”o“1.2 Program Install to CF

Card” for the initial installation procedures.
Initialization procedure deletes all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF
WARNING
card. Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 1: Keyboard will be set up as Japanese keyboard layout.
Note 2: Initialization procedures delete all the programs, SVI files, and office data settings from the CF card.
Be sure to make backups of these data before performing the following steps.
Note 3: Performing the initial installation procedures and executing reboot, LAN1 becomes invalid. Set LAN1
by using PCPro Tools.
Note 4: During the initial installation procedure, the default IP address of LAN1 is set to 192.168.0.2. Check
the settings on your PC. After the initial installation process, the default IP address for LAN2 of
SV8500 becomes 172.16.253.0/16. Check the settings on your PC.
Note 5: Use DISS command to check the issue information of BASE System (OS). You can see the issue infor-
mation of the installer CD-ROM printed on the label as “BASE_SYS:xx.xx”. When you obtain the latest
installer CD-ROM, compare the version information and decide whether to update the OS or not.
Note 6: Do not specify an incorrect device. Doing so will cause a kernel panic. If this occurs, reboot the PC by
power switch.
– 66 –
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn ON a PC to be used for CF card initialization.
STEP 2 Insert the installer CD-ROM (printed “BASIC SOFTWARE” on the label) to the CD/DVD drive
of the PC.
STEP 3 Set the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM; give the top priority to the CD/DVD drive.
Note: Refer to the PC’s manual for the BIOS setting information.
STEP 4 Reboot the PC from the CD-ROM.
• Linux is started from the CD-ROM.

• After a while, the following will be displayed.
Options are: usb ide
hda hdb hdc hdd
hde hdf hdg hdh
auto
none (test only)
The default is auto.
boot:
STEP 5 Assign the device from boot prompt. (The sample screen below is for IDE connection.)
Note: When multiple CD/DVD drives are connected, the display may vary depending on the environment.
Note: Do not specify an incorrect device. Doing so will cause a kernel panic. If this occurs, reboot the PC by
power switch.
boot:ide Enter “usb” when CD/DVD drive is
connected with USB.
Enter “ide” when CD/DVD drive is

connected with IDE.
Enter “sed0” when CD/DVD drive is

connected with S-ATA.
STEP 6 Login from the login prompt.
Use the login account “root”.
– 67 –
(none) login: root

Login as “root”.
root@(none):~#
STEP 7 Enter the following command to mount CD/DVD drive.
Note: When the system is FP85-104 S1 Issue 5, this command entry is not required.
(root@(none):~#
(root@(none):~# mount /dev/cdroms/cdrom0 /cdrom
STEP 8 The following will be displayed.
(root@(none):~# mount /dev/cdroms/cdrom0 /cdrom

mount: block device /dev/ide/................/cd is write-protected,
mounting read-only
(root@(none):~#
STEP 9 Insert the CF card to be initialized to the PCMCIA card slot of the PC.
STEP 10 Execute the install command.
• Press “y” to the execution confirmation message for installation.

• Press the Enter key.
• Installation starts. (It takes approximately 20 minutes.)
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# INSTALLCF
......
......
......
Note: When the system is FP85-104 S1 Issue 4 or earlier, enter the command as below.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# /cdrom/INSTALLCF
......
......
......
STEP 11 “Installation finish!” is displayed.
• Remove the CF card.
STEP 12 Execute halt command.
– 68 –
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# halt
Execute Shut Down.
......
Note: When the system is FP85 104 S1 Issue 3 or earlier, execute reboot command instead of halt command.
root@(none):~#
root@(none):~# reboot
Execute Reboot.
......
STEP 13 Remove the installer CD-ROM from the CD/DVD drive.
Note: When halt command is executed in Step 12, turning off the power of PC and ejecting CD-ROM from PC
can be performed automatically. Turning off the power of PC begins approximately 30 seconds later
when halt command is executed.
Note: If the reboot command is executed in Step 12. When boot prompt appears, remove the installer CD-ROM
from the CD/DVD drive.
boot: boot prompt.
STEP 14 If the reboot command is executed in Step 12, turn OFF the PC.
STEP 15 If you modified the BIOS setting (booting drive priority) at STEP 3, restore to the previous set-
ting as needed.
[End]
CF card initialization is now finished. Go on to the initial installation procedures with PCPro Tools. Refer
to the “Installation Manual” o”CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM STARTUP”o “1.2 Program Install to CF Card”
for the initial installation procedures.
Note: If you use a PC whose writing speed to CF card is slow, an error may occur.
• If the process ends up showing error, the CD-ROM will not be ejected automatically; remove man-
ually.
• If “CF is NOT found...” is displayed, the PC is failed to recognize the card. Try this on other PC.
– 69 –
6. UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
6.1 CPU Card Replacement Procedure
This section explains how to replace the CPU card. This card controls the call process for the system. Be careful
to handle the key operation. The mishandling may cause a critical influence to the system.
WARNING Be careful to handle the key operation on the circuit card.
SV8500 Server (front)
CPU card #1 EMA card

IOC card (Option)
PWR switch CPU card #0 IOC card (Option)

Note
PWR switch
Note Power module #1
SV8500 Server (rear)
Power module #0
Note: When PCPro Tools - System Shutdown is not available or does not work, press this switch for four sec-
onds to shut down the CPU card.
– 70 –
• CPU Card Replacement Procedure for CPU Single Configuration

WARNING When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down.
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn off the SV8500 server.
<By PCPro Tools (recommended)>
• On the initial screen, select “System Control” and click “Execute” button.
• Select “System Shutdown” in “Select Processing” list box.
• Click “Execute” button to shut down the system.
• Make sure that “PWR” lamp is off on the CPU card.Note
• Turn off “Power” switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
Note: Be sure to confirm “PWR” lamp is off on the CPU card before turning off “Power” switch on the Power
module.
<By switch operation>
When PCPro Tools - System Shutdown is not available or does not work, press “PWR” switch on CPU
card for four seconds to shut down the CPU card.
• Press “PWR” switch for four seconds on the CPU card.

module.
STEP 2 Turn off the PIR (s) and TSWR when they are accommodated. If not skip this step.
<For 1-IMG>
Turn off the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
• PIR0oPIR1oPIR2oPIR3 (smaller number PIR first)
<For 4-IMG>
• TSWR
• PIR0oPIR1oPIR2o....oPIR15 (smaller number PIR first)
STEP 3 Disconnect the LAN cables from the front connector.
Note: It is recommended to put a mark on the cable not to reconnect a wrong cable.
– 71 –
STEP 4 Remove the front cover.
STEP 5 Remove the CF card from the CPU card.
STEP 6 Loosen the screws from the CPU card.
STEP 7 Pull the CPU card slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 8 On the new CPU card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old CPU card.
STEP 9 Insert the new CPU card to the CPU slot.
• Make sure that the connector is firmly inserted to the system.
STEP 10 Fasten the new CPU card with the screws.
STEP 11 Insert the removed CF card to the slot.
STEP 12 Attach the front cover again.
STEP 13 Reconnect the LAN cables.
STEP 14 Turn on the PIR (s) and TSWR when they are accommodated. If not skip this step.
<For 1-IMG>
Turn on the power (PWR/DPWR cards) in the following order.
<For 4-IMG>
• TSWR
STEP 15 Turn on the SV8500 server.
• Turn on “Power” switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
STEP 16 Make sure that the system is placed in normal operation by checking the following lamps.
• “PWR” lamp on the CPU card lights green.

• “ON LINE” lamp on the CPU card will change as follows:
(1) OFFo(2)FAST flasho(3)SLOW flasho(4)steady ON
STEP 17 Set the clock information referring to “How to Adjust Date and Time.”
[End]
– 72 –
• CPU Replacement Procedure for CPU Dual Configuration
Replacement procedure explained here assumes the following scenario as an example:
• CPU card (#1) must be replaced

• CPU card (#1) is operating as ACT
Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on the
actual system.
Note: When the system is CPU-dual configuration, system shutdown is not necessary for CPU replacement.
[Start]
STEP 1 Make sure the CPU to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
• “ACT” lamp of “SYS0” side lights green: CPU card #0 is in ACT mode.
• “ACT” lamp of “SYS1” side lights green: CPU card #1 is in ACT mode.
STEP 2 If the CPU to be replaced is in ACT mode, place it in STBY mode. Otherwise, start from STEP
5.
• Use CMOD command from PCPro.
Note: MODE switch - 4 is Make Busy Request (MBR) key. CPU ACT/STBY can be switched by this switch. See
“How to Change over CPU Card” - “CPU Changeover by Key Operation” for more details.
STEP 3 Make sure the CPU to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
• “ACT” lamp on the EMA card is changed? (In this example, “SYS0: ACT” lamp lights green.)
STEP 4 Lock the ACT-side CPU card to ACT. (In this example, set CPU card #0 always ACT.)
• Select ACT-side CPU by SW01-2 (SYS SEL) on EMA card. (In this example, downward.)
• Lock CPU ACT/STBY by SW01-1 (SYS LOCK) on EMA card: upward
Note: CPU ACT/STBY can be locked so that CPU ACT/STBY switchover may not take place during CPU card
replacement.
Note: SW01-02 (SYS SEL) setting shown above is an example, by which CPU card #0 is locked to ACT. The
setting may vary depending on the actual system.
STEP 5 Turn off the STBY side CPU card.
• On the initial screen, select “System Control” radio button.

• Select an appropriate System Side (System 0 or System 1).
• Click “Execute” button.
– 73 –

• Make sure that “PWR” lamp goes off on the CPU card.Note
Note: Be sure to confirm “PWR” lamp is off on the CPU card before proceeding to the next step.

Note: Be sure to confirm “PWR” lamp goes off on the CPU card before proceeding to the next step.
STEP 6 Disconnect the LAN cables from the CPU card that is shut down.
Note: It is recommended to put a mark on the cable not to reconnect a wrong cable.
STEP 7 Remove the front cover.
STEP 8 Remove the CF card from the CPU card.
STEP 9 Loosen the screws from the CPU card.
STEP 10 Pull the CPU card slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 11 On the new CPU card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old CPU card.
STEP 12 Insert the removed CF card to the CF slot on the new CPU card.
STEP 13 Insert the new CPU card to the CPU slot.
• Make sure that the connector is firmly inserted to the system.
Note: Being inserted into the connector, the CPU card is automatically powered on.
STEP 14 Fasten the new CPU card with the screws.
STEP 15 Reconnect the LAN cables.
STEP 16 Make sure that the new CPU shows no abnormality by checking lamps on the front.

• “ON LINE” lamp on the CPU card will change as follows:
(1) OFFo(2)FAST flasho(3)SLOW flasho(4)steady ON
STEP 17 Set SW01 to the original key position.
– 74 –
• SW01-2 (SYS SEL) on EMA card = Downward

• SW01-1 (SYS LOCK) on EMA card = OFF (Downward)
Note: Normally,SW01 should be set to all OFF.
STEP 18 Switch over the CPU ACT/STBY to test the newly replaced CPU card.
STEP 19 Make test calls to see that newly replaced CPU card is operating normally.
STEP 20 Attach the front cover again.
[End]
– 75 –
6.2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure
EMA card is mounted in the telephony server. The main functions of the card are as fol-
lows: ATTENTION
Contents
• Designation of ACT/STBY status of the CPU Static Sensitive

Handling
• Detection of abnormality within the system

• Control of the PFT (NCU) circuit card
CPU card #1 EMA card

IOC card (Option)
CPU card #0 IOC card (Option)
Note: Power Failure Transfer (PFT) will be activated during EMA card replacement when PFT is provided.
[Start]
STEP 1 Loosen the screws from the EMA card.
STEP 2 Pull the EMA card toward you slowly to remove from the system.
Note: PFT function will start operating if NCU circuit card is provided.
STEP 3 On the new EMA card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old EMA card.
STEP 4 Insert the new EMA card to the system. (Insert the connector to the system firmly.)
• PWR lamp lights green on the front panel of the EMA card.
STEP 5 Fasten the new EMA card with the screws.
Note: PFT function will stop operating automatically.
STEP 6 Set the clock information referring to “How to Adjust Date and Time”.
[End]
– 76 –
6.3 EMA SUB Card Replacement Procedure
This card is used for system having PIR only. EMA SUB (EMA SUB-A/EMA SUB-B)
cards are mounted on the rear side of SV8500 server. The main functions of the card are ATTENTION
Contents
as follows: Static Sensitive

Handling
• EMA SUB-A: Collects the alarm information from PIRs.

• EMA SUB-A: Internal/External Music-On-Hold (for 1-IMG system)
• EMA SUB-B: Collects the alarm information from TSWR and other frames.

EMA SUB-A
EMA SUB-B
(for 4-IMG only)
[Start]
STEP 1 Set “SW00-1 [MB (SUB)]” on the front panel of EMA card to “ON (Upward)”.
STEP 2 Disconnect the cables from the connector of the EMA SUB card.
STEP 3 Loosen the screws on the EMA SUB card.
STEP 4 Remove the EMA SUB card.
STEP 5 Attach the new EMA SUB card.
STEP 6 Insert the cable to the connector.
STEP 7 Set SW00-1 [MB (SUB)] on the front panel of EMA card to “OFF (Downward)”.
[End]
– 77 –
6.4 EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card Replacement Procedure
This card is used for system having PIR only. EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) cards are
mounted on the rear side of SV8500 server. The main function of the card is to provide ATTENTION
Contents
an interface between CPU and PIR/TSWR through Local I/O bus. When CPU is provided Static Sensitive
Handling
in dual configuration, ACT/STBY of EXB card and CPU always switches over in com-
bination. EXB-PIR and EXB-TSW are used for 1-IMG and 4-IMG respectively. Howev-
er, replacement procedure is exactly the same.
PIR/TSWR Line/Trunk
Local I/O bus Local I/O bus
EXB0 EXB1
CPU0 CPU1
EMA SV8500 Server
WARNING When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down for EXB
card replacement.
EXB (#1)
EXB (#0)
– 78 –
EXB - Replacement Procedure for CPU Single Configuration

WARNING When the system is CPU single configuration, the whole system must be shut down.
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn off the SV8500 server.
• On the initial screen, select “System Control” and click “Execute” button.
module.

module.
STEP 2 Turn off the PIR (s) and TSWR when they are accommodated. If not skip this step.
<For 1-IMG>

<For 4-IMG>
• TSWR
STEP 3 Disconnect the bus cable from the EXB card.
• 1-IMG: D37 SC50 CA-A (PIR connector)

• 4-IMG: D37 SC50 CA-B (TSWR connector)
– 79 –
PIR/TSWR connector
EXB card
screw
PWR
ACT
screw Cable support

bracket
D37 SC50 CA-A / D37 SC50 CA-B
STEP 4 Loosen the screws on the EXB card.
STEP 5 Remove the cable support bracket.
STEP 6 Pull the EXB card slowly toward you.
STEP 7 Insert the new EXB card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the
connector provided on the server.
STEP 8 Place the both ends of the cable support bracket on the screws.
STEP 9 Fasten the cable support bracket on the EXB card by tightening the screws.
STEP 10 Insert the bus cable to the connector again.
STEP 11 Turn on the PIR (s) and TSWR when they are accommodated. If not skip this step.
<For 1-IMG>
• PIR05PIR15PIR25PIR3 (smaller number PIR first)
<For 4-IMG>
• TSWR
STEP 12 Turn on the SV8500 server.
• Turn on “Power” switch (press the right side of the switch) on the Power module.
STEP 13 Make sure that the system is placed in normal operation.

• “SYS 0” side “ACT” lamp on the EMA card lights green.
– 80 –
STEP 14 Make sure that the newly replaced EXB card is operating normally in the system.
• “PWR” lamp lights green on the EXB card.
Note: If the lamp does not light green, make sure that the EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit.
STEP 15 Make test calls to see that newly replaced EXB card is operating normally.
• Place test calls using stations / trunks accommodated in PIR.

• Confirm whether any system messages related fault are output or not. Use DFTD from PCPro.
Note: If any fault is found, check the following:

- EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit?
- Bus cable is securely inserted into the connector?
[End]
– 81 –
EXB - Replacement Procedure for CPU Dual Configuration
[Start]
Replacement procedure explained here assumes the following scenario as an example:
• EXB card (#1) must be replaced

• EXB card (#1) is operating as ACT
Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on the
actual system.
Note: When this system is CPU-dual configuration, system shutdown is not necessary for EXB replacement.
STEP 1 Make sure the EXB card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode. ACT/STBY can be identified
by “ACT” lamp on the EXB card.
• “ACT” lamp is steady ON (green): this EXB card is in ACT mode.

• “ACT” lamp flashes (green): this EXB card is in STBY mode.
STEP 2 If the EXB to be replaced is in ACT mode, switch over CPU ACT/STBY. Note
• Use CMOD command from PCPro to switch over CPU ACT/STBY.
Note: When CPU is provided in dual configuration, ACT/STBY of EXB card and CPU always switches over in
combination.
Note: MODE switch - 4 is Make Busy Request (MBR) key.
STEP 3 Disconnect the bus cable from the EXB card that is placed in STBY mode.
• 1-IMG: D37 SC50 CA-A (PIR connector)

• 4-IMG: D37 SC50 CA-B (TSWR connector)
PIR/TSWR connector
EXB card
screw
PWR
ACT
screw
Cable support
bracket
D37 SC50 CA-A / D37 SC50 CA-B
STEP 4 Loosen the screws on the EXB card.
STEP 5 Remove the cable support bracket.
STEP 6 Pull the EXB card slowly toward you.
– 82 –
STEP 7 Insert the new EXB card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the
STEP 8 Place the both ends of the cable support bracket on the screws.
STEP 9 Fasten the EXB card by tightening the two screws onto the server.
STEP 10 Insert the bus cable to the connector again.
STEP 11 Make sure that the newly replaced EXB card is operating normally in the system.
• “PWR” lamp lights green on the EXB card.
Note: If the lamp does not light green, make sure that the EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit.
STEP 12 Switch over the CPU ACT/STBY to test the newly replaced EXB card.

• Place test calls using stations / trunks accommodated in PIR.
• Confirm whether any system messages related fault are output or not. Use DFTD from PCPro.
Note: If any fault is found, check the following:

- EXB card is securely inserted into the main unit?
- Bus cable is securely inserted into the connector?
[End]
– 83 –
6.5 IOC Card Replacement Procedure
IOC card (option) is mounted on the front side of SV8500 server. One card provides four
ports of serial interface. During IOC card replacement, all pieces of equipment (i.e. ATTENTION
Contents
PCPro, SMDR, MCI) that are connected to the IOC card cannot be used. A maximum of Static Sensitive
Handling
two IOC cards can be used in the system.
WARNING During IOC card replacement, all pieces of equipment that are connected to the IOC card
cannot be used.
CPU card #1 EMA card IOC cards

(option)
IOC card
CPU card #0 IOC card
to PIR/TSWR
EXB0 EXB1
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
IOC
IOC
#0 #1 #2 #3
PCPro, SMDR, MCI, printer, etc.
– 84 –
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn on MBR key (left side of SW00) on the IOC card to be replaced.
Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 CONN

MBR AUX SD RD
OPE 1
IOC card ALM 0
DR ER
RS CD
SW00
Set this key (MBR) upper position (1).
The OPE lamp on the card changes as follows:
• OPE lamp starts flashing

• OPE lamp goes off
Note: During IOC card replacement, the system does not send the text data (i.e. SMDR data) to the connected
equipment. The text data is temporarily stored in the buffer memory of the system, and it is automatically
sent to the equipment when the replaced IOC card is placed in operation.
STEP 2 Disconnect the IOC cable (SV 4PORT CA-A) from the front connector.

MBR AUX SD RD
IOC card OPE 1 DR ER
ALM 0
RS CD
SW00
IOC cable
(SV 4PORT CA-A)
STEP 3 Loose the right side screw and then remove the cable support bracket.
• To remove the bracket, slide it to the left and pull it toward you.

loosen this screw
MBR AUX SD RD
OPE 1 DR ER
IOC card ALM

SW00
0
RS CD
cable support bracket
– 85 –
STEP 4 Loosen the left side screw.
STEP 5 Pull the IOC card slowly toward you to remove from the system.
STEP 6 On the new IOC card, set the switches exactly same as those of the old IOC card.
Note: IOC card has S2 switch (4 - DIP switch).
STEP 7 Turn on MBR key (left side of SW00) on the new IOC card.
• Set MBR key upper position (1).
STEP 8 Insert the new IOC card by placing it on the slots of the server, and then securely insert into the
STEP 9 Fasten the IOC card by tightening the two screws.
STEP 10 Insert the cable support bracket.
STEP 11 Connect the IOC cable (SV 4PORT CA-A) to CONN connector again.
STEP 12 Turn off MBR key (left side of SW00) on the IOC card.
• Set MBR key down position (0).
STEP 13 Make sure the following.
• OPE lamp starts flashing (IOC card is initialized)
Note: If OPE lamp does not start flashing, check the following.
- IOC card is securely inserted into the main unit?
- The switch setting of the new IOC card is the same as that of old card?
STEP 14 Make sure equipment that is connected to the new card operating normally.
Note: If it is not operating normally, make sure the IOC cable is securely inserted into the system.
– 86 –
7. FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
The section explains how to replace a FAN that is accommodated in the system cooling FAN
module. A FAN can be replaced while the system is in operation. Three units of FAN are ac- ATTENTION
Contents
commodated as follows. Note that the figure shows a DC-powered model as an example. Static Sensitive
Handling
Accommodating Location of FANs (Rear Side)
! 警告 WARNING ・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・ MP -48V -48VR
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ALM IN (COMMON)
･･･････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･････････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ PACT
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･･････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･････････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
! 警告 WARNING ・・・・・・・・・・
System cooling FAN ・・・・・・・・

MP -48V -48VR
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ ALM IN (COMMON)
・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･･････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･････････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ PACT
・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･･････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･････････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
･･････････････････・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・
Note: If cooling FAN is faulty, temperature in the system may rise, which might cause some serious damage
to system operations. For this reason, we recommend you to replace FAN at least every five years,
whether any failure is found or not.
7.1 Replacement Procedure
STEP 1 If a FAN is faulty, identify the FAN by using PCPro. When this is periodical FAN replacement,
this identification is not necessary.
STEP 2 Loosen the left side screw on the FAN module by using a Phillips screw driver.
System cooling FAN

!
Module
・・・
・・・
・・・
・
・・・
・・・
・・
・・・
・・・
MP
ALM -48V
IN -48V
(CO R
MM
ON)
・・・
・・・
・・・
・
・・・
・・・
・・
・・・
・・・
MP
ALM -48V
IN -48V
(CO R
MM
ON)
Phillips screw driver
– 87 –
STEP 3 Remove the FAN cover.
!
PWR cable
・・・
・・・
・・・
・
・・・
・・・
・・
・・・
・・・
MP
ALM -48V
IN -48V
(CO R
MM
ON)
・・・
・・・
・・・
・
・・・
・・・
・・
・・・
・・・
MP
ALM -48V
IN -48V
(CO R
FAN cover MM
ON)
STEP 4 Disconnect the PWR cable of the FAN to be replaced from the connector. When the FAN is op-
erating, this will stop the FAN.
STEP 5 Remove the two screws from the FAN to be replaced.
– 88 –
・・・
・・・
・・
・・
・・・
・・・
・・
・・・・
・・
MP
ALM -48V
IN -48V
(CO R
MM
ON)
・・・
・・・
・・
・・
・・・
・・・
・・
・・・・
・・
MP
ALM -48V
IN -48V
(CO R
MM
ON)
FAN to be replaced
STEP 6 Fasten the new FAN with the two screws.
STEP 7 Connect the PWR cables to the connector. This will starts the FAN.
STEP 8 Repeat the steps explained above again for the remaining FANs as needed.
Note: When replacing two or three FANs while the system is in operation, if you attempt to replace multiple
FANs at a time, the chassis might be heated up. For this reason, when replacing multiple FANs, be sure
to replace them one by one.
7.2 Test Procedure After the Replacement
STEP 1 Check to see if the replaced FANs are operating normally.
• All FANs are operating normally?
STEP 2 If any FAN is not operating, check the PWR cable of the FAN.
STEP 3 Attach the FAN cover again.
– 89 –
8. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES
Although the system is maintenance free, maintenance technicians occasionally may confront a situation in
which they have to manually control the system. This section describes system control procedures focusing on
the following items.
• How to Change over CPU Card

• How to Control Switching Block
• Manual Changeover of Speech Path System
• Manual Changeover of PLO
8.1 Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO
8.1.1 General
This section explains the system operations that are necessary for changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO.
Before performing these operations, see Figure 2-6 through Figure 2-9 to obtain general understanding
on the system configuration.
– 90 –
<1-IMG>
CPU Card Changeover: The ACT/STBY of CPU card can be changed by the CMOD command or
operating the MBR key on the CPU card front panel.
Speech Path Changeover: The ACT/STBY of speech path system (TSW) can be changed over by the
CMOD command or operating the TSW MBR key on the active TSW cir-
cuit card. When the TSW is changed over, all MUX cards in the system are
also changed over.
PLO Changeover: PLO is included in the TSW. To change the ACT/STBY of PLO, operate
PLO MBR key on the PLO active TSW card.
Figure 2-6 Switching Network General Block Diagram (1-IMG)
[PIR]
IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
Note 2:
MUX MUX MUX MUX
TSW 0 TSW 1 Note 3:

(PLO 0) (PLO 1)
TSW: PH-SW10-A MUX: PH-PC36

[SV8500 Server]
EXB0 EXB1 Note 1:
CPU0 CPU1 Note 4:

EMA
Note 1: When CPU changes over, EXB will also change over.
Note 2: When TSW changes over, all the speech path including MUX cards also change over.
Note 3: TSW has a MBR key (Make Busy Request). System changeover is available also by this key.
Note 4: System changeover is available by the MBR key on the front of the CPU card in ACT state.
– 91 –
<4-IMG>
CPU Card Changeover: The ACT/STBY of CPU card can be changed by the CMOD command or
operating the MBR key on the CPU card front panel.
Speech Path Changeover: The ACT/STBY of speech path system (TSW) can be changed over by the
CMOD command or operating the MBR key on the active GT circuit card.
When the speech path is changed over, all TSW, DLKC, MUX cards are
also changed over.
PLO Changeover: To change the ACT/STBY of PLO, operate MB key on active PLO card.
Figure 2-7 Switching Network General Block Diagram (4-IMG)
[PIR] IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 2 IMG 3
Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX MUX

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0 DLKC 1
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
Note 2:
GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server] EXB0 EXB1 Note 1:
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
Note 3:
Note 1: When CPU changes over, EXB will also change over.
Note 2: When GT changes over, all the speech path including DLKC/TSW/MUX cards will change over.
Note 3: The system changeover is available by the MBR key on the front of the CPU card in ACT state.
– 92 –
8.1.2 How to Check LED
To determine whether the system is in normal operation or not, maintenance personnel can check LED
lamps. The following shows a sample of LED indications when the system is in normal operation. Note
that the sample assumes that the system is operating by CPU #0, TSW #0, and PLO #0.
<1-IMG>.
How To Judge ACT/STBY of Each Block (1-IMG)
Block Card LED Name (Color) State Description Remarks
ON ACT ACT (SYS0) is ON: CPU 0 is ACT Note
CPU EMA Card ACT (Green)
OFF STBY ACT (SYS1) is ON: CPU 1 is ACT
ON ACT ACT/STBY of TSW and MUX cards always switch

TSW ACT (Green) over in combination when speech path is provided in
Speech OFF STBY
dual configuration.
Path ON ACT
TSW MUX ACT (Green)
OFF STBY
ON ACT TSW includes PLO function. However, TSW and
PLO PLO ACT (Green) PLO switch over independently.
OFF STBY
Note: If both ACT lamps (SYS0 and SYS1) light green because of reasons such as ACT-CPU failure, the system
whose LINK lamp is lighting green is ACT side.
– 93 –
Figure 2-8 How to Check LEDs (1-IMG)
MUX ACT MUX ACT PIR3
MUX0
MUX1
MUX0
MUX1

MUX0
MUX1
Speech Path
FANU
TSW ACT TSW ACT PIR0
MUX ACT MUX ACT
PLO PLO ACT PLO ACT

TSW0
TSW1
[CPU Card 1] LINK

SYS ACT ALM
PWR ALM SYS1
LOAD SYS0
PWR
ON LINE
CPU
[CPU Card 0]
PWR
LOAD Lamp Status

ON LINE
: ON
BASEU
: Flash
: OFF
Note: LED indications shown above are an example, where system 0 is in ACT system.
– 94 –
To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 2-9, and
then operate the related key.
Note: LED indications cited in Figure 2-9 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can
differ, depending on each system setting.
Accommodati Card (Slot LED Name Descri
Block State Remark
on Number) (Color) ption
ACT lamp ON ACT ACT (SYS0) is ON: CPU 0 is ACT Note
CPU SV8500 Server EMA Card
(Green) OFF STBY ACT (SYS1) is ON: CPU 1 is ACT
GT OPE/MB ON ACT
(04/05) (Green) OFF STBY
TSW TSW ACT ON ACT
TSWR ACT/STBY of GT, TSW, DLKC, and MUX
Speech (06-13) (Green) OFF STBY cards always switch over in combination
Path DLKC OPE/MB ON ACT when speech path is provided in dual
(02/03) (Green) OFF STBY configuration.
MUX MUX ACT ON ACT

PIR
(13/14) (Green) OFF STBY
PLO ACT ON ACT Speech path and PLO switch over
PLO TSWR
(14/15) (Green) OFF STBY independently.
Note: If both ACT lamps (SYS0 and SYS1) light green because of reasons such as ACT-CPU failure, the system
whose LINK lamp is lighting green is ACT side.
The following illustrates the mounting location of each card in TSWR.

Accommodating Location of Cards in TSWR
TSW00
TSW01
TSW02
TSW03
TSW10
TSW11
TSW12
TSW13
DLCK0
DLKC1
PLO0
PLO1
GT0
GT1
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
– 95 –
Figure 2-9 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (4-IMG: IMG2/3)
PIR3 MUX ACT MUX ACT
MUX0
MUX1
Speech Path
MUX0
MUX1
LED Name OPE/MB TSW ACT ACT
TSWR PLO
Speech Path
DLKC0
DLKC1
GT0
GT1
TSW0
TSW0
TSW0
TSW0
TSW1
TSW1
TSW1
TSW1
PLO0
PLO1
TSW0 TSW1
MUX0
MUX1
[CPU Card 1] LINK
SYS ACT ALM
PWR ALM SYS1 FANU
LOAD SYS0
CPU
ON LINE
PWR PIR0 MUX ACT MUX ACT
[CPU Card 0] [EMA Card]

MUX0
MUX1
PWR
LOAD
ON LINE
BASEU BASEU
Lamp Status : ON : Flash : OFF
– 96 –
8.1.3 How to Change over CPU Card
CPU card, when it is provided in a dual configuration, can be switched over by

one of the operations shown in the table below. When the system of CPU is
ATTENTION
changed over, the ACT/STBY of GT (in TSWR) is also changed over (4-IMG) Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
.
TYPE OPERATIONS REMARKS
(a) Changeover by CMOD Use CMOD command.
Turn off (downward) MBR key (MODE switch - 4) on the ACT CPU
(b) Changeover by key operation
card. After a few seconds, return it to the previous position.
Note 1: While the changeover of the CPU card is in progress, any call attempt is rejected. Already established
calls, however, will not be affected.
(a) CPU Changeover by CMOD Command
See CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands for more details.

(b) CPU Changeover by Key Operation
To change over the ACT/STBY of CPU card, CMOD command is normally used. However, if the com-
mand cannot be used for some reason, do this changeover by the key operation.
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, applying
extreme care.
[Start]
Replacement procedure explained here assumes that the system is operating as follows:
• CPU card (#0) is placed in ACT mode

• CPU card (#1) is placed in STBY mode
Therefore, in the following explanation, replace #1 with #0 as needed when performing this procedure on
the actual system.
– 97 –
STEP 1 Make sure which CPU card is placed in ACT mode by checking lamp ACT lamp on the EMA
card. When CPU card #0 is active, SYS0 - ACT lights green on the EMA card.
Figure 2-10 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (when #0 is ACT)
ACT lamp (SYS1: CPU#1)
MB SYS SYS
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1 ON
1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2 0
SWO0 SWO1
STEP 2 Check the mate CPU card (#1 in this example) is operating normally.
• PWR lamp lights green on the CPU card?

• ON LINE lamp light green on the CPU card?
• ALM lamp is off on the CPU card?
STBY:
PWR lamp LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
3 1
CF
PWR
4 2
LOAD 1 2 3 4
ON
ON CONSOLE LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
LINE MODE USB
ON LINE lamp
ACT:
3 1
CF
PWR
4 2
LOAD 1 2 3 4
ON
LINE MODE USB
WARNING The system changeover of CPU can be performed only when the mate CPU is available.
STEP 3 Set the MBR key to ON (downward) on the active CPU card. A few seconds later, return the
MBR key to OFF (upward). System changeover starts automatically. The ACT lamp will change
as follows on the CPU card.
• MBR key operation

• Both ACT lamps start flashing for few seconds on the EMA card.
• ACT lamp of the mate CPU card lights green on the EMA card.
– 98 –
Figure 2-11 CPU Changeover by MBR Key
3 1
PWR
4 2
STBY:
LOAD
ON LINE SPEED LINE SPEED
LINE

changeover
3 1
ACT:
PWR
MODE switch
CF -4
4 2
LOAD 1 2 3 4
ON
LINE MODE USB
[1] ON (downward) 1 2 3 4
ON
MODE ON
a few seconds later....

OFF
[2] OFF (upward)

4 1 2 3
ON
MODE
Note: If the MBR (MODE switch - 4) key remains in the UP position, the CPU card stays in make-busy state.
Be sure to return the key to the DOWN position, except in special circumstances.
STEP 4 Make sure that changeover is successful by checking ACT lamp.
• Another ACT lamp should light green (SYS1 ACT lamp in this example)
Figure 2-12 ACT Lamp Indication on CPU card
MB SYS SYS
PWR ALM INIT
SYS 1 ON
1
SYS 0 1 2 1 2 0
SWO0 SWO1
STEP 5 Analyze the displayed system messages.
After the above steps are performed, the system outputs system messages [7-C] and [7-D].
Confirm that no errors occurred during the CPU changeover process.
– 99 –
8.1.4 How to Control Switching Block
This section explains how to control switching block, which consists of the follow-
ing cards:
ATTENTION
Contents
• TSW (1-IMG: PH-SW10-A, etc. 4-IMG: PH-SW12) Static Sensitive
Handling
• MUX (PH-PC36) Precautions Required
• DLKC (PH-PC20 for 4-IMG only)

• PLO (PH-CK16-D, etc for 4-IMG only)
Perform the required system changeover by using the CMOD command or by operating the related key on
the GT/PLO card. Refer to the tables below.
Changeover of Switching Block (1-IMG)
- TSW ACT lamp goes off on the TSW card that
CMOD was originally placed in ACT mode.
Use CMOD command (See CHAPTER 7).
(recommended) - TSW ACT lamp lights green on the TSW card that
was originally placed in STBY mode.
-TSW ACT lamp lights red and MUX ACT lamp
goes off on the TSW card.
- Set TSW MBR key upward on the TSW that is placed in ACT.
Key Operation -TSW ACT lamp goes off.
- Return TSW MBR key downward on the TSW.
- TSW ACT lamp lights green on the TSW card that
WARNING Be sure to use “TSW MBR” key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If “TSW MB” key is operated
before operating “TSW MBR” key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During
this initialization, all channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active

- TSW ACT lamp goes off on the TSW card that was originally placed
in ACT mode. OPE lamp also goes off on DLKC card that was original-
CMOD ly placed in ACT mode.
Use CMOD command (See CHAPTER 7).
(recommended) - TSW ACT lamp lights green on the TSW card that was originally
placed in STBY mode. OPE lamp also lights green on DLKC card that
- TSW ACT lamp goes off on the TSW card that was originally placed
in ACT mode. OPE lamp also goes off on DLKC card that was original-
- Set MBR key upward on the ACT GT. ly placed in ACT mode.
Key Operations
- Return MBR key downward on the GT. - TSW ACT lamp lights green on the TSW card that was originally
placed in STBY mode. OPE lamp also lights green on DLKC card that
WARNING Be sure to use “MBR” key on the ACT GT card. If “MB” key is operated before operating
“MBR” key on the ACT GT card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all channels
that are related to this card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
– 100 –
8.1.5 Manual Changeover of Speech Path System
Speech path system can be switched over by using the CMOD command from PCPro. If the command
cannot be used for some reason, do this procedure.
1-IMG
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, applying
extreme care.
• Operation is required on the following cards:

Target Cards for Manual System Changeover of Speech Path (1-IMG)
SLOT
MODULE CIRCUIT CARD TARGET CARD LOCATION
NUMBER
TSW
13
(PH-SW10-A, etc.) FANU
13 14
TSW1
TSW0
PIR0
PIR0
TSW
14
(PH-SW10-A, etc)
SV8500 Server
– 101 –
STEP 1 Make sure which TSW card is currently placed in ACT mode.
When TSW is active, TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card lights green. When the TSW ACT lamp
is off, the TSW card is in STBY mode.
Figure 2-13 When TSW #0 is ACT side (1-IMG)
TSW ACT TSW ACT
TSW:ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT TSW:STBY

PLO ACT PLO ACT
MB MB
TSW MBR TSW MBR
PLO MBR PLO MBR
Meaning ON OFF
slot13 slot14
WARNING The changeover of TSW can be performed only when the mate TSW is in STBY mode. Do
not attempt the changeover, if the mate TSW is closed.
STEP 2 Set TSW MBR key upward on the TSW-ACT-TSW card.
STEP 3 Make sure that the TSW ACT lamp starts to light green on the mate TSW card. A few seconds
will be required before this happens.
• active TSW: TSW ACT and MUX ACT lamps go off

• mate TSW: TSW ACT and MUX ACT lamps light green
– 102 –
STEP 4 Return TSW MBR key downward on the TSW that was placed in ACT.
ACT STBY STBY ACT
Make sure that
TSW ACT lights green
on the mate TSW.
TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT
MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT
PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT
MB MB MB MB MB MB
TSW MBR TSW MBR TSW MBR TSW MBR Return the key. 㪖 TSW MBR TSW MBR
PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR
TSW MBR to Upward TSW MBR to Downward
slot13 slot14 slot13 slot14 slot13 slot14
Note: If the MBR key remains in the UP position, the TSW card stays in make-busy state. Be sure to return the
key to the DOWN position, except in special circumstances.
Note: PLO can be switched over by PLO MBR key. For this reason, TSW changeover does not affect that of
PLO.
WARNING Be sure to use “TSW MBR” key on the TSW-ACT TSW card. If “TSW MB” key is operated
before operating “TSW MBR” key on the TSW-ACT TSW card, the card will be reset. During
this initialization, all channels on the card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active
STEP 5 Make test calls to see that the TSW card is operating normally.
STEP 6 Analyze system messages.
• When TSW ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-E, 7-F, and 1-T will be issued.
– 103 –
[4-IMG]
To changeover the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, the CMOD command is normally used.
However, if the command cannot be used, use the key operations listed below.
ACT/STBY of the Speech Path System can be changed over via the MBR key on the GT (PH-GT09)
card. Because each GT (GT 0 and GT 1) can control both the Speech Path System 0 and 1, perform the
key operation on the active GT card, not on the card in STBY mode.
By changing over the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, all the related systems, such as TDSW,
DLKC, and MUX, are totally switched over.
Figure 2-14 System Block Diagram (Switching Network for Speech Path System)
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0 DLKC 1
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1 Note 1
Note 1 GT 0
[TSWR]
[SV8500 Server] EXB0 EXB1
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
Note 1: When turning on and off the MBR key on the GT PKG, all the speech path (TSW/INT, DLKC, MUX)
will also be changed over.
– 104 –
• Operation is required on the following cards:

Target Cards for Manual System Changeover of Speech Path (4-IMG)
SLOT
NUMBER
FANU
04 05
GT1
GT0
TSWR
TSWR 04/05 GT (PH-GT09)
SV8500 Server
STEP 1 Make sure which speech path system is currently placed in ACT mode.
• The following shows lamp indications on DLKC/TSW/MUX cards that are placed in ACT mode.
Figure 2-15 Lamp Indication of TSW/DLKC/MUX that are in ACT Mode
DLKC (PH-PC20) TSW (PH-SW12) MUX (PH-PC36) Meaning ON OFF
OPE/MB TSW ACT MUX ACT
MB MB MB
TSW MBR
DLKC:ACT TSW:ACT MUX:ACT
Note: Check all cards that are related to speech path system such as TSW cards and MUX cards.
WARNING The ACT/STBY of Speech Path System can be changed over only when the mate system is
in STBY mode. Do not attempt the changeover if the mate Speech Path System is closed.
– 105 –
• The following shows lamp indications on DLKC/TSW/MUX cards that are placed in STBY mode.
Figure 2-16 Lamp Indication of TSW/DLKC/MUX that are in STBY Mode
DLKC (PH-PC20) TSW (PH-SW12) MUX (PH-PC36) Meaning ON OFF
OPE/MB TSW ACT MUX ACT
MB MB MB
TSW MBR
DLKC:STBY TSW:STBY MUX:STBY
Note: Check all cards that are related to speech path system such as TSW cards and MUX cards.
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys with extreme
care.
STEP 2 Flip the MBR key on the active GT card. Refer to Figure 2-17.
Figure 2-17 Speech Path System Changeover via Active GT MBR Key
GT (PH-GT09)
OPE/MB OPE/MB OPE/MB
MB MB MB
MBR MBR MBR

(1) Upward (2) Downward
– 106 –
Note: If the MBR or MB key is set to upward, the GT card is placed in make-busy status. Return the key to the
original position (downward).
WARNING Be sure to use “MBR” key on the ACT GT card. If “MB” key is operated before operating
“MBR” key on the ACT GT card, the card will be reset. During this initialization, all channels
that are related to this card will be placed in MB status, disconnecting all active calls.
STEP 3 Confirm the changed lamp indications.
• See the figure below to check the lamp indications.

Figure 2-18 LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover
Meaning ON OFF
Before After
DLKC TSW MUX DLKC TSW MUX
OPE/MB TSW ACT MUX ACT OPE/MB TSW ACT MUX ACT
MB MB MB MB MB MB
TSW MBR TSW MBR
STEP 4 Make test calls to see that the TSW card is operating normally.
• When TSW ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-E, 7-F, and 1-T will be issued.
– 107 –
8.1.6 Manual Changeover of PLO
This section explains how to changeover Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) card, which can be switched over
independently of Speech Path System.
Changeover of PLO (1-IMG)

- Set PLO MBR key upward on the TSW
whose PLO is placed in ACT.
- PLO ACT lamp goes off when PLO MBR key is set up-
- Make sure that PLO ACT lamp goes off on
ward on the TSW whose PLO is placed in ACT.
Changeover by key operation the card, and PLO ACT lamp lights green on
- PLO ACT lamp lights green on the mate PLO-STBY-
the mate PLO-STBY-TSW card.
TSW card.
- Return TSW MBR key downward on the
key-operated-TSW card.
care.
WARNING Voice calls are not be affected by PLO changeover. However, bit errors may occur on data
lines.
Target Cards for Manual System Changeover of PLO (1-IMG)

SLOT
NUMBER
TSW
13
(PH-SW10-A, etc.) FANU
13 14
TSW1
TSW0
PIR0
PIR0
TSW
14
(PH-SW10-A, etc)
SV8500 Server
STEP 1 Make sure which PLO is currently placed in ACT mode.
When PLO is active, PLO ACT lamp on the TSW circuit card lights green. If PLO ACT lamp
is off, the PLO is in STBY mode.
– 108 –
STEP 2 Set PLO MBR key upward on the PLO-ACT-TSW.
STEP 3 Make sure that PLO ACT lamp lights green on the mate TSW.
• PLO-ACT-TSW: PLO ACT lamp goes off

• mate TSW: PLO ACT lamp lights green
STEP 4 Return the PLO MBR key downward on the key-operated TSW card.
ACT ST-BY ST-BY ACT
Make sure that
PLO ACT lights green
on the mate TSW.
TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT TSW ACT
MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT MUX ACT
PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT PLO ACT
MB MB MB MB MB MB
TSW MBR TSW MBR TSW MBR TSW MBR TSW MBR TSW MBR
Return the key. 㪖
PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR PLO MBR
PLO MBR to Upward PLO MBR to Downward

Note: Be sure to return the PLO MBR key to down position, except in special circumstances.
Note: PLO changeover does not affect the ACT/STBY of TSW.
• When PLO ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-U, 7-V will be issued.
– 109 –
PLO can be switched over independently of Speech Path System.

- Set MB key upward on the ACT PLO card. - OPE lamp goes off when MB key is set upward on the
Changeover by key opera-
- Make sure that ACT lamp goes off on the card. PLO card.
tion
- Return MB key downward on the card. Note - OPE lamp lights green on the mate PLO card.
Note: When operating MB key, ten seconds interval is required between MB key ON and OFF.
care.
WARNING Voice calls are not be affected by PLO changeover. However, bit errors may occur on data
lines.
Target Cards for Manual System Changeover of PLO (4-IMG)

SLOT
NUMBER
FANU
14 15
TSWR
PLO1
PLO0
PLO
TSWR 14/15
(PH-CK16-D, etc)
SV8500 Server
– 110 –
STEP 1 Make sure which PLO is currently placed in ACT mode by checking OPE lamp.
Meaning ON OFF
PLO
OPE OPE
MB MB
PLO ACT PLO STBY
slot14 slot15
STEP 2 Set PLO MB key upward on the ACT PLO card.

STEP 3 Make sure the following.
• active PLO: OPE lamp goes off
• mate PLO: OPE lamp lights green.
STEP 4 Return the MB key downward on the PLO card. Note:

Note: When operating MB key, ten seconds interval is required between MB key ON and OFF.
WARNING The changeover of PLO system can be done only when the mate PLO is in STBY mode. Do
not attempt the changeover if the mate PLO is closed.
ACT ST-BY ST-BY ACT
ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT ACT
MB MB MB MB MB MB
STEP 5 Analyze the displayed system messages.
• When PLO ACT/STBY is changed, system Messages 7-U, 7-V will be issued.
– 111 –
9. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
To obtain the value of common equipment usage, the system provides traffic measurement feature. It can
improve the system efficiency.
9.1 Kind of Traffic Measurement
9.1.1 Description of Traffic Measurement
The kinds of traffic measurements are shown below.

Table 2-1 Traffic Measurement Types
KIND OF
TYPE MEASUREMENT DESCRIPTION
1 Terminal Traffic Measurement of traffic on a per LENS basis, and measurement of the total
Note 1 Measurement Note 2 traffic on a PIR basis.
2 Route Traffic Measurement of traffic on a per route basis.
Note 1 Measurement
3 Station Peg Count Measurement of the number of outgoing connections, intra-office calls,
Note 1 outgoing C.O. line calls, TIE line calls, etc. originated by each station.
Note 6
4 ATTCON Peg Count Measurement of the number of each type of call handled at the ATTCON/
Note 1 DESKCON.
Note 6
Note 6
5 Route Peg Count Measurement of the number of various types of call connections on a per
Note 1 route basis.
Measurement of the number of times the following services are operated:
Call Hold Speed Calling - System
Call Back Speed Calling - Station
Executive Right of Way Off-Hook Outgoing Trunk Queuing
6 Service Peg Count Call Waiting Outgoing Trunk Queuing
Note 6 Call Pickup - Group Consultation Hold - All Call
Call Pickup - Direct Call Transfer - All Calls
Call Forwarding - All Calls Three-Way Calling
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
8 UCD Route Peg Count Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls, and
abandoned calls handled at UCD Groups on a per route basis.
9 UCD Group Peg Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls and
Count abandoned calls on a UCD Group basis.
10 UCD Station Peg Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls and
Count abandoned calls for each station on a UCD Group basis.
15 ATT Answer Peg Measurement of the number of answered calls handled by each attendant.
Note 3 Count
Note 6
18 Connection Route Peg Measurement of the number of various type of call connection on a
Count connection route basis.
19 Connection Route Measurement of traffic on a connection route basis.
Traffic
20 IP Service Peg Count The total number of call origination/termination via FCCS Networking via
IP and CCIS Networking via IP, on a Node-to-Node basis. Note 3
21 IP Service Traffic Measurement of IP service-related traffic on a Node-to-Node basis (IP
Measurement service: FCCS Networking via IP, CCIS Networking via IP). Note 3
– 112 –
Table 2-1 Traffic Measurement Types
KIND OF
TYPE DESCRIPTION
MEASUREMENT
22 SIP Service Peg Count Measurement of the number of call originations, completed call origina-
tions, call terminations, answered calls, unanswered calls, handover
attempt, completed handover, registration request, succeeded Digest
Authentication, failed Digest Authentication, all speech channels in busy
state, and failed Keep Alive connection for SIP terminals in entire system
and per SIP Server ID.
Note 1: These kinds of traffic measurement can be saved on the HD of the PCPro.
Note 2: Terminal traffic measurement is not available for LENS of IP terminal and virtual LENS of PS/WLAN
Handset.
Note 3: ATT Answer Peg Count is available for the following Attendant Incoming Calls. Note that the Route
Class Data (CDN 6: TCL) of the Incoming Route must be 1 (=DDD Line)/2 (=FX Line).
• Ringdown
• LDN Call via ISDN/MFC Line.

Furthermore, there are several conditions described below.
(a) The call terminated to the Attendant on the ground from ISDN trunk when Called Number and Sub
Address cannot be received.
(b) In the case of following Incoming Call from ISDN/MFC line to Attendant Console, these services are
not available.
• Call Forwarding-Busy Line/All Calls/Don’t Answer to Attendant Console.
• Call Forwarding to Attendant Console by Vacant number.
• Incoming Call to Attendant Console with All Attendant Access from trunk.
• Incoming Call to Attendant Console with Individual Attendant Access.
Note 4: The word “Node” here refers to (1) self-SV8500 and (2) distant SV8500 on the other connected side.
When FCCS Networking via IP/CCIS Networking via IP is used, Node stands for the self-SV8500 and
distant SV8500.
Note 5: Assign the largest value of Number of Tenants (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 8) in all nodes to activate the
traffic measurement order by ATRFN command. Assign “FF Hex” for MDATA.
Note 6: Assign the largest value of Number of Attendant Consoles (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 9) in all nodes to
activate the traffic measurement order by ATRFN command. Assign “FF Hex” for MDATA.
– 113 –
Listup Report for Each Traffic Measurement
The following shows listup report for each Traffic Measurement.
(1) Terminal Traffic Measurement

The following shows Terminal Traffic Measurement Listup Report and description of symbols in the re-
port.
Page (UP) Page (Down) Save Text File
[LOCALHOST::DTFA] 10, 27, 2005

TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
* Terminal Traffic Data (DTF101) *

Start Time: 10/27 00:01
End Time: 10/27 12:00
Traffic for LENS
ModuleGroup Unit Group Type Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7
Level 0 Level 1
Traffic Level
Level 2
for3 LENS
0 0 1 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 2 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 3 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 4 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 5 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 6 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
1 0 13 0 7 9 CCS 1 09252.000 3 09215.859 6 09179.718 0 0.9143.5766 09107.435
0 09071.294
1 09035.153
5 08999.012
0
0 0 8 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 9 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
0 0 10 CCS 09252.000 09215.859 09179.718 0.9143.576 09107.435 09071.294 09035.153 08999.012
Note: The traffic data on the above report is an example.
• Module Group : Module Group data for LENS

• Unit : Unit data for LENS
• Group : Group data for LENS
• Level 0 - Level 7 : Level data for LENS
• Type : Unit Type of Traffic Measurement
– 114 –
(2) Route Traffic Measurement

The following shows Route Traffic Measurement Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
* Route Traffic Data (DTF102) *

Start Time: 10/27 01:01
End Time: 10/27 23:59
Traffic for Route
Route Number of Trunks Type Traffic Data
4 3 Erlang 2.976
5 1 Erlang 0.127
6 1 Erlang 0.987
7 20 Erlang 14.59
8 1 Erlang 12.344
9 6 Erlang 50.322
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
• Route : Route Number

• Number of Trunks : Number of Trunks
• Traffic Data : Traffic Data measured
– 115 –
(3) Station Peg Count

The following shows Station Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
[LOCALHOST::DTFA] TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT 10, 27, 2005
* Display of Station Peg Count Data (DTF103) *

Start Time: 10/27 21:30
End Time: 10/27 22:00
Tenant Originator Sta to Sta Outgoing Other Sta to Sta Incoming Ringing No Answer Answer No Answer Other
Outgoing Outgoing Incoming 30 Seconds Incoming
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
(a) Outgoing Calls:

Originator
Sta to Sta Outgoing Outgoing Other Outgoing
• Originator : The number of times a station went off-hook for call origination.
• Sta to Sta Outgoing : The number of times a station went off-hook and dialed a station num-
ber, a dead number or an attendant number.
Call originations are counted even if they encounter line busy. Also
counted when a station placing a call on hold dials a station number,
dead number or an attendant number.
Transferred call to another station when the station is engaged in a call,
calling another station via Attendant, call origination by Step Call are
not counted here.
– 116 –
• Outgoing : The number of times a station went off-hook and attempted outgoing
C.O. lines or tie line calls.
Call originations through C.O. lines or tie line are counted when a sta-
tion placing a call on hold dials a station number, dead number or an
attendant number.
Transferred call to another station when the station is engaged in a call,
calling another station via Attendant through C.O. lines or tie lines are
not counted here.
• Other Outgoing : The number obtained by subtracting the number of “Sta to Sta Outgo-
ing” and the number of “Outgoing” from “Originator”.
Examples counted as “Other Outgoing” calls are:
-When a call originator lifted the handset but did not dial any digits.
-When a call originator started dialing but replaced the handset before
dialing was completed.
(b) Incoming Calls:
Sta to Sta Incoming Incoming
*Number of attempts to station
Ringing Other Incoming

*Calls encounter line busy or
No Answer 30 Seconds
Calls transferred to Attendant
Answer
*Number of answer in 30 seconds No Answer
• Sta to Sta Incoming : The number of Station to Station call terminations

• Incoming : The number of station calls attempted by direct dialing (not via Atten-
dant) from C.O. lines or tie lines.
• Ringing : The number of calls terminating to stations included in the sum of “Sta
to Sta Incoming” and “Incoming” above.
• No Answer 30 Seconds : The number of calls that are not answered within 30 seconds in the
“Ringing”. (Calls answered after 30 seconds have past are not counted
here.)
• Answer : The number of answered calls in the “Ringing”.
• No Answer : The number of calls that are not answered in the “Ringing”. (The num-
ber obtained by subtracting “Answer” from “Ringing”.)
– 117 –
• Other Incoming : The number obtained by subtracting the number of “Ringing” from the
sum of “Sta to Sta Incoming” and “Incoming”.
Examples counted as “Other Incoming” calls are:
-Calls encounter line busy
-Calls transferred to Attendant
(4) Attendant Peg Count

The following shows Attendant Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report. Symbols
in this report are name of keys on the ATTCON.
* Display of Attendant Peg Count Data (DTF104) *

Start Time: 10/27 16:33
End Time: 10/27 16:40
Tenant 1 * INCOMING *
LDN ATNDor RCL FX WATS CCSA TIE BUSY NANS ICPT SCBorHP
ADM
23 13 1 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
TF DND GST HWC LT Total
0 0 0 0 0 50
• LDN Listed Directory Number (Cen- : The number of call terminations from C.O. to At-
tral Office) tendant.
• ATND Attendant : The number of call terminations from stations to
Attendant.
• ADM Administration Station : The number of call terminations from Administra-
tion Station to Attendant in the hotel system.
• RCL Recall : The number of Recalls from stations to Attendant.
• FX Foreign Exchange : The number of Call terminations from FX Trunks.
Available in North America only.
• WATS Wide Area Telephone Service : The number of call terminations from WATS
Trunks. Available in North America only.
– 118 –
• CCSA Common Channel Switching : Call terminations from CCSA Trunks. Available in
Arrangement North America only.
• TIE Tie Line : Call terminations from tie line to Attendant.
• BUSY Call Forwarding - Busy Line : Forwarded call terminations to Attendant when
originally called station is busy.
• NANS Call Forwarding - Don’t An- : Forwarded call terminations to Attendant when
swer originally called station does not answer.
• ICPT Call Forwarding - Intercept : Forwarded call terminations to Attendant when
originally called station is restricted.
• SCB Special Common Battery : Not used.
• HP House Phone Station : House Phone call terminations to Attendant. This
symbol is used in hotel system.
• TF Inter-Position Transfer : Transferred call terminations to Attendant by IN-
TER-POSITION TRANSFER [I-5].
• DND Do Not Disturb : Transferred call terminations to Attendant when
calls to originally called station are restricted by
DO NOT DISTURB [D-11]. This symbol is used
in hotel system.
• GST Guest Station : Call terminations from Guest Station to Attendant.
This symbol is used in hotel system.
• HWC Howler Call : Call terminations to Attendant when the off-hook
time of Guest Station is beyond the previously as-
signed time. This symbol is used in hotel system.
• LT Long Line Telephone Call : Call terminations to Attendant when the duration
of call of Guest Station is beyond the previously
assigned time. This symbol is used in hotel sys-
tem.
– 119 –
(5) Route Peg Count

The following shows Route Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
* Display of Route Peg Count Data (DTF105) *

Start Time: 10/27 16:34
End Time: 10/27 16:40
Report Type Incoming/Outgoing Trunks Route 1
Attempts Block Established Outgoing Incoming Register Access Attendant
23 3 26 19 6 19 6
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
Station Tandem Others VT(E-CCIS) VT(E-CCIS)
Establishment Establishment
[OUT] [IN]
0 0 0 0 0

.
• Report Type : 1 = Intra Office Trunks

(Route Peg Count Type) 2 = IC/OG Trunks
• Attempts : The number of times that a trunk selection was attempted.
• Block : The number of times that trunk busy was encountered when accessing a
trunk.
• Established : The number of connections to trunks in the counting target office.
• Outgoing : The number of times trunks were accessed. The number does not always
coincide with the number obtained by subtracting “Block” from “At-
tempts”.
• Incoming : The number of call terminations.
• Register Access : The number of actual ORT/IRT register connections. In the case of
Bothway C.O. Trunks (CBWT), the number becomes “0”.
Also when register blocking has occurred, the “Incoming” number and
the “Register Access” number do not always coincide.
• Attendant : The number of incoming calls that directly terminate to the Attendant.
• Station : The number of incoming station to station calls (not via the Attendant
Console).
– 120 –
• Tandem : The number of incoming calls that directly provide tandem connection
(not via the Attendant Console)
• Others : The number obtained by subtracting “Attendant”, “Station” and “Tan-
dem” from “Incoming”. These calls include the following scenarios:
-Incoming calls terminated but released before the line is connected.
-Calls to unused numbers
• VT(E-CCIS) Establish- : The number of call originations through Virtual Tie Line (E-CCIS).
ment [OUT]
• VT(E-CCIS) Establish- : The number of call terminations through Virtual Tie Line (E-CCIS).
ment [IN]
(6) Service Peg Count

The following shows Service Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
* Display of Service Peg Count Data (DTF201) *

Start Time: 10/27 16:21
End Time: 10/2716:25
Tenant 1
Call Hold Call Back Call Back Erow Call Waiting Call Waiting Call Pick Up Direct Call CFA Entry
Cancel Originate Terminate Pick Up
2 3 2 12 0 0 15 2 5
CFA Cancel CFB Entry CFB Cancel CFDA Entry CFDA System Individual Individual TAS Answer
Speed Speed Call
1 13 9 1 3 6 Cancel0 6 Call
Access 0
Access 1Speed Call 5 0
Entry
1 1 0 2 1 12 1 0 0
Off Hook On Hook On Hook Consult Hold Call Transfer Add On
OG Queuing Queuing Queuing Conference
Entry Cancel
0 0 0 0 0 8
• Call Hold : The number of times that the line is on hold with dialing access code
for CALL HOLD [C-6].
• Call Back : The number of times that CALL BACK [C-1] is set to the station with
dialing the access code for CALL BACK.
– 121 –
• Call Back Cancel : The number of times that CALL BACK [C-1] is canceled with dialing
the cancellation access code CALL BACK.
• Erow : The number of times that a station bridges into the busy connection
with dialing access code for EXECUTIVE RIGHT-OF-WAY [E-1].
• Call Waiting Originate : The number of times that CALL WAITING-ORIGINATING [C-31]
is set to the station engaged in connection with dialing the access
code.
• Call Waiting Terminate : The number of times that CALL WAITING-TERMINATING [C-12]
is automatically set to the station engaged in connection.
• Call Pick Up : The number of times that another station in a group for CALL PICK-
UP-GROUP [C-7] answers the call with dialing access code when the
terminated station in the group does not answer the call.
• Direct Call Pick Up : The number of times that another station answers the call with dialing
access code for CALL PICK UP [C-30] + actually call terminated sta-
tion number when the terminated station does not answer the call.
• CFA Entry : The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-
5] is set to the station with dialing the entry access code + target sta-
tion number.
• CFA Cancel : The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS [C-
5] is canceled with dialing the cancellation access code.
• CFB Entry : The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE [C-2]
is set to the station with dialing the entry access code + target station
number.
• CFB Cancel : The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE [C-2]
is canceled with dialing the cancellation access code.
• CFDA Entry : The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER
[C-3] is set to the station with dialing the entry access code + target
station number.
• CFDA Cancel : The number of times that CALL FORWARDING-DON’T ANSWER
[C-3] is canceled with dialing the cancellation access code.
• System Speed Call Access : The number of times that the station performs SPEED CALL AC-
CESS-SYSTEM [S-3] with dialing the access code + Abbreviated
Call Code.
• Individual Speed Call Ac- : The number of times that the station performs SPEED CALL AC-
cess CESS-STATION [S-21] with dialing the access code + Abbreviated
Call Code.
• Individual Speed Call Entry : The number of times that the Primary Station (or Attendant) in a
group for SPEED CALL ACCESS-GROUP [S-23] allocates the out-
going number to each Abbreviated Call Code.
– 122 –
• TAS Answer : The number of times that the station answers incoming external calls
with dialing TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION (TAS) [T-8]
access code (or with pressing Function Key/Answer Key).
• Off Hook OG Queuing : This count service is set when calls from stations providing OFF-
HOOK QUEUING [O-7] encounter all outgoing trunks are busy.
Count begins with the first call origination since trunks become idle.
• On Hook Queuing Entry : The number of times that OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING [O-2] is
set to a station with dialing entry access code when the station en-
counter all outgoing trunks are busy.
• On Hook Queuing Cancel : The number of times that OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING [O-2]
setting is canceled with dialing cancellation access code.
• Consult Hold : The number of times a terminated station transfers a call after going
on-hook and transferred station answers the call.
• Call Transfer : The number of times a terminated station goes on-hook and transfers
a call before transferred station answers the call.
• Add On Conference : The number of times that another party is added to an existing con-
nection (without Attendant assistance) and THREE-PARTY CALL-
ING [T-2] is established.
(7) UCD Route Peg Count

The following shows UCD Route Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
– 123 –
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
* Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data (DTF301) *

Start Time: 10/27 01:01
End Time: 10/27 23:59
Route UCD Group Number Incoming Calls Answered Calls Abandoned Calls
1 1 134 114 20
1 2 256 231 25
5 1 45 42 3
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
• Route : UCD Route Number

• UCD Group Number : UCD Group Number
• Incoming Calls : Number of call terminations
• Answered Calls : Number of answered call terminations
• Abandoned Calls : Number of call terminations disconnected before answered
(8) UCD Group Peg Count

The following shows UCD Group Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
– 124 –
* UCD Group Peg Count Data (DTF302) *

Start Time: 10/27 21:30
End Time: 10/27 22:00
UCD Group Incoming Calls Answered Calls Abandoned Calls
1 124 120 4
2 221 221 0
3 453 453 0
4 67 62 5
5 13 13 0
1 13 96 1 544 3 6 544 0 60 0 1 5 0
7 65 64 1
• UCD Group : UCD Group Number

– 125 –
(9) UCD Station Peg Count

The following shows UCD Station Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
* UCD Station Peg Count Data (DTF303) *

Start Time: 10/27 21:30
End Time: 10/27 22:00
UCD Group Tenant Station Incoming Calls Answered Calls Abandoned Calls
1 1 200 2 2 0
1 1 201 1 1 0
1 1 202 3 3 0
1 1 203 4 4 0
1 1 204 2 2 0
1 13 1 9 11 3 205 6 3 0 6 3 0 1 0 5 0
1 1 206 3 3 0
1 1 207 11 11 0
1 1 208 43 43 0
1 1 209 19 19 0
1 1 210 33 33 0
• UCD Group : UCD Group Number

• Tenant : Tenant Number
• Station : Station Number
– 126 –
(10) ATT Answer Peg Count

The following shows ATT Answer Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
* Attendant Answering Peg Count Data (DTF501) *

Start Time: 10/27 01:01
End Time: 10/27 23:59
Attendant Number Answered within Answered within 10 Answered within Answered calls
0 to 10 seconds to 30 seconds 30 to 60 seconds exceeding 60 seconds
1 0 1 0 0
2 2 0 0 0
3 0 2 1 0
4 1 3 0 0
5 1 3 1 0
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
• Attendant Number : ATTOCON number

• Answered within 0 to 10 seconds : The number of times that Attendant answers a C.O. incom-
ing call within a period of time (0-10 seconds)
• Answered calls exceeding 60 sec- : The number of times that Attendant answers a C.O. incom-
onds ing call after more than 60 seconds have past
– 127 –
(11) Connection Route Peg Count

The following shows Connection Route Peg Count Listup Reports and description of symbols in the report.
* Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data (DTF601)*

Start Time: 10/27 21:30
End Time: 10/27 22:00
C_RT Attempts Block Outgoing Incoming Terminate Tandem Others
4 346 23 187 156 134 16 0

9 167 11 78 64 69 8
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
• C_RT : Connection Route

• Attempts : The number of times that a trunk selection was attempted.
• Block : The number of times that trunk busy was encountered when accessing
a trunk.
• Outgoing : The number of times trunks were accessed. The number does not al-
ways coincide with the number obtained by subtracting “Block” from
“Attempts”.
• Incoming : The number of call terminations.
• Terminate : The number of connected call terminations.
• Tandem : The number of incoming calls that directly provide tandem connection
(not via the Attendant Console)
• Others : The number obtained by subtracting “Terminate” and “Tandem” from
“Incoming”. These calls include the following scenarios:
-Incoming calls terminated but released before the line is connected.
-Calls to unused numbers
– 128 –
(12) Connection Route Traffic

The following shows Connection Route Traffic Count Listup Reports and description of symbols in the re-
port.
* Connectin Route Traffic Data (DTF602) *

Start Time: 10/27 01:01
End Time: 10/27 23:59
C_RT Number of Trunks Type Traffic Data
9 24 Erlang 98.123
12 45 Erlang 19.236
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
• C_RT : Connection Route

• Number of Trunks : Number of Trunks
– 129 –
(13) IP Service Peg Count

The following shows IP Service Peg Count Listup Report and description of symbols in the report.
* Dispaly of IP Service Peg Count Data (DTF701)*

Start Time: 10/27 01:01
End Time: 10/27 23:59
NODE 1 FPC 1 PC - NUMBER 100000000000000000000000
Attempts Block Outgoing Outgoing-Incomplete Outgoing-Incomplete Outgoing-Incomplete Outgoing-Incomplete

1 2 3 Other
255 65535 287454020 287454020 287454019 287454018 287454017

1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
Incoming Incoming-Incomplete Incoming-Incomplete Incoming-Incomplete Incoming-Incomplete

1 2 3 Other
287454021 287454021 287454022 287454023 287454024
(a) Originating Party:
• Attempts : The number of calls attempted

• Block : The number of calls whose origination was blocked
• Outgoing : The number of call originations
• Outgoing-Incomplete 1 : The number of placed call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead
number or invalid number) Note 1
• Outgoing-Incomplete 2 : The number of placed call incompletion (connected party is busy, or in-
coming trunk selection NG) Note 2
• Outgoing-Incomplete 3 : The number of placed call incompletion (No answer from called party)
• Outgoing-Incomplete : The number of placed call incompletion (due to other reason)
Other
(b) Terminating Party:
• Incoming : The number of call terminations
– 130 –
• Incoming-Incomplete 1 : The number of incoming call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead
number or invalid number) Note 1
• Incoming-Incomplete 2 : The number of incoming call incompletion (called party is busy, or in-
coming trunk selection NG) Note 2
• Incoming-Incomplete 3 : The number of incoming call incompletion (incoming call is restricted
by office data) Note 3
• Incoming-Incomplete : The number of incoming call incompletion (due to other reason)
Other
Note 1: Dead number means lack of dialed number, non-existent station number.
Note 2: Incoming trunk selection NG indicates that incoming trunks are all busy or cannot be used for some
reason.
Note 3: The restriction by office data includes incoming call restriction at terminal side and restriction of in-
coming trunk tandem connection.
(14) IP Service Traffic Measurement

The following shows IP Service Traffic Measurement and description of symbols in the report.
* IP Service Traffic Data (DTF702)*

Start Time: 10/27 01:01
End Time: 10/27 23:59
NODE FPC PC NUMBER Traffic Data

1 - 100 100000000000000000000000 301999997.930
100 253 100 - 03220.900
2 3 - 555555555555555555555555 150994943.985
3 - 18383 999999999999999999999999 1549741.982
1 13 9 1 3 6 0 6 0 1 5 0
• NODE : Node Number Allocate to each system within the network.
– 131 –
• FPC : Fusion Point Code (FPC) for FCCS Networking via IP service.
• PC : Point Code (PC) for CCIS Networking via IP service
• NUMBER : Station or Terminal Number
(15) SIP Service Peg Count

The following shows description of symbols in the SIP Service Peg Count Listup Report. Following items
are measured in two ways. One is Peg Count for SIP terminals in entire system “System Entire Peg Count”
and another is SIP terminals per SIP Server ID “Each server peg count (Per SIP server ID)”.
Page (Down) Page (UP)

Save Text File
TRAFFIC MEASUREMENT
* Traffic SIP service Peg Count (DTF801)*
Start Time: 10/27 01:01

End Time: 10/27 23:59
System Entire Peg Count
Sending frequency Sending completion call frequency Arrival frequency

12345 12345 12345
Call no response frequency Arrival no response frequency
12345 12345
Handover demand frequency Handover completion frequency
12345 12345
SIP extension terminal register demand frequency SIP extension terminal digest attestation success frequency
12345 12345
SIP extension terminal digest attestation failure frequency Talk band all speaking frequency
12345 12345
SIP extension terminal cut keep alive failure
12345
Server ID:999
Sending frequency Sending completion call frequency Arrival frequency

12345 12345 12345
Call no response frequency Arrival no response frequency
12345 12345
SIP extension terminal register demand frequency SIP extension terminal digest attestation success frequency
12345 12345
Handover demand frequency Handover completion frequency
12345 12345
SIP extension terminal digest attestation failure frequency Talk band all speaking frequency
12345 12345
SIP extension terminal cut keep alive failure
12345
• Sending frequency : Number of times the call is originated from SIP terminal. Also it in-
cludes the number of times of off-hook operations.
– 132 –
• Sending completion call : Number of times the call originated from the SIP terminal is an-
frequency swered by the destination. Also it includes the number of times the
call is connected to Announcement Trunk.
• Arrival frequency : Number of times the call is terminated to SIP terminal (ringer is
heard).
• Call response frequency : Number of times the terminating call is answered by SIP terminal.
• Arrival no response fre- : Number of times the call directed to SIP terminal ends up unan-
quency swered because of the SIP terminal whose power OFF, out of zone
or no vacancies of bandwidth. Note 1
• Handover demand frequen- : Number of times the SP sends the message to request the handover
cy by WLAN Handset (MH Series) toward TP. Note 2
• Handover completion call : Number of times WLAN Handset (MH Series) completes the han-
frequency dover. Note 2
• SIP extension terminal reg- : Number of times SP accepts REGISTER. Note 3
ister demand frequency
• SIP extension terminal di- : Number of times Digest Attestation by SIP terminal is succeeded
gest attestation success fre- and accepted.
quency
• SIP extension terminal di- : Number of times Digest Attestation by SIP terminal is failed and re-
gest attestation failure fre- jected. Note 4
quency
• Talk band all speaking fre- : Number of situations that all speech channels in the SP are in busy
quency state is occurred. Note 5
• SIP extension terminal cut : Number of times sending and receiving the Keep Alive messages are
keep alive failure failed between the SIP terminal and SP
Note 1: Number of unanswered calls also includes the number of all speech channels in busy state.
Note 2: Handover mentioned here is layer 3 level handover that requires changing IP address.
When the handover is layer 2 level handover, the traffic data is not counted as Handover demand fre-
quency and Handover completion call frequency.
Note 3: In the following cases, the number is not counted as this frequency:
• One acceptance as REGISTER for Digest Attestation success
• When domain assigned to the SIP terminal is different from the domain in the SP domain list
– 133 –
Note 4: When this count is large in number, wrong password may be assigned to either the TP side or SIP ter-
minal side. When the TP side or the SIP terminal side of password is corrected, this situation does not
occur. For more information of TP side password, refer to SIP terminal Accommodation [S-146] in
Data Programming Guide (Windows)-SIP. For SIP terminal side, refer to the operation manual for
each terminal.
Note 5: This is the number of situations recognized as no vacancies in bandwidth at SP. When this count is large
in number, additional vacant speech channels are needed. The speech channels are added by ASSDN/
ASSDL command. Up to 1200 speech channels are provided.
9.2 Operating Procedure for PCPro
(1) Procedure for Set-up and Start

The procedure to set up and start the traffic measurement is as follows:
STEP 1 By using the ASYD/ASYDN command, assign the necessary system data as follows:
When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:

- ASYD
SYS1, INDEX 8 (Number of Tenants) Note 1
SYS1, INDEX 9 (Number of Attendant Consoles) Note 1
SYS1, INDEX 47, b0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang Note 2
SYS1, INDEX 47, b7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service Assign “1.” Note 2
When performing traffic measurement on a network basis (via TCP/IP):

- ASYDN
SYS1, INDEX 8 (Number of Tenants) Note 1
SYS1, INDEX 9 (Number of Attendant Consoles) Note 1
SYS1, INDEX 47, b0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang Note 2
SYS1, INDEX 47, b7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service Assign “1.” Note 2
Note 1: When Station Peg Count, ATTCON Peg Count or ATT Answer Peg Count is performed.
Note 2: When Terminal Traffic Measurement, Route Traffic Measurement or Connection Route Traffic
Measurement is performed.
STEP 2 By using the ATRF/ATRFN command, assign the traffic measurement programs as follows:

- ATRF Note 4
Assign traffic measurement TYPE Note 3, PORT number used, and the output INTERVAL and
Time (HOUR/MINUTE), etc. For more information, see the ATRF command.

- ATRFN Note 4
Time (HOUR/MINUTE), etc. For more information, see the ATRFN command.
Note 3: Select one measurement TYPE at a time. If two or more measurement TYPEs are needed, repeat the
same steps, following the entry of this command.
– 134 –
Note 4: When ATRF/ATRFN Command is assigned to obtain the Traffic data automatically, log-in state must
be maintained continuously on the PCPro.
STEP 3 Terminate all the PCPro commands.
An image of a PCPro Menu is shown in Figure 2-19. Terminate all PCPro commands, and
make sure no command is currently running via the Processes button.
– 135 –
STEP 4 Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation.
Click the Scan New Alarms/Traffic and Collect New Alarms buttons on the PCPro Menu
(confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state). Then, the Traffic Measurement is
activated as programmed.
END
(2) Procedure for Set-up and Start (IP Service Traffic Measurement)
The procedure to set up and start the traffic measurement (related to IP Services) is as follows:
STEP 1 By using the ASYD command, assign the necessary system data as follows:
- ASYD
SYS1, INDEX 8 (Number of Tenants)
SYS1, INDEX 47, b0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang
SYS1, INDEX 47, b7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service Assign “1.”
STEP 2 By using the ANTI command, assign the Node number at each connected side:
- ANTI
Assign Node numbers for self-SV8500 and each connected SV8500.
STEP 3 By using the ATRF command, assign the traffic measurement programs as follows:
- ATRF Note 2
Time (HOUR/MINUTE), etc. Also, be sure to assign START NODE and END NODE.
Note 1: Select one measurement TYPE at a time. If two or more measurement TYPEs are needed, repeat the
same steps, following the entry of this command.
Note 2: When ATRF/ATRFN Command is assigned to obtain the Traffic data automatically, log-in state must
be maintained continuously on the PCPro.
STEP 4 Terminate all the PCPro commands.
An image of SV8500 PCPro Menu is shown in Figure 2-19. Terminate all the PCPro com-
mands, and make sure no commands are currently running via the Processes button.
STEP 5 Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation.
Click the Scan New Alarms/Traffic and Collect New Alarms buttons on the PCPro Menu
(confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state). Then, the Traffic Measurement is
activated as programmed.
END
– 136 –
Figure 2-19 SV8500 PCPro Menu Display Image (Example)
This Figure shows an example of PCPro menu, which should look similar to the following:
Scan New Alarms/Traffic
Collect New Alarms
Command Entry Field Collect New Traffic

Abort Data Collections
View Scan Log

Major Alarm Indicator
Minor Alarm Indicator
Supervisory Message Indicator
Traffic Data Indicator
– 137 –
(3) Data Output - Details on DTFD/DTFDN Command

To obtain the collected traffic data, use the DTFxxx or DTFxxxN command as shown below. The commands
can be activated by your direct log-in operation onto the PCPro, but in normal cases, the commands are
activated automatically at predetermined intervals assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN command.
The newest traffic data can only be obtained by using the DTFD/DTFDN command in the list below. The
traffic measurement program must be assigned by ATRF/ATRFN command to obtain all the traffic data
activated at predetermined intervals.
Each command below corresponds to the Traffic Measurement TYPE assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN
command.
MEASUREMENT “TYPE” COMMAND
FULL COMMAND NAME
(BY ATRF COMMAND) NAME
1 Terminal Traffic DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data
2 Route Traffic DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data
3 Station Peg Count DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data
4 ATTCON Peg Count DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data
5 Route Peg Count DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data
6 Service Peg Count DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data
8 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data
9 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data
10 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303 Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data
15 ATT Answer Peg Count DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data
18 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data
19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data
20 IP Service Peg Count DTF701 Display of IP Service Peg Count Data
21 IP Service Traffic DTF702 Display of IP Service Traffic Data
22 SIP Service Peg Count DTF801 Display of SIP Service Peg Count Data
(BY ATRFN COMMAND)
FULL COMMAND NAME
NAME
1 Terminal Traffic DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for FCCS Network
2 Route Traffic DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network
3 Station Peg Count DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
4 ATTCON Peg Count DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
5 Route Peg Count DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
6 Service Peg Count DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
8 UCD Route Peg Count DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
9 UCD Group Peg Count DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
10 UCD Station Peg Count DTF303N Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
– 138 –

(BY ATRFN COMMAND)
FULL COMMAND NAME
NAME
15 ATT Answer Peg Count DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
18 Connection Route Peg Count DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
19 Connection Route Traffic DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network
Note: For information on the command display images, see Figure 2-20, Figure 2-21, and Figure 2-22.
– 139 –
Figure 2-20 DTFD Command Display Image (Example)
This Figure shows the DTFD command display image (example). The DTFD/DTFDN command should look
similar to this.
Traffic Data Data collecting Log

Check box to specify the Traffic Data TYPE. This area displays the current Traffic
Measurement data, based on the selected
Traffic Data TYPE.
Tool Buttons
• Collect Data
Used to collect the Traffic report with regard to the selected Traffic Data TYPE. The result test is shown in
the Data Collection Log display area.
• Stop
Used to quit the currently performed Traffic Data collection.
• Print Log
Used to print out the text data now displayed in the Data Collection Log area
• View Database
Used to view the whole data (based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE), so far stored in the database. More
details are shown in Figure 2-21.
• Clear Database
Used to delete (clear) the whole data (based on the selected Traffic Data TYPE), so far stored in the database.
• Log Colors
Used to designate/change the text font color of the Data Collection Log display area.
• Exit
Used exit this command. (Note that the database contents are not cleared by pressing this button.)
– 140 –
Figure 2-21 Listup Report Window when View Database is Selected (Example)
This Figure shows a sample image of the Listup Report window for the DTFD/DTFDN command. This window appears by taking
the following operations, and is used to obtain a sequence of Traffic data, so far collected and stored in the database. The window is
also used to save the Traffic data text (now displayed in the window) onto the desired PC directory.
- To activate this window:

1. Designate a specific Traffic Data TYPE out of the DTFD/DTFDN command check boxes. (see Figure 2-20).
2. Press the View Database button on the left-bottom part of the DTFD/DTFDN command (see Figure 2-20).
Display Area
This area displays the details
on the Traffic report, specified
by the “Page (UP)/Page
(DOWN)” buttons.
Shown here is an example of a
certain first page of “Terminal
Traffic Data (DTF101).”
Save Text File

When saving the currently displayed text page, press this button.
Then, a dialog box, as shown in Figure 2-22, appears.
Page (UP)
Page (DOWN)
Any Traffic data, now in the database, can easily be found via these buttons. Select UP or DOWN,
according to the text display pattern: the newest the first, the oldest the last. Note
Note: When this window displays, the first text to appear is the newest file data. This data is derived from a sequence of Traffic
reports. The newest text (in the database) appears on the first page, and the most current previous version on the next
page.
Figure 2-22 Export Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving
If the Save Text File button is selected on the Listup Report window, the dialog box shown below, displays.
(see Figure 2-21 above). If saving the file:
1. Select Character-separated values on the Format

list box.
2. Select Disk file on the Destination list box.
3. Click OK.
After these steps, a new dialog box displays. Enter the saved file name and directory. Complete the data saving by filling
out these necessary items.
– 141 –
(4) Service Conditions (when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP/IP)

a. Each time the system is initialized or data change is requested from the ATRFN command, the
Network-level Data (NDM) for the traffic measurement order is replaced/updated.
b. When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the node-level data for ATRF
command cannot be changed or modified.
c. When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the already assigned data by
the ATRF command is not cleared, but becomes ineffective.
d. When a data transfer error occurs, the following are performed in order:
Traffic measurement is suspended momentarily and system message is displayed (notification of
fault)
Traffic measurement concerning all the remaining data, except for the fault-involved one, is
resumed.
Retry is made repeatedly for the transfer of fault-involved data, until the fault has been eradicated
If the fault has not eradicated by the time of next measurement routine, the data is finally
discarded and the next traffic measurement routine starts
e. When the same individual ATT numbers exist on the network, the traffic measurement concerning the
ATTCON/DESKCON cannot be performed correctly.
(5) Service Conditions (for IP service-related Traffic Measurement)
a. The measurement of Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] and 21 [IP Service Traffic] can be
performed only on a Node-to-Node basis, without consideration of other mediating interface(s).
“Node” refers to:
- self-SV8500 and distant SV8500 (when FCCS Networking via IP/CCIS Networking via IP is used)
b. By designating Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] in the ATRF command, the following
information can be obtained:
<Origination>
- The number of call attempts
- The number of calls whose origination was blocked
- The number of call origination
- The number of placed call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead number or invalid number) Note
1
- The number of placed call incompletion (connected party is busy, or incoming trunk selection NG)
Note 2
- The number of placed call incompletion (No answer from called party)
- The number of placed call incompletion (due to other reason)
<Termination>
- The number of call termination
- The number of incoming call incompletion (due to the dialing of dead number or invalid number)
Note 1
- The number of incoming call incompletion (called party is busy, or incoming trunk selection NG)
Note 2
- The number of incoming call incompletion (incoming call is restricted by office data) Note 3
- The number of incoming call incompletion (due to other reason)
– 142 –
Note 1: Dead number means lack of dialed number, non-existent station number.
Note 2: Incoming trunk selection NG indicates that incoming trunks are all busy or cannot be used for some reason.
Note 3: The restriction by office data includes incoming call restriction at terminal side and restriction of
incoming trunk tandem connection.
c. Either of CCS or Erlang can be selected for Traffic TYPE 21 [IP Service Traffic].
d. For both Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] and 21 [IP Service Traffic], free output interval can
be set in the sphere between 30 and 120 (minutes) by 10 minute increments.
e. For both Traffic TYPE 20 [IP Service Peg Count] and 21 [IP Service Traffic], it is only available via
FCCS/CCIS using the IPTRK circuit card. It is not available with the Peer-to-Peer FCCS and Peer-to-
Peer CCIS network.
– 143 –
10. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR)
Billing information can be managed by connecting Telephony Server and an external computer (SMDR
equipment).
Note: SMDR equipment and its software must be provided by the user.
The System provides the SMDR equipment with the following information:
• Calling Party Information
• Called Party Number
• Call Start Time
• Call End Time
• Call Data
• Authorization Code/Account Code
• Trunk Arrival Time (only for Incoming Call) Note
Note: Available in EU only.
Upon receiving the above information from the System, the SMDR equipment performs editing and manage-
ment of the information and outputs the resulting information. This section explains the information provided
to the SMDR equipment and also explains the method of controlling the interface port between the SMDR
equipment and Telephony Server.
10.1Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment
(1) Transmission Format

As seen in the figure below, the basic information to be transmitted (Transmission Message) is a block
which begins with Start of Text (STX) and ends with End of Text (ETX). When the call ends, the whole
contents of this information is transmitted to the SMDR equipment.
S S U E
T A A TRANSMISSION MESSAGE T
X X
STX: START OF TEXT

ETX: END OF TEST
SA: SYSTEM ADDRESS
UA: UNIT ADDRESS
– 144 –
(2) Transmission Message

One transmission message consists of 128 bytes of data. Each byte represents by ASCII codes the data to
be transmitted (Refer to Table below). The contents of the data to be transmitted vary with the kind of call,
but the first byte is always transmitted by ASCII code K (4B hex.). The second byte to be transmitted is the
data which specifies the kind of call.
Note: If FCCS service is involved, the message can consist of more than 128 byte data.
ASCII Code
ASCII CODE
CHARACTER BINARY DIGIT REMARKS

HEX.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 30 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 31 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
2 32 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
3 33 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
4 34 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
5 35 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1
6 36 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
7 37 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
8 38 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
9 39 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
SPACE 20 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Special Characters Code
STX 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
ETX 03 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
SA 30 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
UA 21 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
* 2A 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
# 23 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
– 145 –
Message Format for Outgoing Call
BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA BYTE DATA
1 K 28 60 104
MONTH CALLED AUTHORI-
A NUMBER ZATION (SEE
CODE PARAGRAPH
3 30
ROUTE DAY 7.2.4)
NUMBER
ORIGINATING 32 CALL END (SEE
TRUNK HOUR TIME PARAGRAPH
6 INFORMATION (SEE 7.2.3)
TRUNK PARAGRAPH
NUMBER 34 7.2.2)
MINUTE
9 ORIG 36
SECOND
10
TENANT CALLING
PARTY 38 ACCOUNT 114
CODE YEAR
12 INFORMATION (SEE
STATION (SEE PARAGRAPH
OR PARAGRAPH 7.2.4) 116
ATTEND- 7.2.1) YEAR
ANT
OR 118
ROUTE
TRUNK
NUMBER
18
MONTH SPACE
92 (SEE (20 Hex.)
CALL PARAGRAPH
20 METER- 7.2.7)
DAY ING
CALL START 48
TIME CALLING
22 PARTY
(SEE TENANT
HOUR PARAGRAPH
7.2.2) 96
OFFICE
24 51 CODE
MINUTE CONDI- OF
TION CALLING 128
26 B PARTY ONLY FOR
SECOND NO. 7 CCIS
54 100 (SEE
OFFICE PARAGRAPH
ROUTE ROUTE CODE OF 7.2.8)
NUMBER ADVANCE BILLING
1 INFORMATION PROCESS
(SEE OFFICE
57
PARAGRAPH
ROUTE 7.2.5)
NUMBER
2
– 146 –
Message Format for Incoming Call
1 EI-K 28 60 104
MONTH CALLED AUTHORI-
E NUMBER ZATION (SEE
CODE SECTION
3 30
ROUTE DAY 7.2.4)
NUMBER
TERMINATING
32 CALL END (SEE
TRUNK HOUR TIME SECTION
6 INFORMATION (SEE 7.2.3)
TRUNK SECTION
NUMBER 34 7.2.2)
MINUTE
9 ORIG 36
SECOND
10
TENANT CALLED
PARTY 38 ACCOUNT 114
CODE YEAR
12 INFORMATION (SEE
STATION (SEE SECTION
OR SECTION 7.2.4) 116
ATTEND- 7.2.1) YEAR
ANT
OR 118
ROUTE
TRUNK
NUMBER
18
MONTH SPACE
92 (SEE (20 Hex.)
CALL SECTION
20 METER- 7.2.7)
DAY ING
CALL START 48
TIME CALLED
22 PARTY
(SEE TENANT
HOUR SECTION
7.2.2) 96
OFFICE
24 51 CODE
MINUTE CONDI- OF
TION CALLED 128
26 B PARTY ONLY FOR
SECOND NO. 7 CCIS
54 100 (SEE
OFFICE SECTION
ROUTE CODE OF
NUMBER ROUTE 7.2.8)
ADVANCE BILLING
INFORMATION PROCESS
(SEE OFFICE
57 00
SECTION
00 7.2.5)
00
– 147 –
Message Format for Station-to-Station Call
1 K 28 60 104
MONTH TENANT AUTHORI- (SEE
B ZATION SECTION
CODE 7.2.4)
3 30 62
DAY
CALL END STATION

32 OR CALLED
SPACE HOUR TIME (SEE PARTY
6 (20 Hex.) ATTEND-
SECTION 7.2.2) ANT INFORMATION
34 (SEE SECTION
MINUTE 7.2.1)
9 ORIG 36 68
SECOND
10 TENANT
TENANT CALLING
PARTY 38 ACCOUNT (SEE SECTION 114
CODE YEAR
12 INFORMATION 7.2.4) 71
(SEE SECTION SPACE
7.2.1) (20 Hex.) 116
YEAR
STATION
OR
ATTEND- 118
ANT
18
MONTH SPACE
92 (20 Hex.)
20
DAY SPACE
CALL START (20 Hex.)
48 CALLING
TIME (SEE PARTY
22 SECTION 7.2.2)
HOUR TENANT
96
24 51 (SEE SECTION
MINUTE CONDI- 7.2.6)
TION SPACE 128
26 B (20 Hex.)
SECOND
54
SPACE
(20 Hex.)
10.2Details on Transmission Data
10.2.1 Calling Party Information/Called Party Information
• The 9th byte indicates the type of the calling (or called) party. The 10th through 17th bytes are data
pertaining to this calling (or called) party.
– 148 –
ORIG (Originating Source Identification):

0 = Calling (or called) Party is a station
1 = Calling (or called) Party is an Attendant
2 = Calling (or called) Party is an outside (inside) party
• The contents of 12th through 17th bytes vary with the type of the calling (or called) party.
(1) For a station (ORIG = 0): Data showing Station Number
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
12 1st DIGIT 4
13 2nd DIGIT 0
14 3rd DIGIT 0
15 4th DIGIT 1
16 5th DIGIT SPACE
17 6th DIGIT SPACE
(2) For an Attendant (ORIG = 1): Data showing Attendant Number
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
12 1st DIGIT 1
13 2nd DIGIT 0
14 3rd DIGIT SPACE
15 4th DIGIT SPACE
16 5th DIGIT SPACE
17 6th DIGIT SPACE
(3) For a trunk (ORIG = 2): Data showing Route Number and Trunk Number
Byte Data Example
12 1st DIGIT 0
Route
13 2nd DIGIT Number 0 RT No. = 1
14 3rd DIGIT 1
15 1st DIGIT 0
Trunk
16 2nd DIGIT Number 5 TR No. = 50
17 3rd DIGIT 0
10.2.2 Call Start/Call End Time Information
• The data that indicates Call Start Time is as follows:
– 149 –
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
18 MONTH 0
19 (01-12) 6
20 DAY 0
THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL
21 (01-31) 1 STARTED AT 1 O’CLOCK P.M. ON JUNE 1st,
1998
22 HOUR 1
23 (00-23) 3
24 MINUTE 0
25 (00-59) 0
26 SECOND 0
27 (00-59) 0
114 YEAR 9 YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY

THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.
115 (00-99) 8
• The data that indicates Call End Time is as follows:
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
28 MONTH 1
29 (01-12) 0
30 DAY 2
THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL
31 (01-31) 0 ENDED AT 9 O’CLOCK 10 MIN. 30 SEC. A.M.
ON OCT. 20, 1998.
32 HOUR 0
33 (00-23) 9
34 MINUTE 1
35 (00-59) 0
36 SECOND 3
37 (00-59) 0
116 YEAR 9 YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY

THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.
117 (00-99) 8
– 150 –
10.2.3 Called Number
• The data that indicates the Called Number is as follows:
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
60 1st DIGIT 0
61 2nd DIGIT 4
62 3rd DIGIT 7 9-0471-83-0351 HAS BEEN DIALED.
63 4th DIGIT 1
64 5th DIGIT 8 9: OG ACCESS CODE
65 3
66 0
67 3
68 5
69 1
70 SPACE
71 12th DIGIT SPACE
90 30th DIGIT SPACE
91 32nd DIGIT SPACE
10.2.4 Account Code/Authorization Code
• The data that indicates the Account Code is as follows:
– 151 –
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
38 1st DIGIT 1
39 2nd DIGIT 1
40 3rd DIGIT 1 ACCOUNT CODE: 1115 HAS BEEN DIALED.
41 4th DIGIT 5
42 5th DIGIT SPACE
46 9th DIGIT SPACE
47 10th DIGIT SPACE
Note: An Account Code is a numerical code dialed (up to ten digits) by a station user with the capability
to enter a cost accounting.
• The data which indicates the Authorization Code is as follows:
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
104 1st DIGIT 4
105 2nd DIGIT 0
106 3rd DIGIT 0 AUTHORIZATION CODE: 4001 HAS BEEN DIALED
107 4th DIGIT 1
108 5th DIGIT SPACE
112 9th DIGIT SPACE
113 10th DIGIT SPACE
Note: An Authorization Code is a numerical code dialed (up to ten digits) by station users that will
override the station’s class (RSC or SFC) for facilities access restriction.
10.2.5 Route Advance Information
When a call has been originated by route advancing, the following data is transmitted.
– 152 –
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
54 1st DIGIT 0
ROUTE
55 2nd DIGIT NUMBER 1 0
THE CALL ORIGINATES
VIA ROUTE 3 BECAUSE
56 3rd DIGIT 3 ROUTE 30 IS BUSY.
57 1st DIGIT 0
ROUTE
58 2nd DIGIT 3
NUMBER 2
59 3rd DIGIT 0
ROUTE NUMBER 1: The route that was actually used.

ROUTE NUMBER 2: The route that should have been selected first.
10.2.6 Condition B Information
The 51st through 53rd bytes are Condition B Information. The Condition B Information indicates the
following data:
BYTE DATA OUTPUT NUMBER
51 C2 0, 1 or SPACE
52 C1 0–3 or SPACE
53 C0 0–5 or SPACE
C2: 0 = Call not transferred

1 = Call transferred
C1: 0 = Normal Call

1 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing
2 = Call originated by dialing with Account Code
3 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing and dialing with Account Code
C0: 0 = Regular Call (Direct Dialing from a station)

1 = Regular Call (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)
2 = Call through route advance (Direct Dialing from a station)
3 = Call through route advance (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)
4 = Call through Least Cost Routing (Direct Dialing from a station)
5 = Call through Least Cost Routing (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)
10.2.7 Call Metering Information
The value of call metering from the Central Office is transmitted via the data from the 92nd byte to 95th
byte.
– 153 –
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
92 1000 5
93 100 WHEN 5200 METERING PULSES

2
ARE RECEIVED FROM C.O.
94 10 0
95 1 0
10.2.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office
The 96th byte through 99th byte indicates the Office Code of Calling (Called) Party terminated via
CCIS line.
The 100th byte through 103rd byte indicates the Office Code of the office processing centralized billing
for CCIS network.
Note: Office Code includes the CCIS line access code.
BYTE DATA EXAMPLE
96 1st DIGIT 8
97 2nd DIGIT OFFICE CODE OF 1

CALLING (CALLED) OFFICE CODE = 812
98 3rd DIGIT PARTY 2
99 4th DIGIT SPACE
100 1st DIGIT 8

OFFICE CODE OF
101 2nd DIGIT BILLING PROCESS 1
OFFICE CODE = 813
OFFICE
102 3rd DIGIT 3
103 4th DIGIT SPACE
10.2.9 Text Format of Centralized Billing - FCCS
Below is the text format for billing information (FCCS) transmitted to the SMDR equipment.
K
Kind
S / Kind E
of
T 0 ! K L Data Data Transmission Data of Data Transmission Data T
X / Length Data Length X
Note
M
STX : Start of Text ETX : End of Text

Note: For details on the Kind of Data, see Table below. KK : Outgoing KL : Incoming
KM : Extension
– 154 –
Centralized Billing-CCS Kinds of Data
KIND
KK KL KM
OF CONTENTS
(OUTGOING) (INCOMING) (STATION)
DATA
00 Not Used
01 Outgoing Trunk/Incoming Trunk Information Provided Provided -
02 Calling Party Information (Station Number) Provided - Provided
03 Calling Party Information (Telephone Number) Conditionally - Conditionally
Provided Provided
04 Called Party Information (Station Number) - Provided Provided
05 Called Party Information (Telephone Number) - Conditionally Conditionally
Provided Provided
06 Call Start/Call End Time Provided Provided Provided
07 Account Code Conditionally Conditionally Conditionally
Provided Provided Provided
08 Condition B Information Provided Provided Provided
09 Alternate Routing Information/Incoming Route Provided Provided -
Number
10 Dial Code Provided Conditionally -
Provided
11 Office Code Information (For CCIS) Conditionally Conditionally -
Provided Provided
12 Authorization Code Conditionally Conditionally -
Provided Provided
13 Condition C Information + Billing Info/Call Metalling Provided Conditionally -
Info Provided
– 155 –
Centralized Billing-CCS Kinds of Data (Continued)
KIND
KK KL KM
OF CONTENTS
(OUTGOING) (INCOMING) (STATION)
DATA
14 Condition D Information + Bill Notification Attendant Conditionally - -

Console Number Provided
15 Department Code Conditionally - -
Provided
16 Automatic Number Indication Conditionally Conditionally -
Provided Provided
17 Converted Number Conditionally - -
Provided
18 MA-ID Conditionally Conditionally Conditionally
Provided Provided Provided
19 Trunk Arrival Time - Conditionally -
Provided
20-99 Not Used - - -
Note: Conditionally Provided: Information is provided when data is effective.

Provided : Information is provided on every call with no exception.
- : Not available.
– 156 –
Message Format for Outgoing Call - FCCS

Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data
STX 1 220 Billing Calling
0 0 Informa- Condition Party
Minute MA-ID
! 0 ~ 3 tion C Informa- MA-ID
1 K 75 /Call (Max. 5
Second
K 150 295 digits)
0 225 1 Outgoing
Milli-Sec- Route
For more
5 1 0, 0 MA-ID
information on 80 Condition 300 (Max. 5 digits)
the data to 155 D D Informa- EXT
FPC Outgoing Year
230 Bill Notifi-
which the Trunk cation
Note marks 10
Physical 85
Month Call
are attached, 1
End 5
see Day 160
235 0 Depart-
Reference. Trunk Hour Dial Code Dial Code ment Code
15
(Max. 32 Depart-
90 digits)
Logical Minute
165
240 1
Second
0 6
20 0 ~ 3
1 95 Milli-Sec-
170 *
ORIG 0 245
Calling
25 Tenant Party 0 ~ 1
Information 100
(Station No.)
175
STN No. 250
ATT CON
30 No.
RT/TK 105 Accoun
t Code
180
255
0 Account
Code 1
35 0 ~ 2 (Max. 16 1
110 0 Automatic
185 Number
FPC Automatic
Office 260 Indication
Number
(Max. 32
Code of Indication
40 User Calling Note
Group 115 Office Code
Calling Information
190 Office
Party 0 265
Code of
Information 8 Billing
45 (Telephone 0 Condition B
120 1
Information
Tele- C2 Note 195
phone C1 0 ~ 1 270
Number C0
50 (Max. 16 0
digits) 125
1 Authoriza-
200
/ tion Code 275
55 Logical FPC1 1
Authori-
130 7
Alternate zation
205 Code 0 ~ 0
Physical Routing 280 1 6
Information (Max 16 Con-
0 digits.) verted
60 Converted Number
Logical
3 135 Number
210 (Max. 6
285 digits)
FPC2
Year
65 Call ETX 1
140 Physical 8
Start 1 MA-ID
Time 215 3 1
Month 290 0
0, 0, 0
Day Logical
70 C
145
Hour
– 157 –
Message Format for Incoming Call - FCCS

Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data
STX Call Authorization

Logical Authori- Incoming
0 Start 135 Code
Month RT No. 1 zation 270 Route
! Time Code MA-ID MA-ID
1 K 205 (Max. 5
Day
L 70 FPC2 (Max. 16 digits)
0 1
Hour
1 140 275 9
Physical
5 1 1
Minute RT No. 2
210 7
75
FPC Incoming Second Logical
(3 digits) Trunk RT No. 2 Year
145 280
Information Milli-Second
10 1 1
Physical 215 Trunk
0 3
Route Month Arrival
80 0 ~ 3 0
Time
Year Condition Day
Trunk No. 150 C C Informa- 285
15 Call End tion Hour
Time 220
Logical Month Call
85
Route Metering Minute
Day 155 290
0 1 Second
20 4 6
Hour 225
1 0 ~ 3
90 Milli-Second
Minute
ORIG
Called
* ETX
160
Tenant Party Second
25
(3 digits) Information 230
(Station Dial Code Dial Code
95 Milli-Second (Max. 32
STN No. digits)
ATT CON 165
0
30 No.
7
RT/TK No. 235
0 ~ 1
100
05 170
35 0 ~ 2 Account
Code 240
105
Automatic
FPC Number
(3 digits) Indication Automatic
Account 175 Number
(Max. 32
40 User Code Indication
digits)
Group (Max. 16 245 Note
Number Called 110 digits)
Party
Information 180
45 (Telephone
1 250
Telephone 115 1
Number 0
(Max. 16 0 185
ETX
50 digits) 8
Condition B Office
Code of 255
0 Information
/
120 Note Calling
C2 Party
Logical Office Code
Route No. C1 190 Office Information
55 C0 Code of
0 Billing Pro- 260 1
125 9 cess Office 8
1 1
1
195 0
0 2
60 6 0 ~ 1 Called
FPC1 Incoming 265 Party MA-ID
3
Route MA-ID
130
Number (Max. 5
Physical Note digits)
200
Year RT No. 1
65
For more information on the data to which the Note marks are attached, see Reference.
– 158 –
Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - FCCS

Byte Data Byte Data Byte Data
(3 digits)
STX
0 135
! Called
1 K Party
70 Information
M
(Telephone No.)
0
2 140
Telephone 0
5 1 Number 8
0 Calling (Max. 16
ORIG (Note) Party 75 digits) 0 Condition B
Information 3 Information
Tenant (Station No.) 145 C2 Note
(3 digits) C1
10
C0
80 1
STN No. 8
ATT CON
150 1
No.
0 0
15 (6 digits)
6 Calling
Party
0 85 3 MA-ID MA-ID
3 4 155 (Max. 5
Call
Start digits)
0 2
~ Time
20 7 2 Year
Calling Called
FPC Party Party
90 MA-ID
(3 digits) Information
(Telephone No.) Month 160 (Max. 5
User Group digits)
25 Number Day ETX
(3 digits)
95
Hour
Minute
30
Second
100
Telephone Milli-Second
Number
35 (Max. 16
digits)
105 Year
Call End
Time
40 Month
110
Day
0
4
Hour
45 1
0 Minute
115
ORIG (Note)
Called
Party Second
Tenant
(3 digits) Information
50 (Station No.)
Milli-Second
120
STN No.
ATT CON 0
No. 7
55 (6 digits) 0 1
~
1 6
125
05
0 2
~
60 3 2
Account
Code
FPC 130 Account
(3 digits) Code
(Max. 16
User Group digits)
65 Number
For more information on the data to which the Note marks are attached, see Reference.
– 159 –
Reference
Data = 02: Calling Party Information (Station Number)
O Station No.
R Tenant
ATTCON No.
02 10 I RT / TK No.
G (3 digits)
(6 digits)
ORIG: Originating Source Identification

ORIG = 0: Transmitted data depicts information on Station
ORIG = 1: Transmitted data depicts information on Attendant Console
ORIG = 2: Transmitted data depicts information on Trunk
Data = 08: Condition B Information
C C C
08 03 2 1 0
C0 = 0: Call Origination - Direct

1: Call Origination - via ATTCON
2: Call Origination - Direct (Alternate Routing)
3: Call Origination - via ATTCON (Alternate Routing)
4: Call Origination - Direct (LCR Routing)
5: Call Origination - via ATTCON (LCR Routing)
6: Call Origination - Direct (Called No. - first six digits of change code)
7: Call Origination - via ATTCON (Called No. - first six digits of change code)
C1 = 0: -
1: Call Origination by OG Queuing
2: Call Origination by dialing with accounted code
3: Call Origination by OG Queuing & dialing with accounted code
4: Call Origination by Call Forwarding Outside
5: -
6: Call Origination by Call Forwarding Outside & dialing with accounted code
C2 = 0: -
1: Call was transferred
2: Billing is continued
3: Call was transferred & billing is continued
4: Call was transferred to last called party
5: Abandoned Call
– 160 –
Data = 09: Alternate Routing Information (KK) / Incoming Route Number (KL)
FPC1 Physical Logical FPC2 Physical Logical

09 18
(3 digits) RT 1 RT 1 (3 digits) RT 2 RT 2
FPC1: FPC actually used

Physical Route 1: Physical route actually used
Logical Route 1: Logical route actually used
FPC2: FPC first selected
Physical Route 2: Physical route first selected
Logical Route 2: Logical route first selected
Data = 13: Condition C Information + Billing Info / Call Metering Info.
01
•
Billing Info
05
13 C /
•
Call Metering
07
Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x 100)

Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x 101)
Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x102)
Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x103) In case of
Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x104) Billing Information
Charge Data (Basic Charge Unit x105)
0: No Charge Information
1: Charge Information for 1 cent unit
2: Charge Information for 0.1 cent unit
3: Charge Information for 10 cent unit
4: Charge Information for $1 unit
5: Charge Information for $10 unit
6: Calling Metering (4 digits)
F: Charge Information Error
– 161 –
Data = 14: Condition D Information + Bill Notification ATT CON Number
Bill
01 Notification
14 • D
ATTCON
04 Number
D - : Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Available

0 : Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Applied
1 : Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Available
Data = 16: Automatic Number Indication
01
16 * Automatic Number Indication (maximum 32 digits)
~
33
* Information Element Identifier = 0: Unable to Output

1: Display
2: Unable to Notify
3: Out of Service (Out of Area)
4: Public Telephone Origination
– 162 –
11. REDUNDANT DATA MEMORY BACKUP FOR OFFICE DATA
11.1 Overview
ATTENTION
Contents
Original office data and its redundant data can be managed in two different data drives (usu- Static Sensitive
Handling
ally Drive B and C), to deal with failure causing the data loss. In this way, for example, even
when office data is lost due to failure occurring while the office data is being updated, the pre-
vious office data can be easily loaded because it is already managed in another drive. In FCCS system, this ser-
vice can be performed to all nodes.
Figure 2-23 CF card contents
Drive A New program

CF Card
Drive B
Office data
used for office data
Drive C Office data
(Redundance)
Old program
Drive D
11.2 Redundant Data Memory Backup Procedure
• Office Data Installation
(1) Before office data update, save the existing office data to CF card from the memory using the MEM_HDD
command. Specify a Drive (usually Drive C) as the destination to save.
(2) After office data update has finished, save the updated office data to CF card from the memory using the
MEM_HDD command. Specify a different Drive (usually Drive B) from the Drive where the existing of-
fice data is saved as the destination to save.
• Undo Office Data Installation
(1) Confirm the Drive where the existing office data is saved referring to the date of office data file using the
DHDF command.
(2) Execute “Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize” by the SINZ command. For this operation,
specify the Drive (usually Drive C) where the existing office data has been saved. The Drive can be spec-
ified by [Option] in the menu bar. In default setting, Drive B is specified.
(3) Save the office data before update to CF card from the memory using the MEM_HDD command. Specify
the Drive (usually Drive B) where originally updated office data has been saved as the destination to save.
11.2.1 Service condition
1. In the routine diagnosis, office data verification and data backup are only applied to the Drive where office
– 163 –
data is loaded or saved last time.

2. In FCCS system, redundant Data Memory can be applied to all nodes by logging in Network Control Node
(NCN).
3. Office data in Drive B of the CF card will be loaded in the following situation.
• The system is turned on.
• “Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize” is executed by the SINZ command.
• “Restart” is executed by the SINZ command.
11.2.2 Programming
Redundant Data Memory Backup can be done by following the predeclare steps in Redundant Data Memory
Backup Procedure.
Note: Office data that is saved from MEM to CF card by using MEM_HDD command can be saved in other
storage device. Use PCPro Tools for this backup. See “Office Data Backup” - “<How to Download the
Office Data>” for more details.
– 164 –
12. RTP INFORMATION OUTPUT
This feature is used to output log that includes the causes of low voice quality and abnormal status of IP device.
Therefore, network administrator will be able to understand its cause and figure out how to solve the problem.
Note 1: For more information such as available firmware version, please refer to [R-58] RTP Information Out-
put in Data Programming Manual - Business.
• Communication Log Function
A history (containing speech time, information of opposite party, IP address, MAC address, and voice qual-
ity) per speech is collected and output.
If a user makes a complaint about voice quality, the appropriate data can be retrieved in the form of speech
logs, which can be used to confirm and investigate the cause.
• Fault Log Collection Function
When an event such as autonomous reset occurs on terminals, the system outputs the reset factor and time
of the cause. If it is caused due to packet fault, the system also outputs the number of times that packets
have been sent/received/retransmitted, which will be useful to investigate the cause.
If a user makes a complaint about the terminal control and its status, the appropriate data can be retrieved
in the form of speech logs, which can be used to confirm and investigate the cause.
Note 2: Communication Log Collection Function and Fault Log Function are available depending on termi-
nals. Please refer to [R-58] RTP Information Output in Data Programming Manual - Business for more
detailed information.
• .Warning Tone Playback for RTP Packets Communicating Error
Warning Tone is generated to indicate a deteriorated voice quality due to the RTP packets loss reaching the
predetermined threshold. Beeps are heard with tone duration of 120 ms and pause of 100 ms. The packet
loss threshold is 20% of total expected packets within 3 consecutive seconds or more. Packet loss is
checked every 1 second. If RTP packet loss continues the Warning Tone will be not generated one after
another but 10 seconds after the first one.
RTP Packet Loss Check Period 1 second

Received RTP Packet Loss Threshold 20% of expected packets
Warning Tone Playback
Reported Packet Loss Interval 3 seconds or more
Conditions
Time Between Warning Tone Beeps 10 seconds
Warning Tone Form Tone 120 ms
Pause 100 ms
– 165 –
12.1How to Display Log
To operate the speech log output
For SNMP Manager, see SNMP [S-148] of Data Programming Manual - Business.
For PCPro, see the command in this manual.
To operate the fault log output
For SNMP Manager, see SNMP [S-148] of Data Programming Manual - Business.
For PCPro, see the command in this manual.
To display the information as system message on PCPro, set ASYDL SYS1 INDEX996 Bit2 = 1. For more
detailed information about the system messages, refer to the appropriate manuals for the system.
See System Message described in this manual.
Terminal Claim Notification
See Terminal Claim Handling [T-65] on Data Programming Manual - Business.
– 166 –
12.1.1 Use of Collected Information
The following information is displayed on SNMP Manager.
• Speech Log Information

CALL STATISTICS A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
The following is an example.

CALL STATISTICS 00012060,00012061,0,2004051813121700,
2004051813141800,0000001F,0000000A,00000000,0A29CF64,0060B9C39B2
C,0001
A: Self-EN (Self Equipment): 0x00012060 [FPC=1, Module Group(MG)=8, Unit(U)=0, Group(G)=12,

Level(L)=0]
Accommodation Location for each equipment is obtained as shown below:
CALL STATISTICS 00012060,.....

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0x60 GROUP LEVEL
0x20 0 Module Group UNIT
0x01 FPC
0x00 NOP
Convert the value indicated in hexadecimal to binary.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0x60 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0x20 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0x01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0x00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Read the value in decimal on a category basis.
0x60 Group = 12 LV = 0
0x20 0 MG = 8 U = 0
0x01 FPC = 1
0x00 NOP = 0
Thus, Module Group = 8, Unit = 0, Group = 12, Level = 0 are obtained in this instance.
– 167 –
B: Mate-EN: 0x00012061 [FPC=1, Module Group(MG)=8, Unit(U)=0, Group(G)=12, Level(L)=1]
C: Warning Tone (0: No warning tone/1: warning tone generated)

0x0 = No warning tone
Note: In the following terminals, even though the warning tone is generated, 0 will be output.
• DT700 Series
• DtermIP (SIP)
• Soft Client SP350
• DtermSP30 (SIP)
D: Speech Start Time

0x2004051813121700 = 2004/5/18 13:12 17.00 (Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute Second)
E: Speech End Time

0x2004051813141800 = 2004/5/18 13:14 18.00 (Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute Second)
F: RTP Send Count

The value is indicated in hexadecimal.
0x0000001F = 31 packets
G: RTP Receive Count

This he value is indicated in hexadecimal.
0x0000000A = 10 packets
H: RTP Receive Loss Count

The value is indicated in hexadecimal.
0x00000000 = 0 packet
I: IP Address
Convert the value to decimal on a byte basis to obtain IP Address.
0x0A29CF64 = 10.41.207.100
J: MAC Address
Convert the value to decimal on a byte basis to obtain MAC Address.
0x0060B9C39B2C = 0.96.185.195.155.44
K: LOC-ID
0x0001 = 1
Note: For each answered call two Call Statistics messages are generated.
– 168 –
Examples of Log
Example 1
Take statistics of RTP sent/received (F, G, H) on a Self-EN (A) basis.

Also, see (C) if warning tone occurs or not.
– 169 –
Example 2
Take statistics of users (A) on a warning tone (C) basis.

Also, take statistics between areas (I and K).
– 170 –
Example 3
Take statistics of period (D, E) on a warning tone (C) basis.

Also take statistics between areas (I and K).
– 171 –
• Fault Log Information
The fault log is read out as follows:
Note: This is an example when the system outputs 36-N. Note that the format is variable.
The following is an example.

SYSTEM MESSAGE 36-N IP Equipment Status Report
Main Office LTS May 18 13:12
LP08-0-ACT
Header Reset Factor
1: 6020 0100 810A 29CF 2:C901 3400 010E 0100 3:0901 0000 2004 0518
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
4: 1323 5658 021E 0200 5:1000 0000 0900 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
[11] [6] [7] [12] [9] [13] [14] [15] [16]
7: 1300 0000 1100 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
[17] [18]
Make sure [1] (EN) and [2] (Sequence Number), the sequence numbers on the same EN are continuous data
related to the EN. Fault logs by the same terminal are divided into packets and output, therefore, it is required
to analyze the data by grouping the same header.

LP08-0-ACT
Header
1: 6020 0100 820A 29CF 2:C900 0000 0003 0200 3:0000 0000 0000 0000
[1] [2] [3] [19] [6] [7] [8] [9]
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
– 172 –
Note: System message for DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP) is as follows.

LP08-0-ACT
Header
1: 6020 0100 820A 29CF 2:C900 0000 0003 0200 3:0000 0000 0000 0000
[1] [2] [3] [19] [20] [21] [6] [7] [8]
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
[9]
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
[1]: Accommodation Location (Line Equipment Numbers)
Accommodation Location for each equipment is obtained as shown below:

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0x60 GROUP LEVEL
0x20 0 Module Group UNIT
0x01 FPC
0x00 NOP
Convert the value indicated in hexadecimal to binary.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0x60 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0x20 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0x01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0x00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Read the value in decimal on a category basis.
0x60 Group = 12 LV = 0
0x20 0 MG = 8 U = 0
0x01 FPC = 1
0x00 NOP = 0
Thus, Module Group = 8, Unit = 0, Group = 12, Level = 0 are obtained in this instance.
– 173 –
[2]: Sequence Number and Fault Log Output Kind

Sequence Number (Bit0-6) = 0x01 (Sequence Number1)/0x02 (Sequence Number2)
Fault Log Output Kind (Bit7): 0/1 = Period/at the moment after registry
[3]: IP Address
Convert the value to decimal on a byte basis to obtain IP Address.
0x0A29CFC9 =10.41.207.201
[4]: Fault Log: 0x01

This data and the following data ([5] to [19]) are variable.
[5]: Data Length: (0034HEX) Variable
[6]: Data Kind

0x01/0x02/0x03 = Reset Factor/Control PKT Send/Receive Information/Registry NG Factor
[7]: Data Length

0x0E/0x1E/0x2E = Reset Factor/Control PKT Send/Receive Information/Registry NG Factor
[8]: The Number of Fault Logs

0x01 - 0x08
[9]: NOP: 0x00
[10]: Reset Factor

Major Item (0x09: Configuration Mode End)
Intermediate Item (0x01)
Minor Item (0x00)
Details (0x00)
[11]: Reset Execution Time: 2004/5/18 13:23 56.58 (Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute Second)
Reset Factor and Reset Execution Time are as follows:
0901 0000 2004 0518 1323 5658

Reset Execution Time
Details
Minor Item
Intermediate Item
Major Item
– 174 –
Table 2-2 Detailed Information of Reset Factors
Major Sub Factors

Item Factors
(Hex) DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol) DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP)
00 Not used - -
01 before registra- During “DHCP Connecting....” Failure before registration such as fail-
tion/ indication, the terminal was placed in ure while acquiring DHCP address,
before DRS01 configuration mode and Save or cancel DHCP server connection timeout
(Initial Setting was performed.
Request)
02 during registra- During “DRS Connecting....” Failure during registration such as

tion/before DRS indication, the terminal was placed in response wait timeover, receiving
03 (Signaling configuration mode and Save or cancel abnormal response
Path Set was performed.
Autonomous Reset
Response)
03 after registration/ - Failure immediately after registration
during initializa- completion such as 200 OK Receive
tion timeout for initial SUBSCRIBE and no
reception of initial SUBSCRIBE from
the server
04 during call pro- Reset occurred because of timeout Not used
cess while waiting to receive TIR PAW.
05 during partial ini- - Not used
tialization
06 diagnosis com- Reset occurred after “Network Busy” Response wait timeover for SUB-
mand not SCRIBE or NOTIFY/SUBSCRIBE is
received/Keep- expired.
alive NG
07 Software Reset Request Reset was requested by the system/ Reset was requested by the server.
Reset occurred after receiving All
ClearPAW direction.
08 DHCP lease is expired Reset occurred after DHCP Lease DHCP Lease Expiration or NACK
Expiration. Reception
09 Configuration mode is After placing in Configuration Mode Configuration menu is ended.
ended from clock indication, save or cancel
(DtermIP only) was performed in the mode.
0A Reset Request by PROTI- Terminal reset was requested by PCPro Not used
MIS (DtermIP only) commands such as AKYD, ADKS or
MBST.
0B - Not used - -
– 175 –
[12]: Protocol
0x01/0x02/0x03 = iLP-PM/PROTIMS/SIP
[13]: Total Number of Transmitted Control PKTs

0x10000000 = 10 times
[14]: Number of Retransmitted Control PKTs

0x09000000 = 9 times
[15]: Number of Failed Control PKTs

0x00000000 = None
[16]: Total Number of Received Control PKTs

0x00000000 = None
[17]: Number of Received Abnormal PKTs

0x13000000 = 19 times

0x11000000 = 17 times

0x00000000 = None
[20]: Number of Retransmission (three times) Note
[21]: Number of Retransmission (four times or more) Note
Note: Available for DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP) only.
The following shows how to count the numbers and the meaning of each protocol.
This example is applied for all the parameters.
6A 01 00 00 0x016A 362 times

Lower Upper
Converted in decimal
– 176 –
Table 2-3 Send/Receive Control Packet Counter on each Protocol
Sent/
Received DtermIP (SIP)/
Control iLP-PM (0x01) PROTIMS (0x02) Soft Phone (SIP)
Packets (0x04)
Information
[13] Total Number of Transmit- Total Number of Transmit- Number of Transmitted

ted Control PKTs ted Packets Requests
[14] Number of Retransmitted Number of Transmitted Number of Received Requests
Control PKTs ACK Packets
[15] Number of Failed Control Number of Retransmitted Number of Transmitted
PKTs Packets Response (Normal)
[16] Total Number of Received Number of Three Times Number of Transmitted
NG Control PKTs Retry Response (Error)
[17] Total Number of Received Total Number of Received Number of Received Illegal
Abnormal PKTs Packets Messages
[18] Number of Abnormal ACK Packets Number of Retransmission
Sequences (once)
[19] Number of Duplicated Total Number of Abnormal Number of Retransmission
Sequences Packets received (twice)
[20] - - Number of Retransmission
(three times)
[21] - - Number of Retransmission
(four times or more)
– 177 –
Example of System Message Output
The following is an example when fault logs are output eight times. One data can be made by connecting three
related messages in the example. This shows the appropriate parts extracted from the system messages.
Eight fault logs and eight reset factors exist in the messages.
Data Kind: 01 (Reset Factor)
Header Reset Factor (1)
1:B91F 0000 81AC 10FD 2:1D01 8400 0162 0800 3:090B 09DF 2001 0610 4:2140 5500 090B 09DF
Reset Factor (2) Reset Factor (3)
5:2004 0610 2142 4300 6:0644 058B 2004 0610 7:2213 1900 0944 0AE4 8:0000 0000 0000 0000
No data is assigned here.
Header Reset Factor (4) Reset Factor (5)

1:B91F 0000 82AC 10FD 2:1D20 0406 1108 5905 3:0009 440A E420 0406 4:1109 0723 0007 440A
Reset Factor (6) Reset Factor (7)
5:1220 0406 1109 0748 6:0006 4405 8B20 0406 7:1109 1143 0006 4405 8:0000 0000 0000 0000
No data is assigned here.
Header Reset Factor (8)

1:B91F 0000 83AC 10FD 2:1D8B 2004 0611 0945 3:2900 021E 0200 6A01 4:0000 6A01 0000 0B00
Protocol: 01(iLP-PM)
5:0000 0200 0000 6D01 6:0000 5E01 0000 0100 7:0000 02(PROTIMS)
Data Kind:02(Received/Sent Control Packets Info)
– 178 –
• Information Displayed on SNMP Manager

36-N IP Equipment Status Report A B C D E F G H I J
A: CPU Number
B: Output Time
C: Self-EN
D: Output Time
F: Reset Factor
G: Reset Execution Time
H: RTCP Send Time
I: RTCP Receive Time
J: RTCP NG Time
– 179 –
Examples of Log
Example 1
[NON] When messages are output immediately

LP00-0-ACT
after registry.

Take statistics of area (E) on the basis of reset factor (F) and reset execution time (G).
– 180 –
Example 2
[NON] When messages are output immediately

LP00-0-ACT after registry.
Take statistics of users (C) on the basis of reset factor of a terminal (F).
Also take statistics of status of RTCP sent/received (H, I, J).
– 181 –
Example 3
When messages are output immediately

[NON] LP00-0-ACT after registry.
Take statistics of network status including packet retransmission rate and retransmission NG
rate (H, I, J), on the basis of terminal user and area (C, D, E).
– 182 –
12.1.2 Examples of Using Logs
<Trouble 1 - When All of the DtermIP are logged out- >
(1) Brief
All the DtermIP are not available for a short time.
(2) Cause
Because DHCP server had sent back NACK, DtermIP has performed autonomous reset.
(3) If Fault Log Collection Function is used
From logs occurred when re-registration has been completed, it can be analyzed that all of the DtermIPs have
performed autonomous reset around the same time because the valid term for IP addresses provided by DHCP
server had been expired. (This includes terminals that received NACK indicating 50% of the valid term has
passed.)
Use fault logs to solve the problem.
<Trouble 2 - No tone/One-way Speech>
(1) Brief
When DtermIP originates call via MC-MG (COT), sometimes no tone is heard.
(2) Cause
While peer-to-peer connection was being handled, timeout of H.245 sequence occurred due to packet delay/loss.
(3) Using Fault Log Collection Function
Logs are output when errors occur in established peer-to-peer connection. From these logs, it can be determined
that connection handling is abnormal.
(4) Using Communication Log Collection Function
From logs caused for peer-to-peer disconnection, RTP arrival status on end points can be recognized.
Use fault and speech logs to solve the problem.
– 183 –
<Trouble 3 -Network Busy->
(1) Brief
Network Busy is often displayed on LCD of DtermIP.
(2) Cause
Packets are discarded on network devices.
(3) When Fault Log Collection Function is used
By confirming retransmission times/retransmission failed times from collected logs, it can be determined that
the problem could be caused on network and SV8500/PHD sides.
From memory in a system, it can be determined that the retransmission failed.
By seeing retransmitted NG occurred on two-way, it can be determined that the fault could have occurred on the
network.
Figure out how to solve the problem in consideration of

other type of logs.
<Trouble 4 -Noise, Voice Cut Off- >
(1) Brief
Noise and Voice Cut Off on speech occurred between IP terminals.
(2) Examination Method
The cause of network fault can be analyzed by using Call Log Collection Function and seeing its logs including
information of opponent, speech start time, speech end time, RTP arrival status when noise or no tone is caused
during speech, status of discarded packets, enable/disable of warning tone, and information on end points.
Use speech logs to solve the problem.
– 184 –
<Trouble 5 -Sudden Reset/Sudden Login- >
(1) Brief
IP terminal has suddenly reset itself.
Confirm the reset factor/generation time by using Fault Log Collection Function.
<Trouble 6 -Buttons cannot be activated- >
(1) Brief
The buttons of DtermIP cannot be activated sometimes.
By specifying objects for Call Log Collection and shortening the period, confirm the number of times for
retransmitting and discarding packets (retransmission failed) per unit time.
<Trouble 7 -MG-PRI has been reset suddenly (Installation Fault)>
(1) Brief
Buttons of DtermIP cannot be activated sometimes.
(2) Cause
It is because an IP address of IP-BS replaced is overlapped.
(3) When Fault Log Collection Function is used
Check IP addresses from logs collected after re-registration, and then make sure any of the equipment installed
in the network does not have the same IP addresses.
– 185 –
13. DTERM IP CALL INFORMATION DISPLAY
During conversation, real-time Call Information (Codec, Payload Size, Lost Packet, etc.) can be displayed in
LCD on DtermIP by pressing Call Information Display Key assigned as FKY or Soft Key. The Call Information
is automatically updated every five seconds.
IP Network
Lost RTP Packet

Codec
Pay Load Size
Real-time Call Information is

DtermIP DtermIP
displayed.
13.1Operation
For operations on the terminal side, refer to Operating Procedure of [T-65] on Data Programming Manual -
Business.
13.2Examples of Using Logs for Solution
<Example 1 - Packet Loss - >
(1) Brief
Call is disconnected.
(2) Cause
Due to unmatched duplex link between switches or network load, RTP packets are discarded in the network.
(3) Checking the Call Information Display helps to find the cause.
When the decreasing number displayed for 1.Lost Packet in Call Information Display is checked, it is noticed
that RTP packets are discarded while the DtermIP is trying to receive RTP packets.
<Example 2- Checking Configuration Contents- >
(1) Brief
Codec/Payload Size can be checked.
(2) Checking Codec/Payload Size by using Call Information Display.
Using Call Information Display, which displays Codec/Payload Size, makes it easy to check Codec/Payload
Size.
– 186 –
14. IP DEVICE PC PORT REMOTE CONTROL
14.1Overview
This feature allows the maintenance personnel to disconnect/connect the PC port of the IP Stations from/
to the network using PCPro. For example, the maintenance personnel can quickly disconnect the PC (that
is connected to the PC port of IP Station) from the network when virus is detected on the network.
14.2Operating Procedure
See “CPCP command” in Chapter 6.
14.3Service Conditions
(1) This feature is available for the following terminals:

IP Enabled Dterm (Dterm Series i): Ver. 3.06 or later
DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol): Ver. 3.08 or later
DtermIP (SIP): Ver. 3.0.0.0 or later
DT700 Series: Available since first version
(2) This feature can be executed while the terminals registered to the System.
(3) In the FCCS network, execute this feature on a node basis.
(4) The status of the PC port can be saved on a station number basis.
(5) The following shows the service conditions only for DtermIP (Proprietary Protocol).
(a) PC Port setting is canceled if the DtermIPs (Proprietary Protocol) register to the System again after
the terminal reset. Therefore, DtermIPs (Proprietary Protocol) needs to be placed in “PC Port shut-
down” status after each registration.
(b) This feature is not available for DtermIPs which have not yet registered to the System. It is required
to execute this feature after completing the registration.
(c) If this feature data (CPCP command) is set on the terminals in logout status, the set data does not take
effect even after the terminals log into the System. In this case, the CPCP command data setting is
required after the registration.
(d) To use this feature (CPCP command control), the following configuration setting on the terminal is
required.
• Select “Automatic” from the User Menu o Ether Port Setting o PC Port Settings o Port Available
(PC).
When “Automatic” is selected:
If the software reset is executed, the status of the PC port can be maintained.
If the hardware reset is executed after turning off the terminal, the status of PC port is also reset (PC
port will be connected to the network).
– 187 –
When “Automatic” is not selected, the status of the PC port follows the configuration setting.
Note: After the registration:

If the terminal which does not support this feature is instructed to disconnect its PC port by the system,
a mismatch between the CPCP command setting and the status of the PC port may occurs.
Before the registration:
If the terminal which does not support this feature is instructed to disconnect its PC port by the system,
the CPCP command setting does not take effect.
(e) To disconnect the PC port by CPCP command, “Automatic” needs to be set on the configuration set-
ting on the terminal. The table below shows the status of PC port depending on the configuration set-
ting on the terminal and office data setting on CPCP command.
Configuration Setting
CPCP Command Setting Status of PC Port
on Terminal
Connection PC port is connected.
Automatic Note 3 Disconnection PC port is disconnected.
No data setting PC port is connected.
Connection PC port is disconnected.
OFF Disconnection PC port is disconnected.
No data setting PC port is disconnected.
Note 3: The default is “Automatic”.
Note 4: If the terminal with “Automatic” is connected to the system which does not support this feature, the PC
port is connected.
Note: Not supported on the DtermIP INASET320C/G.
(6) The following shows the service conditions only for SIP Multiple Line terminal.
(a) The data setting (CPCP command) for the terminals in logout status is also available. The set data
takes effect after the terminals log into the System.
(b) To use this feature (CPCP command control), the following configuration setting on the terminal is
required.
• Select “Automatic” from the User Menu o Advanced Settings o PC Port Settings o Port Avail-
able (PC).
When “Automatic” is not selected, the status of the PC port follows the configuration setting.
– 188 –
15. LICENSE REGISTRATION INFORMATION DISPLAY
15.1 Overview
License registration information, including the number of license, the number of registered IP terminals,
and the number of consumed license, are displayed in this feature. By reading out the license registration
information, maintenance personnel can analyze the terminal configuration for terminal types and can
grasp the current terminal registration state. This function helps the maintenance personnel to administrate
terminal licenses with efficiency.
This feature is used to see the remaining number of license depending on the system capacity and the num-
ber of currently operating terminals when necessary to add new terminals in the network.
The following license information is output in this feature:
• License registration: The number of licenses user has purchased. Licenses registered in the system
is displayed for each terminal type. Each IP terminal turns available by ap-
plying this license.
• IP Terminal registration: The number of IP terminals currently registered on the system data. The num-
ber of registered terminals is displayed on terminal group basis.
• License consumption: The number of terminals registered on the office data and in operation; login
stations and MC/MG devices completing startup procedure, is displayed.
15.2 Operating Procedure
Activate DPTR command by PCPRo and click “DETAILS” tab. For more information, see DPTR com-
mand in Chapter 6.
15.3 Service Conditions
(1) Terminals with no license are not displayed by this command, even when the terminal data is assigned in
office data.
(2) This feature is independent of the connected line’s condition, like in FCCS connection.
15.4 Data Assignment
None.
– 189 –
16. FTP SERVER SUPPORT (LAN1)
When Telephony Server is used as an FTP server, the following file transfer services are supported between a
remote PC and CF cards.
• IP Terminal Program Upload/Download

During “Terminal for Download” operation by ATDL command, new firmware supposed to be download-
ed to IP Stations can be uploaded to Telephony Server using the FTP server process. Then IP Stations can
download the firmware from Telephony Server as FTP clients. For more information, refer to IP Device
Firmware Remote Download [I-47] in Data Programming Manual - Business
• Firmware Download to IP Stations using “Firmware Auto Update Tool”

DT700 Series can download new firmware from Telephony Server using “Firmware Auto Update Tool.”
16.1Operating Procedure
IP Terminal Program Upload/Download
STEP 1 Start up a remote PC which FTP client software is installed in. Then log in to FTP server.
Enter Telephony Server’s IP address (Note 1) after FTP command using FTP client software.
Note 1: Enter the IP address of LAN1 connector on ACT side CPU/STBY side CPU by the ATDL command.
• For the single CPU, enter the ACT side CPU IP address.
• for the dual CPU, enter each IP address (#0, #1) of ACT side CPU/STBY side CPU by the ATDL
command
Example) Log in to Telephony Server (10.41.207.224) via FTP. Note 2
Note 2: The files are transferred to/from the directory in which a connection is made via FTP. For examples,
in the following case, the directory “C:\temp” is used to transfer files to/from FTP server (Telephony
Server).
C:\temp>ftp 10.41.207.224
STEP 2 Enter login name and password to log in to Telephony Server.
Example) XXXX is entered as a login name.
Note: The following message appears when login to Telephony Server is succeeded.
230 User XXXX logged in.
– 190 –
STEP 3 Type the command “bin” to prepare to transfer the files in binary.
ftp>bin
STEP 4 Type the command “put” to upload a program file to FTP server (Telephony Server).
Example) Transfer “itlisipe.tgz” from the remote PC to the directory of Telephony Server.
ftp>put itlisipe.tgz
STEP 5 Make sure that the file has been written in the specified directory using “ls” or “dir” command.
ftp>dir
STEP 6 Exit the FTP server.
To exit the FTP server, use “bye” or “quit” command.
ftp>bye
Firmware Download to IP Stations by “Firmware Auto Update Tool”
STEP 1 Activate the FTP server process according to “Programming.”
Note: “Maintenance User Account Assignment” setting is not required.
STEP 2 Execute further operations referring to the “Firmware Auto Update Tool for DT700 Series” sec-
tion in Peripheral Equipment Description.
16.2Service Conditions
• The table below provides command information related to FTP control and the directory tree in FTP server
(Telephony Server).
Command List Related FTP
COMMAND MEANING DESCRIPTION

This command must be entered before transferring
bin Switch a type to binary mode.
the files.
cd Change the directory.
ftp Make the FTP connection.
delete Delete the files.
Copy the files into a remote
get
terminal.
– 191 –
Command List Related FTP (Continued)
COMMAND MEANING DESCRIPTION

Write the files into FTP server
put
(Telephony Server).
pwd Show the full path.
“ls” shows a list of files and sub directories.
ls/dir Show the files in the directory.
“dir” shows a list of files in detail.
quit/bye Exit the FTP server.
rename Change the file name.
• Directories in the CF card differ in each maintenance user account assigned by ADTM command. If files
are written using the maintenance user account “A” for example, these files cannot be browsed using the
maintenance user account “B.”
• When Telephony Server is logged in using login name of the maintenance user account, the following di-
rectories and files exist in default state. However, do not use these directories and files.
Directory:
bin
lib
File:
..bash_logout
..bash_logout.rpmorig
..bash_profile
..bash_profile.rpmorig
..bashrc
..bashrc.rpmor
• When the system is in Dual Configuration, the maintenance user account can be used for both of #1 and #0
CPU CF cards. When writing the same files to both #1 and #0 CPU CF cards, IP address for each CPU CF
card needs to be entered because files are operated on CPU CF card bases via FTP server.
• When the maintenance user account is deleted, all of the written files and created directories using the ac-
count are also deleted.
• A maximum of 20 FTP clients can access simultaneously.
• Change the transfer method from ASCII (default) to binary form by using “bin” command.
• A maximum of three maintenance user accounts can be created.
• If the ADTM command data is changed, back up the office data by MEM_HDD command for the change
to take effect in the STBY side.
– 192 –
16.3Programming
FTP Server Startup Assignment
STEP 1 Select LAN1 for Select LAN Interface.
STEP 2 On Options tab, select “Activation setting of Internal server” in function list of LAN1 field, and
then click the Execute button.
STEP 3 On Activation setting of Internal server window, check the checkbox of “FTP Server” in In-
ternal Server list of LAN1 field to ON. Then click the Set button.
Maintenance User Account Assignment
STEP 2 On Options tab, select “Maintenance User Account Settings” in function list of LAN1 field, and
STEP 3 On Maintenance User Account Settings window, click the Add button.
STEP 4 Maintenance User Account Settings sub-window appears. Enter the following parameters,
and then click OK button.
- Login Name: 4~12 characters, “-”, “_”
- Password: 4~12 characters, “-”, “_”
- FTP: Check to allow.
Note: Refer to ADTM: Assignment of Data for TCP/IP Module in Command Manual for available characters
to enter the Login Name and Password.
Note: Level is Low and it is fixed.
STEP 5 On Maintenance User Account Settings window, click the Set button.
FTP Server Cancelation
STEP 2 On Options tab, select “Activation setting of Internal server” in function list of LAN1 field, and
STEP 3 On Activation setting of Internal server window, check the checkbox of “FTP Server” in In-
ternal Server list of LAN1 field to OFF. Then click the Set button.
Maintenance User Account Deletion
– 193 –
STEP 2 On Options tab, select “Maintenance User Account Settings” in function list of LAN1 field.
Then operate the following procedure.
<To inactivate FTP server on the maintenance user account>
Select the maintenance user account to inactivate FTP server, and click the Edit button. Check
the checkbox of “FTP” to OFF, and then click the Set button.
<To delete the maintenance user account>
Select the maintenance user account to delete, and click the Delete button. Then click the Set
button.
– 194 –
CHAPTER 3 System Messages
1. Observation Method of System Message
System messages display during routine diagnosis, system operation status controlling, and fault
occurrence. Figure below shows an example of a system message.
System Message Example
(1) SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E SUP LOCK UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY)

(2) NEC TOKYO JUL 24 09:35
(3) LP00-0-ACT
(4) 1:1102 0000 0000 0000 2:0000 0000 0000 0000 3:0000 0000 0000 0000
4:0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000
7:0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000
Meaning:
(1) : SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E SUP LOCK-UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY)
Meaning of the message
Alarm Level
(Indicated by Alarm Lamp) Note
System Message Number
Note: There are four kinds of alarm information indicated by alarm lamps: MN, MJ,
SUP, and No Indication.
(2) : Office Name, Date and Time
(3) : LP00-0-ACT
ACT/STBY indication for dual systems
System 0/1 indication for dual systems
Faulty processor/Related processor
(4) : Message detail data (notation by hexadecimal numbers)
– 195 –
2. Collection of System Messages
This section explains how to collect the System Messages by the PCPro.
• Automatic Output to the PCPro

System Messages can be output by Fault Scanning function.
• Output by DFTD command

System Messages can be output by DFTD command.
The figure below shows icons that are related to system message collection.
Buttons Related to System Messages
View Scan Log

Abort Data Collection
Collect New Alarms Alarms

Scan New Alarms/Traffic
(a) To Activate Fault Scanning
STEP 1 To enable System Message Scan service, assign “1” to SYMSCAN parameter on AIOC com-
mand for IOC Port Number = 0.
STEP 2 Close all commands.
STEP 3 Click “Scan New Alarms/Traffic” and “Collect New Alarms” buttons to place these buttons into
pressed position (ON).
When the Fault Scanning is effective, PCPro can scan the System status by polling every 20 seconds. If the
System has faults, DFTD command is automatically activated and System Messages are output.
– 196 –
DFTD Screen Image
The following explains each button on DFTD command:
Read Messages: Display all the System Messages which are currently occurring. These
messages are stored in the database in the PC.
Cancel: Close the DFTD command. (The data in the database is not cleared.)
Stop: Abort the readout of the System Message(s).
Print: Print out the System Message(s) displayed on the screen.
File Save: Save the System Message(s) displayed on the screen into the file.
Clear Log Window: Clear the System Message(s) displayed on the screen.
View Database: Display all the System Messages stored in the database.
Clear Database: Clear all the System Messages stored in the database.
Colors: Set the colors of the background, lamps and letters on the screen.
– 197 –
(b) To Export (Save) System Message into Text File
STEP 1 After reading out the System Messages by DFTD, click “View Database” button to display a
listup report similar to the following.
Figure 3-1 How to Export: Listup Report Screen Image

Click this button to export the stored system messages.
STEP 2 On the Listup Report window, click button to export the System Messages in a text file.
STEP 3 The following dialog appears. Select “Text (TXT)” in “Format” list box and “Disk file” in “Des-
tination” list box respectively.
STEP 4 Press “OK” button.

Figure 3-2 How to Export: File Format and Destination for Export
STEP 5 Save the data by specifying an appropriate file name and directory in which the file to be saved.
– 198 –
3. System Messages
This section explains how to read and analyze system messages displayed during routine diagnosis, system
operation status controlling, and occurrence of a fault within the system. The following table provides a list of
system messages.
System Messages List
MESSAGE NO. SYSTEM MESSAGE

0-C Reset Interrupt
0-D CPU Clock Down
0-E C-Level Infinite Loop
0-F Memory Failure
0-G B1-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)
0-H B1-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)
0-I Mate CPU Failure
0-J Abnormal Interrupt
1-A Both TSW Failure (Permanent)
1-B TSW Failure (Permanent)
1-C Both TSW Write Failure
1-D TSW Write Failure
1-E Both TSW Clock Failure
1-F TSW Clock Failure
1-O Both PLO Failure
1-P PLO Failure
1-S Module Group Down Failure
1-T TSW ACT Change Report
1-U DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) (4-IMG only)
1-V DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) (4-IMG only)
1-W PLO Restore
2-T AP-INT Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Note 3
2-U AP-INT Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Note 3
2-V IP Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Note 3
2-W IP Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Note 3
3-B C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)
3-C C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)
3-D Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)
3-E Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)
3-F -48V Over Current
– 199 –
System Messages List (Continued)
3-G Ground Failure

3-H Digital Line Warning
3-I Digital Line Failure
3-J Digital Line Restore
3-K Line Fault
3-L Line Fault Release
4-C Both TSW Ready Failure
4-D TSW Ready Failure
4-Q DLKC Ready Failure (4-IMG only)
4-R IO Ready Failure for UAP Note 3
4-S MUX Ready Failure
4-T Both MUX Ready Failure
4-U PCI Card Failure
4-V PCI Card Failure Recovered
4-W TSW Ready Failure Restore
6-A System Failure
6-B RGU & Howler Failure
6-C Line Load Control Start
6-D Line Load Control Stop
6-H Bad Call Notification
6-I STA-Test Connection Data
6-J Emergency Call
6-L Emergency Control Start
6-M Emergency Control Stop
6-N Abnormal Call Duration Data
6-O SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm
6-P SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release
7-A System Initialize With Data Load
7-B System Initialize
7-C CPU MBR Key Turn ON
– 200 –
7-D CPU MBR Key Turn OFF

7-E TSW MBR Key Turn ON
7-F TSW MBR Key Turn OFF
7-G TSW PLO Key Turn ON
7-H TSW PLO Key Turn OFF
7-K PM MB Key Turn ON
7-L PM MB Key Turn OFF
7-M NCU MB Key Turn ON
7-N NCU MB Key Turn OFF
7-O Cyclic Diagnosis Normal
7-P Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected)
7-Q PFT Key ON
7-R PFT Key OFF
7-U PLO MB Key Turn ON (4-IMG only)
7-V PLO MB Key Turn OFF (4-IMG only)
10-A Activation Code Request Notice (SUP)
10-B Activation Code Request Notice (MN)
10-C Activation Code Request Notice (MJ)
10-D IP License Excess Notice (SUP)
10-E CPU Operation Mode Error Notification
10-F Connection Failure between Telephony Server and SR-MGC
10-G Connection Recovery between Telephony Server and SR-MGC
10-H Illegal Software Version Information Set
10-I Software Version Information Report (SUP)
10-J Software Version Information Report (MN)
10-K Software Version Information Report (MJ)
10-L SR-MGC State Notification
13-A CCH Clock Failure
13-B CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)
13-C CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)
13-D CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)
13-E CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)
– 201 –
13-F CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

13-G CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)
13-H CCS Link Failure (Permanent)
13-I CCS Link Failure (Temporary)
13-J Restoration From CCS Link Failure
13-K CCH Reset Interrupt Failure
13-N Digital Line Warning
13-O Digital Line Failure
13-P Digital Line Restore
13-Q DRU Battery Operation
13-R DRU Line Operation
13-Z Power Failure
15-A VPS Failure (Temporary)
15-B VPS Failure (Permanent)
15-C VPS Restore
16-A Inside Trunk All Busy
16-B Virtual Tie Line Set Report
16-C Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report
16-E Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out
16-F Sender Start Time Out
16-M Hard Clock Failure
16-N Hard Clock Restore
17-A CCH MBR Key Turn ON
17-B CCH MBR Key Turn OFF
17-C CCH MB Key Turn ON
17-D CCH MB Key Turn OFF
17-H Day/Night Change Information
17-O IOC MB Key Turn ON
17-P IOC MB Key Turn OFF
17-Q IOC MBR Key Turn ON
17-R IOC MBR Key Turn OFF
23-J ATM Interface Warning Note 1
– 202 –
23-K ATM Interface Failure Note 1

23-L ATM Interface Recovered Note 1
23-P DCH Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End
23-Q DCH Back-Up Manual Change Start/End
23-R ATM Interface Change Report Note 1
23-S FCH Failure Note 1
23-T FCH Failure Recovered Note 1
23-U FCH Status Notice Note 1
23-W FCH Advancing Start Note 1
23-X FCH Advancing End Note 1
23-Y MUX Clock Failure
23-Z Both MUX Clock Failure
25-J ZT Operation Start Note 2
25-K ZT Set Up NG Note 2
25-L ZT Fault Note 2
25-M ZT Fault Recovery Note 2
25-N ZT Carrier Fault Note 2
26-N MAT Log
26-R Call Trace
26-V LAN Interface Error Report
26-W LAN Interface Release Report
27-C ATM Interface Port MB Key ON Note 1
27-D ATM Interface Port MB Key OFF Note 1
33-A MUX Clock Restore
33-B SDT Alarm Warning
33-C SDT Alarm Trouble
33-D SDT Alarm Restore
33-F PKG Download Failure Notification
33-E SDT Interface Change Notify
33-G MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Report
33-H MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Recovery Report
33-R IP PKG Warning
– 203 –
33-S IP PKG Failure

33-T IP PKG Restore
33-U H.323 Information
35-A GK Operation Start Notification
35-B GK Operation Stop Notification
35-C SP Warning Notification
35-D SP Failure
35-E SP Failure Recovery
35-F SP Process Information
35-G SP Process Warning
35-I SP Process Stop
36-A Office Data Copy Status Notification
36-E Registration Security Alert
36-F Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) (Temporary/Permanent)
36-G Bandwidth Warning
36-H Bandwidth Warning Recovery
36-I Bandwidth Fault
36-J Bandwidth Fault Recovery
36-K Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) (Recovery)
36-M IP Terminal Auto Assignment Report
36-N IP Equipment Status Report
36-O System Message Overflow Notification
36-T Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) (Permanent)
Note 1: Refer to the manual related to ATM.
Note 2: Refer to Built-In PCS/PHS System Manual.
Note 3: Refer to the manual related to OAI.
– 204 –
0-C: Reset Interrupt

Default Alarm Default Grade Grade Modified Lamp Modified
MN 3
This message displays when the processor is reset due to a failure in the system.
1: XXXX XX00 XXXX XX00 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Self-CPU Restart Information b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

b1: 0/1 = -/Phase 2 Executed (LP only)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart executed (for Dual-CPU system only)
b5: 0/1 = -/MB Control
b6: 0/1 = Program Load not executed/executed
b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)
2 Mate-CPU Restart Information b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
(FF H: not mounted) b1: 0/1 = -/Phase 2 Executed (LP only)
b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b1 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart executed (for Dual-CPU system only)
b6: 0/1 = Program Load not executed/executed
3 Related-call Release Result b7: 0/1 = Call Release Processing after restart ->Normal End/Abnormal
End
b7 b0
Reference: See section 4.7.1 on page 640, for the repair procedure.
– 205 –
4 Data Load Result after restart b0: Office Data Load Status
processing 0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End
b1: Call Forwarding Data Load Status
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End
b2: SPD Data Load Status
0/1 = Normal End/Abnormal End
b3: RCF Data Load Status
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b4: NDD Data Load Status
b23 b21 b20 b17 b16 b5: Network DM Data Load Status
b6: Local DM Load Status
b31 b24 b7: DM Load Status
0/1 = -/DM Non Load
b8: User Assign Soft Key Data Load Status
b39 b37 b35 b34 b33 b32 b9: Sub-Station Transfer Data Load Status
b10: ACD Station Transfer Data Load Status
b47 b40
b11: Call Block data Load Status
b12: ICB Data Load Status
b13: Expansion Speed Dial Data Load Status
b14: Call Forwarding-Logout Data Load Status
b15: SPD Data Load Status for DtermIP
b16: Drive 0 (B) Load Status
0/1 = -/Drive Number 1 Load
b17: Drive 2 (C) Load Status
b20: Drive 0 (A) Load Status
b21: Drive 3 (D) Load Status
b32: H.323 Call Forwarding Data Load Status
b33: MA-ID Data Load Status
b34: SR-MGC Data Load Status
b35: SIP Extension Call Forwarding Data Load Status
b37: SPD Name Data Load Status
b39: Day/Night Data Load Status
b40: Local Phone book Data Load Status
– 206 –
0-D: CPU Clock Down

MN 3
This message displays when a fault has occurred to the clock oscillator in the CPU.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Self-CPU Restart Information b0: 0/1=-/Monitor Restart

b3: 0/1=-/Initialization
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b4: 0/1=Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
b5: 0/1=-/MB control
b7: 0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)
2 Male-CPU Restart Information b0: 0/1=-/Monitor Restart

(FF H: not mounted) b3: 0/1=-/Initialization
b4: 0/1=-/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b5: 0/1=-/MB control
b7: 0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)
3 Related Call Information b7: 0/1=Released/Not released

b7 b0
– 207 –
0-E: C-Level Infinite Loop

SUP 2
C-Level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, running under clock interrupt disable state, is in an
infinite loop. This message displays when the counter value to check the normality of the processing has become
abnormal.
0-E C-Level Infinite Loop

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8
7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
8
1 Self-CPU Restart Information after b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

clock fault occurrence b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b5: 0/1 = -/MB Control

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
3 NMI Factor b0: 0/1 = -/Reset by Power On

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: 0/1 = -/Watchdog Timer timeout
b2: 0/1 = ISAGT is mounted/ISGAT is not mounted
b3: 0/1 = -/OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT
b4: 0/1 = -/IO parity Alarm
b5: 0/1 = -/IO ready Alarm
b6: 0/1 = -/External NMI
Reference: See Section 4.7.1,
Control System Fault - Fault Occurs
Intermittently on ACT side, for the repair procedure.
– 208 –
4 System Controlling Port B b0: 0/1 = Timer 2 Gate ON/OFF

b1: 0/1 = Speaker Gate ON/OFF
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = Parity Check Enable/MASK
b3: 0/1 = Channel Check Enable/MASK
b4: 0/1 = -/RAM Refresh Pulse Output State
b5: 0/1 = -/Timer 2 Output State
b6: 0/1 = -/Channel Check error Detected
b7: 0/1 = -/Parity error Detected
5 CPU Alarm b0: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor COP Alarm
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor MEM Alarm
b3: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow
b4: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor CLK Alarm
b5: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor COP Alarm
b6: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor MEM Alarm
b7: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow
6 CPU Changeover Factors b0: 0/1 = -/CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/SOFT EMA
b3: 0/1 = -/SOFT changeover
b4: 0/1 = -/Emergency Counter Overflow
b5: 0/1 = STBY/ACT
b6: 0/1 = Dual/Single
b7: 0/1 = CPU 0/CPU 1
7 System ALM b0: 0/1 = -/Main Power Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm
b3: 0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm
b4: 0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm
b5: 0/1 = -/Parity Alarm
b6: 0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted
b7: 0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm
8 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers
– 209 –
0-F: Memory Failure

SUP 3
This message displays when a CPU memory read/write error occurs.
0-F Memory Failure

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8
8
1 Information on Self-CPU Restart b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

after detection of a clock fault b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b5: 0/1 = -/MB Control

3 NMI Factor b0: 0/1 = -/Reset by Power On

b1: 0/1 = -/Watchdog Timer timeout
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = ISGAT is mounted/ISGAT is not mounted
b3: 0/1 = -/OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT
b4: 0/1 = -/IO parity Alarm
b5: 0/1 = -/IO ready Alarm
b6: 0/1 = -/External NMI
– 210 –
4 System Controlling Port B b0: 0/1 = Timer 2 Gate ON/OFF

b1: 0/1 = Speaker Gate ON/OFF
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = Parity Check Enable/MASK
b3: 0/1 = Channel Check Enable/MASK
b4: 0/1 = -/RAM Refresh Pulse Output State
b5: 0/1 = -/Timer 2 Output State
b6: 0/1 = -/Channel Check error Detected
b7: 0/1 = -/Parity error Detected
5 CPU Alarm b0: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor CLK Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor COP Alarm
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor MEM Alarm
b3: 0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow
b4: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor CLK Alarm
b5: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor COP Alarm
b6: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor MEM Alarm
b7: 0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow
6 CPU Changeover Factors b0: 0/1 = -/CLK Alarm

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: 0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow
b2: 0/1 = -/SOFT EMA
b3: 0/1 = -/SOFT changeover
b4: 0/1 = -/Emergency Counter Overflow
b5: 0/1 = STBY/ACT
b6: 0/1 = Dual/Single
b7: 0/1 = CPU 0/CPU 1
7 System ALM b0: 0/1 = -/Main Power Alarm

b1: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm
b3: 0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm
b4: 0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm
b5: 0/1 = -/Parity Alarm
b6: 0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted
b7: 0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm
– 211 –
0-G: B1-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)

MN 2
This message displays when a B-Level infinite loop failure occurs.
0-F Memory Failure

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Information on Self-CPU Restart b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

after detection of a clock fault b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
3 B-Level Infinite Loop b0: 0/1 = -/B-Level Infinite Loop

b1: 0/1 = -/Task Timer Timeout
b7 b1 b0
– 212 –
0-H: B1-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)

SUP 1
This message displays when, in the CPU program processing, the counter value to check the normality of the
processing has become abnormal.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
b5: 0/1 = -/MB control

(FF H: not mounted) b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0
3
b0: 0/1 = -/B-Level Infinite Loop
b7 b1 b0 b1: 0/1 = -/Task Timer Timeout
– 213 –
0-I: Mate CPU Failure

SUP 3
This message displays when a fault, such as the Clock down or C-Level infinite loop error, has occurred.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Mate-CPU Restart Information b0: 0/1 = -/CPU clock down

b1: 0/1 = -/C-Level infinite loop
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Memory error, Parity alarm
b3: 0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow
Reference: See Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side, Control System Fault - STBY
Side Is Faulty for the repair procedure.
– 214 –
0-J: Abnormal Interrupt

SUP 2
This message displays when Central Processing Unit (CPU) has been abnormally interrupted in the process. If
the system receives this event, the system automatically executes the following actions depending the event
count.
EVENT COUNT ACTIONS

1-7 Monitor Restart
Monitor Restart (Single System)
8
CPU System Changeover (Dual System)
9-15 Monitor Restart
16 Phase 1 Restart
24 Non-Load Restart
32 Program Load Restart
Note 1: Each CPU (0/1 system) manages its event count.
Note 2: The event count is daily cleared at 00:00.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 215 –

b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)

(FF H: not mounted) b3: 0/1 = -/Initialization
b7 b5 b4 b3 b0 b5: 0/1 = -/MB control
– 216 –
1-A: Both TSW Failure (Permanent)

MN 3
This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both
systems.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 TSW system in which a fault is b0: 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1

detected
b7 b0
2 Status at the time of fault detection b0: 0/1 = TSW System 0/TSW System 1
b6: Speech Path in ACT status
b7 b6 b0 0/1 = System 0/System 1
– 217 –
1-B: TSW Failure (Permanent)

MN 3
This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in one
of the dual systems.
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

detected
b7 b0
2 Status at the time of fault detection

b0: 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1
b7 b6 b0 b6: 0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status
System 0/System 1
Reference: See Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault for the repair procedure.
– 218 –
1-C: Both TSW Write Failure

MN 2
This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both
systems.
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

detected
b7 b0
2
b0: 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1
b6: 0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status
b7 b6 b0 System 0/System 1
Reference: See Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs
Intermittently on ACT sidefor the repair procedure.
– 219 –
1-D: TSW Write Failure

MN 2
This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in
one of the dual systems.
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

detected
b7 b0
2 Status at the time of fault detection b0: 0/1 = TSW 0/TSW 1

b6: 0/1 = Speech Path ACT status
b7 b6 b0 TSW System 0 is ACT/TSW System 1 is ACT
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech, Speech Path System Fault -
STBY Side Has Become Fault, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side for the repair
procedure.
– 220 –
1-E: Both TSW Clock Failure

MN 3
This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head
down, in both systems.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 TSW card in which a fault is b0: 0/1 = -/TSW System 0

detected b1: 0/1 = -/TSW System 1
b7 b1 b0
2 Clock status of TSW 0 b2: 0/1 = -/DTG output down

b6: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) System 0 down
b7 b6 b2 b0 b7: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) System 0 down
3 Clock status of TSW 1
Note: Refer to the meaning of 2 .
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard for the repair
procedure.
– 221 –
1-F: TSW Clock Failure

MJ 3
This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame Head
down, in one of the dual systems.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 TSW card in which a fault is b0: 0/1 = -/TSW 0

detected b1: 0/1 = -/TSW System 1
b7 b1 b0
2 Clock status of TSW 0 b2: 0/1 = -/DTG output down

b6: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) System 0 down
b7 b6 b2 b0 b7: 0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) System 1 down
3 Clock status of TSW 1
Note: Refer to the meaning of 2 .
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault, for the repair procedure.
– 222 –
1-O: Both PLO Failure

MJ 3
This message displays when the system detects a fault, such as input clock all down or output clock down in the
PLO cards, at both sides.
1: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detected PLO number b0: 0/1 = PLO 0/PLO 1

b7 b0
2 Valid Information bit for Scan b0-b7: Bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan Data 1
Data 1 ( 4 ) is flagged “1”.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Reference: See PLO Card Replacement Procedure, for the circuit card replacement procedure.
– 223 –
4 Scan Data 1: Current Status of PLO b0: Clock status at time of detection
card 0/1 = STBY/ACT
b1: Circuit Card status at time of detection
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drift abnormal
b2: 0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of Input clock
b4 b3 DCS INPUT ROUTE ROUTE OF INPUT

CLOCK
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 - 2
1 1 - 3
b5: 0/1 = -/PLO input all down

b6: 0/1 = -/PLO output down
b7: 0/1 = -/Drifting
5 Scan Data 2: Current Status of PLO b0: 0/1 = -/Five milliseconds Burst Clock down
card b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down
b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down
b7 b4 b1 b0
– 224 –
1-P: PLO Failure

MN 3
This message displays when the system detects all the failures concerned with input clock down or output clock
down in the PLO card at the ACT side. When this message is indicated, the PLO card changeover executes.
Note: The PLO Card 0 automatically changes over to 1. The changeover of 1 to 0 is not automatic.
1: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Self-CPU Restart Information b0: 0/1 = PLO 0/PLO 1

b7 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Valid Information bit for Scan Data b0-b7: Bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan Data 2
2 ( 5 ) is flagged “1”.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 PLO Card Replacement Procedure for the circuit card replacement procedure.
– 225 –
4 Scan Data 1: Status of PLO card b0: Clock status at time of detection
0/1 = STBY/ACT
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: Circuit card at time of detection
0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting
b3, b4: Route of Input clock
b4 b3 DCS INPUT ROUTE ROUTE OF INPUT

CLOCK
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 - 2
1 1 - 3

5 Scan Data: Status of PLO card b0: 0/1 = -/Five millisecond Burst Clock down
b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down
b7 b4 b1 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down
– 226 –
1-S: Module Group Down Failure

MJ 3
This message displays when a fault of the speech path system has occurred in a specific Module Group. The
specific Module Group is placed into make-busy state.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 MG number of fault detection b0: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b7 b0
2 Kind of failure b0-b7: 00H/01H = -/ACT side TSW fault

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Speech Path/Clock System b0: ACT side speech path

0/1 = System 0/System 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: ACT side clock
0/1 = System 0/System 1
Reference: See Chapter 5 TSW Replacement: 1-IMG or TSW Card Replacement Procedure: 4-IMG for the
circuit card replacement procedure.
– 227 –
1-T: TSW ACT Change Report

NON 2
This message displays when the changeover of the TSW system is executed.
1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 ACT side Speech Path (TSW) after b0: 0/1 = System 0/System 1
changeover
b7 b0
– 228 –
2 Reason for changeover

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7-b4 b3-b0 CARD CONTENTS
0 1 TSW I/O Alarm
2 32ch Clock down, FH down
3 24ch Clock down, FH down
6 TSW SW Memory write failure
9 I/O Alarm release
10 32ch Clock down recovered,
FH down recovered
11 24ch Clock down recovered,
FH down recovered
13 TSW MBR key OFF
15 TSW ACT/STBY changeover by CMOD
command
6 1 MUX MUX circuit card Ready failure
2 MUX circuit card Clock failure
3 ~ 6 Status of ACT-side TSW card
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 3 MG 00 MG 01
4 MG 02 MG 03
5 MG 04 MG 05
6 MG 06 MG 07
b7-b4 b3-b0
b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07)

0000 = Normal
0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links)
– 229 –
7 ~ 10 Status of STBY-side TSW card

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 7 MG 00 MG 01
8 MG 02 MG 03
9 MG 04 MG 05
10 MG 06 MG 07
b7-b4 b3-b0
b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07)

0000 = Normal
0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links)
– 230 –
1-U: DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent)

MN 3
This message displays when DLKC data transfer failure (temporary), shown in System Message [1-V], occurs
more than 16 times an hour. At this time, the faulty DLKC card is down and its switching network automatically
changes over.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 System status of faulty DLKC card b0: 0/1 = System 0/ System 1

b7 b0
2 Error Code 01H: Firmware fault

02H: Data transfer time out to DLKC
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: No answer time out (at DLKC)
04H: Data parity error
3 Details on Switching Network b0: Status of Speech Path System (including DLKC)
0/1 = System 0 is ACT/System 1 is ACT
b7 b1 b0 b1: Status of basic clock
– 231 –
1-V: DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary)

SUP 1
This message displays when a data sending error or no answer error occurs at the time of data transfer from CPU
to DLKC card.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 System status of faulty DLKC card b0: 0/1 = System 0/System 1

b7 b0
2 Error Code 01H: Firmware fault

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02H: Data transfer time out to DLKC
03H: No answer time out (at DLKC)
04H: Data parity error
3 Details on Switching Network b0: Status of Speech Path System (including DLKC)
b7 b1 b0 0/1 = System 0 is ACT/System 1 is ACT
b1: Status of basic clock
b7: Information on Reset of STBY DLKC Note
0/1 = - /STBY DLKC card was reset
Note: This data displays when the STBY DLKC card is detected as faulty.
– 232 –
1-W: PLO Restore

NON 3
This message displays when a failure such as internal clock down occurred to PLO is restored.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Restoration of PLO fault b0: 0/1 = PLO System 0/PLO System 1

b7 b0
2 Current Status of PLO card b0: 0/1 = Clock is in STBY side/ACT side
b1: 0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of input clock (see the table below)
CONNECTED WITH PRIMARY CONNECTED WITH

b4 b3
OSCILLATOR (M-OSC) EXTERNAL CLOCK
0 0 M-OSC 0 Route 0
0 1 M-OSC 1 Route 1
1 0 – Route 2
1 1 – Route 3

3 Current Status of PLO card b0: 0/1 = -/Five millisecond clock down
b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down
b7 b4 b1 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down
– 233 –
3-B: C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)

MN 3
This message displays when a C-Level program abnormal state is detected as permanent. When the Port
Microprocessor (PM) on an LC/TRK card detects the abnormal state, the PM places the card into make-busy
status. If the failure occurs more than 15 times an hour, the system judges the failure as permanent and issues
this system message.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty Circuit Card Mounting b0-b4: Group

Location b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7: Module Group (0/1)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 234 –
3-C: C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)

SUP 1
This message displays when C-Level program is detected as abnormal by the Port Microprocessor (PM)
mounted on an LC/TRK card. If the failure occurs less than 15 times/hour, and a B-monitor/Initial restart
executes as the result, the failure is judged as temporary and this message is created.
1: XX0X 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty Circuit Card Mounting b0-b4: Group

Location b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7: Module Group (0/1)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 PM Restart Type b0: 0/1 = B-monitor/Initial Restart Note

b7 b0
Note: B-monitor Restart: Ports whose link has already been established remain connected. Ports processing a
call-origination may be released.
Initial Restart: All ports on the circuit card are forcibly released to be placed in idle state.
– 235 –
3-D: Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)

MN 3
At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in
order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the
system displays this data. When the failure is detected more than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as
permanent.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty Circuit Card Location b0-b4: Group

b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7: Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
Reference: See Chapter 5 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side for the repair
procedure.
– 236 –
3-E: Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)

SUP 1
At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in
order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the
system displays this data. When the failure is detected less than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as
temporary.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty Circuit Card Location b0-b4: Group

b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7: Module Group
2 PM Restart Type b0: 0/1 = B-monitor/Initial Restart

b7 b0
– 237 –
3-F: -48V Over Current

SUP 3
This message displays when over current of the operating power (DC-48V) is supplied from the ATI/ELC
circuit card to the Attendant Console/Dterm. When this fault occurs, the related circuit card is placed into make-
busy state and stops supplying power.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty PM b0-b4: Group

b5, b6: Unit
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
– 238 –
3-G: Ground Failure

SUP 1
This message displays when a wire of the line between the LC circuit card and the telephone set is short-circuited
with ground.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty circuit card b0-b2: Circuit (0-7)

b3-b7: Circuit Card (0-31)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Location of faulty circuit card b0, b1: Unit (0-3)

b2-b7: MG (0-1)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note: This message displays when the specific LC card providing the above function is used.
– 239 –
3-H: Digital Line Warning

SUP 2
This message displays when the DTI card detects an abnormal state of a digital line, but this failure has no
influence on the speech path. When the status worsens, the system issues [3-I] Digital Line Failure message.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of PM (LENS) with a fault b0-b4: Group

b5, b6: Unit
2 Kind of fault 01H = Frame alignment loss occurs three times a day
02H = Bit error rate is over 10-6
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H = Slip occurs twice a day
04H = Multi-frame alignment loss occurs three times a day
08H = Fault-detection on the CCIS Bch
3 Time Slot number of fault (This data b0-b4: Time slot number in which the digital line failure occurred
is valid only when the kind of fault (1-16, 17-31)
is 08H.)
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 240 –
3-I: Digital Line Failure

SUP 3
This message displays after [3-H] Digital Line Warning lasts in the DTI card over the particular time. This
failure may cause a speech path fault to the DTI card.
1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
3 4 3 4
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty PM b0-b4: Group

b5, b6: Unit
2 Kind of fault 01H = Frame alignment loss occurs 100 times a day
03H = Slip occurs 50 times a day
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 04H = Multi-frame alignment loss occurs 110 times a day
06H = Frame alignment loss lasts for two to three seconds
07H = Bit error rate is over 10-4
09H = Warning signal (AIS) from the opposite office has been received for
one second continuously.
0BH = Multi-frame alignment loss lasts for two to three seconds
0FH = Digital Line is not restored
3 Location of faulty circuit card (This b3-b7: Group number

data is valid when 2 is 0FH)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b0
– 241 –
4 Location of faulty circuit card (This b0, b1: Unit number

data is valid when 2 is 0FH) b2-b7: MG number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 242 –
3-J: Digital Line Restore

NON 0
This message displays when a digital line fault is restored.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty line b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/odd-numbered MG
– 243 –
3-K: Line Fault

SUP 1
This message indicates that A wire and B wire of the line between the LC circuit card and telephone set is short-
circuiting with each other.
Note: This message is available in Australia only.
1: XX0X 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty line (G, U, MG No.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
b7: Module Group
2 Location of faulty line (level number)
b7 b2 b1 b0 b0-b2: Level Number (0-7)
– 244 –
3-L: Line Fault Release

SUP 1
This message indicates that A wire and B wire of the line between the LC circuit card and telephone set, which
once short-circuited (cf. 3-K “Line Fault” (Page 240)), have become normal.)
Note: This message is available in Australia only.
1: XX0X 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of the faulty line (G, U, MG No.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
b7: Module Group
2 Location of the faulty line (level number)
b7 b2 b1 b0 b0-b2: Level Number (0-7)
– 245 –
4-C: Both TSW Ready Failure

MN 3
This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in both systems as a result of the TSW card having a failure
or the card is not mounted properly.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit and MG number of fault b0: 0/1 = TSW System 0/TSW System 1
detection
Note: When Ready Failure occurs in both systems, the [4-C]
b7 b0
message is separately issued twice: “0” displays in one
message, and “1” in the other message.
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard for the repair
procedure.
– 246 –
4-D: TSW Ready Failure

MN 3
This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in one of the dual systems because the TSW card fails or
the card is not mounted properly.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit and MG number of fault b0: 0/1 = TSW System 0/TSW System 1
detection
b7 b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault or the repair procedure.
– 247 –
4-Q: DLKC Ready Failure

MN 3
This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs on a DLKC card.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Details on faulty DLKC card b0: 0/1 = System 0/System 1

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY
b7 b0
– 248 –
4-S: MUX Ready Failure

MN 3
This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in one of the dual systems. When
the card is not ready for service because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly, the system
creates this message.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit and MG number for MUX card b0: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 0
with ready fault b1: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 1
b2: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 3
b4: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in odd-numbered MG, Unit 0
2 MG and system number for faulty b0: MG number for faulty MUX card
MUX card 0/1 = Even number/Odd number
b1: 0/1 = Ready failure in MUX System 0/Ready failure in MUX System 1
b7 b2 b1 b0 b2: ACT or STBY status of faulty MUX.
0/1 = ACT/STBY
Reference: See Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over for the repair
procedure.
– 249 –
4-T: Both MUX Ready Failure

MN 3
This message displays when the MUX card has a Ready Failure in both of the dual systems. When the card is
not ready for service because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly, the system creates this
system message.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit and MG number for MUX card b0: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 0
with the ready fault b1: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 1
b2: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/MUX ready fault in even-numbered MG, Unit 3
2 MG and system number for faulty b0: MG number for faulty MUX card
MUX card 0/1 = Even number/Odd number
b1: 0/1 = Ready failure in MUX System 0/Ready failure in MUX System
b7 b2 b1 b0 1 Note 1
b2: ACT or STBY status of the faulty MUX Note 2
0/1 = ACT/STBY
Note 1: Though this message indicates the Ready Failure in both systems, the information displayed here only
relates to the ACT-side MUX status. (Two messages are not displayed separately.)
Note 2: Fixed as 0 (=ACT) Note 1.
procedure.
– 250 –
4-U: PCI Card Failure

MN 3
This message displays when a PCI card failure occurs.
1: 0X0X XX0X XX0X XX00 2: 000X XX00 000X XX0X 3: XX00 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detection of LAN connector fault b0: 0/1 = -/Fault occurrence to LAN3 connector
b1: 0/1 = -/Fault occurrence to LAN2 connector
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Fault occurrence to LAN1 connector
b3: 0/1 = -/Fault occurrence to LAN4 connector
2 LAN3 connector fault status: b0: 0/1 = -/Link fault Note 1

F-Bus Link fault b1: 0/1 = -/Late Collision fault
b2: 0/1 = -/Parallel fault
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/Transmission Speed fault
3 LAN3 connector fault status: b0: 0/1 = -/Carrier loss

F-Bus Link fault b1: 0/1 = -/SQE test error
b2: 0/1 = -/Jabber error
b7 b2 b1 b0 b7: 0/1 = -/Initial fault
– 251 –
4 LAN3 connector fault status: b0: 0/1 = -/Link fault

P-Bus Link fault b1: 0/1 = -/Late Collision fault

P-Bus Link fault b7: 0/1 = -/Initial fault
b7 b0
6 LAN2 connector fault status: b0: 0/1 = -/Link fault Note 1

slot1 External Ether card
b7 b0
7 LAN2 connector fault status: b2: 0/1 = -/Jabber error

slot1 External Ether card b3: 0/1 = -/Sending error
b7: 0/1 = -/Initial error
b7 b3 b2 b0
8 LAN1 connector fault status b0: 0/1 = -/Link fault Note 1
b7 b0
9 LAN1 connector fault status b2: 0/1 = -/Jabber error Note 1

b3: 0/1 = -/Sending error
b7 b3 b2 b0 b7: 0/1 = -/Initial error
– 252 –

F-Bus Link fault b1: 0/1 = -/Late Collision fault

F-Bus Link fault b1: 0/1 = -/SQE test error
b2: 0/1 = -/Jabber error
b7 b2 b1 b0 b7: 0/1 = -/Initial fault

P-Bus Link fault b1: 0/1 = -/Late Collision fault

P-Bus Link fault b7: 0/1 = -/Initial fault
b7 b0
Note 1: Physical link failure includes the following:

- Ether cable disconnection
- Ether cable electrical short out
- Ether cable type, straight or cross, mixing up
– 253 –
4-V: PCI Card Failure Recovered

MN 3
This message displays when the PCI card, which was detected as faulty, is recovered.
1: 0X0X 0X0X 0X00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detection of LAN connector fault b0: 0/1 = -/LAN3 connector fault release
release b1: 0/1 = -/LAN2 connector fault release
b2: 0/1 = -/LAN1 connector fault release
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/LAN4 connector fault release
2 LAN3 connector fault release status b0: 0/1 = -/F-BUS Link release
b1: 0/1 = -/P-BUS Link release
b7 b1 b0
3 LAN3 connector fault release status b0: 0/1 = -/External Ether Link fault release
b7 b0
4 LAN1 connector fault release status b0: 0/1 = -/External Ether Link fault release
b7 b0
5 LAN4 connector fault release status b0: 0/1 = -/F-BUS Link release
b1: 0/1 = -/P-BUS Link release
b7 b1 b0
– 254 –
4-W: TSW Ready Failure Restore

MN 3
This message is displayed when TSW Ready failure is restored.
1: XXXX 0XX0 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Information on TSW Ready failure b0: 0/1 = -/Failure restoration in TSW system 0
restoration b1: 0/1 = -/Failure restoration in TSW system 1
b2: 0/1 = Failure restoration in TSW on even-numbered MG/
b7 b2 b1 b0 Failure restoration in TSW on odd-numbered MG
b7: 0/1 = TSW in normal state after restart/
TSW in abnormal state after restart
2 Self CPU status after restart b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor restart

b7: 0/1 = ACT/STBY
b7 b0
3 Failure information b0–b3: Type of failure (HEX)

00= -
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 01= DLKC/PLO initialize failure
02= TSW ACT changeover failure
03= GT card abnormal
04= GT card abnormal (MB control abnormal)
06= GT card abnormal
07= GT card abnormal (MB control abnormal)
09= During fault processing
0A= During fault processing
0B= TSW ACT changeover failure
– 255 –
4 Related call release result b7: 0/1 = Released/Not released

b7 b0
– 256 –
6-A: System Failure

NON 3 (FIXED)NON (FIXED)3
This message displays when any of the following faults are detected:
• Power failure
• FAN failure
• Fuse blowing
• In-Frame abnormal temperature
1: XX00 XXXX 00XX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Probable cause for failure b0: Input power (-48V) down/abnormal detected
b1: PWR Supply abnormal detected Note 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: PWR Supply Fuse Blown detected
b3: Abnormal temperature MJ (70ºC [158ºF])
b4: Abnormal temperature MN (60ºC [140ºF])
b5: (0 is fixed.)
b6: FAN failure detected Note 2
Note 1: When abnormal PWR Supply is detected, the alarm lamps light as the following, according to the na-
ture of its failure.
(1) When either one of the systems of PWR Supply circuit cards in the IMG is faulty, MN lamp turns on.
(2) When either one of each system of PWR, GT, and PLO circuit cards in the TSWR is faulty, MN lamp
turns on.
(3) When either one of the pair of PWR Supply circuit cards in the MISCR is faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
(4) When both system of PWR Supply circuit cards within the same IMG are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
(5) When both system of PWR Supply circuit cards in the TSWR are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
(6) When both system of GT circuit cards in the TSWR are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
(7) When both system of PLO circuit cards in the TSWR are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
(8) When both system of PWR Supply circuit cards in the MISCR are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
– 257 –
Note 2: When FAN failure is detected, the alarm lamps light as the following, according to the nature of its fail-
ure.
(1) When FAN failure is detected in any of the IMG, TSWR, or MISCR, MN lamp turns on.
(2) When either one of the three CPU FANs is faulty, MN lamp turns on.
(3) When two or all of the three CPU FANs are faulty, MJ lamp turns on.
2 Frame in which a fault is detected b0-b3: Frame (0 Only)

0/1 = CPU is mounted/Not mounted
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4, b5: Frame Group number
b6, b7: Kind of frame
00 = IMG
01 = CPU
02 = TSWR
03 = MISCR
3 Factor of failure b0: 0/1 = -/OBP Alarm 0 side

b1: 0/1 = -/OBP Alarm 1 side
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/OBP Alarm MISC side
b3: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm 0 side
b4: 0/1 = -/Power Alarm 1 side
Reference: See Chapter 5 Power Supply Fault, for the repair procedure.
4 Factor of failure (for SR-MGC(SR b0: 0/1 = -/POWER UNIT for Dual Configuration is connected to CPU
T20) only) 0.
b1: 0/1 = -/Internal failure of the POWER UNIT in CPU 0.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/The POWER UNIT for Dual Configuration connected to
CPU 0 is faulty.
b3: 0/1 = -/The FAN UNIT for Dual Configuration connected to CPU 0
is faulty.
b4: 0/1 = -/POWER UNIT for Dual Configuration is connected to CPU
0.
b5: 0/1 = -/Internal failure of the POWER UNIT in CPU 1.
b6: 0/1 = -/The POWER UNIT for Dual Configuration connected to
CPU 1 is faulty.
b7: 0/1 = -/The FAN UNIT for Dual Configuration connected to the
CPU 1 is faulty.
5 Factor of failure (for SV8500 only) b0: 0/1 = -/OBD Alarm GT 0 system
b1: 0/1 = -/OBD Alarm GT 1system
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/OBD Alarm PLO 0 system
b3: 0/1 = -/OBD Alarm occurred in 0 System of PLO
b4: 0/1 = -/FAN 0 side failure
– 258 –
6-B: RGU & Howler Failure

MN 3
This message displays when a fault in either the ringer or howler tone occurs in the PWR card.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit and MG number of fault b0, b1: Unit (0-3)

detection b2: 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
b7 b2 b1 b0
2 Kind of fault b0: 0/1 = -/RGU (Ringing Unit) Fault

b1: 0/1 = -/Howler Fault
b7 b1 b0
– 259 –
6-C: Line Load Control Start

NON 3
This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate exceeds the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1,
INDEX 56, and the call origination from the pre-selected group of stations is restricted (i.e., Line Load Control
is set). This system message is always indicated as 0.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 260 –
6-D: Line Load Control Stop

NON 2
This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate becomes lower than the value assigned to ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX 57, and Line Load Control is cancelled. This system message is always indicated as 0.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 261 –
6-H: Bad Call Notification

SUP 2
This message displays to indicate the result of Bad Call Notification.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
b0-b3: Station number digit with the fault. [This data is always indicated as
“0” when type of connection is 2 (ACD Trunk).]
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7: Type of connection
0 = Station connection
1 = Trunk connection
2 = ACD Trunk connection
When type of connection is Station connection

2 - 4 Station number (see table.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7 b0-b3
2 DC0 DC1
3 DC2 DC3
4 DC4 DC5
5 The called station number b0-b3: Number of digits for called station number
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 262 –
6 - 8 Called station number

(See table.)
b4-b7 b0-b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 6 DC0 DC1
7 DC2 DC3
8 DC4 DC5
9 Time Slot Number of Link 1
– 263 –
When type of connection is Trunk connection

2 - 4 Station number (See table.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7 b0-b3
2 DC0 DC1
3 DC2 DC3
4 DC4 DC5
5 Remote Route number b0-b5: Route (1-63)

b6: OP
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0/1 = Data in OPRT is invalid/valid
b7: AC
0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk
6 Remote Route number b0-b3: OPRT Route (Over 64)

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
7 Called Trunk number b0-b7: Trunk number

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 264 –
When type of connection is ACD Trunk connection
2 ACD Trouble Kind b0-b7: ACD trouble kind

01H=ACD trunk trouble key Note 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 14H=ACD reset start Note 2
15H=Insufficient ACD memory
16H=Insufficient ACD call record
17H=Excessive business station on ACD calls
18H=Excessive calls queued
21H=Unknown Pilot number called Note 3
24H=Illegal execution of ACD timeout procedure Note 4
30H=ACD pointer error detection and recovery Note 5
33H=ACDP reset completion Note 6
34H=Call recovery failure on unknown Pilot number Note 7
37H=ACD Traffic (incoming) Capacity Over
99H=Illegal ACD processing-trace stored Note 4
Note 1: When (ACD Trouble Kind) is 01 HEX:

3 - 6 Information on Calling Party
(a) Station (b) Trunk
My Line number Route number + Trunk number
b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3
3 DC0 DC1 3 DC0
Route number
4 DC2 DC3 4 DC1 DC2
5 DC4 DC5 5 DC0
Trunk number
6 6 DC1 DC2
Example: RT 125,TK l0
7 8 Not used 01 25 00 l0
9 10 Information on Calling Party 3 4 5 6
Refer to 3 ~ 6
11 12 Information on Held Party or 3rd Station/Trunk in 3-Party Connection
Refer to 3 ~ 6

3 Issue of ACDP (First digit of decimal place)
4 Issue of ACDP (Second digit of decimal place)

3 ~ 6 Information on Calling Party
Refer to 3 ~ 6 of Note 1
7 8 Not used
9 10 Information on Unknown Pilot number
Refer to 3 ~ 6 , (a) Station of Note 1
– 265 –
Note 4: When (ACD Trouble Kind) is 24 or 99 HEX:

3 ~ 6 Not used
7 8 Error Counter

3 ~ 6 Pointer Address
7 Not used
8 Error Kind

3 ACDP Data Memory
00 = Used
01 = Not used
4 ACDP System Capacity
02 = 50 Agent positions
07 = 500 Agent positions Note
15 = 2,000 Agent positions
Note: If other data is output, the ACD system may not be working correctly. In this case, be sure to install the ACD
application again by using the MSVICD command.

3 ~ 6 Information on Unknown Pilot number
Refer to 3 ~ 6 , (a) Station of Note 1
– 266 –
6-I: STA-Test Connection Data

NON 3
This message displays to indicate the result of a designated connection test (Individual Trunk Access) from a
station.
Table 1:
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 00XX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 12 12 12 12
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Test Item (b0-b3 is valid only for b0-b2: Kind of Signal

Outgoing trunk test) 2 = Second Dial Tone
6 = Sender (Delay Dial Start)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 7 = Sender (Wink Start)
b3: 0/1 = Data is invalid/valid
b4-b7: Test item
1 = Outgoing Trunk Test
2 = ORT/IRT Test
3 = Sender Test
4 = Digital Conference
5 = Tone Test
6 = Ringing Signal test
0 = Test NG
– 267 –
2
b0-b3: Number of digits of the testing station number
b4-b7: Error Numbers (See table.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Error Numbers and Their Meanings
ERROR
MEANING
NO.
0 ---
1 The testing station is restricted from activating the service.
2 Route Number error of the designated trunk
3 Trunk Number error of the designated trunk
4 Trunk busy
5 Sender busy
6 SMDR failure
7 Call origination restriction
8 Register busy
9 Trunk number error - when the trunk has been designated
by SHF.
A Trunk busy - when the trunk has been designated by SHF.
B Inter-digit timer expiration
C Register or sender is defective with respect to DP, DP/PB
D Register of sender is faulty with respect to PB
E Tone fault
F Test Processing error
3 - 5 Station number of testing station

(See table.)
b4-b7 b0-b3
3 DC0 DC1
4 DC2 DC3
5 DC4 DC5
6 Tenant number b0-b3: Tenant (1-15)

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7: OP
0/1 = Data in OPTN ( 7 ) is invalid/valid
– 268 –
7 OPTN data b0-b3: Tenant (Over 15)

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 Tested Route number b0-b5: Route (1-63) Note

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b6: OP
0/1 = Data in OPRT( 9 ) is invalid/valid
b7: AC
Note:When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.
9 OPRT data b0-b7: Route( >

= 64) Note
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note: When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.
10 (This data is not for Ringing Signal b0-b7: Trunk number for Outgoing trunk test, ORT/IRT Test, Sender Test
Test) and Digital Conference test
Tone Slot number for Tone Test
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 = DT 1 = SPDT
2 = RBT 3 = CRBT, CWT
4 = BT 5 = RBT
6 = SST, WT 7 = SDT
8 = TRG 9 = SDTT
10 = CWRBT 14 = MSC
11 Digit of Dialed Number (for test)
b0-b4: Dialed number digit sent by the test Trunk/Sender
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 or
Dialed Number digit received by the test Register
12 Dialed Number (for test)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 269 –
(a) Dialed Number sent by the test Trunk/Sender (b) Dial Number received by the test Register
b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3
DC0 DC1 DC12 DC13 DC0 DC1

DC10 DC11 DC10 DC11
– 270 –
6-J: Emergency Call

SUP 3
This message displays when a call terminates to the Emergency Telephone.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - 6 Called Station (Emergency 1 DC0 (1st digit)

Telephone) number 2 DC1 (2nd digit)
(ASCII Code)
3 DC2 (3rd digit)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 4 DC3 (4th digit)
5 DC4 (5th digit)
6 DC5 (6th digit)
7 - 12 Calling Station number (ASCII

7 DC0 (1st digit)
Code)
8 DC1 (2nd digit)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 9 DC2 (3rd digit)
10 DC3 (4th digit)
11 DC4 (5th digit)
12 DC5 (6th digit)
– 271 –
6-L: Emergency Control Start

NON 3
This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is set at the Attendant Desk Console.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Route Selection Time Pattern b0-b2: Pattern (1-7)

number assigned at Attendant Desk
Console
b7 b2 b1 b0
Note: Route Selection Time Pattern 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN 0-7 in the AOPR command.
– 272 –
6-M: Emergency Control Stop

NON 3
This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is cancelled at the Attendant Desk Console.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Suspension of Emergency Control b0: Fixed 0.

0 = Outgoing call restriction is released by Attendant Desk Console
b7 b0
Note: Route Selection Patterns 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN 0-7 in the AOPR command.
– 273 –
6-N: Abnormal Call Duration Data

NON 0
This message displays when the system detects abnormal duration in the line connection between the calling
and called party. When the calling and called party establish a line connection and continue the hook-up for an
extremely short or long period of time [predetermined by the ASYD command (SYS1, INDEX 45, 46)], this
message is created.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00
1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Calling party information b0-b3: Type of Calling party

0 = Station
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 = Attendant console
2 = Trunk
b7: 0/1 = Short/Long Time
2 Tenant number of Calling/Called party (HEX)
3 Calling party Information
When calling party is Station

Calling station number (See table.)
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7 b0-b3
DC0 DC1
DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
– 274 –
When calling party is ATTCON/DESKCON

Attendant/Desk console number
(See table.)
b4- b7 b0-b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DC0 DC1
When calling party is Trunk

Route and Trunk number (See table.)
b0-b7
(a) Route (HEX) Note
(b) Route (HEX) Note
(c) Trunk (HEX)
(d) Trunk (HEX)
Note:
Route (a) b0-b5: Route (1-63)
b6: OP
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0/1 = Data in OPRT is invalid/valid
b7: AC
Route (b)
b0-b3: OPRT
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 Route (Over 64)
4 Called party information

b0-b3:
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 00 = Station-to-Station call
01 = Outgoing call to outside
02 = Incoming call from outside
– 275 –
5 Called Party Information

Station to Station Call
(a) Type of called party
b4-b7 b0-b3
00 = Station (a)
01 = Attendant Console Tenant
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Tenant
DC0 DC1
DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
OG Call to outside (IC Call from outside)
b4-b7 b0-b3 b0-b7

Route (HEX) Route (HEX)
Route (HEX) Route (HEX)
Trunk (HEX) Trunk (HEX)
Trunk (HEX) Trunk (HEX)
DC0 DC1
DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
DC6 DC7
DC8 DC9
DC10 DC11
DC12 DC13
DC14 DC15
DC16 DC17
DC18 DC19
– 276 –
6-O: SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm

SUP 1
This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has exceeded the value assigned to ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX 249.
1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detail Information b0-b3: FS

b4-b7: FE
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
This system message varies depending on the data.
FS FE MEANING
(a) 0 0 SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value
assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249.
(a) 0 1 After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the
value assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249,
usage rate lowered less than the value assigned by
INDEX 250.
(b) 1 0 -
(c) 2 0 Data output is impossible due to SMDR apparatus
failure.
(a) FS = 0, FE = 0/1
2 b0: 0/1 = Data assigned by the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249, 250 is valid/
invalid
b7 b0
– 277 –
3 Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by b0-b3: Units

ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249 b4-b7: Tens
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4 Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by b0-b3: Units

ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 250 b4-b7: Tens
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(b) FS = 1, FE = 0
2
b0: Fault Grade by ALMG command
00 = NON CONT 01 = SUP
b7 b2 b1 b0
10 = MN 11 = MJ
3 Overflow Rate b0: 0/1 = -/100% Overflow

b7 b0
4 Overflow Rate b4-b7: 1-9 = 10%-90% Overflow

b7 b6 b5 b4 b0
– 278 –
(c) FS = 2, FE = 0
2 SMDR Group number b0-b3: SMDR Group number to which failure occurred
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Port number b0-b7: Port number allocated for SMDR Group to which failure occurred
(0-7)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
(d) FS = 3, FE = 0
2 b0-b3: SMDR Group number to which failure occurred

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 279 –
6-P: SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release

NON 0
This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has been lowered to less than the value assigned
in the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 250 after the rate exceeds the value assigned by INDEX 249.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detail Information b0-b7: 00H = After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value
assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 249, the rate lowered less than
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 the value assigned by INDEX 250.
– 280 –
7-A: System Initialize With Data Load

NON 3
This message displays after the office data is loaded and system initialization has executed.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Initial Information
b0: 0/1 = IPL/PWR ON

b1: 0/1 = Load Key OFF/ON
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = IPL KEY/PCPro INITIAL
b3: 0/1 = Program load/Non Program load
b4: 0/1 = -/Phase 1 Restart Note
Note: Phase1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way
connections that have already been established:
• Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)
• Fixed connections
• Two-way connections established on a FCCS link
For more information, see Chapter 2 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM.
– 281 –
2 Load Status b0: Office Data Load Status

0/1 = Load OK/NG
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: Call Forwarding Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b2: SPD Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b3: RCF Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b4: Name Display Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b23 b21 b20 b17 b16 b5: Network DM Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b6: Local DM Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b31 b24 b7: DM Load Status
0/1 = DM Load/Non Load
b8: User Assign Soft Key Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b39 b32 b9: Sub Station Transfer Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b10: ACD Office Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b47 b40 b11: Call Block Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b12: ICB Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b55 b48 b13: Expansion Speed Dial Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b14: Call Forwarding-Logout Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b63 b62 b61 b59 b58 b57 b56 b15: SPD Data Load Status for DtermIP
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b16: Drive 0 (B) Load Status
b71 b64 b17: Drive 2 (C) Load Status
b20: Drive 0 (A) Load Status
b21: Drive 3 (D) Load Status
b56: H.323 Call Forwarding Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b57: MA-ID Data
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b58: SR-MGC Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b59: SIP Extension Call Forwarding Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b61: SPD Name Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b62: Mobility Access Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b63: Day/Night Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
b64: Local Phone book Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
– 282 –
7-B: System Initialize

NON 3
This message displays when system initialization is activated.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 b2: 0/1 = IPL KEY/PCPro INITIAL

b3: 0/1 = Program Load/Non Load
b7 b4 b3 b2 b0 b4: 0/1 = -/Phase1 Restart Note
Note:Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way
connections that have already been established:
• Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)
• Fixed connections
• Two-way connections established on a FCCS link
For more information, see Chapter 2 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE OF THE SYSTEM.
– 283 –
7-C: CPU MBR Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MBR switch on the Telephony Server is turned ON at the time of system
changeover or speech path changeover.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Self-CPU Restart information b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

2 Mate-CPU Restart information b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

– 284 –
7-D: CPU MBR Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MBR switch on the Telephony Server is turned OFF at the time of system
changeover or speech path changeover.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Self-CPU Restart information b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

2 Mate-CPU Restart information b0: 0/1 = -/Monitor Restart

– 285 –
7-E: TSW MBR Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned ON at CPU changeover or speech path
changeover.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 System status of TSW card b0: 0/1 = System 0/System 1

b7: Kind of Circuit Card
b7 b0 0/1 = SW 12/GT 19
– 286 –
7-F: TSW MBR Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card is turned OFF at CPU changeover or speech path
changeover.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 System status of TSW card b0: 0/1 = System 0/System 1

b7: Kind of Circuit Card
b7 b0 0/1 = SW 12/GT 09
– 287 –
7-G: TSW PLO Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the PLO MBR switch on TSW is turned ON (UP).
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Information on PLO MBR operation b0: 0/1=System 0/System 1

b7 b0
– 288 –
7-H: TSW PLO Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the PLO MBR switch on TSW is turned OFF (DOWN).
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Information on PLO MBR operation b0: 0/1=System 0/System 1

b7 b0
– 289 –
7-K: PM MB Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a
circuit card or at PM initialization.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty Line/Trunk card b0-b4: Circuit Card (0-31)

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7: MG number
– 290 –
7-L: PM MB Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a
circuit card or at PM initialization.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty Line/Trunk card b0-b4: Circuit Card (0-31)

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 291 –
7-M: NCU MB Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a circuit
card, or at PM initialization.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty PFT card number b0-b2: Circuit Card (0-7)

b7 b2 b1 b0
2 Location of faulty PFT card b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 292 –
7-N: NCU MB Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting a circuit
card, or at PM initialization.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty PFT card number b0-b2: Circuit Card (0-7)

b7 b2 b1 b0
2 Location of faulty PFT card b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 293 –
7-O: Cyclic Diagnosis Normal

NON 3
In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they
are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis
program and the result of the diagnosis is normal.
1 Note 1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Performed Diagnosis Item [00H] Routine Diagnosis Start

[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold
[51H] Accommodated Location of PS - No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Note 1: The data in this area will be Note 2
diverse, according to the di- [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End
agnosis specified in 1 . For [A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal End
details on each item data, [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End
see the following pages.
Note 2: This is output when a PS

line is accommodated on programmable line/feature key of the Dterm as a sub line.
– 294 –
[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start
1: 00XX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Performed Diagnosis Item [00H] Routine Diagnosis Start
2 Pending Diagnosis Menu (SYS1, b0: 0/1=-/Program Memory Verification

INDEX 89) b1: 0/1=-/Data Memory Verification
b2: 0/1=-/TSW ACT/STBY Changeover
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1=-/CPU ACT/STBY Changeover
b4: 0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Check
b5: 0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection
b6: 0/1=-/Call Forwarding Memory Clear Service
b7: 0/1=-/IP ACT/STBY changeover
3 Pending Diagnosis Menu (SYS1, b1: 0/1=-/Periodic Back-up

INDEX 90) b2: 0/1=-/HFC Diagnosis
b3: 0/1=-/Unused Link Detection
b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4 Automatic Transferring Memory b0: 0/1=-/Automatic Call Forwarding Cancellation

Cancellation b1: 0/1=-/Automatic Call Forwarding Busy Cancellation
b2: 0/1=-/Automatic Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer Cancellation
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 295 –
5 Periodic Backup (INDEX 304) b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data
b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data
b3: 0/1 = -/Name Display Data
b4: 0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data
b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data
b6: 0/1 = -/Call Block Data
6 Periodic Backup (INDEX 305) b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding-Logout Data

b2: 0/1 = -/SPD Data Load Status for DtermIP
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/DM/LDM/NDM Data
b5: 0/1 = -/MA-ID Data
b6: 0/1 = -/SIP Extension Call Forwarding Data
7 Periodic Backup (INDEX 306) b0: 0/1 = -/Local Phone book Data
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 296 –
[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End
1: 20XX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End
2 Verification of HD (Flash Card) b0: 0/1 = -/Active CPU Flash Card is abnormal
b7 b0
3 Verification of Data Memory b0: 0/1 = -/Data Memory

b1: 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory
b7 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory
4 Verification of Office Data b0: 0/1 = -/Verified against Drive1

b1: 0/1 = -/Verified against Drive2
b7 b1 b0
– 297 –
[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
1: 30XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
2 Active TSW system after b0: 0/1 = TSW 0 is ACT/

changeover TSW 1 is ACT
b7 b0
– 298 –
[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
1: 40XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
2 Active CPU system b0: CPU

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 299 –
[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold
1: 50XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold
2 MG and Unit number of Trunk b0: Unit 0, Even-numbered MG

Ineffective Hold 1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
b1: Unit 1, Even-numbered MG
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
b4: Unit 0, Odd-numbered MG
– 300 –
[51H] Accommodated Location of PS - No Trunk Ineffective Hold
1: 5100 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [51H] Accommodated Location of PS - No Trunk Ineffective Hold
– 301 –
[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End
1: 7000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End
– 302 –
[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal
1: 10XX XXXX 0000 XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 00XX 3: 00XX 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Routine Diagnosis [A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal
2 Information on Periodic Backup b0: 0/1 = HFD 0 Normal end/Abnormal end

Normal End b1: 0/1 = HFD 1 Normal end/Abnormal end
b7 b1 b0
3 Backup Data to System 0 b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b2: 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data File
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data
b9: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding-Logout Data
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b10: 0/1 = -/SPD Data for DtermIP
b11: 0/1 = -/DM/LDM/NDM Data
b13: 0/1 = -/MA-ID
b15: 0/1 = -/Mobility Access Data
b16: 0/1 = -/Local Phone book Data
– 303 –

2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data File
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b5: 0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b10: 0/1 = -/SPD Data for DtermIP
b13: 0/1 = -/MA-ID
– 304 –
[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End
1: C000 00XX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Performed Diagnosis Item [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Link Block b0: 0/1 = -/Activation with Link Block

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 305 –
7-P: Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected)

NON 3
In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they
are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis
program and the result of the diagnosis is not normal.
1 Note 1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 306 –
1 Detected Error Item [20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (Flash Card Fault)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 [2FH] Data Memory Verification Stop
[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure
[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (MUX Fault)
[3FH] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Stop
[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Single CPU System)
[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM Verification NG)
[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)
[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU
RAM Copy NG)
[45H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (EMA MB)
[46H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (EMA FIFO NG)
[47H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (GATE Fault)
[48H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (CPU Abnormal State)
[49H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Transfer Error)
[4AH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (No Answer Error)
[4FH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Stop
[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected
[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released
[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible
[53H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold
Detected Note 2
[54H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold
Detected and Released Note 2
[5FH] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection Stop
[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG
[7FH] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Stop
[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End
[AFH] Periodic Backup Stop
[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End
Note 1: The data in this area will be diverse, according to the diagnosis specified in 1 . For details on each
item data, see the following pages.
Note 2: This is output when a PS line is accommodated on programmable line/feature key of the Dterm as a
sub line.
– 307 –
[20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy
1: 20XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

Diagnosis
2 Verification of Flash Card b0: 0/1 = -/Active CPU Flash Card is abnormal
b7 b0
3 Verification of Data Memory b0: 0/1 = -/Present Data Memory (DM)

b1: 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM)
b7 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM)
4 Verification of Office Data b0: 0/1 = -/Verified against Drive1

b1: 0/1 = -/Verified against Drive2
b7 b1 b0
– 308 –
[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (Flash Card Fault)

DM LDM NDM
1: 21XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 7
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note: On the e above diagram, the output location of 4 ~ 7 is different depending on which information to look
for; that of DM, LDM, or NDM.
1 Error detection by Routine [21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (Flash Card Fault)
Diagnosis
2 Flash Card Impossible Verification b0: 0/1 = -/Active CPU Flash Card is abnormal
b7 b0
3 Verification of Data Memory b0: 0/1 = -/Data Memory (DM)

b1: 0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM)
b7 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM)
4 Error Type 00H: Flash Card Processing NG

01H: Flash Card Not Connected
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02H: Flash Card Busy
03H: Flash Card Fault (Fault processing/Not equipment etc.)
04H: Transfer NG
05H: Response Timeout
5 Single Code 51H: Data Transfer starts

53H: File Transfer starts
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 55H: Data Load
– 309 –
7 Error Drive b0: 0/1 = -/Drive 0 (A)

b1: 0/1 = -/Drive 1 (B)
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Drive 2 (C)
b3: 0/1 = -/Drive 3 (D)
Note: When 4 (Error Type) is 00H, 5 Signal Code, 6 and 7 Error Drive are valid.
– 310 –
[2FH] Data Memory Verification Stop
1: 2FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detected Error Item [2FH] Data Memory Verification Stop
2 Suspended Item (refer to ASYD b1: 0/1=-/Data Memory Verification

SYS1 INDEXs 89 and 90) b2: 0/1=-/TSW ACT/STBY changeover
b3: 0/1=-/CPU ACT/STBY changeover
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b6: 0/1=-/Call Forwarding Memory Automatic Cancellation
b15 b9 b8 b9: 0/1=-/Periodical Backup
3 Cause for Suspension b0: 0/1=-/CPU changeover

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 311 –
[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure
1: 30XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detected Error Item [30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure
2 Active TSW number b0: 0/1=TSW ACT 0/ACT 1

b7 b0
3 - 4 MUX card (ACT-side) linkage As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
condition allocated for each MUX card in position. When “1” is set, the
corresponding MUX card (status: ACT) has a functional failure or is not
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 mounted in the proper location.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0
MG 1 MG 0
MG 3 MG 2
0: -
MG 5 MG 4 1: MUX connection error
6 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 (functional fault/not mounted)
MG 7 MG 6
– 312 –
7 - 10 MUX card (STBY) linkage As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
corresponding MUX card (status: STBY) has a functional failure or is not
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
MG 1 MG 0
MG 3 MG 2
9 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 Unit 3 Unit 2 Unit 1 Unit 0 0: -
1: MUX connection error
MG 5 MG 4 (functional fault/not
mounted)
MG 7 MG 6
– 313 –
[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (MUX Fault)
1: 31XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detected Error Item [31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (MUX Fault)
2 Active TSW number b0: 0/1=TSW ACT 0/ACT 1

b7 b0
3 - 6 MUX card (ACT-side) linkage As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
corresponding MUX card (status: ACT) has a functional failure or is not
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
MG 1 MG 0
MG 3 MG 2
mounted)
MG 7 MG 6
– 314 –
7 - 10 MUX card (STBY) linkage As shown in the following table, each bit represents the Unit number
corresponding MUX card (status: STBY) has a functional failure or is not
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
MG 1 MG 0
MG 3 MG 2
mounted)
MG 7 MG 6
– 315 –
[3FH] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Stop
1: 3FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detected Error Item [3FH] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover stopped

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4: 0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Check

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 316 –
[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure
1: 41XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

Diagnosis
2 ACT system after changeover b0: CPU

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 317 –
[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM Verification NG or PM Verification NG)
1: 42XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis (DM or PM Verification NG)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 318 –
[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)
1: 43XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)
Diagnosis

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 319 –
[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)
1: 44XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 320 –
[45H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (EMA MB)
1: 45XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis (EMA MB)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 321 –
[46H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (EMA FIFO NG)
1: 46XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis (EMA FIFO)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 322 –
[47H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (GATE Failure)
1: 47XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis (GATE Failure)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 323 –
[48H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (CPU Abnormal State)
1: 48XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis (CPU Abnormal State)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 324 –
[49H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Transfer Error)
1: 49XX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Diagnosis (Transfer Error)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 325 –
[4AH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (No Answer Error)
1: 4AXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [4AH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

Diagnosis (No Answer Error from other processor when changeover is
requested)

0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
b7 b1 b0 b1: TSW
0/1 = ACT 0/ACT 1
– 326 –
[4FH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Stop
1: 4FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [4FH] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Stop

Diagnosis

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4: 0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Check
3 Cause for Suspension b0: 0/1 = -/CPU changeover

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 327 –
[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected
1: 50XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 3 3
4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
3 3
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected

Diagnosis
2 LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold b1 b0

(MG, U) 0 0 = Unit 0
0 1 = Unit 1
b7 b2 b1 b0 1 0 = Unit 2
1 1 = Unit 3
b2: 0/1 = Even-number/Odd-number Module
3 LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk (G, LV)

Group number
1: 500X 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
Group 1 21 2 13 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Number
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 328 –
<Level>
Level
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
G0
0/1 = -/Ineffectively held
G1
G2
G3
G30
G31
– 329 –
[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released
1: 51XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 13 13
13 3
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released
Diagnosis
12 LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold b1 b0

Detected and Released (MG, U) 0 0 = Unit 0
0 1 = Unit 1
b7 b2 b1 b0 1 0 = Unit 2
1 1 = Unit 3
b2: 0/1 = Even-number/Odd-number Module
13 LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk (G, LV)

Group Number
1: 500X 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
Group 1 21 2 13 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Number
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 330 –
<Level>
Level
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
G0
0/1 = -/Ineffectively held
G1
G2
G3
G30
G31
– 331 –
[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible
1: 5200 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible

Diagnosis
2 Cause for suspended detection of 01H: The CPU to detect is abnormal

Trunk Ineffective Hold 02H: Data transfer error
03H: No Answer error
b7 b2 b1 b0 04H: Data transfer error by PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold
– 332 –
[53H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected
1: 5300 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 3
4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
3 3
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [53H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected
Diagnosis
2 Number of Trunk Ineffective NUMBER OF TRUNK

DATA (HEX)
Hold by PS INEFFECTIVE HOLD
0000 (000 HEX) -
0100 (001 HEX) 1
0200 (002 HEX) 2
… …
FE07 (7FE HEX) 2046
FF07 (7FF HEX) 2047
0008 (800 HEX) 2048 (maximum)
3 Accommodated location of PS in Trunk Ineffective Hold

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
a LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (G, LV)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b2: LV (0-7)
b3-b7: G (0-24)
– 333 –
b LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (MG, U)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b2: U (0-3)
b3-b7: MG (0-31)
– 334 –
[54H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released
1 2 3 3
3 3
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [54H] Accommodated Location of PS - Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected
Diagnosis and Released
2 Number of Trunk Ineffective NUMBER OF TRUNK

DATA (HEX)
Hold by PS INEFFECTIVE HOLD
0000 (000 HEX) -
0100 (001 HEX) 1
0200 (002 HEX) 2
… …
FE07 (7FE HEX) 2046
FF07 (7FF HEX) 2047
0008 (800 HEX) 2048 (maximum)
3 Accommodated location of PS in Trunk Ineffective Hold

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
10th 11th 12th 13th 14th 15th 16th
a b a b a b a b a b a b a b
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 335 –
a LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (G, LV)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b2: LV (0-7)
b3-b7: G (0-24)
b LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected (MG, U)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0-b2: U (0-3)
b3-b7: MG (0-31)
– 336 –
[5FH] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection is stopped
1: 5FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
0000 XXXX XXXX
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [5FH] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection is stopped

Diagnosis

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 337 –
[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG
1: 7000 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine Diagnosis [70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG
2 Cause for which Transfer Memory b1 b0

was stopped 0 1 = CPU is abnormal
1 0 = Data Transfer error
b7 b1 b0
– 338 –
[7FH] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Stop
1: 7FXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
0000 XXXX XXXX
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [7FH] Call Forwarding Memory Clear is stopped

Diagnosis

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 339 –
[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End
1: A0XX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 00XX 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 3 6
2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End

Diagnosis
2 Information of Periodic Backup b0: 0/1 = Flash Card 0 Normal end/Abnormal end
Abnormal End b1: 0/1 = Flash Card 1 Normal end/Abnormal end
b7 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data File
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b10: 0/1 = -/SPD Data for DtermIP
b13: 0/1 = -/MA-ID
– 340 –
4 Error Code of System 0 Flash Card 21H:

40H~47H:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 53H:
57H:
59H~5BH:
80H~84H:
A0H:
Flash Card
A2H~A6H:
BDH:
C0H: Failed installation
01H: Flash Card being used by another
program
02H: Flash Card not equipped
5 Error Status of System 0 Flash Card Error occurs;
b0: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer started
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: 0/1 = -/At the time data saved
b2: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer ended
b3: 0/1 = -/At the time file transfer started
6 Backup data to System 1 b0: 0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data
b2: 0/1 = -/Remote Call Forwarding Data File
b9: 0/1 = -/Call Forwarding-Logout Data Load Status
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b10: 0/1 = -/SPD Data Load Status for DtermIP
b13: 0/1 = -/MA-ID
– 341 –
7 Error Code of System 1 Flash Card 21H:

40H~47H:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 53H:
57H:
59H~5BH:
80H~84H:
A0H:
Flash Card
A2H~A6H:
BDH:
C0H: Failed installation
01H: Flash Card being used by another
program
02H: Flash Card not equipped
8 Error Status of System 1 Flash Card Error occurs;

b0: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer started
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
b1: 0/1 = -/At the time data saved
b2: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer ended
b3: 0/1 = -/At the time file transfer started
9 Technical Information for Analysis
– 342 –
[AFH] Periodic Backup Stop
1: AFXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Error detection by Routine [AFH] Periodic Backup Stop

Diagnosis

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 343 –
[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End
1: C000 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Performed Diagnosis Item [C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Error Data (ED) b1 b0

0 1 = CPU is not normal
b7 b1 b0 1 0 = Data transfer error
1 1 = No Answer error
– 344 –
7-Q: PFT Key ON

NON
This message displays when PFT key (2 in SW00 on EMA card) is set to ON (upward).
Note: This message is available since S1E.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 345 –
7-R: PFT Key OFF

NON
This message displays when PFT key (2 in SW00 on EMA card) is set to OFF (downward).
Note: This message is available since S1E.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 346 –
7-U: PLO MB Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned on while extracting or inserting a circuit
card.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty PLO card number b0: 0/1 = PLO System 0/PLO System 1
b7 b0
– 347 –
7-V: PLO MB Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO card is turned off while extracting or inserting a circuit
card.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Faulty PLO card number b0: 0/1 = PLO System 0/PLO System 1
b7 b0
2 Status of PLO card at the time of b0: 0/1 = Clock STBY/ACT

failure detection (Scan Data 1) b1: 0/1 = PLO Synchronizing/PLO self-running or drifting
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3, b4: Route of Input clock (see table)
CONNECTIED WITH PRIMARY CONNECTED WITH

b4 b3
OSCILLATOR (M-OSC) EXTERNAL CLOCK
0 0 M-OSC 0 Route 0
0 1 M-OSC 1 Route 1
1 0 - Route 2
1 1 - Route 3

3 Status of PLO card at the time of b0: 0/1 = -/n ufive millisecond clock down
failure detection (Scan Data 2) b1: 0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization down from SYNC card
b4: 0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down
b7 b4 b1 b0
– 348 –
10-A: Activation Code Request Notice (SUP)

SUP 1
This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for more than 29 days and less than 45
days.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Passed days from startup [30-44 days] (Displayed in HEX)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Value Days
1E: 30 days
1F: 31 days
20: 32 days
21: 33 days
22: 34 days
23: 35 days
: :
: :
2C 44 days
– 349 –
10-B: Activation Code Request Notice (MN)

MN 1
This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for more than 44 days and less than 60
days.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Passed days from startup [45-59 days] (Displayed in HEX)

2D: 45 days
2E: 46 days
2F: 47 days
30: 48 days
31: 49 days
32: 50 days
: :
: :
3B 59 days
– 350 –
10-C: Activation Code Request Notice (MJ)

MJ 1
This message displays when Activation Code has not been registered for 60 days or more.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Passed days from startup [maximum 127 days] (Displayed in HEX)
Note: More than 127 days is not counted.
3C: 60 days
3D: 61 days
3E: 62 days
3F: 63 days
40: 64 days
41: 65 days
: :
: :
7F 127 days
– 351 –
10-D: IP License Excess Notice (SUP)

SUP 1
This message is displayed if the number of IP terminals exceeds the number of registered IP Licenses. One
message can display the information of 13 ports that encountered IP address acquisition NG.
#1 #2 #3 #4 #5
1 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
#6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2
#12 #13
7: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
3 2 3
1 IP License Excess Counter

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Total Number of IP License Acquisition NG ports (0-65535)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
2 ~ 3 IP Address Acquisition Information
• IP Address Acquisition Information NG Time Information

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0-b3: 0-9 (one’s digit of Hour), b4-b7: 0-2 (ten’s digit of Hour)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b0-b3: 0-9 (one’s digit of Minute), b4-b7: 0-5 (ten’s digit of Minute)
• IP Address Acquisition NG LENS Information

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group Number
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b8-b9: Unit Number
b10-14: MG Number
b15: Not Used
– 352 –
10-E: CPU Operation Mode Error Notification

- 3
This message is issued when Abnormal Reset Process is activated on the program.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Kind of Notification 01 (Hex) = IP QUE Initialization

b7 b0
– 353 –
10-F: Connection Failure between Telephony Server and SR-MGC

SUP
This message displays when connection failure is detected between Telephony Server and Survivable Remote
MGC (SR-MGC).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Function 01 (Hex): Health Check Failure

02 (Hex): Office Data Copy Failure
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03 (Hex): Switch generation in SR-MGC, due to SP Failure Detection
81 (Hex): Health Check failure (SR-MGC)
– 354 –
When 1 =01 (Health Check Failure)
12 , 3 SR-MGC Number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4 ~ 7 SR-MGC IP Address
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 , 9 Destination Port Number

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 355 –
When 1 =02 (Office Data Copy Failure)
12 , 3 SR-MGC Number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4 Error detail 01 (Hex): Detected Health Check NG in MGC side

02 (Hex): HFC Check NG
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
03 (Hex): Copy NG to C Drive
04 (Hex): File Collation NG
05 (Hex): SR-MGC Data Save NG
06 (Hex): Copy NG from C Drive to B Drive
07 (Hex): Copy NG from B Drive to C Drive
08 (Hex): HFC Check NG after Copy NG between Drive
09 (Hex): Recovery NG of B Drive
0A (Hex): Load NG after Copy
0B (Hex): Checksum NG
0C(Hex): Address Information NG
0D(Hex): Number of Blocks NG
0E(Hex): Response NG from MGC
0F(Hex): Size of File NG
10(Hex): Detected Network NG in SR-MGC side
11(Hex): Login NG to MGC
12(Hex): Disagreetment of Office Data Copy State with MGC side
13(Hex): Copy interruption
14 (Hex): Office Data Copy Timeout is detected.
15 (Hex): Variable Definition NG is detected.
16 (Hex): Directory Creation NG/Reference NG is detected.
17 (Hex): File Creation NG is detected.
18 (Hex): FTP Server Connection is failed (Remote Information Collection).
19 (Hex): FTP Server Operation is failed (Remote Information Collection).
1a (Hex): Download List Creation is failed.
1b (Hex): Temporary File Deletion NG is detected.
1c (Hex): Download List does not exist.
1d (Hex): FTP Server Connection is failed (batch download).
1e (Hex): FTP Server Operation is failed (batch download).
1f (Hex): Download (1st) File Size is illegal.
20 (Hex): Download (1st) Office Data does not exist.
21 (Hex): Office Data Binary Compare NG is detected.
22 (Hex): Office Data File Size Discrepancy is detected.
23 (Hex): FTP Server Connection is failed (individual download).
24 (Hex): FTP Server Operation is failed (individual download).
25 (Hex): Download (2nd) File Size is illegal.
26 (Hex): Download (2nd) Office Data does not exist.
27 (Hex): Office Data File Update NG is detected.
28 (Hex): CF Access NG is detected.
38 (Hex): Office data copy failure (Office data size exceeded SR300 tolerance).
– 356 –
When 1 =03 (SP Failure)
12 SP Failure Detection Mode 00 (Hex): SP Failure Detection of All SP-PHx

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
When 1 =81 (Health Check Failure Detection)
12 Trouble detection type 00 (Hex): -

01 (Hex): Health Check Packet reception time-out
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02 (Hex): ping failure
03 (Hex): Health Check Sending and receiving completion Packet reception
time-out
3 ~ 6 MGC IP Address b0-b7: IP Address of Fault detected MGC

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
7 Ping Error Code (Not displayed)
– 357 –
10-G: Connection Recovery between Telephony Server and SR-MGC

NON
This message displays when the communication between Telephony Server and Survivable Remote MGC (SR-
MGC) recovers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Kind of Recovered Failure 01 (Hex): Health Check Communication Recovered

03 (Hex): SP Failure Recovered
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 81 (Hex): Health Check Communication Failure Detection
– 358 –
When 1 =01 (Health Check Communication Recovered)
12 , 3 Detected SR-MGC Number SR-MGC Number (0 ~ 255)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
4 ~ 7 IP Address of Fault detected SR-MGC IP address in the form of “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 (xxx = 0 ~ 255 HEX.)
8 , 9 Destination Port Number Port Number = 0, 1024 ~ 65534

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
When 1 =03 (SP Failure Recovered)
12 Kind of Error
00 (Hex): All PHs are down.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 359 –
When 1 =81 [Health Check Communication Failure Detection (SR-MGC)]
2 Failure Recovery Detection Type

b0-6:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H = Health Check Packet Receiving OK
02H = Ping OK
03H = Health Check Send/Receive Complete Packet Receiving OK
b7:
0/1 = Health Check Recovery Detection after SR-MGC startup/
Health Check Recovery Detection after a failure is detected
3 ~ 6 IP Address of MGC
b0-7: IP address of MGC which recovered from Health Check com-
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 munication failure
– 360 –
10-H: Illegal Software Version Information Set

MN 3
This message is issued when the software version assigned to NDM is later than the software version that has
been actually installed to this node. If this message is issued, the software version that is assigned to NDM is
not correct.
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Software Version Assigned to NDM b0-b31 = Information about Software Version Assigned to NDM
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 361 –
2 Software Version Actually Installed b0-b31: Information about Software Version Actually Installed to the Node
to the Node
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 362 –
10-I: Software Version Information Report

SUP 1
This message is issued when the particular program version information remains assigned to NDM for 3 to 7
days. The system checks the NDM at 0:00 a.m. every day.
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 The Number of Days The number of days different program versions coexist in the same network.
03H: 3 days
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
04H: 4 days
05H: 5 days
06H: 6 days
07H: 7 days
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 363 –
to the Node
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 364 –
10-J: Software Version Information Report

MN 1
This message is issued when the particular program version information remains assigned to NDM for 8 to 14
days. The system checks the NDM at 0:00 a.m. every day.
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
08H: 8 days
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
09H: 9 days
0AH: 10 days
0BH: 11 days
0CH: 12 days
0DH: 13 days
0EH: 14 days
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 365 –
to the Node
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 366 –
10-K: Software Version Information Report

MJ 1
This message is issued when the particular program version information remains assigned to NDM for 15 or
more days. The system checks the NDM at 0:00 a.m. every day.
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
0FH-7FH: 15 days-127 or more days
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 367 –
to the Node
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 368 –
10-L: SR-MGC State Notification

NON
This message displays when the state of SR-MGC is changed to Operating Mode or Stand-by Mode.
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 SR-MGC State Change Notification 01H = Change to Operating Mode.

02H = Change to Stand-by Mode.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
When 1 =01 (Change to Operating Mode)
2 Kind of State Change

01H = Change of the state on startup
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02H = Change of the state by network failure detection
03H = Change of the state by CMNT command
– 369 –
When 1 =01 (Change to Stand-by Mode)
2 Kind of State Change

01H = Change of the state on startup
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02H = Change of the state by network recovery detection
03H = Change of the state by CMNT command
– 370 –
13-A: CCH Clock Failure

SUP 3
This message displays when a clock down failure occurs in the CCH/DCH circuit card. When this message is
indicated, the related CCH/DCH card is placed into make-busy status.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of faulty CCH/DCH card b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 371 –
13-B: CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

SUP 3
This message displays when C-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 372 –
13-C: CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)

SUP 1
This message displays when C-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 373 –
13-D: CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)

SUP 3
This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the
CPU.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 374 –
13-E: CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)

SUP 3
This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the
CPU.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 375 –
13-F: CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

SUP 3
This message displays when B-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 376 –
13-G: CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)

SUP 1
This message displays when B-Level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 377 –
13-H: CCS Link Failure (Permanent)

SUP 1
This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and the
link has been placed into make-busy state.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 378 –
3 Probable cause for failure b0-b3: See the table below.

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
CCITT
FLT ID FACTOR
ERROR
00 A S (F = 1) frame is received.
01 B DM (F = 1) response is received.
02 C UA (F = 1) response is received.
03 D UA (F = 0) response is received.
04 E DM (F = 0) response is received.
05 F SABME command is received.
06 G N200 Timeout (Link is set)
07 H
N200 Timeout (Link is disconnected)
08 I N200 Timeout (Link failure is restored

to normal)
09 J N (R) frame error is received.
0A K FRMR frame is received (Link is re-
setup).
0B L Undefined frame is received.
0C M -
0D N Improper long frame is received.
0E O I frame with I field which exceeds
N201 is received.
0F - -
10 - Layer 1 down (for ILC)
40 - FRMR frame is received. (Link is not
re-setup)
– 379 –
13-I: CCS Link Failure (Temporary)

NON 1
This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and the
link has been placed into make-busy state. When this fault lasts over three minutes, the system message changes
to [13-H] CCS Link Failure (Permanent).
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
¬
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 380 –
3 Probable cause for the failure b0-b3: See the table below.
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
CCITT
FLT ID FACTOR
ERROR
00 A S (F = 1) frame is received.
01 B DM (F = 1) response is received.
02 C UA (F = 1) response is received.
03 D UA (F = 0) response is received.
04 E DM (F = 0) response is received.
05 F SABME command is received.
06 G N200 Timeout (Link is set)
07 H
N200 Timeout (Link is disconnected)
08 I N200 Timeout (Link failure is restored

to normal)
09 J N (R) frame error is received.
0A K FRMR frame is received (Link is re-
setup).
0B L Undefined frame is received.
0C M -
0D N Improper long frame is received.
0E O I-frame with I-field that exceeds N201
is received.
0F - -
10 - Layer 1 down (for ILC)
40 - FRMR frame is received. (Link is not
re-setup)
– 381 –
13-J: Restoration From CCS Link Failure

NON 3
This message displays when the faults pertaining to CCIS/ISDN Link are restored to normal.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
2 CKT No. of faulty circuit b0-b7: CKT (0-3)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 382 –
13-K: CCH Reset Interrupt Failure

SUP 3
This message displays when a fault occurred to the Port Microprocessor (PM) within the CCH/DCH circuit card
and the restart processing is executed.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 383 –
13-N: Digital Line Warning

SUP 1
This message displays when a digital line failure occurs.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Accommodated location b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
2 Kind of Fault b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)

00 = -
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down
02 = Bit error rate is over 10-6
03 = Slip is detected
04 = -
05 = Dch down
06 = Multi-frame alignment loss
07 = -
10 = -
11 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (frequently)
13 = Slip is detected (frequently)
14 = Opposite office alarm is detected
15 = -
16 = Multi-frame alignment loss (frequently)
17 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (continuously)
18 = Multi-frame alignment loss (continuously)
– 384 –
13-O: Digital Line Failure

SUP 2
This message displays when a digital line failure occurs.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)

00 = -
03 = Slip is detected
04 = Opposite office alarm (AIS) is detected
05 = -
07 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (continuously)
08 = Multi-frame alignment loss (continuously)
– 385 –
13-P: Digital Line Restore

NON 0
This message displays when a digital line failure is restored to normal.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)

00 = -
03 = -
04 = Opposite office alarm (AIS) is detected
05 = Dch restores to normal
– 386 –
13-Q: DRU Battery Operation

SUP 1
This message displays when the battery is operated in the DRU system.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 387 –
13-R: DRU Line Operation

NON 0
This message displays when the main power of the DRU system is restored to normal.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 388 –
13-Z: Power Failure

NON 3
This message displays when a PWR circuit card failure is detected.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
¬
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 MG No. and Unit number of fault b0, b1: Unit (0-3)

detection b2: MG number
b7 b2 b1 b0
2 Kind of Power b1: 0/1 = -/-5V Power Failure

b2: 0/1 = -/+12V Power Failure
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: 0/1 = -/+5V Power Failure
b4: 0/1 = -/-48V Power Failure
3 Location of faulty circuit card b0: 0/1 = Group 24 (0 side) / Group 25 (1 side)
b7 b0
Reference: See Chapter 5 Replacement Procedure of PWR (Power) Circuit Card, for the circuit card
replacement procedure.
– 389 –
15-A: VPS Failure (Temporary)

SUP 1
This message displays when a VPS failure is detected.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Probable cause for failure b0-b7: 0 = -

1 = Sector error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 FF = Other than above
2 LENS of VPS with the failure b0-b2: Level

b3-b7: Group
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 LENS of VPS with the failure b0, b1: Unit number

b2-b7: MG number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 390 –
15-B: VPS Failure (Permanent)

MN 2
This message displays when a VPS failure is detected.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Probable cause for failure b0-b7: 0 = -

1 = Sector error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 FF = Other than above

b3-b7: Group
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b2-b7: MG number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 391 –
15-C: VPS Restore

NON 2
This message displays when a VPS failure is restored to normal.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b3-b7: Group
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b2-b7: MG number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 392 –
16-A: Inside Trunk All Busy

SUP 3
This message displays when Intra-Office Trunks (ATI, RST, etc.) have all become busy.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Intra-Office trunks that have b0-b7: Intra-Office trunks that have become all busy (01-1F)
become all busy (See table on the following page)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 393 –
ROUTE DATA TRUNK NAME ROUTE DATA TRUNK NAME

NO. (HEX) NO. (HEX)
901 01 Attendant Console 917 11 MFC Sender
902 02 Originating Register Trunk 918 12 Not used
903 03 Incoming Register Trunk 919 13 MODEM
904 04 MF Receiver 920 14 MODEM
905 05 Sender Trunk DP/PB 921 15 MODEM
906 06 PB Receiver for Automated 922 16 MODEM
Attendant Service
907 07 AMP 923 17 MODEM
908 08 Not used 924 18 MODEM
909 09 Three-Way Conference Trunk 925 19 MODEM
910 0A Not used 926 1A MODEM

911 0B Not used 927 1B Not used
912 0C Originating Register Trunk for 928 1C Not used
ATTCON/DESKCON
913 0D Three-Way Conference Trunk for 929 1D Data Signaling Trunk-Option
ATTCON/DESKCON
914 0E Not used 930 1E Rate Adaptation Conversion Trunk

915 0F Night ATTCON/DESKCON 931 1F Not used
916 10 MFC Register
– 394 –
16-B: Virtual Tie Line Set Report

NON 3
This message displays when virtual tie line setup has completed.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Counter b0: 00=-

01=Re-setup
b7 b0
2 Virtual TIE line call header b0,b1: Unit number

accommodated location b2: Module Group number
b7 b2 b1 b0
3 Virtual TIE line call header b0-b2: Level

accommodated location b3-b7: Group number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 395 –
16-C: Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report

NON 3
This message displays when virtual TIE line cancel has completed.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Counter b0: 0/1=-/Re-setup

b7 b0

b7 b2 b1 b0

b7 b2 b1 b0
– 396 –
16-E: Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out

NON 1
This message displays when virtual TIE line setup has failed due to a fault in the network of the terminating
office concerned.
1: 00XX XX8X XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 397 –
3 Virtual TIE line call header b3-b7: Call Source

accommodated location
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DATA CALL SOURCE
0 User
1 Private network to which the user is directly connected.
(self side)
2 National network to which the user is directly connected.
(self side)
3 TIE line network
4 National network to which the opposite party is directly
connected. (Opposite party’s side)
5 Private network to which the opposite party is directly
connected. (Opposite party’s side)
7 International network
A Network from Interworking
Other Spare
b4-b7: “8” is always indicated.

4 Fault Cause b0-b3: Reason Kind
b4-b6: Class
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0=No Answer
Other than 0=Refer to the following table
REASON
CLASS KIND DATA REASON KIND
VALUE
000 0001 1 Dead Number

000 0010 2 No route to the designated transit network
000 0011 3 No route to the opposite Party
Reason Kind 000 0110 6 Use of channel not allowed
Class Value 000 0111 7 Call terminated to a setup channel
X X 001 0000 16 Normal disconnection
001 0001 17 Called user busy
8765 4321(bit) 001 0010 18 No response from called user
001 0011 19 Called party being rung/no answer
-000 001 0101 21 Communication denied
xxxx 001 0110 22 Opposite party’s terminal number changed
-001 001 1010 26 Disconnection and release of the user not selected
001 1011 27 Opposite party’s terminal out of order
Normal Event Class 001 1100 28 Invalid number format (incomplete number)
001 1101 29 Facility denied
001 1110 30 Answer to status inquiry
001 1111 31 Other normal class
– 398 –
REASON
CLASS KIND DATA REASON KIND
VALUE
010 0010 34 No usable channel/line

010 0110 38 Network failure
010 1001 41 Temporary failure
010 xxxx
010 1010 42 Switching system congested
Classes not allowed use of resources
010 1011 43 Access information discarded
010 1100 44 Use of requested line/channel not allowed
010 1111 47 Class not allowed use of other resources
Reason Kind 011 0001 49
Class Value 011 0010 50 Use of QoS restricted
X X 011 1001 57 Requested facility not contracted
011 1010 58 Bearer capability restricted
8765 4321(bit) 011 1111 63 Bearer capability restricted at present
011 xxxx Class not allowed to use other services or options
Classes not allowed use of services
100 0001 65 Unprovided bearer capability designated
100 0010 66 Unprovided channel kind designated
100 xxxx
100 0101 69 Unprovided facility requested
Classes not provided with services
100 0110 70 Restricted digital information bearer capability
100 1111 79 Class unprovided with other services or options
101 0001 81 Invalid call number used
101 0010 82 Invalid channel number used
101 0011 83 Designated transit call ID number unused
101 0100 84 Transit call ID number being used
101 xxxx
101 0101 85 No transit call
Invalid message class
101 0110 86 Designated transit call disconnected and released
101 1000 88 Terminal attributes unmatch
101 1011 91 Invalid transit network selected
101 1111 95 Other invalid message class
110 0000 96 Mandatory information elements inadequate
110 0001 97 Message kind undefined or unprovided
110 0010 98 Call status and message unmatching or message
110 xxxx kind undefined
Procedure error (ex: unrecognized 110 0011 99 Information element undefined
message) class 110 0100 100 Content of information element invalid
110 0101 101 Call status and message unmatching
110 0110 102 Recovery due to timer over
110 1111 111 Class of other procedure errors
111 xxxx 111 111 127
Other interworking class
Interworking class
Others Reserved
5 Diagnosis Information (indicated in hexadecimal)
– 399 –
16-F: Sender Start Time Out

NON 0
This message indicates that an outgoing call (by connection acknowledge system) has not received an
acknowledgment signal from the opposite office. As a result, the attempted outgoing call is routed to Reorder
Tone (ROT) connection.
1: XXXX XXXX XX0X XX0X 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
In Case of Station OG/ATT OG/ATT Tandem Connection
1 Type of connection and station b0-b2: Digits of station number (origination)

number digits b6-b7: 0H=Station OG connection
4H=ATT OG connection
b7 b6 b2 b1 b0 CH=ATT Tandem connection
2- 4 Calling station number

(see table)
b4-b7 b0-b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 DC0 DC1
3 DC2 DC3
4 DC4 DC5
5 Tenant number of calling station b7: OP data (0/1)

(HEX) When OPTN data of 6 is valid, “1” displays.
b7 b6 b2 b1 b0 b0-b3: Tenant number of calling station

• b7=0 Tenant number<16 Refer to the OPTN
• b7=1 15<Tenant number = <255 data of 6
– 400 –
6 OPTN data b0-b3: OPTN data Note

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note: This data displays when the Tenant number of the calling station is larger than 15, and b7 of 5 displays
as “1” (otherwise, “0” displays at any time). While the four-bit data of 5 is self-sufficient in verifying
Tenant 1-15, this OPTN data provides a supportive role to cover Tenant number ranging from 16 to 255.
Use the following method to analyze the data:
Tenant number of Calling Station (1-15) = 0 0 0 0 Tenant No.
OPTN data (0: fixed) b0 - b3 of 5
Tenant number of Calling Station (16-255) = OPTN data Tenant No.
OPTN data (variable) b0 - b3 of 5
7 OG route number (HEX) b7: AC data

0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b6: OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of 8 is valid, “1” displays,
b0-b5: OG route number
• b6=0 Route number <64 Refer to the OPTN
• b6=1 63<Route number data of 8
8 OPRT data b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note:This data displays when the OG Route number is larger than 63, and b6 of 7 displays as “1” (otherwise,
“0” displays at any time). While the six-bit data of 7 is self-sufficient in verifying the Route 1-63, this OPRT
data provides a supportive role to cover Route number larger than 63. Use the following method to analyze
the data:
OG Route (1-63) = 0 0 0 0 OG Route No.
OPTN data (0:fixed) b0 - b5 of 7
OG Route (64 or larger) = OPTN data OG Route No.
OPTN data (variable) b0 - b5 of 7
– 401 –
9 Trunk number of OG trunk b0-b7: Trunk number of OG trunk

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
10 Trunk number of OG sender b0-b7: Trunk number of sender

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
11 Number of digits dialed by caller b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by caller

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
12
Number dialed by caller (See table)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7 b0-b3
DC0 DC1
DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
DC6 DC7
DC8 DC9
DC10 DC11
DC12 DC13
DC14 DC15
DC16 DC17
DC18 DC19
DC20 DC21
– 402 –
In Case of Tandem Connection
1 Type of connection b7 b6
1 0 = Tandem connection
b7 b6 b0
2 IC route number (HEX) b7: AC data

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b6: OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of 3 is valid, “1” displays.
b0-b5: IC route number
• b6=0 Route number<64 Refer to the OPTN
• b6=1 <63 Route number data of 3

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note:This data displays when the IC Route number is larger than 63, and b6 of 2 displays as “1” (otherwise,
“1” displays at any time). While the six-bit data of 2 is self-sufficient in verifying the Route 1-63, this OPRT
the data:
IC Route (1-63) = 0 0 0 0 IC Route No.
OPRT data (0:fixed) b0 - b5 of 2
IC Route (64 or larger) = OPRT data IC Route No.
OPRT data (variable) b0 - b5 of 2
4 - 5 Trunk number of IC trunk b0-b7: Trunk number of IC trunk

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 403 –
6 Not used
7 OG route number (HEX) b7: AC data

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b6: OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of 8 is valid, “1” displays,
b0-b5: OG route number
• b6=0 Route number<64 Refer to the OPTN
• b6=1 <63 Route number data of 8

b7 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note:This data displays when the OG Route number is larger than 63, and b6 of 7 displays as “1” (otherwise,
“0” is displays at any time). While the six bit data of 7 is self-sufficient in verifying Route 1-63, this OPRT
the data:
OG Route (1-63) = 0 0 0 0 OG Route No.
OPRT data (0: fixed) b0 - b5 of 7
OG Route (64 or larger) = OPRT data OG Route No.
OPRT data (variable) b0 - b5 of 7
9 Trunk number of OG trunk b0-b7: Trunk number of OG trunk

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 404 –
10 Trunk number of sender b0-b7: Trunk number of sender

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
11 Number of digits dialed by caller b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by caller

b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
12 Number dialed by caller (See table)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7 b0-b3
DC0 DC1
DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
DC6 DC7
DC8 DC9
DC10 DC11
DC12 DC13
DC14 DC15
DC16 DC17
DC18 DC19
DC20 DC21
– 405 –
16-M: Hard Clock Failure

SUP 3
This message displays when the timer circuit in the system becomes faulty and stops functioning and a 64 Hz
clock alarm is output.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Message Detail Data

This system message is always indicated as 0000.
– 406 –
16-N: Hard Clock Restore

NON 3
This message displays when [16-M] 64 Hz Clock Down Detected is restored to normal.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Message Detail Data

This system message is always indicated as 0000.
– 407 –
17-A: CCH MBR Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned ON.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Location of CCH/DCH card b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
2 CKT number b0, b1: CKT (0-3)

b7 b1 b0
– 408 –
17-B: CCH MBR Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned OFF.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
2 CKT number b0, b1: CKT (0-3)

b7 b1 b0
– 409 –
17-C: CCH MB Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned ON while extracting or inserting a
circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 410 –
17-D: CCH MB Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card is turned OFF while extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 411 –
17-H: Day/Night Change Information

NON 0
This message displays when the NIGHT switch on the ATTCON/DESKCON is operated or when the DAY/
NIGHT change is executed by the external switch operation.
1 2 3 4 Note 1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Tenant number b0-b3: Tenant (1-15)

b4-b7: Tenant (over 15)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Changing Method b0-b7:

1=Night Key on ATTCON/DESKCON
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 2=External Key
3=ADNM Command (for North America only)
4=Dterm Note 1
5=OAI RCF (for North America only)
Note 1: In the case of Changing Method 4 (Dterm), “xxxx

xxxx” will indicate the EN of the Dterm performing
Day/Night change.
– 412 –
3 Day/Night Mode Specification b0-b3: Mode after changing

b4-b7: Mode before changing
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0 b1 b2 b3
MEANING
b4 b5 b6 b7
0 0 0 0 Day Mode
0 0 0 1 Night Mode 1
0 0 1 0 Night Mode 2 available only for Japan
0 0 1 1 Night Mode 3 (DIT-Night Connection Fixed) Note
Note: This data is programmed as initial data.
4 External Switch Status b0-b7:

01=Not used
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
02=Day/Night Change
03=Not used
– 413 –
17-O: IOC MB Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message is displayed when IOC card is removed from the module while the MBR is set to OFF.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Circuit Card number b0: 0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

b7 b0
– 414 –
17-P: IOC MB Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message is displayed when IOC card is inserted into the module while the MBR is set to OFF.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0
– 415 –
17-Q: IOC MBR Key Turn ON

NON 3
This message is displayed when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned ON.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0
– 416 –
17-R: IOC MBR Key Turn OFF

NON 3
This message displayed when the MBR switch on the IOC card is turned OFF.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0
– 417 –
23-P: DCH Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End

NON 1
This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated automatically.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Condition of Dch b0-b7:

1 = Back-up Start
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 2 = Back-up End
3 = Back-up Failed
2 Location of Dch (Primary) b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
3 Location of Dch (Back-up) b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 418 –
4 Changeover Information b0, b1:

00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 01 = Change from Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch
10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status
11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status
b2, b3:
00 = Change signal is received
01 = Change signal is sent
5 Status of the Primary/Back-up Dch b0-b2: Status of Primary Dch

b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0 = In Service
1 = Standby
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make-Busy
4 = Changing status from STBY to In Service
5 = Manual Out of Service
b3-b5: Status of Primary Dch
0 = In Service
1 = Standby
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make-Busy
6 EVENT number b0-b7: EVENT number

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 419 –
23-Q: DCH Back-Up Manual Change Start/End

NON 1
This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated manually.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Condition of Dch b0-b7:

1 = Back-up Start
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 2 = Back-up End
3 = Back-up Failed
2 Location of Dch (Primary) b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
3 Location of Dch (Back-up) b0-b4: Group number

b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
– 420 –
4 Detailed information on changing b0, b1:

Dch 00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up
01 = Change from the Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status
11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status
b2, b3: Way of changing

00 = Changed by the MAT
01 = Changed by the MB switch of the circuit card
02 = Changed by placing Dch to Make-Busy
03 = Unknown
5 Status of Primary/Back-up Dch b0-b2: Status of Primary Dch

0 = In Service
b7 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 1 = Standby
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make Busy
b3-b5: Status of Back-up Dch
0 = In Service
1 = Standby
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make Busy
6 EVENT number b0-b7: EVENT number

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 421 –
23-Y: MUX Clock Failure

MN 3
This message displays when the MUX card has a clock failure in one of the dual systems.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit, MG, system number for MUX b0-b1: Unit number where a clock failure occurred
card with a clock failure b2: MG number where a clock failure occurred
b3: 0/1 = Clock failure in MUX System 0/
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Clock failure in MUX System 1
b4: 0/1 = Faulty MUX is in ACT/
Faulty MUX is in STBY
2 Scan Data Scan Data:Clock alarm information on the faulty MUX card
b1: 0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b2: 0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway
b3: 0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM
procedure.
– 422 –
23-Z: Both MUX Clock Failure

MN 3
This message displays when the MUX card has a clock failure in both of the dual systems.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 MUX card location b0-b1: Unit number

b2: MG number
b7 b2 b1 b0
2 Scan Data 1 Scan Data 1:Details on clock alarm information (ACT mode)
3 Scan Data 2 Scan Data 2:Details on clock alarm information (STBY mode)
Reference: See Chapter 5 MUX Replacement: 1-IMG or MUX Replacement: 4-IMGfor the circuit card
– 423 –
26-N: MAT Log

NON 0
This message displays when the PCPro is log-in or log-out.
1: XX00 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Port number of the PCPro logged b0-b2: I/O Port number

in/out 000 = Port 0 001 = Port 1
010 = Port 2 011 = Port 3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 100 = Port 4 101 = Port 5
110 = Port 6 111 = Port 7
b4-b7: 0000 = Login
0001 = Logout
0010 = Command is startup
0011 = Command END
2 Command Name b0-b7: Command name

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 User Name b0-b7: User name entered by the MAT

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 424 –
26-R: Call Trace

NON 2
This message is issued when a call, originated via a station/trunk, is judged as malicious, and then, the details
on the call are traced with the called party pressing an access code or the Call Trace key.
When a call is originated from a station
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9
10 11
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
• Information on Called Party (Informer)
1 Fusion Point Code (FPC) (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
1
DC2 DC3
2 Tenant number (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
2
DC2 DC3
3
b4 - b7 b0 - b3
Physical Station number (HEX) Note 1
DC0 DC1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
4 User Group Number (UGN) (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
4
DC2 DC3
5
b4 - b7 b0 - b3 b4 - b7 b0 - b3
Telephone number (HEX) Note 1
DC0 DC1 DC8 DC9
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DC2 DC3 DC10 DC11
5
DC4 DC5 DC12 DC13
DC6 DC7 DC14 DC15
– 425 –
• Information on Malicious call
6 Kind of Call (HEX) 10H=Call from a station

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b4 - b7 b0 - b3
7 Fusion Point Code (FPC) (HEX) Note 1, Note 3
DC0 DC1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 7
DC2 DC3
b4 - b7 b0 - b3
8 Tenant number (HEX) Note 1, Note 3 DC0 DC1
8
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC2 DC3
b4 - b7 b0 - b3
9 Physical Station number (HEX) Note 1 DC0 DC1
9 DC2 DC3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DC4 DC5
b4 - b7 b0 - b3
10 User Group Number (UGN) (HEX) Note 2, Note 3
10
DC0 DC1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC2 DC3
b4 - b7 b0 - b3 b4 - b7 b0 - b3
11 Telephone number (HEX) Note 1, Note 3 DC0 DC1 DC8 DC9
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC2 DC3 DC10 DC11
11
DC4 DC5 DC12 DC13
DC6 DC7 DC14 DC15
Note 1: Each number/code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings are as follows:

Output Data (HEX) Actual Meaning
1~9 o 1~9
A o 0
B o *
C o #
0 o blank
For example:
“1A0” is output for indicating the FPC “10”, and “1A3” for the FPC “103”.
“1A” is output for indicating the Tenant Number “10”.
Note 2: This message is output only when the caller’s User Group Number is “1”.
Note 3: When no Telephone Number is allocated to the connected party’s number in Station-to-Station calls,
FPC, User Group Number, Tenant Number, and Telephone Number data here is output as “0”.
– 426 –
When a call is originated from a trunk
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
• Information on Called Party (Informer)
1 Fusion Point Code (FPC) (HEX) Note 1

b4 - b7 b0 - b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
1
DC2 DC3
2 Tenant number (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
2
DC2 DC3
3 Physical Station number (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
3 DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
4 User Group Number (UGN) (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

DC0 DC1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 4
DC2 DC3
5 Telephone number (HEX) Note 1 b4 - b7 b0 - b3

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC0 DC1
DC2 DC3
DC4 DC5
DC6 DC7
5
DC8 DC9
DC10 DC11
DC12 DC13
DC14 DC15
– 427 –
• Information on Malicious Call
6 Kind of Call (HEX) 20H=Call from a trunk

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b4 - b7 b0 - b3
DC0 DC1
7 Calling number of Trunk Call (Caller ID) (HEX) Note 1, Note 2 DC2 DC3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC4 DC5
DC6 DC7
DC8 DC9
DC10 DC11
DC12 DC13
DC14 DC15
Note 1: Each number/code is output in hexadecimal. 7
DC16 DC17
Detailed meanings are as follows:
DC18 DC19
Output Data (HEX) Actual Meaning DC20 DC21
DC22 DC23
1~9 o 1~9
DC24 DC25
A o 0 DC26 DC27
B o * DC28 DC29
DC30 DC31
C o #
0 o blank
For example:
“1A0” is output for indicating the FPC “10”, and “1A3” for the FPC “103”.
“1A” is output for indicating the Tenant Number “10”.
Note 2: If the number of the trunk call (Caller-ID) cannot be identified, the data here is output as “0”.
– 428 –
26-V: LAN Interface Error Report

SUP
This message is issued when the connection error related to external LAN Interface equipment occurs in the
system.
TCP/IP Part Application Part
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 00XX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
4: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
24 25 26 27 28
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 ~ 4 IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (HEX)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
5 , 6 Socket number (Used Socket number) (HEX) - Socket Number used by application, in which error has been
detected.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
7 Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (HEX)See Table 3-1.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 429 –
Table 3-1 Error Code
OUTPUT DATA
DEFINITION
(HEX (DEC))
01 (01) Not operational

16 (22) User parameter error
25 (37) Operation already in progress
31 (49) Cannot assign requested address
32 (50) Network is down
37 (55) Buffer space error
41 (65) No route for requested host
8 Application Type b0-b7: (HEX)

01=SUPER SERVER
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02=MAT
03=SMDR
04=MCI
05=OAI
06=PMS
07=MIS
08=NMS
09=CS REPORT
When 8 =02 (PCPro) / 08 (NMS)
9 Device Number of error-detected Client PC b0-b7: (HEX)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Device Number of error-detected Client PC.
If the Machine Number is not determined, “00”
is output.
b0-b7: (HEX)
10 Kind of Error 01 =SEND Execution error
02 =RECEIVE Execution error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 06 =Time Over
07 =Parity error
08 =Connection error
09 =Connection Port Capacity Over
0A=Detection of B-Level Infinite Loop
0B=Disconnection by Remote Control
0F =TCP/IP Internal Process error
10 =TCP/IP Internal Process error
– 430 –
11 Details on Detected Error -When 01/02 is output at 10 (HEX)

b0-b7: 01
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
-When 06 is output at 10 (HEX)
1
b0-b7: 01
-When 08 is output at 10
11 (HEX)
b0-b7: 01
-When 09/0A is output at 1011 (HEX)
b0-b7: 00
-When 0B is output at 10
11 (HEX)
b0-b7: 01
When 01/02/06/08/0A/0B is output at 11 ,

10 MAT input
12 ~ 28 Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers information is displayed.
When 8 =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI)

b0-b7: (HEX)
9 Device Number of error-detected Client PC Device Number of error-detected Client PC.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 If the Machine Number is not determined, FF
is output.
10 Kind of Error
b0-b7: (HEX)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
01=SEND Execution Error
02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=SEND Execution Count Over
04=RECEIVE Execution Count Over
05=System Data is not assigned
06=Time Over
07=Parity Error
08=Connection Error
09=Connection Port Capacity Over
0A=Detection of B-level Infinite Loop
0B=Disconnection from remote
0C=Undefined message receive
0D=SEND Execution Error
0E=Duplicated device number is used
0F=TCP/IP Internal Process Error
10=TCP/IP Internal Process Error
– 431 –
11 Details on Detected Error

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -When 01/02 is output at 10
11
b0-b7: Cause of error (HEX)

11
b0-b7: 01=Data (Data Output via LAN) not assigned

02=Device number not assigned
b0-b7: 00=No Parity is set
01=Odd Parity is set
02=Even Parity is set
12 ~ 28 Not used
When 8 =05 (OAI) / 07 (MIS)
9 Faulty Logical Port number (HEX)

b0-b7: (HEX)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 OAI logical number for external LANs whose fault
has occurred
10 Error Kind (ERRK)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b7: (HEX)
02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=TCP/IP Connection Error
04=Connection Error (B-Level Infinite Loop, etc.)
05=TCP/IP Port Capacity Over
06=TCP/IP Connection Error (Service Invalid)
11 ~ 28 Not used
– 432 –
When 8 =06 (PMS)
9 Device Number of error-detected PC (HEX) b0-b7: Device Number of error-detected Client PC. If the
Machine is not determined, FF is output.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
10 Error Kind (ERRK) b0-b7: Error Kind (HEX)

01: SEND Execution error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02: RECEIVE Execution error
05: System Data is not assigned
Note: This information is printed when PMS is used.
When 8 =09 (CS REPORT)
9 Device Number of error-detected Client PC (HEX) b0-b7: (HEX)

Device number for external LANs whose fault has
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 occurred. Non-specified equipment indicates “00”.
b0-b7: Error Kind (HEX)

10 Error Kind (ERRK) 02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=SEND Execution Count Over
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 05=System data is not assigned
06=Time Over
07=Parity Error
08=Connection Error
Note: This information is printed when PMS is used. 09=Invalid Device Error
0B=Client Forced Disconnection
0D=Identical Data Consecutive Receive
0E=Device number is same.
10=Process Stop
11 =Process Activation Error
12 =DB related error when receiving call data
13 =DB related error when compiling call data
14 =DB related error when editing reports
15 =DB Capacity Alarm
16 =Resource Error of HD
– 433 –
11 Details on Detected Error

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 -When 01/02 is output at 10
11

11
b0-b7: 01=Data (Data Output via LAN) not assigned

02=Device number not assigned
b0-b7: 00=No Parity is set
01=Odd Parity is set
02=Even Parity is set
12 ~ 28 Not used
– 434 –
26-W: LAN Interface Release Report

NON
This message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure, detected in System Message [26-V],
recovers. The message displays when the LAN Interface Connection Failure is restored. The first data is
normally sent/received by the recovered application equipment.
TCP/IP Application
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 00XX 2: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 - 4 IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (HEX)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
5 , 6 Socket number (Used Socket number) (HEX) - Socket Number used by application whose failure has been
received.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
7 Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (HEX)See Table 3-1.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b0-b7: (HEX)
01=SUPER SERVER
02=MAT
8 Application Type
03=SMDR
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 04=MCI
05=OAI
06=PMS
07=MIS
08=NMS
09=CS Report
– 435 –
When 8 =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI)
9 Device number of recovered Client PC b0-b7: (HEX)

Device number of recovered Client PC
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 for external LAN Interface.
10 Recovery Information b0-b7: (HEX)

01=Recovered
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02~FF=Not defined
When 8 =06 (PMS)

Device number of recovered Client PC.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
When 8 =09 (CS REPORT)

Device Number of recovered Client PC for external
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 LAN interface.
10 Recovery Information b0-b7: (HEX)

01=Recovered
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
02-0F=Not defined
10=Process Stop is recovered
11=Process Activation Error is recovered
12=DB related error when receiving call data recovery
13=DB related error when compiling recovery reports
14=DB related error when editing recovery reports
15=DB Capacity Alarm is recovered
16=Restore Error of HD is recovered
– 436 –
33-A: MUX Clock Restore

NON 3
This message displays when the MUX card, whose clock function was detected as faulty, is recovered.
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Unit, MG number for MUX card, b0-b1: Unit number for the recovered MUX card
which recovered from a clock failure b2: MG number for the recovered MUX card
b3: 0/1 = Fault recovery in the MUX System 0/
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Fault recovery in MUX System 1
b4: 0/1 = Faulty MUX is in ACT/
Faulty MUX is in STBY
2 RLS Data RLS Data:Clock alarm information on the recovered MUX card
– 437 –
33-B: SDT Alarm Warning

NON 2
This message displays when an abnormal state is detected temporarily on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card.
1: X0XX 00XX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Module Group (MG) b7: 0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b7 b0
2 Details on alarm b4, b3 b2-b0

00 000
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 00 001 Hardware Failure SDT Card
00 010 Optical Line Failure Trouble
00 011 Onboard Power Alarm
01 000
01 001 PCM Loss
01 010 Frame Alignment Loss
52M Interface
01 011 Receiving Section Failure
Alarm
01 100 Mistake Rate Degradation
01 101 Sending Section Failure
01 110 Mistake Detection
10 000
10 001 Receiving Path Failure
10 010 Pointer Failure VC-11 Path
10 011 Sending Path Failure Trouble
10 100 Receiving Path Error
Note
10 101 Sending Path Error
b7: SDT Card Status

0/1=System 0/System 1
Note: Alarm-detected HW is specified in 3 .
– 438 –
3 Alarm-detected HW The data here specifies the HW, on which any of the VC-11 Path
Trouble was detected in data 2 . Note.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Refer to the table below:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
- - - - 28 27 26 25
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
0/1=-/VC-11 Path Trouble
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Note: This data displays only when b4 is “1” and b3 is “0” in data 2 .
Repair Procedure
Fault repair work is not required by the display of this message. If the message is created frequently, it is
recommended that the repair work be performed as shown in System Message [33-C] SDT Alarm Trouble.
– 439 –
33-C: SDT Alarm Trouble

MN 3
This message displays when a grave failure occurs on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card. If this is issued, remember
the ACT/STBY change of the SDT card may be followed, as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line
(see System Message [33-E]).
1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0
2 Details on alarm b4, b3 b2-b0

00 000
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 00 001 Hardware Failure SDT Card
00 010 Optical Line Failure
00 011 Onboard Power Alarm Trouble
00 100 Abnormal MB Key Operation
01 000
01 001 PCM Loss
01 010 Frame Alignment Loss 52M Interface
01 011 Receiving Section Failure Alarm
10 000
10 101 Sending Path Error Note
b7: SDT Card Status

Note: See Fault Repair procedure on each alarm.
– 440 –
Repair Procedure
Depending on the fault status shown in data 2 , perform necessary repair work:
(1) Hardware Failure/Onboard Power Alarm

SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card is faulty. Replace the card with a spare by referring to Chapter 5: Replacement
Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable.
(2) Optical Line Failure

Diagnosis: In addition to this alarm, is the PCM Loss alarm also indicated?
YES o Optical line side is faulty.

Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed into make-busy state. Also, perform the
light level check of the optical fiber cables.
NO o SDT card is faulty.

Replace the SDT card with a spare by referring to Chapter 5: Replacement Procedure of SDT Card
and Optical Fiber Cable.
(3) Abnormal MB Key Operation

This alarm is indicated when the MB key on the PA-SDTA card is turned ON, even though the MBR key
has been on the OFF side. Place the MBR key UP (=ON) and then turn ON the MB key.
(4) PCM Loss

Abnormal state is detected on the optical line side. Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed
into make-busy state. Also, perform the light level check of the optical fiber cables.
(5) 52M Interface Alarm

- Frame Alignment Loss
- Receiving Section Failure
- Mistake Rate Degradation
- Sending Section Failure
- Mistake Detection
Clock synchronization with the distant node might be lost, or a trouble might occur on the optical line side.
Check the PLO cards first in both self-node and distant node. When no fault is found, proceed with the light
level check of the optical fiber cables.
– 441 –
(6) Receiving Path Failure/Receiving Path Error

Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the Receive signals. To restore this, perform the
following:
STEP 1 Initialization of SDT card (distant node)
Initialize the SDT card in the distant node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,
proceed with STEP 2.
STEP 2 Initialization of SDT card (self-node)
Initialize the SDT card in the self-node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,
STEP 3 Replacement of SDT card
It cannot be confirmed which node side (self-node or distant node) is faulty. By referring to
Chapter 5: Replacement Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable, first replace the SDT
card only in one of the nodes. When the fault does not recover, then also replace the SDT card
in other side of the nodes.
(7) Pointer Failure/Sending Path Failure/Sending Path Error

Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the Send signals. To restore this, perform the fol-
lowing:
STEP 1 Initialization of SDT card
Initialize the SDT card in the self-node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,
STEP 2 Replacement of SDT card
By referring to Chapter 5: Replacement Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable, replace
the SDT card in the self-node with a spare.
– 442 –
33-D: SDT Alarm Restore

NON 1
This message displays when the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card or optical fiber line, that was once detected as faulty,
recovers.
1: X0XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0
2 Details on the fault b4, b3 b2-b0

00 000
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 00 001 Hardware Failure
SDT Card
00 010 Optical Line Failure
00 011 Onboard Power Alarm Trouble
00 100 Abnormal MB Key Operation
01 000
01 001 PCM Loss
01 010 Frame Alignment Loss 52M Interface
01 011 Receiving Section Failure Alarm
10 000
10 101 Sending Path Error
b7: SDT Card Status

– 443 –
33-E: SDT Interface Change Notify

NON 2
This message displays when the ACT/STBY of the SDT (PA-SDTA) card is changed over as a result of fault
detection in the optical fiber line. When the ACT/STBY change cannot be performed, this message also
indicates the cause for the changeover execution failure.
1: X0XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b0
2 Detailed information b0: Active SDT after Changeover

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b1: Operating Status of SDT
0/1=In service/Out of service
b2, b3: Result of Changeover
0/1=Success/Failure
b7-b4 Cause for Changeover
0001 SDT had a serious failure
0010 MB key on SDT card was turned ON
3 Cause for changeover execution failure

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0H: (Changeover Success)
1H: Optical interface is not dual
2H: Optical interface has a serious failure in each System 0/1
Repair Procedure
Once this message displays, be sure to check other messages, such as [33-C] SDT Alarm Trouble, and review
the cause for the changeover. If any fault is implicated, repair the whole fault(s) according to the situation.
– 444 –
33-F: PKG Download Failure Notification

SUP 1
This message is shown when failure in downloading from the system to the card, or from the card to the terminal,
is detected.
1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note: This message has been available since FP30-104 R25E.
1 Kind of Fault b0: 01H = ELCN-PKG Menu download failure for DT300
b1: 02H = Menu download failure between ELCN-PKG and terminal
b7 b1 b0 b2-b7: Not used
2 Mounting Location Fault detected
When 1 is 01H (ELCN-PKG Menu b0-b15: Mounting location of ELC card which detected fault
download failure for DT300)
b0-b2: Not used
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b0
b3-b7: Group No.
b8-b9: Unit No.
b10-b14: MG No.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b15: Not used
– 445 –
When 1 is 02H (Menu download failure b0-b15: Mounting location of terminal which detected fault
between ELCN-PKG and terminal)
b0-b2: Level No.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b3-b7: Group No.
b8-b9: Unit No.
b10-b14: MG No.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b15: Not used
3 Details of Fault
When 1 is 01H (ELCN-PKG Menu b0: Download failure of Menu for First language
download failure for DT300) b1: Download failure of Menu for Second language
b2: Download failure of Shortcut Menu for First language
b7 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: Download failure of Shortcut Menu for Second language
b4-b7: Not used
When 1 is 02H (Menu download failure b0: Download failure of Menu

between ELCN-PKG and terminal) b1: Download failure of Shortcut Menu
b2-b7: Not used
b7 b1 b0
– 446 –
33-G: MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Report

MN 3
This message displays when PCM parity error occurs on MUX circuit card.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 MUX in which a fault occurs b0-b1: Unit Number

b2: MG Number
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: MUX System
0/1= System 0/System 1
b4: MUX Status
0/1= ACT/STBY
– 447 –
33-H: MUX PKG PCM Parity Error Recovery Report

- 0
This message displays when PCM parity error on MUX circuit card has been recovered.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 MUX in which a fault occurs b0-b1: Unit Number

b2: MG Number
b7 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: MUX System
0/1= System 0/System 1
b4: MUX Status
0/1= ACT/STBY
– 448 –
33-R: IP PKG Warning

SUP 2
This message is issued as a warning for the IP-related network configuration (IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IP PAD), such
as heavy load imposed on the IP network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
25 26 27 28
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Accommodated location of fault- b0-b4: Group (G) No.

detected card b5, b6: Unit (U) No.
b7: Module Group (MG) No.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG
2 Circuit Number b0-b2: Circuit No.

FFH: IPELC PKG Fault
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Fault Kind (FNC) 01H: Internal Ether Error

02H: External Ether Error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: Application Error
04H: IPELC/IPLC Fault (Fault related to LAN)
05H: Sequence Error
06H: PKG Inside Error
07H: MG Error
08H: Telephony Server (PHI) Error
09H: Telephony Server (PHF) Error
– 449 –
4 Fault Information (INF) When 3 = 01 or 02 Hex.:

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H: Hardware Error
02H: Ether Error
03H: IP Error
04H: TCP Error
When 3 = 03 Hex.:
01H: RTP/RTCP Error
When 3 = 04 Hex.:
01H: Hardware Error (Removal of Ether Cables, Initialization Fault,
etc.)
02H: Ether Error (Fault related to Ether Drivers)
03H: IP Error (Warning related to IP Packets)
04H: RTP/RTCP Warning (Warning related to RTP Packets)
05H: PM Error (Fault related to ELC)
06H: NC Error (Fault related to IP Functions)
07H: PCM Error (Fault related to PCM)
08H: VCT Error (Fault related to VC)
When 3 = 05 Hex.:
01H: iLP-PM Command Error
02H: Registry Error
03H: Health Check Error
04H: Communication Error
When 3 = 06 Hex.:
01H: Internal fault of PHL(PHE)/IP PAD is detected.
When 3 = 07 HEX:
05H: TCP Fault
06H: RTP Warning (Voice)
07H: Processor Error
When 3 = 08 HEX:
01H: TCP Link Fault Warning
When 3 = 09 HEX:
02H: Internal PHF fault
Socket related processing error
03H: Data transmission error
Data send/receive error
5 Details on Fault Information (FLT) This data can be analyzed by seeing combination of the data.
See the tables on the following pages:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 450 –
6 - 28 Additional Information These data vary depending on the combination of the data.
See the tables on the following pages:
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 451 –
The following provides the fault information by using the combination of data (FNC, INF, and FLT).
Definition of Fault Information
FNC
INF ( 4 ) FLT ( 5 ) Data of 6 - 28 Description
(3)
01/02 01 01 None Ether cable not connected
02 Failed to initialize Ether Controller
03 Failed to reset Ether Controller
04 Failed after 16 attempts to transmit,

due to collisions
05 Lost carrier during transmission
06 Collision has occurred after the slot

time of the channel has elapsed
07 CRC error on the incoming frame
08 Received Descriptor is not available
09 Received Buffer error
0A Transmit Buffer error
0B Exceeds allowed transmission limit
0C FIFO overflow
02 01 Transmit Timer time out
02 Receives over-length message

03 Transmit Buffer overflow
03 01 6 - 9 : Destination IP Address Time-to-live expired on packet
02 10 , 11 : Faulty Port No. (Origination)
Bad header checksum in packet
12 , 13 : Faulty Port No. (Destination)
03 Received bad format packet
04 Failed to frame received pack-
ets
05 Cannot fragment packet
– 452 –
FNC
(3)
04 01 6 : Port Kind No response to keep alive

01: For FCCS Signaling packet
02 02: For Speech Path Control
03: For CCIS Signaling Level 4 error
03 7 : Connection Type Time out disconnection
01: Client
04 02: Server
8 - 11 : Destination IP Address
01/02
12 , 13 : Faulty Port No. (Origination)
14 , 15 : Faulty Port No. (Destination)
Exceeds allowed connection
16 : Trouble Information maximum
00: Not Confirmed
01: Originating Side
02: Destination Side
17 : Trouble Element (04 Hex. fixed)
– 453 –
FNC
(3)
03 01 02 6 : Faulty Voice Channel Lost packets a lot
03 7 : CODEC (H1H2) Over jitter-interval

When IP PAD is installed, “H2” is not used,
04 and some bytes ( 9 -) are different from Jitter buffer overflow
those of others. Refer to “Note 2”.
05 Received unknown pay-load in RTP
H1: Speech Compression Mode
packet
00: Not Used
06 01: G.729a (8 kbps) Pay-load length too long
02: G.723.1 (5.3 kbps)
07 03: G.723.1 (6.3 kbps) Received SDES of another CNAME
04: G.711P-Law (64 kbps)
08 Received RTCP length too long
05: G.711A-Law (64 kbps)
09 06-0F: Not Used Received RTCP length too short
H2: Packet Configuration Mode
0A 00: Original Payload Received BYE packet
01: Standard Payload
81 Not received RR packet
02: Standard Payload +
82 Payload for DTMF relay
03-0F: Not Used
8 : Voice Sending Interval
00: Not Used
01: 10ms
02: 20ms
03: 30ms
04: 40ms
9 , 10 : Destination Port
15 , 16 : Originating Port
17 - 20 : Originating IP Address
21 - 24 : Send Synchronization Source Transmission packet is late
25 - 28 : Receive Synchronization Source
Note 1: “ 21 - 28 ” are for

Synchronization source
identifier. Random Values
are output.
Note 2: When IP PAD is installed,

some parameters are as
follows:
9 - 12 : Destination LENS
17 , 18 : Destination Location ID
– 454 –
FNC
(3)
04 01 09 6 : Function Code Receive Buffer Error

00: Warning
02 00 01: Fault Fixed
03 02: Recovery
00 Fixed
9 - 28 : Dynamic Data
04 00 Fixed
Note:For more information, see Communication restart from PM to
05
03 “Detailed Information of NC (CPU)
Fault”. Failed to register PAW due to queue
08 overflow
10 Timer
13 Memory Fault
06 Communication restart from PM to
43 NC (CPU)
58 Ethernet Driver
07 80 Initial Setting (PCMCNT-0)
90 Initial Setting (PCMCNT-1)
08 C0 Initializing setting (Sub PKG#0)
Detect WDT overflow on OS VC-0
C1 (Sub PKG#0)
D0 Initializing setting (Sub PKG#1)
D1 (Sub PKG#1)
E0 Initializing setting (Sub PKG#2)
E1 (Sub PKG#2)
F0 Initializing setting (Sub PKG#3)
F1 (Sub PKG#3)
– 455 –
FNC
(3)
05 01 01 6 : Sequence Number Failed to send IP related data setting

command
7 : PM Type Note 1
02 Failed to receive IP related data
8 : PM Extension Type Note 1 setting command
03 9 : Contents of Command Response timeout of IP related data
setting command
04 Failed to send NTP information
command
05 Failed to receive NTP information
command
06 Response timeout of NTP
information command
07 Failed to send Media control
information command
08 Failed to receive Media control
information command
09 Response timeout of Media control
information command
0A Failed to send SW/H.245
information command
0B Failed to receive SW/H.245
information command
0C Response timeout of SW/H.245
information command
0D Failed to send HC executing data
command
0E Failed to receive HC data setting
response command
0F Response timeout of HC data setting
response command
10 Failed to send HC executing data
deletion command
11 Response timeout of HC executing
data deletion command
12 Failed to send VLAN setting
command
13 Failed to receive VLAN setting
command
14 Failed to send VLAN/EN deletion
command
15 Failed to receive VLAN/EN deletion
command
– 456 –
FNC
(3)
05 01 16 6 : Sequence Number Response timeout of VLAN/EN

deletion command
7 : PM Type Note 1
17 Command for PH restart with initial
8 : PM Extension Type Note 1 settings: 01h output
9 : Contents of Command Command for PH restart with initial
18
settings: 02h output
19 PM reset output
1A Failed to send HC status read request

command
1B Response timeout of HC status read
request command
1C Failed to send ToS setting request
command
1D Failed to send ToS data read
response command
1E Response timeout of ToS data read
response command
02 01 Failed to send initial setting
command
02 Failed to receive path setting
completion command
03 Response timeout of path setting
completion command
04 Failed to send EN-IP address setting
command
02 05 Failed to receive EN-IP address
setting completion command
06 Response timeout of EN-IP address
setting completion command
07 Failed to send EN-IP address setting
deletion command
08 Response timeout of EN-IP Address
deletion completion command
09 Failed to send key-assigned table
setting command
0A Failed to receive key-assigned table
setting response command
0B Response timeout of key-assigned
table setting command
0C Failed to send initializing part
command
– 457 –
FNC
(3)
05 03 01 6 : Error Number Failed to perform health check

7 : PM Type Note 1 Note:The system automatically
8 : PM Extension Type Note 1
resets the appropriate ter-
minal for the recovery pur-
9 : MAC Address (Max.8 addresses) pose.
04 01 [33-R/S]
Detect a communication port error
on Telephony Server
[33-T]
Communication port error on
Telephony Server was recovered.
02 Failed to communicate between
Telephony Server and IP terminals
Note:The system automatically
resets the appropriate ter-
minal for the recovery pur-
pose.
06 01 01 6 : Alarm Database Number
01: Table which SH1 monitors
02: Table which SH2 monitors
7 : Message Number (Max.10)
Detect the fault of PHL/IP PAD
– 458 –
FNC
(3)
07 05 01 6 : Port Kind Failed to receive keep-alive packets

01: H.245
03 Disconnected connection due to
02: Signaling (MG and IP terminal)
timeout
03: Speech Channel Control
04 7 : Connection Type
00: Client
01: Server
8 - 11 : Connecting IP Address
12 , 13 : Self Port Number
Error due to overload of connection
14 , 15 : Counter Port Number
number
16 : Fault Location
00: Undefined
01: Self Side
02: Counter Side
06 02 6 : Detected Fault Channel Large number of packet loss occurs.

(Loss rate of arriving packets kept
7 : Voice Compression
10 for 15 seconds, or more than 10
00: Not Used
of all the packets received for 5
01: G.729a (8k)
seconds kept exceeding a maximum
02: G.723.1 (5.3k)
of jitter-buffer for 15 seconds.)
03: G723.1 (6.3k)
04 04: G.711 (P-Law) Jitter-buffer overflow
05: G.711 (A-Law) This message is output only one time
per session.
8 : Packet Kind
05 01: 10ms Payload type is abnormal.
02: 20ms Undefined payload of RTP packet is
03: 30ms received.
06 04: 40ms Payload over 200 ms is received.
06: 60ms
08 RTCP packet over standard packet
9 , 10 : Counter Port Number length (772 bytes) is received.
11 - 14 : Counter IP Address RTCP packet below standard packet
09
15 , 16 : Self Port Number length (772 bytes) is received.
0A 17 - 20 : Self IP Address Forcefully-disconnection flag (BYE
packet) was received.
21 - 24 : Sending SSRC
82
25 - 28 : Packet transmission is delayed.
Receiving SSRC
– 459 –
FNC
(3)
07 07 01 6 - 26 : Detailed Fault Information MG fault is determined because a

several faults in PM of PHI in each
Telephony Server occur for a period.
02 SH4 (NC) temporary fault
03 SH1 (TC) temporary fault
04 SH1 (VC) temporary fault
05 78K4(DC) temporary fault
08 01 6 - 9 : Accommodated Location
10 , 11 : MG-ID
12 : MG-Type Detect Temporary TCP Link Fault
13 - 16 : IP Address
17 , 18 : Port Number
– 460 –
FNC
(3)
01 PHF operation start
01 02 Recovered from the network fault Not Applicable
03 Recovered by re-routing
01 Socket option error
02 FCCS port fault Initialize PHF module
03 UDP packet sending error

02 Communication failure (major) Peer-to-Peer FCCS network has
been disconnected because of fre-
04 quent packet loss. Contact the net-
work administrator and have the
cause investigated.
01 Restart sequence start
02 Line fault
Not Applicable
03 Continuous sending timed out
09 04 Continuous sending occurred
Alternate Routing The office data has been assigned

wrongly, or network failure is
occurring. If system message ([33-
S] IP PKG Failure) has been output
05
as well, contact the network admin-
03 istrator. If only this message has
been output, check again the office
data related to FCCS.
Communication failure (minor) Packet loss is occurring. Check
whether the same system message
has been output at the opposite
06 node. If this message has been out-
put continuously, contact the net-
work administrator and have the
cause investigated.
07 PHF Communication Status Report This message is for engineer only.
– 461 –
Note 1: Combination of 7 and 8 shows the following Circuit Cards.
7 8
Circuit Card
(PM Type) (PM Extension Type)
0F 11 PHA (4 card-width occupied)
0F 12 PHA (2 card-width occupied)
4F 11 PHD (4 card-width occupied)
4F 12 PHD (2 card-width occupied)
1F 11 IP PAD
AF 11 PHE (4 card-width occupied)
AF 12 PHE (2 card-width occupied)
AF 13 Internal PHE (2 card-width occupied)
1F 13 Internal PHI
– 462 –
The following provides the troubleshooting for “Definition of Fault Information”. If the appropriate solution is not
in the list, contact NEC engineers.
Table 3-2 Troubleshooting For Fault Information
FNC( 3 ) INF( 4 ) FLT( 5 ) SOLUTION

02 01 01 This message is output when the LAN cable link on the front panel of the
circuit card (PHA/PHD/IP PAD) indicates link-down.
The cause could be considered that LAN cable between HUB and the
circuit card is abnormal. Make sure the cables, if necessary, replace the
appropriate one with the new one.
02 03 This message is output when outgoing buffer from Telephony Server to
IP terminals is overflowed. Make sure the IP terminals’ status, whether
network congestion or packet delay occurs.
04 01 This message is output when a communication port on the counter PHC
is abnormal. Make sure the network status and the network
configuration. If the error keeps occurring, reset the TCP/IP module.
04 This message is output when the PHC connection number exceeds the
maximum number (64). Make sure the number and adjust it if it does.
03 01 02 This message is output when the real-time protocol (RTP) packet loss
occurs beyond allowed time or period.
The cause could be considered as some of the network problems such as
hardware fault and LAN fault. However, it might be temporary problem
due to the traffic congestion. If the error keeps occurring occasionally,
ask the network administrator.
04 ALL ALL Refer to Table 3-3.
05 01/02 ALL This message is output when the fault occurs in the system initialization
or the registration process abnormality of IP station number.
The cause could be considered as some of the network problem such as
hardware fault and LAN fault. Check the card. If the card works properly,
the fault might be temporary. If the card does not work properly, replace
it with a new one. If the error keeps occurring after the replacement,
contact NEC engineers.
03 01 This message is output when the connection cannot establish between
PHA/PHE and MC, Telephony Server and IP terminals.
The cause could be considered that related equipment (such as LAN,
MC, MG, or PHA/PHE) is abnormal. Make sure that the MC/MG with
the MAC address shown on the message is available to use. If it is listed
as available, keep watching it. Otherwise, contact NEC engineers.
Specify the cause location of the fault as follows:
If the health check error occurs in PHA/PHE accommodating all the
MCs, the error might occur in the system, PHA/PHE or PHA/PHE-side
network.
If the health check error occurs in specified MC,
the error might occur on the speech path connecting the MC.
04 01 This message [33-R/S] is output when the Telephony Server
communication port is abnormal. If the message keeps occurring, reset
the TCP/IP module.
– 463 –

05 04 02 This message is output when the connection cannot establish between
Telephony Server and IP terminals.
The cause could be considered that related equipment are abnormal.
Make sure that the MG with the MAC address shown on the message is
available to use. If it is listed as available, keep watching it. Otherwise,
contact NEC engineers.
07 06 02 If this message is frequently output, review the network and make sure
the LAN configuration, or ask maintenance personnel.
07 01 If this message is frequently output, replace the appropriate MG.
02
03
04
05
08 08/102 ALL If this message is frequently output, review the network and make sure
the LAN configuration, or ask maintenance personnel.
09 01 01 6 - 9 : Socket number acquired
02 6: Recovery Detail
01: Recovered from socket fault
02: Recovered from data transmission error
03 6 : FPC number of adjacent nodes which has recovered
7 - 10 : IP Address of adjacent nodes which has recovered
– 464 –

09 02 01 6 - 9 : Cause of socket option setting error
(Error number notified by the TCP/IP module)
10 - 13 : Socket number with error
(Socket number will be indicated as “0” when failed to generate the
socket number)
02 6 : Cause of error cause: 01 (Socket generating error)
: 02 (Bind error)
: 03 (Call Back setting error)
7 - 10 : Cause of socket option setting error
socket number)
03 6 - 9 : Cause of socket option setting error
socket number)
14 : Destination FPC number
19 : Destination PBI number
20 - 21 :
UDP Sending packet ID
(Indicated as “0” when it is not re-send)
– 465 –

09 03 01 6 : Destination FPC number
7 : Cause of start 1/2 = Send process/Receive process
8 - 9 : Send/Received packet ID when phenomenon occurred
10 - 11 : ID of packet estimated to be received when phenomenon
occurred (Only when Cause of start = “2”)
02 6 : Destination FPC number
03 or 04 6 : Destination FPC number

11 - 12 : Packet ID when phenomenon occurred
05 6 : Cause 01 Health Check error
02 PHF status error
03 Office data is not registered.
7 : Destination FPC number designated by the dominant module
8 : FPC number with send error
9 - 12 : IP Address with send error
06 6 : Destination FPC number

7 : Loss rate of transmitted packets
8 - 11 : Total number of transmitted packets of each FPC
12 - 15 : Number of lost transmitted packets of each FPC
16 : Loss rate of received packets
17 - 20 : Total number of received packets of each FPC
21 - 24 : Number of lost received packets of each FPC
– 466 –
The following provides detailed fault information and the solution by using the combination of data (INF, FLT, and
Detailed Info). These information are provided when FNC ( 3 ) indicates 04.
Table 3-3 Detailed Fault Information and The Troubleshooting
Detailed Info
INF ( 4 ) FLT ( 5 ) 7 8
Description Solution
05 03 20 0E Failed to communicate between DPMs Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
occurs again, replace the IPELC
Restart to communicate between DPMs
(IPLC) with a new one.
08 12 0C Buffer Overflow None
01 01 Detect NC (CPU) WDT Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
occurs again, replace the IPELC
02 01 Detect PCMCONT-0 (DSP) WDT
03 01 Detect PCMCONT-1 (DSP) WDT
08 01 Detect VC0 (CPU) WDT Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
Recovery VC0 (CPU) occurs again, replace the VC0 PKG
08 04 Failed to initialize VC0 (CPU) device with a new one.
09 01 Detect VC1 (CPU) WDT (Sub PKG#1) Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
10 Recovery VC1 (CPU) occurs again, replace the VC1 PKG
09 04 Failed to initialize VC1 (CPU) device with a new one.
0A 01 Detect VC2 (CPU) WDT (Sub PKG#2) Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
0A 04 Failed to initialize VC2 (CPU) device with a new one.
0B 01 Detect VC3 (CPU) WDT (Sub PKG#3) Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
0B 04 Failed to initialize VC3 (CPU) device with a new one.
12 00 80 Failed to download programs Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault

42 02 Memory Fault occurs again, replace the IPELC
13 Memory Fault Recovery (IPLC) with a new one.
40 80 13 Failed to reserve OS resource Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault

20 0E occurs again, replace the IPELC
43 Failed to communicate between DPMs (IPLC) with a new one.
06
80 16 Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
4A Failed to set LAN related data occurs again, replace the IPELC
– 467 –
Table 3-3 Detailed Fault Information and The Troubleshooting (continued)
Detailed Info
INF ( 4 ) FLT ( 5 ) Description Solution
7 8
80 23 (1) When the fault occurs in all the
terminals accommodated in
IPELC (IPLC), reset the IPELC
(IPLC). If the fault occurs again,
replace the IPELC (IPLC) with a
new one.
4A Failed to negotiate with terminals
(2) When the fault occurs in some
06 terminals accommodated in
IPELC (IPLC), reset the IPELC
(IPLC). If the fault occurs again,
replace the terminals with new
ones.
43 10 Failed to receive packets None
58
43 11 Failed to send packets None
80 02 04 Failed to initialize PCMCONT-0 device Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
07 occurs again, replace the IPELC
03 04 Failed to initialize PCMCONT-1 device (IPLC) with a new one.
90
0C 04 Failed to initialize VC0 device (Sub Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
PKG#0) occurs again, replace the VCT0 PKG
C0 with a new one.
Complete to initialize VC0 device (Sub
PKG#0)
C1 0C 01 Detect VC0 (DSP) WDT (Sub PKG#0) None
0D 04 Failed to initialize VC1 device (Sub Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
D0 with a new one.
PKG#1)
08 D1 0D 01 Detect VC1 (DSP) WDT (Sub PKG#1) None
0E 04 Failed to initialize VC2 device (Sub Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
E0 with a new one.
PKG#2)
E1 0E 01 Detect VC2 (DSP) WDT (Sub PKG#2) None
0F 04 Failed to initialize VC3 device Reset IPELC (IPLC). If the fault
F0 occurs again, replace the VCT3 PKG
Complete to initialize VC3 device with a new one.
F1 0F 01 Detect VC3 (DSP) WDT (Sub PKG#3) None
– 468 –
33-S: IP PKG Failure

SUP 3
This message is issued when the system detects a failure on the IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IP PAD circuit cards that
affects normal speech path state.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
25 26 27 28
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

detected card b5, b6: Unit (U) No.
b7: Module Group (MG) No.
2 Circuit Number b0-b2: Circuit No.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Fault Kind 01H: Internal Ether Error

02H: External Ether Error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: Application Error
04H: IPELC/IPLC Fault (Fault related to LAN)
05H: Sequence Error
07H: MG Error
08H: Telephony Server (PHI) Error
09H: Telephony Server (PHF) Error
– 469 –
4 Fault Information When 3 = 01 or 02 Hex.:

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H: Hardware Error
02H: Ether Error
03H: IP Error
04H: TCP Error
When 3 = 03 Hex.:
01H: RTP/RTCP Error
When 3 = 04 Hex.:
01H: Hardware Error (Removal of Ether Cables, Initialization Fault,
etc.)
02H: Ether Error (Fault related to Ether Drivers)
03H: IP Error (Warning related to IP Packets)
04H: RTP/RTCP Warning (Warning related to RTP Packets)
05H: PM Error (Fault related to ELC)
06H: NC Error (Fault related to IP Functions)
07H: PCM Error (Fault related to PCM)
08H: VCT Error (Fault related to VC)
When 3 = 05 Hex.:
01H: iLP-PM Command Error
02H: Registry Error
03H: Health Check Error
When 3 = 06 Hex.:
01H: Internal fault of PHL(PHE)/IP PAD is detected.
When 3 = 07 HEX:
05H: TCP Fault
06H: RTP Warning (Voice)
07H: Processor Error
When 3 = 08 HEX:
02H:TCP Link Fault
When 3 = 09 HEX:
5 Details on Fault Information
See the tables of [33-R].
6 - 28 Additional Information
– 470 –
33-T: IP PKG Restore

NON 1
This message is issued when IPTRK/PHC/PHL/IP PAD circuit cards’ failure recovers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
25 26 27 28
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Accommodated location of fault b0-b4: Group (G) No.

detected card b5, b6:Unit (U) No.
b7:Module Group (MG) No.
2 Circuit Number b0-b2:Circuit No.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Fault Kind 01H:Internal Ether Error

02H:External Ether Error
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H:Application Error
04H:IPELC/IPLC Fault (Fault related to LAN)
05H:Sequence Error
07H:MG Error
08H:Telephony Server (PHI) Error
09H:Telephony Server (PHF) Error
– 471 –
4 Fault Information When 3 = 01 or 02 Hex.:

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H:Hardware Error
02H:Ether Error
03H:IP Error
04H:TCP Error
When 3 = 03 Hex.:
01H:RTP/RTCP Error
When 3 = 04 Hex.:
IP related fault occurs in LAN
01H=Hardware Error
02H=Ether Error
03H=IP Error
04H=RTP/RTCP Warning
05H=PM Error
06H=NC Error
07H=PCM Error
08H=VCT Error
When 3 = 05 Hex.:
01H=iLP-PM Command Error
02H=Registry Error
03H=Health Check Error
When 3 = 07 HEX:
05H:TCP Fault
06H:RTP Warning (Voice)
07H:Processor Error
When 3 = 08 HEX:
00H:TCP Link Recovery
When 3 = 09 HEX:
5 Details on Fault Information
6 - 28 Additional Information
– 472 –
33-U: H.323 Information

NON 1
This message is issued when the system detects any H.323-related information.
1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Accommodated location of circuit b0-b4: Group (G) number

card that detected H.323 b5, b6: Unit (U) number
information b7: Module Group (MG) number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Circuit Number b0-b7: Circuit number

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Fault Kind 01H: GK Information

02H: RTP/RTCP information
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: Internal interface information
– 473 –
4 Fault Information
This data can be analyzed by combination of 3 and 4 .
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
See the table below:
Definition of Fault Information - Details
DATA OF DATA OF
3 4 DEFINITION
(HEX) (HEX)
01 01 Received RCF message
02 Received RRJ message
03 Received UCF message
04 Received URJ message
02 01 Finished to register RTP/RTCP
02 Failed to register RTP/RTCP
03 03 Internal Ether error, between voice and signalling circuit cards
– 474 –
35-A: GK Operation Start Notification

- 0
This message displays when initial settings for Gate Keeper (GK) have successfully completed and the GK starts
operating.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 ID of GK that starts operating b0-b7: ID of GK that starts operating (01-FF)

(HEX)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 IP Address of GK that starts operating b0-b31: IP Address (HH1.HH2.HH3.HH4)

(HEX) b0-b7: HH1 (00-FF)
b8-b15:HH2 (00-FF)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b16-b23:HH3 (00-FF)
b24-b31:HH4 (00-FF)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
– 475 –
3 Number of Speech Channels b0-b15:The number of speech channels between Telephony Server and GK
Between Telephony Server and GK (1-300)
(HEX) (Little Indian Note)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
Note: Format for storage or transmission of binary data in which the least significant bit in the lowest address
comes first. For example, b0-b7 indicates 0A and b8-b15 (the lower address) indicates 00, the sent bits
will be 0x000A.
– 476 –
35-B: GK Operation Stop Notification

SUP 1
This message displays when Telephony Server failed to communicate with Gate Keeper (GK) via control
signals during operations.
1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 ID of GK that stops operating b0-b7: ID of GK that stops operating (01-FF)

(HEX)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 477 –
35-C: SP Warning Notification

SUP 2
This message displays when temporal failure occurs on SP.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

detected SP or the PH under the b5, b6: Unit (U) No.
control of SP b7: Module Group (MG) No.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Type of failure (FNC) 01H: Health check error

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Failure information (INF) When 2 = 01 Hex:

01H: MPH failure
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02H: PH failure
– 478 –
35-D: SP Failure
MN 3
This message displays when any failure has influence on carrying on calls occur on SP.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Failure information (INF) When = 01 Hex:

01H: MPH failure
– 479 –
35-E: SP Failure Recovery

NON 1
This message displays when any failure has influence on carrying on calls recovered.
1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Failure information (INF) When 2 = 01 Hex:

01H: MPH failure
– 480 –
35-F: SP Process Information

NON 0
This message displays the event information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XX00 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note 2: WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process controls the following terminals in SP.
- VoWLAN dual terminal/VoWLAN terminal/Standard SIP terminal/Standard SIP Video terminal
1 Kind of process (KIND) b0-b7: 01H = WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Kind of information (FNC) Note 2 b0-b7: 01H = Service Start.

02H = Reset Indication from MAT.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
03H = ACT Change Indication from MAT.
3 SIP server ID of WLAN Handset/ b0-b7: SIP server ID (1-127)

Standard SIP Process (ID) Note 2 When FNC is 01H: SIP server ID of SP whose operation is started.
When FNC is 02H: SIP server ID of SP to reset
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
When FNC is 03H: SIP server ID of SP that is active when changeover
direction is received.
– 481 –
4 IP address of WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process (IP) Note 2

IP address ** ** ** **
1 2 3 4
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0-b7: IP address 1
When FNC is 01H: IP address of SP whose operation is started.

When FNC is 02H: IP address of SP to reset
When FNC is 03H: IP address of SP that is active when changeover direction is received.
5 Number of speech channels for b0-b15: Number of speech channels for WLAN Handset/Standard
WLAN Handset/Standard SIP SIP process (0-1200)
process (CH NO) Note 2
When FNC is 01H: Number of speech channels for SP whose operation is
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
started.
When FNC is 02H: Number of speech channels for SP to reset
When FNC is 03H: Number of speech channels for SP that is active when
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
changeover direction is received.
6 Status of WLAN Handset/Standard b0-b7: 00H = No status

SIP process (ST) Note 2 01H = Single (When SIP Wireless Terminal Backup is not
executed.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
02H = Active
03H = Standby
When FNC is 01H: Status of SP whose operation is started.

When FNC is 02H: Status of SP to reset.
When FNC is 03H: Fixed to active.
Note 3: Available when “KIND = 01H“.
– 482 –
• Terms for outputting System Message
Each operation related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process and system message that is output when an
event occurs is as follows.
Note: Several messages may be output for one event.
Terms for outputting System Message
SIP Wireless Terminal

Operation/Event System Message
Backup
• 35-F (Information), FNC=01H

Operation is started.
(Service Start.), ST=01H (Single)
• 35-I (Stop), FNC=01H
(Service Stop), ST=01H (Single)
Operation is stopped.
Note: It takes about five minutes to output the mes-
Not executed sage after operation is stopped.
(Reset Indication from PCPro),
ST=01H (Single)
Reset operation from PCPro.
(Service Start.), ST=01H (Single)
(Service Start.), ST=02H (Active)
Operation is started.
(Service Start.), ST=03H (Standby)
• 35-G (Warning), FNC=01H
(Service Stop.), ST=03H (Standby)
Executed
(Active/Standby) • 35-I (Stop), FNC=02H
(SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.)
Operation of both SP are
stopped. Note: It takes about five minutes to output the mes-
sage after operation is stopped.
Note: If single operation is stopped, “35-I (MJ),

FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup
Service Stop.)” is not output.
– 483 –
Terms for outputting System Message
SIP Wireless Terminal

Operation/Event System Message
Backup
• 35-F (Information), FNC=02H (Reset Indica-

tion from PCPro.), ST=02H (Active)
Reset operation from PCPro • 35-G(Warning), FNC=02H (ACT Change.),

(Active side) ST=02H (Active)
• 35-F(Information), FNC=01H (Service Start.),

ST=03H (Standby)
• 35-F(Information), FNC=02H (Reset Indica-
tion from PCPro.), ST=02H (Active)
Reset operation from PCPro
(Standby side)
ST=03H (Standby)
Executed • 35-G(Warning), FNC=02H (ACT Change.),
(Active/Standby) ST=02H (Active)
Changeover by a failure
ST=03H (Standby)
• 35-F(Information), FNC=03H (ACT Change
Indication from PCPro.), ST=02H (Active)
Changeover operation from • 35-G(Warning), FNC=02H (ACT Change.),

PCPro ST=02H (Active)

ST=03H (Standby)
Mismatch in redundant setting • 35-G(Warning), FNC=03H (SIP Wireless Ter-
between SP and office data minal Backup Service Configuration Failure.)
Note: When office data for WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process is registered by ASSDN/ASSDL command al-
though WLAN Handset/Standard SIP terminal is not accommodated, “35-F: FNC=01H (Service
Start.)” is output when SP is activated and “35-I: FNC=01H (Service Stop.)” is output when SP is
stopped.
Note: ASSDN/ASSDL data is usually registered although WLAN Handset/Standard SIP terminal is not accom-
modated.
Note: It takes about five minutes (Time to detect KeepAliveTimeOut) to output “35-G: FNC=01H (Service
Stop.)”, “35-I: FNC=01H (Service Stop.)” or “35-I: FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service
Stop.)” after WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process stopped the operation.
– 484 –
Note: If WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process is restarted before TP side detects KeepAliveTimeOut, only
“35-F: FNC=01H (Service Start.)” is output without outputting “35-G: FNC=01H (Service Stop.)“,
“35-I: FNC=01H (Service Stop.)” or “35-I: FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.)“
– 485 –
35-G: SP Process Warning

SUP 2
This message displays the warning information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note: Refer to “35-F” for “Terms for outputting system message” and “Note”.
1 Kind of process (KIND) b0-b7: 01H = WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Kind of warning (FNC) Note 2 b0-b7: 01H = Service Stop.

02H = ACT Change.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
03H = SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Configuration
Failure.

Standard SIP process (ID) Note 2 When FNC is 01H: SIP server ID of SP whose operation is stopped.
When FNC is 02H: SIP server ID of SP that is changed active by
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
changeover.
When FNC is 03H: SIP server ID of SP that is detected mismatch in
redundant setting for SIP Wireless Terminal Backup.
– 486 –

1 2 3 4
When FNC is 01H: IP address of SP whose operation is stopped.

When FNC is 02H: IP address of SP that is changed active by changeover.
When FNC is 03H: IP address of SP that is detected mismatch in redundant setting for SIP Wireless Terminal Backup.
5 Number of speech channels for b0-b15: Number of speech channels for WLAN Handset/Standard
WLAN Handset/Standard SIP SIP process (0-1200)
process (CH NO) Note 2
When FNC is 01H: Fixed to 0.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
When FNC is 02H: Number of speech channels for SP that is changed
active by changeover.
When FNC is 03H: Fixed to 0.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
6 Status of WLAN Handset/Standard b0-b7: 00H = No status

SIP process (ST) Note 2 01H = Single (When SIP Wireless Terminal Backup is not
executed.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
02H = Active
03H = Standby
When FNC is 01H: Final status of SP whose operation is stopped.

When FNC is 02H: Fixed to active.
When FNC is 03H: Fixed to 00H.
– 487 –
• Factors for outputting system message
System message that disturbs WLAN Handset/Standard SIP terminal operation is indicated as follows.
Factors for outputting system message
System Message Outputting factors/Countermeasure

FNC=01H (Service Stop.) (Normal outputting factor)
Note: Output only when SIP Wireless Terminal • When single SP is powered off.
Backup is executed.
(Abnormal outputting factor)
• When single SP process is stopped or when

hardware failure occurred.
(Countermeasure for abnormal outputting)
• Check the network equipment, connection

and configuration.
• If failure occurs continuously despite the net-

work is normal, contact with field support.
FNC=02H (ACT Change.) (Normal outputting factor)
Note: Output only when SIP Wireless Terminal • When changeover is executed from PCPro.
Backup is executed.
• When active SP is powered off or rebooted.
• When changeover is executed by network

failure.
• When active SP process is stopped or when


and configuration.
• If an failure occurs continuously despite the

network is normal, contact with field support.
– 488 –

FNC=03H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Config- (Abnormal outputting factor)
uration Failure.)
• When redundant SIP server ID is different be-
Note: Output only when SIP Wireless Terminal tween the config data on SP side and the ASS-
Backup is executed. DN/ASSDL data.
• Make redundant the SIP server ID of config

data on SP side and the office data.
– 489 –
35-I: SP Process Stop

MJ 3
This message displays the major failure information related to WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process. Note 1
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note: Refer to “35-F” for “Terms for outputting system message” and “Note”.
1 Kind of process (KIND) Note 2 b0-b7: 01H = WLAN Handset/Standard SIP process
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Kind of warning (FNC) Note 2 b0-b7: 01H = Service Stop. (When SIP Wireless Terminal Backup is not
executed.)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
02H = SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.

Standard SIP process (ID) Note 2 When FNC is 01H: SIP server ID of SP whose operation is stopped.
When FNC is 02H: SIP server ID of SP that is stopped later than other SP
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
of two SP executing SIP Wireless Terminal Backup.
– 490 –

1 2 3 4
When FNC is 01H: IP address of SP whose operation is stopped.

When FNC is 02H: IP address of SP that is stopped later than other SP of two SP executing SIP Wireless Terminal
Backup.
– 491 –
• Factors for outputting system message
System message that disturbs WLAN Handset/Standard SIP terminal operation is indicated as follows.

FNC=01H (Service Stop.) (Normal outputting factor)
Note: Output only when SIP Wireless Terminal • When SP is powered off.
Backup is not executed.
• When SP process is stopped or When hard-

ware failure occurred.

and configuration.

FNC=02H (SIP Wireless Terminal Backup Service Stop.) (Normal outputting factor)
Note: Output only when SIP Wireless Terminal • When both SP are powered off.
Backup is executed.
• When both SP process is stopped or when


and configuration.

– 492 –
36-A: Office Data Copy Status Notification

SUP
This message displays when the Office Data transfer is completed or started.
1
1
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Detailed information
These data depend upon the kind of Office Data Copy [10, 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60]. For the detail, see the
following pages.
The detail for the Data information 1

[When the kind of Office Data Copy is 10/20/30/40 (DM/LDM)]
1 a b c d e f g
4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XX00 0000 0000
g h
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 : This data indicates 10, 20, 30, or 40.
– 493 –
[a] Broadcast Destination LP [System b0: PBI No.30 (No.0 CPU system on LP00)
0] (indicates in Logical PBI number) b1: PBI No.38
b2: PBI No.40 (No.0 CPU system on LP08)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b3: PBI No.48
b5: PBI No.58
b15 b8 b7: PBI No.68
b8: PBI No.02 (No.0 CPU system on SP) Note
[b] Broadcast Destination LP [System b0: PBI No.31 (No.1 CPU system on LP00)
1] (indicated in Logical PBI b1: PBI No.39
number) b2: PBI No.41 (No.1 CPU system on LP08)
b3: PBI No.49
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4: PBI No.51 (No.1 CPU system on LP16)
b5: PBI No.59
b7: PBI No.69
b15 b8 b8: PBI No.03 (No.1 CPU system on SP) Note
Note: This bit is applied only for STBY CPU.
[c] Broadcast Destination LP [System b0: PBI No.30 (No.0 CPU system on LP00)
b3: PBI No.48
b5: PBI No.58
b7: PBI No.68
[d] Broadcast Destination LP [System b0: PBI No.31 (No.1 CPU system on LP00)
b3: PBI No.49
b5: PBI No.59
b7: PBI No.69
– 494 –
Note: This bit is applied only for STBY CPU.
[e] Capacity of Broadcast Destination Data Memory (DM)/Network Data Memory (NDM)
Kind of Office Data Copy:When the Office Data Copy 1 is 10/20 indicates Data Memory (DM),
when the Office Data Copy 1 is 30/40 indicates Network Data Memory
(NDM).
• When the Office Data Copy 1 = 10/20 (Data Memory Capacity)
1 Data Memory Capacity b0-b7: Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by
ASYD SYS1 INDEX30)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: 2M
07H: 3M
0FH: 4M
1FH: 5M
3FH: 6M
7FH: 7M
FFH: 8M
• When the Office Data Copy 1 = 30/40 (Network Data Memory Capacity)
1 Network Data Memory Capacity b0-b7: Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by
ASYDL/ASYDN SYS1 INDEX514)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H: 2M
03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M
3FH: 12M
7FH: 14M
FFH: 16M
[f] Capacity of Broadcast Destination Local Data Memory (LDM)

Kind of Office Data Copy:When the Office Data Copy 1 is 10/20 indicates Data Memory (DM),
when the Office Data Copy 1 is 30/40 indicates Network Data Memory
(NDM).
– 495 –
• When the Office Data Copy 1 = 10/20 (Data Memory Capacity)
1 Local Data Memory Capacity b0-b3: Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H: 2M
03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M Note 1
3FH: 12M
Note 1: Available since FP85-104 S1E.
• When the Office Data Copy 1 = 30/40 (Network Data Memory Capacity)
1 Network Data Memory Capacity b0-b4: Data Memory Capacity (displays attributes specified by
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 01H: 2M
03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M
[g] The number of packet for Broadcast

to DM/NDM Area
[h] The number of packet for Broadcast to LDM Area
The detail for the Data information 2

[When the kind of Office Data Copy is 50/60 (DM/LDM)]
1 a b
b
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 496 –
1 : This data indicates 50 or 60.
[a] Capacity of Broadcast Destination b0-7: NDM Capacity (displays attributes specified by ASYDL/
Network Data Memory (NDM) ASYDN SYS1 INDEX514)
01H: 2M
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M
3FH: 12M
7FH: 14M
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
FFH: 16M
b8-b15: NDM Capacity (displays attributes specified by ASYDL/

ASYDN SYS1 INDEX957)
01H: 2M
03H: 4M
07H: 6M
0FH: 8M
1FH: 10M
[b] The information of the Broadcast Destination Office (FPC No.)

When the Office Data Copy is started ( 1 = 50) FPC numbers of destination office are displayed.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 1
~
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 32
– 497 –
When the Office Data Copy is finished or failed ( 1 = 60) FPC numbers of destination office are displayed.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 1
~
~
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Node No. 32
– 498 –
36-E: Registration Security Alert

SUP 1
This message displays when IP terminal user failed to enter the correct password when logging in. Note 1
1: XX00 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note 1: For Multiple Line terminal, this system message is not output even though a wrong password is entered
in the terminal.
1 Number of password failure b0-b7: Number of password failure.

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 -7 MAC Address of IP Terminal
8 - 15 Last failed LOGIN number
Last failed LOGIN number:

9 10 11 12 13 14 15
b0-b3: Failed LOGIN number DC0 8

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b4-b7: Failed LOGIN number 9

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b4-b7: Failed LOGIN number 15
– 499 –
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
16 - 19 IP Address of when failed to LOGIN
– 500 –
36-F: Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent)

SUP - -
[36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check
is detected.
This message is of two types: Temporary and Permanent.
The temporary failure message is displayed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected. Note 1
The permanent failure message is displayed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check has been detected ten
consecutive times.
Fusion Health Check is executed by assigning the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 530].
Also, the system message [36-F/36-K/36-T] is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected, by
assigning the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 534]. Refer to Office Data Specifications for the de-
tail.
Note 1: By default, the message is defined to be output at the first timeout; this output timing can be changed by
the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN:SYS1, Index 656, Bits 0-3].
Note: While [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) has been output for the temporary tim-
eout of Fusion Health Check, if Release Alarm is executed, the Error Counter will be cleared. Therefore, if
the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected after Release Alarm is executed, the [36-F] Fusion Health
Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) will be output for the temporary timeout of Fusion Health Check.
Also, if Release Alarm is executed when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected, [36-K] Fusion
Health Check Report (Recovery) will not be output.
Note: [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) can be output instead of [36-F] Fusion Health Check Re-
port (Temporary/Permanent) for the permanent timeout of Fusion Health Check when the system data
[ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 655, Bit 0-2 = 1] is assigned, which can be specified on a Fusion type basis
as shown on the table below.
Fusion Type Target Device Remark
External LAN o Except for Ether

P2P
External LAN Link Disconnection
Note: When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report
(Permanent) is output, if there is no alternate route, a call cannot be made to the node where a failure is
occurring until [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) is output. However, a call can be made
within the same node or node where a failure is not occurring.
Note: When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report
(Permanent) is output, [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) is output when released.
– 501 –
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XX00 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Type of Message 01H=Fusion link temporary failure

02H=Fusion link permanent failure
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Type of Health Check 01H=Health check to FCCH

02H=Health check to other node without FCH in LANI-A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H=Health check to other node without FCH in LANI-B
04H=Health check to Peer-to-Peer Fusion A
05H=Health check to Peer-to-Peer Fusion B
3 Health Check Interface 01H=Health check to LANI-A

02H=Health check to LANI-B
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H=Time out on Peer-to-Peer Fusion A
04H=Time out on Peer-to-Peer Fusion B
4 FCCH Number 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH

01H-FFH: FCH number (1-255)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 502 –
5 Accommodated Location of FCCH b0-b2: Level Number

b3-b7: Group Number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b8-b9: Unit Number
b10-b15: Module Group Number
(00=Health check between nodes without FCH)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
6 FPC 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH

01H-FDH: FPC (1-253)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
7 Destination FPC 00H=Health check to FCCH

01H-FDH: Destination FPC (1-253)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 503 –
36-G: Bandwidth Warning

NON
This message displays when used bandwidth exceeds the warning value defined between location IDs. Once this
message is displayed, the message has not been output until its recovery. Output of this message can be
controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to Office Data Specifications.
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 00 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 A Location ID b0-b15 = A Location ID that exceeded the warning value

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
2 B Location ID b0-b15 = B Location ID that exceeded the warning value

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
Note: Location IDs are set to A LOC-ID and B LOC-ID in ascending order. (A LOC-ID < B LOC-ID)
– 504 –
3 Accommodated location of terminal b0-b31 = Accommodated Equipment Number of terminal that exceeded the
warning value
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
4 Accommodated location of terminal b0-b31: Accommodated Equipment Number of terminal that exceeded the
warning value
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
Note: If bandwidth for call via IP-

PAD exceeds the warning value, the accommodated location (LENS) of IPPAD is outputted.
Note: For FCCS over IP:

Terminal in self-office: Accommodated location (LENS) of the terminal is outputted.
Terminal in a different office: Fusion Point Code (FPC) of the destination office is outputted to bit 8 -
bit 15.
– 505 –
36-H: Bandwidth Warning Recovery

NON
This message displays when used bandwidth drops to below the warning value after the bandwidth warning.
Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to
Office Data Specifications.
1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 00 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 A Location ID b0-b15 = A Location ID that recovered from the bandwidth warning

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
2 B Location ID b0-b15 = B Location ID that recovered from the bandwidth warning

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
– 506 –
36-I: Bandwidth Fault

SUP
This message displays when the bandwidth restriction has been performed in the case of bandwidth resource
shortage. Output of this message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details
refer to Office Data Specifications.
1 2 3 4
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 00 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 A Location ID b0-b15 = A Location ID that performed the bandwidth restriction

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
2 B Location ID b0-b15 = B Location ID that performed the bandwidth restriction

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
Note: Location IDs are set to A LOC-ID and B LOC-ID in ascending order. (A LOC-ID < B LOC-ID)
– 507 –
3 Accommodated location of b0-b31 = Accommodated Equipment Number of Originated Terminal that

originated terminal performed the bandwidth restriction
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
4 Accommodated location of b0-b31 = Accommodated Equipment Number of Destination Terminal that

destination terminal performed the bandwidth restriction
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
Note: If call origination via IPPAD is restricted, the accommodated location (LENS) of IPPAD is outputted.
Note: For FCCS over IP:

Terminal in self-office: Accommodated location (LENS) of the terminal is outputted.
Terminal in a different office: Fusion Point Code (FPC) of the destination office is outputted to bit 8 -
bit 15.
Note: For CCIS over IP (PHC):

Accommodated location (LENS) of Virtual Speech Channel is outputted.
– 508 –
36-J: Bandwidth Fault Recovery

NON
This message displays when reserving enough of the bandwidth resource [for two calls calculated by G711
(sending period 10ms)] after the bandwidth fault has terminated the bandwidth restriction. Output of this
message can be controlled by using the office data settings (ABNDL). For more details refer to Office Data
Specifications.
1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 2
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 00 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 A Location ID b0-b15 = A Location ID that recovered from the bandwidth fault

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
2 B Location ID b0-b15 = B Location ID that recovered from the bandwidth fault

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
– 509 –
36-K: Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery)

NON - -
[36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) message is output when Fusion Health check succeeded after
[36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent)
is output.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Type of Message 03H=Fusion link restore

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

04H=Health check to Point-to-Point Fusion A
05H=Health check to Point-to-Point Fusion B

4 FCH Number 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH

01H-FFH: FCH number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 510 –
5 Accommodated Location of FCH b0-b2: Level Number

b3-b7: Group Number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b8-b9: Unit Number
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8

01H-FDH: FPC (1-253)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 511 –
36-M: IP Terminal Auto Assignment Report

NON
This message displays the result when IP terminal automatic assignment and deletion is executed.
1: XXXX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: XXXX 0000 XXXX XX00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
11 12
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Message Type b0-b7: 01H = Assignment

02H = Deletion
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
2 Result b0-b7: 00H = OK

01H = NG
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
3 Error Code (when Result = NG) b0-b7: 00H = Nothing

01H = Station UCD Hunting Group Exists
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 02H = Phantom Station Data Exists
03H = Hot Line Station Data Exists
04H = Name Display Data Exists
05H = DTE Attribute Data 1 Exists
06H = DTE Attribute Data 2 Exists
07H = Secretary Station Data Exists
08H = Call Pickup Group Exists
09H = Call Pickup Expand Group Exists
0AH = Station Circular Hunting Group Exists
0BH = Station Pilot Hunting Group Exists
0CH = NDM Telephone Number Exists
0DH = Internal Zone Paging Data Exists
– 512 –
4 LENS of IP Terminal (4 byte)

b0-b7: MG = 00-07
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b8-b15: Unit = 0-3
b16-b23: Group = 00-23
b24-b31: Level = 0-7
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
5 IP Terminal Kind b0-b7: 01H = DtermIP (DtermIP, IP Enabled Dterm)

02H = Soft Phone
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H = Smart Phone (DtermIP INASET)
6 Template ID b0-b7: Template ID = 1-30

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
7 RSC b0-b7: Route Restriction Class (0-15)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 SFC b0-b7: Service Feature Class (0-15)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
9 Tenant Number (TN) (HEX) b0-b7: Tenant Number (1-63)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 513 –
10 Station Number (HEX) Note

b4-b7 b0-b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
DC1 DC0
10 DC3 DC2
DC5 DC4
11 User Group Number (UGN) (HEX) Note

b4-b7 b0-b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC1 DC0
11
DC3 DC2
12 Telephone Number (TELN) (HEX) Note

b4-b7 b0-b3 b4-b7 b0-b3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 DC1 DC0 DC9 DC8
DC3 DC2 DC11 DC10
12
DC5 DC4 DC13 DC12
DC7 DC6 DC15 DC14
Note: Each Number/code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings are as follows:

Output Data (HEX) Actual Meaning
1~9 o 1~9
A o 0
B o *
C o #
0 o blank
– 514 –
36-N: IP Equipment Status Report

- -
This message is displayed fault logs for IP devices.
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 Port Number of Terminal b0-b31: Port Number

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
2 Type of Message b0-b6: Sequence Number (1 - N) when message is divided.

b7: Kind of Fault Log Output
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 0=Message collected periodically
1=Message collected immediately after registry
– 515 –
3 IP Address of Terminal b0-b31: IP Address (Big Endian)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note: IP Address is indicated only for Sequence No = 1 of the
divided message.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24
4 TAG1 01H=TAG1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Note: The bits following TAG1 are not fixed.
5 DTC Data Length

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
6 Data Kind 01H=Reset Factor

02H=Control Packet Send and Receive Information
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H=Registry NG Factor
F0H-FFH=Individual Data Kind
Note: Registry NG factor is not notified for DtermIP (SIP) and

Soft Phone (SIP).
– 516 –
When 6 = 01H (Reset Factor) is indicated
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 01XX XX00 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
13
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7 DTC Data Length

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 Block Number A maximum of Eight Blocks.

Note: Bits from 9 Reset Factor to 13 The number of blocks will be
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 output by the number of Block Number.
9 Reset Factor 00H: Not used

01H: Autonomous Reset (before registration [DRS01: Initial Setting
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Request])
02H: Autonomous Reset (during registration to the system [DRS03:
Signaling Path Set Response])
03H: Autonomous Reset (after registration and while setting initial values)
04H: Autonomous Reset (during call processing)
05H: Autonomous Reset (during partial initialization)
06H: Autonomous Reset
(diagnosis command not received/Keep-alive NG.)
07H: Software Reset
08H: DHCP lease is expired
09H: Configuration Mode is ended (only for DtermIP)
0AH: Reset Statement from PROTIMS (only for DtermIP)
0BH-FFH: Not used
For more details see Chapter 2 Detailed Information of Reset Factors.
– 517 –
10 - 12 Destination Reset Factor (Not used)

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
13 Reset Execution Time b0-b63: Reset Time

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Year-Month-Day-Hour-Minute-Seconds.Hundred Millisecond
b0-b7: Year (YY1)

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b8-b15: Year (YY2)
b16-b23: Month
b24-b31: Day
b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b32-b39: Hour
b40-b47: Minute
b48-b55: Second
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b56-b63: Hundred Millisecond (SS2)
Example)
b39 b38 b37 b36 b35 b34 b33 b32 2004-04-01-09:01:12.81
b0-b7: 20
b8-b15: 04
b47 b46 b45 b44 b43 b42 b41 b40
b16-b23: 04
b24-b31: 01
b55 b54 b53 b52 b51 b50 b49 b48 b32-b39: 09
b40-b47: 01
b48-b55: 12
b63 b62 b61 b60 b59 b58 b57 b56 b56-b63: 81
Note: Not used when DTC = 2 and Block Number = 0.
– 518 –
When 6 = 02H (Control Packet Send and Receive Information) is indicated
Note: This is an example of the format for explanation. Actual start bit varies because it follows the undeter-
mined size of bits ( 6 = 01H) explained in the previous page.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 02XX XX00 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15
7: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7 DTC Data Length

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 Protocol Type 01H:iLP-PM

02H:PROTIMS
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H:SIP
04H: DtermIP (SIP) or Soft Phone (SIP)
Note: Message that includes unsupported proprietary header

or contents (such as SIP header Analysis NG, illegal di-
alog, CSeq error, SIP-URI error, syntax error) is not re-
garded as an illegal message.
9 Number of Control Packets PROTIMS: indicates the total number of transmitted PAWs/PRWs
Transmitted/Total Number of (including retransmitted and ACK).
Packets Transmitted/Number of DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of request messages
Request Transmitted transmitted from the terminal to SP.
: iLP-PM/PROTIMS/DtermIP
(SIP), Soft Phone (SIP)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 519 –
10 Number of Control Packets PROTIMS: indicates the number of retransmit PAW/PRW asking for ACK
Retransmitted/Number of ACK (including retransmitted ones).
Request Packets Transmitted/ DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of request messages
Number of Request Transmitted the terminal received from SP.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
11 Number of NG Control Packets PROTIMS: indicates the number of retransmitted PAWs/PRWs asking for
Retransmitted/Number of ACK. The number is incremented for every retry. (Not the number of
Retransmitted Packets sent/ retransmitted occurrence)
Number of Response Transmitted DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of 200 OK response
(Normal) transmissions for various types of request messages.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
12
14 Total Number of Control Packets DtermIP of PROTIMS: indicates the total number of network busy
received/Number of Packets indications.
retried third time/Number of DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of messages other than
Response Transmitted (Error) 200 OK response for various types of request messages.
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
13 Total Number of Abnormal PROTIMS: indicates the total number of received PAWs/PRWs (including
Packets received/Total Number retransmission and ACK).
of Packets received/Number of DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of illegal messages
Illeagal Message received which cause the system unable to continue processing.
(SIP), Soft Phone (SIP) Note: Message that includes unsupported proprietary header
or contents (such as SIP header Analysis NG, illegal di-
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
alog, CSeq error, SIP-URI error, syntax error) is not re-
garded as an illegal message.
– 520 –
14 Number of Abnormal Sequence/ PROTIMS: indicates the total number of PAW/PRW received (including
Number of PAWs/PRWs retransmission).
received asking for ACK Reply/ DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of 1st retransmission
Number of Retransmission (once) (after 500 ms from the previous transmission).
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
15 Number of Overlapped Sequence/ PROTIMS indicates the number of abnormal packets in PAW/PRW.
Total Number of Abnormal Abnormal packets described here indicate unknown packets, data length
Packets/Number of abnormal, abnormal ACK number, abnormal sequence number.
Retransmission (2nd) DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of 2nd
: iLP-PM/PROTIMS/DtermIP retransmission (after 1 second from the previous transmission).
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
16 Number of Retransmission (3rd) DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of 3rd
: DtermIP (SIP), Soft Phone retransmission (after 2 seconds from the previous transmission).
(SIP)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
17 Number of Retransmission (4 DtermIP (SIP)/Soft Phone (SIP): indicates the number of 4th or more
times or more) retransmission (incremented every time when 4th or more retransmission is
: DtermIP (SIP), Soft Phone made).
(SIP)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 521 –
When 6 = 03H (Registry NG Factor) is indicated
Note: This is an example of the format for explanation. Actual start bit varies because it follows the undeter-
mined size of bits ( 6 = 01H) explained in the previous page.
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 03XX XX00 3: XXXX 0000 0000 0000
7 8 9 10
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7 DTC Data Length

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
8 Block Number A maximum of Eight Blocks.

Note: Bits from 9 Reset Factor to 13 The number of blocks will be
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 output by the number of Block Number.
9 Registry NG Factor 01H: Unregistered ID (System does not have any registration.)
02H: Not available. (Equipment that had tried to make a registration is
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 restricted.)
03H: Duplicated registry (Designated ID/Station Number has been already
registered. DtermIP is only available.)
05H: Invalid Accommodation Location. Function is available only when
Terminal ( 1 Port Number of Terminal) is used.
07H: Failed to obtain PH (Equipment that had tried to make a registration
failed to obtain PH.)
09H: Equipment type is invalid. (Registration failed to obtain PH.)
0FH: A part of PH cannot be obtained.
10H: Exceeded Registration Capacity
11H: Resource is not available.
12H: Message Error
10 DRS Number 01H: First DRS

02H: Second DRS
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 03H: Third DRS
04H: Fourth DRS
– 522 –
36-O: System Message Overflow Notification

- 0
This message displays when the number of stored system message gets to 512, the maximum storage capacity.
The indication is fixed to all 0 in this system message.
1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
– 523 –
36-T: Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent)

SUP - -
[36-T] Fusion Health Check Report message (Permanent) is output when the timeout of Fusion health check has
been detected ten consecutive times after an output of temporary timeout of Fusion Health Check of [36-F]
Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent). At this time, the temporary timeout is not counted.
Fusion Health Check is executed by assigning the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 530]. Also, the
system message [36-F/36-K/36-T] is output when the timeout of Fusion Health Check is detected, by assigning
the system data [ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 534]. Refer to Office Data Specifications for the detail.
Note: [36-T] Fusion Health Check Report (Permanent) can be output instead of [36-F] Fusion Health Check
Report (Temporary/Permanent) for the permanent timeout of Fusion Health Check when the system data
[ASYDL/ASYDN: SYS1, Index 655, Bit 0-2 = 1] is assigned, which can be specified on a Fusion type
basis as shown on the table below.
Fusion Type Target Device Remark
External LAN o Except for Ether

P2P
External LAN Link Disconnection
HUB o
FCH/IPTRK Except for Internal
FCH/IPTRK
Legacy LAN Cable Discon-
Internal LAN nection
HUB o HUB
Direct Connection
Note: When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Re-
port (Permanent) is output, if there is no alternate route, a call cannot be made to the node where a fail-
ure is occurring until [36-K] Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) is output. However, a call can be
made within the same node or node where a failure is not occurring.
Note: When [36-F] Fusion Health Check Report (Temporary/Permanent) or [36-T] Fusion Health Check Re-
port (Permanent) is output, Fusion Health Check Report (Recovery) [36-K] is output when released.
The details of this message are in the following:
– 524 –
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 Type of Message 01H=Fusion link permanent failure

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

04H=Health check to Peer-to-Peer Fusion A
05H=Health check to Peer-to-Peer Fusion B

4 FCCH Number 00H=Health check between nodes without FCH

01H-FFH: FCH number (1-255)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 525 –
5 Accommodated Location of FCCH b0-b2: Level Number

b3-b7: Group Number
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
b8-b9: Unit Number
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8

01H-FDH: FPC (1-253)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
– 526 –
CHAPTER 4 Fault Repair Procedures
This chapter provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or
equipment listed in Table has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition.
List of Fault Repair Procedures
Fault Section Fault status Reference
TCP/IP link fault LAN fault, Host fault page 529

LAN\WAN communication fault Network failure page 531
IP related System Message and System Message 33-R and 33-S. page 536
its reason
When cannot define the reason of failure
When Circuit card with failure is indicated by system
System down fault message page 541
Fault repair/localization flow
Fault repair/detailed localizing operation
TP clock failure Clock failure page 549
– 527 –
1. IP RELATED FAULT AND ITS REASON
Because of the system characteristic, there will be faults related to system side equipment and other faults
(including the fault occurred on the network). Refer to system message and detailed data for the best treatment.
In a certain condition, alarm may not be released or the failure may not be solved by the operation of procedure
below.
IP Related Fault and Its Reason
Fault Message Reasons to be fixed Reference
FNC=02H, INF=04H, FLT=04H • Connection unavailable

(Exceeding maximum number of connection)
FNC=05H (Sequence Error), INF=01/02H, • Initializing fault for IPPAD circuit
FLT=xxH card
• Fault in IP station while processing
registration
33-R
FNC=03H, INF=01H, FLT=02H • Occurrence of packet loss
(Excessive loss of RTP packets) • Voice cut-off or sudden-mute
• IPPAD circuit card failure
FNC=05H, INF=01H, FLT=02H • Communication unavailable

(Command re-sending Error)
FNC=02H, INF=01H • Link down of Ethernet (LAN) cable
(Ethernet (LAN) cable not plugged-in) in front panel of IPPAD circuit card
FNC=05H (Sequence Error), INF=01/02H, • Initializing fault for IPPAD circuit

FLT=xxH card
33-S
• Fault in IP station while processing
the registry
FNC=05H, INF=04G, FLT=02H • Communication unavailable

(Command re-sending Error)
– 528 –
1.1 TCP/IP Link Fault
(1) Diagnosis
Because of the system characteristic, there will be faults related to system side equipment and other equip-
ment faults (including the fault occurred on the network). Refer to system message and detailed data for
the best treatment.
START
Method of check and repair upon each ERRK is
shown in the table below. It is referring to the faulty
port number (0-5) displayed.
Is there any fault in host side referring to the diagnosis?
“YES” “NO”
FAULT : There is fault in host side.

Repair the host.
FAULT : There is fault in Ethernet Adapter.
1.1.1 Method of Checking and Repairing Each of “4-R”KIND=03ERRK
ERRK Detailed description about the fault and its repair Method of check and repair
01 Indication from the Host to release all current connection corre-

sponding TCP port was received. All of the resource related to Restart the Host
connection on TCP port of system side is released.
02 - 0B Not used -
0C On all current connection corresponding TCP port, all of the
resource related to connection on TCP port of system side is Re-confirm if there is any prob-
released, because Host operation failure was detected by the lem in Host operation.
Host health check (Heart Beat) function.
0D - FF Not used -
– 529 –
1.1.2 Method of Checking and Repairing Each of “26-V”ERRK
ERRK Detailed description about the fault and its repair Method of check and repair
All connection resource towards the corresponding TCP port is [1] Reconfirm if there is any
released, because text sending failure has occurred continu- failure in UAP side TCP/IP
01 ously on the communicating TCP port. receiving process.
[2] Reconfirm if there is any
trouble in UAP side operation.
Text received from the Host for the corresponding TCP port [1] Confirm the operation of
was in invalid format, system side couldn’t define the text the Host side software.
02 received.
[2] Confirm the line status of
the LAN.
In the corresponding TCP port in link establishing process, all Restart the Host.
connection resource toward the corresponding TCP port is
03
released upon receiving the request of Host to release (discon-
nect) all link establishing process.
All connection resource towards the corresponding TCP port is Reconfirm if there is any trou-
04 released, because operation error is detected for TCP port of ble in Host side operation.
host in connected state.
Connection was requested, but connection could not be estab- Adjust the number of connec-
05 lished because the number of connection exceeds the maximum tion to be below 17 in the
(=16). application side.
Connection was requested, but connection could not be estab- [1] Confirm ASYDL, SYS1,
lished because the service was invalid. INDEX864, bit0=1 (internal
06
IP/ACDP available) is
assigned.
07-FF Not used -
– 530 –
1.2 LAN/WAN Communication Fault
System administrator needs to find out the fault part, define it and repair it in prompt. Administrator needs
to define the trouble part by localizing the trouble down to find out the trouble part when handling the net-
work failure for the system, peripheral equipment or other network equipment (Routers, Switches, etc.).
STEP 1 Localize the failure of communication line equipment, WLAN/LAN hardware and network en-
vironment.
STEP 2 Localize the failure of WAN/LAN equipment and its wiring.
STEP 3 Repair the failure part (equipment/change the parts or interim patch up).
Basic commands used to confirm the network equipment is listed below.
Note: Screens shown below are examples.
[PING]: Command to Confirm Physical Network Connection.
The “ping” command sends out the IP packets toward the desired Host to confirm the packet reach ability
and its reply. The status of IP packet is reported by using the ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
Method: ping IP address (i.e.: ping 192.168.2.10)
C:\TEMP>ping 192.168.2.10
Pinging 192.168.2.10 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.168.2.10: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128

Ping statistics for 192.168.2.10:

Packet Sent=4, Received=4, Lost=0(0% loss)
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
– 531 –
Some of the error screens when ping command is used are shown below.
• Routing trouble to the IP address

Figure below shows that routing towards 192.168.2.10 is unavailable. Confirm the trouble part by us-
ing the tracert command.
C:\TEMP>ping 192.168.2.10
Reply from 192.168.2.10: Destination net unreachable.

.
.
• Trouble in routing setting

Figure below indicates the number of hops exceeding the TTL (Time To Live) caused by the invalid
setting of default gateway or subnetmask.
C:\TEMP>ping 192.168.2.10
Reply from 192.168.2.10: TTL expired in transit

Ping statistics for 192.168.2.10:

Packet Sent=4, Received=4, Lost=0(0% loss)
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum=0ms, Maximum=0ms, Average=0ms
– 532 –
• Missed to solve the host name
Figure below indicates miss to solve the host name with the IP address in the DNS searching when sending
the packet. Confirm if there is any fault in name of the host or the DNS setting.
C:\TEMP>ping pab160
Unknown host pab160.
• Communication error with the corresponding port

Figure below indicates that routing setting is correct, however that routing is not available. Confirm the
fault part using the tracert command.
C:\TEMP>ping pab110
Ping pab110[192.168.2.110] with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
.
.
– 533 –
[TRACERT]: Traces Route Towards Corresponding Point.
TRACERT command is used to confirm the routing setting of the router on the network route when result
of ping command had any kind of fault.
Note: Some router is set not to pass the ICMP command depending on the network environment.
Method: tracert IP address (ie: tracert 192.168.2.10)
C:\TEMP>tracert 192.168.2.10
Tracing route to 192.168.2.10
over a maximum of 30 hops:
1 40ms 40ms 40ms lan1.xx.jp [192.xxx.xxx.xxx]

Trace complete.
– 534 –
[NETSTAT]: Command Used to Specify Network Status.
NETSTAT command is used to specify the cause of the problem (network problem, host setting problem
or the interface problem). This command can specify the log of the packet error, indicate packet transfer on
port base and protocol base. Refer to the command help for further details on netstat command.
Method: netstat
C:\TEMP>netstat -an
Proto(1) Local Address(2) Foreign Address(3) State(4)
TCP router1:2972 router2:netbios-ssn ESTABLISHED

TCP router1:3809 router3:netbios-ssn ESTABLISHED
UDP router1:53 *
UDP router1:53 *
. . . .
. . . .
C:\TEMP>netstat -s
IP Statistics(a)
Packet Received =129314

Received Header Errors =0
Received Address Errors =0
.
.
ICMP Statistics(b) Received Sent

20(14) 208(15)
Messages 0 0(17)
Errors 0 0
Destination Unreachable 0 0
Time Exceeded 0 0
.
.
TCP Statistics
Active Opens =18613

Passive Opens =132
Failed Connection Attempts =1547
. .
. .
UDP Statistics(d)
Datagrams Received =35313

No Ports =353
Receive Errors =15710
Datagram Sent =15710
– 535 –
1.3 IP Related System Messages and the Reasons
This section explains the situation when system messages shown below appeared with relation to the IP.
Because of the system characteristic, there will be faults related to system side equipment and other faults
(including the fault occurred on the network). Refer to system message and detailed data for the best treat-
ment. In a certain condition, alarm may not be released or the failure may not be solved by the operation
of procedure shown below.
Table 4-1 IP related System Messages
System Messages Reference
FNC=02H, INF=04H, FLT=04H (Exceed number of maxi-

mum connection)
FNC=03H, INF=01H, FLT=02H (Excessive RTP packet IP Related System Message and Its
33-R loss) Reason (33-R) on page 537
FNC=05H (Sequence error), INF=01/02H, FLT=xxH
FNC=05H, INF=04H, FLT=02H (Command re-send error)
FNC=02H, INF=01H, FLT=01H (Fall out of Ether (LAN)
cable)
FNC=05H (Sequence error), INF=01/02H, FLT=xxH IP Related System Message and Its
33-S
Reason (33-S) on page 539
FNC=05H, INF=03H, FLT=01H (Health check error)
FNC=05H, INF=04H, FLT=02H (Command re-send error)
– 536 –
1.3.1 IP Related System Message and Its Reason (33-R)
About System Message “33-R” Outputted From IPPAD Circuit Card
(1) FNC=05H (Sequence error), INF=01/02H, FLT=xxH is outputted.

Fault reason
• Trouble during circuit card (IPPAD) initialization
• Trouble during registration process of IP station

<<When trouble occurred during IP station registration or circuit card initialization>>
(a) Confirm all circuit card and IP stations are operating normally.
(b) If all operation is normal, accept it as an impulsive error and continue monitoring. When not activating
normally, change the circuit card (in case of IPPAD). Contact NEC maintenance personnel when prob-
lem is still not solved after performing this procedure.
About System Message “33-R” Outputted Only from IPPAD Circuit Card
(1) FNC=03H, INF=01H, FLT=02H (Excessive RTP packet loss) is outputted

Fault reason
• When packet loss has occurred
• When voice data suddenly cut or muted.
• Circuit card fault (IPPAD)

<<Sudden cut off or mute may occur when packet loss was detected on the network side>>
Hardware fault or network problem might be the reason, thus system will notice there was a impulsive
problem processing the voice data.
(a) Verify the System Message and faulty part when voice data is suddenly cut off or muted.
(b) Contact the network administrator or confirm each network equipment when this fault occurs fre-
quently.
– 537 –
About System Message “33-R” Outputted From Internal PHC
(1) FNC=02H, INF=04H, FLT=04H (Exceed number of maximum connection) is outputted

Fault reason
• Connection is not available
• Exceeding the maximum number of connection allowed

<<Unable to originate or terminate any calls using PHC>>
PHC office-to-office connection is operated with exceeding the maximum number of connections al-
lowed.
(a) Confirm the maximum number of connection allowed, and whether trying to establish a number of
connection exceeding that number or not.
(b) If operating normally after the confirmation, it is simply a matter of maximum numbers. Continue
monitoring.
Note: System Message about exceeding of maximum number is outputted from internal PHC. Confirm the max-
imum numbers of connection allowed.
• Maximum of 48 IPTRK (CCIS) is available.
• Internal PHC (CCIS) can handle up to 64.

(c) problem is still not solved after performing this procedure.
About System Message “33-R” Outputted From Internal PHI
(1) FNC=05H, INF=04H, FLT=02H (Command re-send error) is outputted

Fault reason
• Unable to reply
<<This System Message will be output when control packet send timer time out has occurred eight times
continuously or when any communication fault was detected while sending the control packet.>>
Cause of the error may be the hardware fault or network interference.
(a) Confirm the operating status of MG (Media Gateway).

(b) Confirm each network equipment, connection and configuration when this fault occurs frequently.
– 538 –
1.3.2 IP Related System Message and Its Reason (33-S)
About System Message “33-S” Outputted From IPPAD Circuit Card
(1) FNC=02H, INF=01H, FLT=01H (Fall out of Ether cable) is outputted.

Fault reason
• Ether cable link in the front panel of circuit card (IPPAD) has gone down.
<<Ether cable link down of the circuit card>>
Drop off of the Ether cable or faulty cable between circuit card and HUB may be the reason.
(a) Confirm Ether cable is firmly connected to the circuit card.

(b) If link is still down after the confirmation, check the cable again. Change the Ether cable depending
on circumstances.
(2) FNC=05H (Sequence error), INF=01/02H, FLT=xxH is outputted.

Fault reason
• Trouble during circuit card (IPPAD) initialization
• Trouble during registration process of IP station

<<When trouble occurred during IP station registration or circuit card initialization>>
Hardware failure or LAN interference may be the reason.
(a) Confirm all circuit cards and IP stations are operating normally.
(b) If all operation is normal, the failure may be a temporary fault. Continue to monitor the system. When
not activating normally, change the circuit card (in case of IPPAD). Contact NEC maintenance per-
sonnel when problem is still not solved after performing this procedure.
– 539 –
About System Message “33-S” Outputted From Internal PHI
(1) FNC=05H, INF=04H, FLT=02H (Command re-send error) is outputted.

Fault reason
• Communication is not available.

<<This System Message will be output when control packet send timer timeout has occurred eight times
continuously or when any communication fault was detected while sending the control packet.>>Fall out
of the Ether cable or faulty cable between circuit card and HUB may be the reason.
Hardware failure or network interference may be the reason
(a) Confirm the operation of MG (Media Gateway).

(b) Confirm each network equipment, connection and configuration when this fault occurs frequently.
– 540 –
1.4 System Down Fault
System Down Fault Status
Fault Status Reference
Unable to define the fault reason When Cannot Define the Reason of Failure on page
541
Faulty circuit card is displayed on the System When Circuit Card With Failure Is Indicated on System
Message Message on page 541
Localizing the fault Fault Repair/Localization Flow on page 542
Specific information for fault localizing proce- Details of Fault Repair/Localizing Flow on page 546
dure
1.4.1 When Cannot Define the Reason of Failure
(1) Checking the power supply circuit card
(a) Check the power supply of the load side (DC: -48r5V) on the AC/DC PWR circuit card.
(b) Confirm the NFB (Non-Fuse breaker) of the PWR circuit card is switched ON (placed upward).
(c) Confirm alarm lamp of PWR supply is turned ON.
(2) Initialize the system. (Office data/program load initialization) (Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual)
[When station to station call is available]
Data in the memory may have been temporary corrupted. Continue to monitor the system.
1.4.2 When Circuit Card With Failure Is Indicated on System Message

Fault status
• Change the circuit card when detailed message data about the circuit card was displayed.
(1) Change the faulty circuit card
(a) Turn the MB (Make Busy) switch ON (upward), then pull out the circuit card.
(b) Adjust the key setting of the replacement circuit card to the faulty one.
(c) Turn the MB (Make Busy) switch ON (upward), then insert the circuit card to the corresponding slot.
(d) Turn the MB (Make Busy) switch to OFF (downward).
(2) Confirm that station to station connection is available.
– 541 –
1.4.3 Fault Repair/Localization Flow
This section explains how to restore the system that is not operating normally due to fault. Follow
the flow chart given below, which will show you the cause of the fault as well as countermeasures
against it. Indicated countermeasures are explained in detail on page 546 “Details of Fault Repair/
Localizing Flow”.
Figure 4-1 Flow Chart to Localize Faults (1/3)
Fault Analysis Causes: Countermeasures
START
Yes
Incorrect switch setting? - Incorrect switch setting: See (a).
No
ALM lamp is flashing on EMA? Yes

(abnormal behavior while
running software)
No
No CF Card Access Lamp
is flashing?
Power Off and ON the system.
Yes
Restored? - Temporal CF card fault: See (h).
No
Create new CF card.

(1) CF card initial (page 62)
(2) Initial Install by PCPro Tools
Yes
Restored? - Office Data in CF is abnormal. See (f).
No - Program in CF is abnormal. See (f).
Replace the following in this order.

(1) CF card
(2) CPU card
Power OFF/ON Yes

Restored? - The replaced card was faulty. See (b).
No
- The fault may not be caused by the system. See (i).
Yes
Restored? - Some devices on the CPU card was faulty. See (h).
No
Replace the CPU card
Yes
(A) No
– 542 –

(A)
ALM lamp on EMA card

is steady ON? Yes
(abnormal behavior while
running software)
No
Office Data & Program Load Initial
will automatically take place.
Power Off and ON the system.
Yes
Restored? - Temporal CF card fault: See (g).
No
Create new CF card.

Yes

(1) CPU card
(2) EMA card
(3) Chassis
Status Monitor
- PCPro can login to the system?
- Is there any other abnormal status? Yes
No

LED on ACT-EXB card Yes
is abnormal?
No

(1) EXB card
(2) CPU card
Yes
No
(B)
– 543 –

(B)
Non-load Initial
Yes
Restored? - Part of program starts running away because of
No reasons such as parity alarm: See (c).
Office Data load Initial
Yes
Restored? - Office data is abnormal because of reasons such
No as parity alarm: See (d).
Office Data & Program

load Initial
Yes
Restored? - Program starts running away because of reasons
No such as parity alarm: See (e).
Power OFF/ON
Yes
Restored? - Temporal CF card fault: See (g).
No
Create new CF card.

Yes

(1) CPU card
(2) EMA card
(3) Chassis
Yes - The replaced card was faulty. See (b).

Restored?
No
– 544 –
(3) Countermeasures Against Faults
(a) Available to operate normally after the system is placed in normal operation again.
(b) When the system is restored by this replacement, the replaced parts was faulty. Prepare the spare card/
module/parts as required for future needs.
(c) Parity error may be still left in the system, there might be a possibility to have parity error again after
normal operation, the system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(d) There is no more parity error in the program sector, but there might be a possibility to have parity error
again after normal operation, the system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(e) There is no more office data error caused by the parity error, but there might be a possibility to have
parity error again after normal operation, the system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(f) There is possibility that the contents of CF card has been modified improperly, or CF card operation
is unstable. The system needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(g) There is possibility that some devices mounted on the CPU card have temporal failure. The system
needs to be replaced for preventative measure.
(h) CF card or some devices on the CPU card are faulty.
(i) The fault may not be caused by the system. Please contact the dealer or its service technicians.
– 545 –
1.4.4 Details of Fault Repair/Localizing Flow
(1) Check of Switch Setting and Lamps on the Front Panel
Remove the front cover and confirm the switches and lamps on the front panel when fault occurred and
operating the maintenance. The following figure shows an example when the system has CPU card in dual
configuration.
LINK
MODE SYS ALM
ACT
PBI No
ALM
PWR
PWR
LOAD
ON LINE
SW01
PWR
LOAD SW00
ON LINE
MODE : indicates this lamp lights Green.
(2) Check of ALM lamps
SV8500 server has the following ALM lamps on the front panel. Detailed fault information can also be ob-
tained by using PCPro.
• ALM lamps (on EMA card front panel)

• SYS ALM lamp (on EMA card front panel)
• System messages (available from PCPro)
ALM (for SYS #1)
SYS ALM
ALM (for SYS #0)
: indicates this lamp lights/flashes red.
– 546 –
(a) ALM lamp (Red) indicates abnormal software behavior.

(b) SYS ALM lamp indicates MJ alarm when it is steady ON. Also it indicates MN alarm when it is flash-
ing in a certain interval.
(c) Check the alarm status before starting fault repair procedure. If any change is detected, record it.
(3) System Changeover (For Dual Configuration)
SV8500 server has TP block and SP block. The latter can be divided to “SP block for SIP Station” and “SP
block for other than SIP Station”. When CPU card is changed over, TP block and “SP block for SIP Station”
are switched over in combination. This is indicated by shaded background in the figure below. On the other
hand, “SP block for other than SIP Station” operates in load sharing (N+1), which means both the “SP block
for other than SIP Station” are placed in ACT mode.
SV8500 Server
[1] TP block [2] SP block (for SIP Station)
SP block
[3] SP block (other than SIP Station)
SV8500 Server #0 SV8500 Server #1

(ACT) (STBY)
TP #0 ACT/STBY TP #1
SP #0 SP #1
㧔for SIP Station㧕 (for SIP Station)
(ACT) (STBY)
(ACT) (ACT)
SP #0 SP #1
㧔other than SIP Station) (other than SIP Station)
load sharing㧔N+1㧕
: ACT : STBY
(a) TP Changeover
• CMOD command from PCPro: Use this operation when available.

• Changeover by key operation: See “How to Change over CPU Card” for more details.
(b) SP Changeover
– 547 –
• SP block (for SIP Station): Use CMOD command. TP and this block change over in combination.
• SP block (for other than IP Station): load sharing (N + 1), both SPs are placed in ACT.
WARNING The following operations require system shutdown. Perform the following only when system
shutdown is permitted.
(4) Non-load Initial
(a) Use SINZ from the PCPro.
(5) Office Data load Initial
(a) Use SINZ from the PCPro.
Note: Proceed to the next step if this load initialization cannot be executed using this method.
(6) Office Data & Program load Initial
(a) Execute the Office Data & Program load initialization by using SINZ from the PCPro.
Note: Proceed to the next step if this load initialization cannot be executed using this method.
(7) Power OFF/ON
(a) This is to be executed only when above initialization does not work.
Note: For more details, see “How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System“in Chapter 5.
(8) Program Reinstall
(a) Reinstall the program by referring to Program Install procedure of Installation Manual.
(b) Execute the Load initialization by referring to (5).
– 548 –
1.5 Clock Failure
The clock information can be obtained from an SNTP server that is specified in advance. If system message
16-M “Hard Clock Failure” is output, establish synchronization between the SV8500 and the SNTP server.
Replace the system to alternative when the clock failure cannot be fixed. See also “HOW TO SET THE
CURRENT DATE AND TIME“in Chapter 2.
– 549 –
This page is for your notes.
– 550 –
CHAPTER 5 Operation Procedure for System with PIR
1. PIR ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
This section explains how to replace unit/circuit cards mounted in the PIR.
Precautions:
• Use this procedure to replace a faulty unit/circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.
• There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be replaced.
As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the PIR.
When a circuit card is replaced with a spare card, always make the same switch setting on the new cir-
cuit card as that on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic components on the circuit card may be de-
stroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally.
• When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static elec-
tricity. Touching a circuit card without using the kit may destroy the card due to static electricity on the
human body.
– 551 –
1.1 PIR Face Layout
The figure below shows the slot configuration and the condition of mounted circuit card types for PIR.
Figure 5-1 Circuit card mounting of PIR
PIR 0 (1-IMG)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Slot No.
DPWR (PWR #1)
TSW #0
TSW #1
PWR (PWR #0)
Available Card Type

Line/Trunk Cards Line/Trunk Cards
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 Number of Ports
Card Color
LT Connector Accommodations LT Connector Accommodations
PIR other than PIR0 (1-IMG)
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Slot No.
DPWR (PWR #1)
PWR (PWR #0)
MUX #0
MUX #1
Available Card Type

Line/Trunk Cards Line/Trunk Cards
16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32 16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 Number of Ports
Card Color
LT Connector Accommodations LT Connector Accommodations
Note 1: TSW will be mounted on the Slots 13 and 14 of PIR0 (1-IMG only).
Note 2: Faulty switch settings may cause system down, always handle it with care.
Corresponding alarm lamp is lit and system message is outputted when replacing the circuit card. Release
the alarm when circuit card replacement has completed. All system messages will be deleted when alarm
is released by the RALM command, read the system messages using the DFTD command when the system
messages are needed.
– 552 –
1.2 Replacement Procedure of Line/Trunk Circuit Cards
[Start]
ATTENTION
STEP 1 Turn ON (upward) the MB (Make Busy) switch of the circuit card to be re- Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
placed. Precautions Required
STEP 2 Pull out the circuit card mounted on the slot.
STEP 3 Set the same key setting on the new circuit card as that is set on the removed card.
STEP 4 Confirm that MB (Make Busy) switch of the new circuit card is turned ON (upward).
STEP 5 Insert the new circuit card to the slot
STEP 6 After new circuit card is inserted, turn the MB (Make Busy) switch to OFF (downward).
[End]
– 553 –
1.3 Replacement Procedure of SDT Card and Optical Fiber Cable
This section explains how to replace SDT (PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB) card and the optical
fiber cables that are connected to SDT card.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
1.3.1 How to Replace SDT (PS-SDTA/PA-SDTB) Precautions Required
[Start]
STEP 1 Set P-SW key - 4 (MBR) to ON position on the PA-SDTA card to be replaced.
When the card is provided in dual configuration, do this for both cards in the order of STBY - ACT.
• ACT lamp goes OFF.
• New call attempt will be rejected. However, already established calls can be maintained.
• When having connection link, it will be left connected.
STEP 2 Use SPTS command to see if there is any active call on the card.
When it is found, wait a while, and try again until the card has no active call.
STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the PA-SDTA card.
• OPE lamp changes color to red.
• Active calls will be placed in no-tone-state.
• When having connection link, it will be dropped in a few seconds.
STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the PA-SDTB card.

• Active calls on the card will be disconnected.
• When having connection link, Nailed-down connection between FCH (PA-FCH) and SDT (PA-
SDTB) will be disconnected.
STEP 5 Disconnect MT24 from the PA-SDTB circuit card. Remove the flat cables from the front con-
nectors, I/O and PCM, on both PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards.
STEP 6 Remove the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB.
STEP 7 Referring to the removed cards, perform the switch settings on the new cards.
STEP 8 Make sure that MB key on the new card is set to UP position. Set Switch 4 of P-SW key must
be set to ON position for PA-SDTA.
STEP 9 Insert the new PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB to the slots of the PIR.
• OPE lamp lights red on the new cards.
STEP 10 Connect the disconnected flat cables to the connectors on the new card and other PA-SDTA/PA-
– 554 –
SDTB cards.
STEP 11 When the new card is PA-SDTB, also connect the MT 24 TSW cables to all the required front
connectors.
STEP 12 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new PA-SDTA.
STEP 13 Set P-SW key - 4 (MBR) to OFF position on the PA-SDTA. When the card is provided in dual
configuration, do this for both cards.
STEP 14 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new PA-SDTB.

• OPE lamp lights green on the card.
[End]
1.3.2 How to Replace Optical Fiber Cable
[Start]
STEP 1 Set P-SW key - 4 (MBR) to ON position on the PA-SDTA card to be replaced.
• ACT lamp goes OFF. (When the card is provided in dual configuration, ACT-STBY changeover
will take place.)
• When the card is provided in dual configuration: normal operation is available including new call
origination using other card.
• When the card is provided in single configuration: active calls will be maintained, new call origi-
nation is not available. Note that when having connection link, it will be left connected.
STEP 2 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the PA-SDTA card.
• Active calls will be placed in no-tone-state (single configuration only).
• When having connection link, it will be dropped in a few seconds (single configuration only).
STEP 3 Remove the optical fiber cable from the PA-SDTA card.
STEP 4 Connect the new optical fiber cable.
STEP 5 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the PA-SDTA card.
STEP 6 Set P-SW key - 4 (MBR) to OFF position.

• OPE lamp lights green on the card.
[End]
– 555 –
1.4 Replacement Procedure of IPPAD Circuit Card
[Start]
ATTENTION
STEP 1 Make sure that the IPPAD to be replaced has no ongoing call. Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
• Corresponding BL lamp will light green when a channel is in use.
Note: The status of each channel can be known by changing SW01 setting. For more details, see “Circuit Card
Description.”
STEP 2 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the IPPAD card to be replaced.
• OPE lamp turns OFF on the IPPAD card to be replaced.
OPE OPE OPE
MB MB MB
STEP 1 STEP 2
BL7 BL7 BL7

BL6 BL6 Turn ON MB key. BL6
BL5 BL5 BL5
Make sure BL lamp. BL4 Wait a while.... BL4 BL4
Two channels are in use! BL3 BL3 No channel is in use. BL3
BL2 BL2 BL2
BL1 BL1 BL1
BL0 BL0 BL0
SW01 SW01 SW01
Note: BL0 - BL7 indicate Idle/Busy status of channels. By changing SW01, the status of all channels can be
monitored. For more details, see “Circuit Card Description.”
STEP 3 Disconnect the LAN cable from IP-LAN connector.
RJ45 connector
IP-LAN
LAN cable
connected to
IPPAD card network device
such as switch, router
– 556 –
STEP 4 Pull out the card mounted on the slot.
STEP 5 Make sure the switch setting of the new IPPAD circuit card is the same as the one replaced.
STEP 6 Turn on (upward) MB key on the new IPPAD card.
STEP 7 Insert the new circuit card to the slot.
STEP 8 Insert the LAN cable to IP-LAN connector.
STEP 9 Turn off (downward) MB key on the IPPAD card.
• OPE lamp lights green on the IPPAD circuit card.
[End]
– 557 –
1.5 Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit Card
1.5.1 MUX Replacement: 1-IMG

ATTENTION
This section explains the replacement procedure of MUX circuit card (PH-PC36) for 1- Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
IMG system. MUX circuit card is mounted on PIR 1/2/3 (Slots 13 and 14). TSW card Precautions Required
is mounted on PIR0.
This circuit card is an interface card to accommodate the Line/Trunk circuits. Replacement procedure of
this circuit card is shown below.
Note: Always handle it with care when key setting of the circuit card is to be changed.
Note: MUX card to be replaced must be in STBY mode when the system has speech path in dual configuration.
Use CMOD command to change over the ACT/STBY of the speech path.
[Start]
Note: Proceed to STEP 6 when TSW card is in single configuration. In this case, MN alarm is generated.
STEP 1 Is the circuit card to be replaced in STBY mode?
Check the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX card. When the lamp is off, the card is STBY mode.
YES: Proceed to STEP 3.
NO: Changeover the TSW ACT to STBY mode by using CMOD command, then proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2 Confirm the TSW ACT has been changed over normally.
After TSW changeover, check the following lamp indications:
<STBY side>
TSW ACT (TSW card) = off
MUX ACT (MUX card) = off
<ACT side>
TSW ACT (TSW card) = lit (green)
MUX ACT (MUX card) = lit (green)
– 558 –
STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) the TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side.
TSW ACT (TSW card) = lit (red)
STEP 4 Is PLOACT lamp of TSW card (STBY side) to be replaced lit (green)?
YES: Turn ON (upward) the PLO MB key on the TSW card to be replaced.
PLO ACT is changed over. PLOACT lamp on the TSW card goes out.
NO: Proceed to STEP 5.
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the TSW card.
• M0SY lamp (TSW card) = off
• SYNC lamp (MUX card) = off
STEP 6 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the MUX card to be replaced.
STEP 7 Disconnect the cable from the connector on the front panel of the MUX card to be replaced.
STEP 8 Extract the MUX card to be replaced from the PIR.
STEP 9 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the new MUX card.
STEP 10 Set the keys on the new MUX card, referring to the card replaced.
STEP 11 Insert the new MUX card into the PIR.
STEP 12 Connect the disconnected cable to the connector on the front panel of the new MUX card.
STEP 13 Turn OFF (down) the MB key on the TSW card.
STEP 14 Make sure M1SY/M2SY/M3SY LED, which corresponds to the new card, lights green on the
TSW card (PIR 0).
• TSWACT lamp (TSW card) = lit (red)
• M0SY lamp (TSW card) = lit (green)
• SYNC lamp (MUX card) = lit (green)
– 559 –
STEP 15 Turn OFF the MB key on the new MUX card.
• M1SY, M2SY and M3SY lamps (TSW card) = lit (green) (depending on the number of PIR)
• MUXACT lamp (new MUX card) = remains off
STEP 16 If PLO MB key on the TSW card is set to ON, turn it OFF.
Note: PLOACT #0 has higher priority than PLOACT #1. Therefore, PLOACT #0 is automatically set as ACT
when the TSW MB key is turned ON/OFF while the PLO MB key of TSW #0 is OFF.
STEP 17 Turn OFF (down) the MBR key on the TSW card.
• TSWACT lamp (TSW card) = off
STEP 18 Execute the TSW ACT/STBY changeover by using CMOD command and confirm the new
MUX card is operating normally.
[End]
1.5.2 MUX Replacement: 4-IMG
MUX circuit card is mounted on each PIR. This circuit card is an interface card to accommodate the Line/
Trunk circuits. Replacement procedure of this circuit card is shown below.
[Start]
Note: Proceed to STEP 3 when speech path is in single configuration. In this case, MN alarm is generated.
STEP 1 Is the circuit card to be replaced in STBY mode?
Check the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX card. When the lamp is off, the card is STBY mode.
NO: Changeover the TSW ACT to STBY mode by using CMOD command, then proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2 Confirm the TSW ACT has been changed over normally.
<STBY side>
OPE/MB (DLKC card) = off
<ACT side>
OPE/MB (DLKC card) = lit (green)
– 560 –
STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) the TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side.
STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the TSW card.
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the MUX card to be replaced.
STEP 6 Disconnect the cable from the connector on the front panel of the MUX card to be replaced.
STEP 7 Extract the MUX card to be replaced from the PIR.
STEP 8 Turn ON (upward) the MB key on the new MUX card.
STEP 9 Set the keys on the new MUX card, referring to the card replaced. Note that MB must be set ON
(upward).
STEP 10 Insert the new MUX card into the PIR.
STEP 11 Connect the disconnected cable to the connector on the front panel of the new MUX card.
STEP 12 Turn OFF (downward) the MB key on the MUX card.
• PMCLKALM lamp (MUX card) = off
STEP 13 Turn OFF (downward) the MB key on the TSW card.
• ACT lamp (TSW card) = lit (red)

• SYNC lamp (MUX card) = lit (green)
STEP 14 Turn OFF (downward) the MBR key on the TSW card.
• all ACT lamps of STBY TSW card = off
STEP 15 Execute the TSW ACT/STBY changeover by using CMOD command and confirm the new
MUX card is operating normally.
[End]
– 561 –
1.6 Replacement Procedure of PWR (Power) Circuit Card
This section explains the replacement procedure of the PWR circuit card. DC-DC PWR
and DC-DC DPWR circuit cards are mounted on Slot 01 and 03 of the PIR, supplying
ATTENTION
the power to the circuit cards mounted on the PIR. Replacement procedure of each PWR Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
circuit card is shown below. Precautions Required
Note: When the PWR is not provided in dual configuration, the corresponding PIR cannot
be used during PWR replacement.
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the PWR and DPWR (DC-DC) circuit card to be replaced.
• OPE lamp on the card goes off.
STEP 2 Turn OFF (downward) the -48V switch of the circuit card to be replaced.
STEP 3 Disconnect the power cable of the -48V connector.
STEP 4 Pull out the circuit card mounted on the slot.
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the new PWR/DPWR circuit card.
STEP 6 Insert new circuit card into the PIR.
• OPE lamp of the new circuit card remains off.
STEP 7 Connect the power cable to the -48V connector.
STEP 8 Turn ON (upward) the -48V switch of the new circuit card.
STEP 9 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new circuit card.
• OPE lamp on the new circuit card lights green.
[End]
– 562 –
1.7 Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card
This section explains the replacement procedure of the TSW circuit card (PH-SW10-A,
etc.). TSW circuit card is to be mounted on PIR0 (Slot 13 and 14) in case of dual con-
ATTENTION
figuration. Replacement procedure of TSW circuit card is shown below. Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Note: Always handle it with care when key setting of the circuit card is to be changed.
Note: TSW card to be replaced must be in STBY mode when the system has speech path in dual configuration.
Use CMOD command to change over the ACT/STBY of the speech path.
1.7.1 TSW Replacement: 1-IMG
[Start]
Note: When the system is in single configuration, stop the system first.
STEP 1 Is the TSW card to be replaced in STBY mode?
Check the TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
NO: Changeover the TSW by using CMOD, from ACT to STBY mode, then proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2 Confirm the TSW has been changed over normally.

<STBY side>
MUX ACT (MUX card)= off
<ACT side>
STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) TSW MBR key on the TSW card of STBY side.
STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) PLO MB key on the TSW card to be replaced.
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the TSW card to be replaced.
• M0SY lamp (TSW card) = off
STEP 6 Disconnect MT24 TSW cables from MUX 1, MUX 2, and MUX 3 connectors.
– 563 –
STEP 7 Extract the TSW card to be replaced.
STEP 8 Set the keys on the new TSW card, referring to the card replaced.
STEP 9 Turn ON (upward) PLO MB, TSW MBR and MB keys on the new TSW card.
STEP 10 Insert the new TSW card.
STEP 11 Connect the disconnected MT24 TSW cables to MUX 1, MUX 2 and MUX 3 connectors.
STEP 12 Confirm M0SY, M1SY, M2SY and M3SY LEDs on the new TSW card are all lighting green.
STEP 13 Turn OFF (downward) PLO MB key on the new card.
STEP 14 Turn OFF (downward) MBR key on the new card.
• TSW ACT and MUX ACT lamps on the new card remains unlit.
STEP 15 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new card.
STEP 16 Change over the TSW and confirm that it is operating normally.
[End]
– 564 –
2. TSWR ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE (4-IMG ONLY)
This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards accommodated in the TSWR.
2.1 Precaution
• This procedure is applied when replacing a faulty circuit card with a spare. It is also able to be applied
when checking a spare card.
• There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be replaced.
As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the PIR.
When a circuit card is replaced with a spare card, always make the same switch setting on the new cir-
cuit card as that on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic components on the circuit card may be de-
stroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally.
• When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static elec-
tricity. Touching a circuit card without using the kit may destroy the card due to static electricity on the
human body.
2.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout
The face layout of the circuit cards housed in the TSWR is shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWR
Slot Number: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
TSW 13
TSW 00
TSW 01
TSW 02
TSW 11
PLO 1
TSW 03
TSW 10
TSW 12
PLO 0
DLKC 01
GT 00
DLKC 00
GT 01
PWR 1
PWR 0
Available Circuit Cards:
Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key with extreme care.
WARNING
During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues fault messages and activates the related
alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.
Corresponding alarm lamp is lit and system message is outputted when replacing the circuit card. Release
the alarm when circuit card replacement has completed. All system messages will be deleted when alarm
is released by the RALM command, read the system messages using the DFTD command when the system
messages are needed.
– 565 –
2.3 GT Card Replacement Procedure
GT (PH-GT09) card is mounted in slots 4 and 5 of the TSWR, providing an interface function between
DLKC, TSW, MUX cards and I/O Local Bus.
Figure 5-3 (Connections Between GT and CPU)

PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0 DLKC 1
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
WARNING
[Start]
STEP 1 GT card to be replaced is in STBY mode?
Check OPE/MB lamp on the GT card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
– 566 –
NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD. Proceed to STEP 2.
STEP 2 Make sure that the GT card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
OPE/MB lamp on the GT card goes OFF.
STEP 3 Make sure that the mate GT is placed in ACT mode.

OPE/MB lamp on the GT card lights green.
STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the GT that has been placed in STBY side.
OPE/MB lamp lights red on the GT card.
STEP 5 Extract the GT card whose MB key turned ON.
STEP 6 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the new GT card.
STEP 7 Insert the new GT card to the slot.
STEP 8 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new GT card.
STEP 9 Change over the ACT/STBY of speech path by using CMOD command.
• Make sure that OPE/MB lamp lights green on the new GT card.
STEP 10 Make test calls to confirm that the new GT card is operating normally.
STEP 11 Display system messages from PCPro and analyze them when needed.
[End]
– 567 –
2.3.1 TSW Card Replacement Procedure
TSW circuit card is located in the slot numbers, ranging from 06 to 13 within the TSWR. Equipped with
the Time Division Switch (TSW) and Speech Path Controlling Interface (INT), the card’s main function
is to provide a maximum of 8192 u 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for a designated single IMG. Because
a single TSW card only enables the TS switching associated with a single, individual IMG alone, note
that the fully expanded 4-IMG system requires a total of four TSW cards when it adopts a single
configuration, or as many as eight in the case of dual configuration. If your system adopts the latter’s
dual configuration, the card’s replacement procedures are as follows:
Figure 5-4 provides the system block diagram centering on the TSW cards. If the ACT/STBY of TSW
is changed over, that of DLKC and MUX in the same switching block are also totally changed over.
Figure 5-4 System Block Diagram (TSW and Other Speech Path)
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0 DLKC 1
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
– 568 –
[Start]
STEP 1 TSW card to be replaced is in STBY mode?
Check TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
STEP 2 Confirm the mate TSW has been placed in ACT mode.
When TSW ACT lamp lights green on the mate TSW card, changeover is successful.
STEP 3 Turn ON (upward) MBR key on the TSW to be replaced.
• TSW ACT lamp lights red on the all TSW cards that are placed in STBY mode.
STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the TSW to be replaced.
• SYNC lamp goes OFF on all MUX cards that are under the TSW card whose MB key is set ON.
STEP 5 Extract the TSW card to be replaced.
STEP 6 Set the keys on the new TSW card, referring to the card replaced.
STEP 7 Turn ON (upward) MBR and MB keys on the new TSW card.
STEP 8 Insert the new TSW card.
• TSW ACT lamp light red on the new TSW card.
STEP 9 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new TSW card.
• TSW ACT lights red

• M0SY/M1SY/M2SY/M3SY lamps light green
• SYNC lamps light green on all MUX cards that are under the new TSW card.
STEP 10 Turn OFF (downward) MBR key on the new card.
• TSW ACT lamp goes off on all TSW cards that are placed in STBY mode.
STEP 12 Make sure the following:
[ACT side]
• TSW ACT lights green (TSW card)
• OPE/MB lights green (DLKC card)
– 569 –
• MUX ACT lights green (MUX card)
[STBY side]
• TSW ACT is off (TSW card)

• OPE/MB is off (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT is off (MUX card)
[End]
– 570 –
2.3.2 DLKC Card Replacement Procedure
DLKC (PH-PC20) card is located in slot 02 or 03 within the TSWR. The main function is to provide all
the Desk Consoles with information such as termination/answer/release (abandonment) of ATT calls or
BUSY/IDLE status of stations via the link of TSW system. Use the following procedures to replace
DLCK card with a spare.
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0 DLKC 1
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
WARNING
[Start]
STEP 1 DLKC card to be replaced is in STBY mode?
Check OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
– 571 –
STEP 2 Make sure that the DLKC card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card goes OFF.
STEP 3 Make sure that the mate DLKC is placed in ACT mode.
OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card lights green.
STEP 4 Turn ON (upward) MBR key on the ST
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the DLKC that has been placed in STBY side.
OPE/MB lamp lights red on the DLKC card.
STEP 6 Extract the DLKC card whose MB key turned ON.
STEP 7 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the new DLKC card.
STEP 8 Insert the new DLKC card to the slot.
STEP 9 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new DLKC card.
• Make sure that OPE/MB lamp lights green on the new DLKC card.
STEP 11 Display system messages from PCPro and analyze them when needed.
[End].
– 572 –
2.3.3 PLO Card Replacement Procedure
PLO (PH-CK16-D, etc) card is located in slot 14 or 15 within the TSWR. Used together with digital
interface cards, the card’s main function is to establish clock synchronization on the digital network. In
addition, the MUSIC ROM supplies Music-On-Hold to each station line via the TSW circuit card. Use
the procedures below to replace PLO card with a spare.
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS
PCM HW
PM BUS

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 0 DLKC 1
PLO 1
PLO 0
GT 1
GT 0
[TSWR]
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
WARNING
[Start]
STEP 1 PLO card to be replaced is in STBY mode?
Check OPE lamp on the PLO card. When the lamp is off, the card is in STBY mode.
– 573 –
NO: Changeover the ACT/STBY of PLO. Proceed to STEP 2.
Note: PLO ACT/STBY can be changed over by MB key operation. See “Manual Changeover of PLO” in Chap-
ter 2 for more details.
STEP 2 Make sure that the PLO card to be replaced is placed in STBY mode.
OPE lamp on the PLO card goes OFF.
STEP 3 Make sure that the mate PLO is placed in ACT mode.
OPE lamp on the PLO card lights green.
STEP 4 Extract the PLO card from TSWR.
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) MB key on the new PLO card.
STEP 6 Insert the new PLO card to the slot of TSWR.
STEP 7 Turn OFF (downward) MB key on the new PLO card.
STEP 8 Change over the ACT/STBY of the PLO again.
• Turn ON (upward) MB key on the ACT PLO.

• OPE lamp goes OFF on the key-operated PLO.
• OPE lamp lights green on the other side PLO card.
STEP 9 Make sure the ACT/STBY status of PLO that is shown by CMOD exactly reflects the actual
ACT/STBY status that is indicated by OPE lamps.
STEP 10 Repeat the previous two steps.
STEP 11 Set PLO #0 in ACT mode. (Usually, PLO #0 should be placed in ACT mode.)
[End].
– 574 –
2.3.4 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure
PWR SW (PH-PW14) card is located in slot 00 or 01 of TSWR. This card provides operating power for
circuit cards that are accommodated in TSWR.
WARNING
[Start]
STEP 1 Turn OFF (downward) SW key on the PWR SW card to be replaced.
• P-ON lamp goes OFF on the PWR SW card.

• ALM lamp lights red on the PWR SW card.STEP 3
STEP 2 Extract the PWR SW card from TSWR.
STEP 3 Turn OFF (downward) SW key on the new PWR SW card.
STEP 4 Insert the new PWR SW card to the slot of TSWR.
• P-ON lamp remains OFF on the inserted PWR SW card.

• ALM lamp lights red on the inserted PWR SW card.
STEP 5 Turn ON (upward) SW key on the PWR SW card.
• P-ON lamp lights green on the PWR SW card.

• ALM lamp goes OFF on the PWR SW card.
[End]
– 575 –
2.4 Replacement Procedure of CF Card
Always backup the current program and office data stored in CF card before replacing
the CF card.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
WARNING CF card cannot be removed while the SV8500 is in operation. Doing so stops the system
operation.
WARNING Be sure to use anti-static measures when handling a CF card. See “How to Handle a CF card”
for more details.
[Start]
STEP 1 Backup the office data stored in CF card and copy it into a reliable storage device.
STEP 2 Write in the program to the new CF card by referring to Installation Manual. Also, write in the
office data stored in the storage device such as a hard disk of a PC.
STEP 3 Shutdown the system, referring to “Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System”.
STEP 4 Take out the fault CF card and insert the new CF card in which program and office data have
been written.
STEP 5 Turn ON the system again, referring to “Initialization by Turning OFF and ON the System”.
STEP 6 Set the data and time by using ATIM.
[End]
– 576 –
2.5 Replacement Procedure of FANC (PZ-M699)
This section explains how to replace FANC (PZ-M699) that is accommodated in PIR
and TSWR. The FANC controls three FANs, providing operating power to each FAN
ATTENTION
from the system via this card. For this reason, all FANs that are connected to this card Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
will be stopped during the FANC replacement. FANC is mounted on the upper front of Precautions Required
the FANU. The figure below shows PZ-M699.

Figure 5-5 PZ-M699
FAN0/FAN1/FAN2
FAN operating power is provided
FANU from these connectors.
(connector)
FANU FAN PWR SW FAN0 FAN1 FAN2
FANC xxxx xxxx xx
bracket (left) MADE IN JAPAN
ON
FUSE PZ-M699 FANC bracket (right)
Fuse FAN W SW (Power switch for FANs)

(1.0 A) - Upward: ON (Normal setting)
- Downward: OFF
CAUTION It is not necessary to shut down the system during FANC replacement.
CAUTION Complete the entire procedure within about 15 minutes; where the temperature is around 77
degrees F.
[START]
STEP 1: Remove the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU.
FANU
a rack located just below the FANU

(PIR/TSWR)
Front Cover
– 577 –
STEP 2: Remove the front cover of FANU for the FANC to be replaced.
FANU Front Cover
FANC
PIR/TSWR
STEP 3: Turn OFF (upper) the FAN Power Switch.
• All FANs stop by this operation.
FAN PWR SW (upward)
STEP 4: Remove the cables from the cable support.
STEP 5: Disconnect the FAN cables from the connector.
• Pull the connector while unlocking.
FAN cables
Cable Support
– 578 –
STEP 6: Remove the cables from the FANU connector using a flat-blade screwdriver.
flat-blade screwdriver FANU connector
STEP 7: Loosen the screws fixing the FANC brackets on both sides.
screw (right
screw (left)
a Phillips head screwdriver
STEP 8: Remove the FANC.
• Slide the FANC bracket to the right a little. (about 1cm)
• Pull the bracket toward you.

brackets
[2]
[1] [1]
[1] Slightly slide the FANC to the right

[2] Pull the FANC toward you.
– 579 –
STEP 9: Replace the FANC.
• Turn OFF (upper) the FAN Power Switch on the new FANC.
• FANC and the bracket must be replaced.
STEP 10: Mount the new FANC to the FANU. (in reverse order shown above)
• Place the FANC bracket on the FANU so that the loosed screw at the right side may come through the big
hole of the right bracket.
• Slide the brackets to the left a little. (about 1cm)
• Tighten the screws with a flat-blade screwdriver, and fix the brackets.
STEP 11: Connect the FAN cables to the FAN connectors (FAN0 - FAN2).
• Insert the FAN cables to the point where it clicks.
• Fix the FAN cables on the cable support.
STEP 12: Reconnect the cables to the FANU connector, and tighten the screws with a flat-blade screwdriver.
STEP 13: Turn ON (downward) the FAN Power Switch.
• Check all the FANs are operating normally.
Note: If FANs do not operate normally, check the cables connections.
STEP 14: Return the FAN cover to the FANU.
STEP 15: Return the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU.
[END]
– 580 –
2.6 Replacement Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR)
This section explains how to replace a FAN that is accommodated in PIR or TSWR FAN
can prevent the system from overheating, which might cause malfunction or failure. We
ATTENTION
recommend that FAN should replace every five years. Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Figure 5-6 FANs Accommodated FAN tray
FANs are mounted on FAN tray as shown below. To replace a FAN, the FAN tray must be removed from
the system.
FANs
FANU
FAN
PW
R SW
FUSE
xxx
x
xxx
ON MADE x xx FAN0
IN JA
PAN
PZ-M FAN1
699 FAN2
FANC
FAN Tray
FRONT
CAUTION Do not put your finger to operating FAN box. Before replacing a FAN, make sure that the
FAN blades are completely stopped.
CAUTION Complete the entire procedure within about 15 minutes; where the temperature is around 77
degrees F.
CAUTION It is not necessary to turn off the power of PIR/TSWR during FAN replacement.
[START]
STEP 1: Identify a faulty FAN if this replacement is not regular FAN replacement.
– 581 –
STEP 2: Remove the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU.
FANU
(PIR/TSWR)
a rack located just below the FANU
Front Cover
STEP 3: Remove the front cover of FANU for the FANC to be replaced.
FANU Front Cover
FANC
PIR/TSWR
STEP 4: Turn OFF (upper) the FAN Power Switch.
– 582 –
• All FANs stop by this operation.
FAN PWR SW (upward)
STEP 5: Disconnect the cable from the FA NU connector.
• Use a flat-blade screwdriver.
flat-blade screwdriver FANU connector
STEP 6: Loosen the screws fixing the FAN tray on both sides.
screw (left)
screw (right)
a Phillips head screwdriver
– 583 –
STEP 7: Pull the FAN tray toward you as shown below.
FAN tray
STEP 8: Unfasten the FAN cables from the cable support.
STEP 9: Replace the FAN to be replaced.
• Disconnect FAN0, FAN1, or FAN2 connector.

• Remove the old FAN.
• Attach a new FAN. Note
• Connect the FAN cable.
old FAN
FAN cable connected location
(FAN0)
new FAN
FAN1
FAN2
FAN cable
FANU
FAN
PW
R SW
FUSE
xxx
x xxx
MA x xx FAN0
ON DE
IN JA
PAN FAN1
PZ-M
699 FAN2
FAN0 connector
FAN1 connector Cable support
FAN2 connector
Note: Take into account the FAN cable connected location when attaching the FAN. Otherwise, the cable length
may not be enough to reach the FAN connector.
– 584 –
Note: Insert the FAN connector firmly to the appropriate FAN connector until you hear an audible click.
STEP 10: Attach the FAN tray again.
• Insert the FAN tray to the original position.

• Fix the FAN tray on the FANU again.
STEP 11: Reconnect the cables to the FANU connector, and tighten the screws with a flat-blade screwdriver.
STEP 12: Turn ON (downward) the FAN Power Switch.
• Check all the FANs are operating normally.
Note: If FANs do not operate normally, check the cables connections.
STEP 13: Return the FAN cover to the FANU.
STEP 14: Return the front cover of the rack (PIR/TSWR) located just below the FANU.
[END]
– 585 –
2.7 Replacement Procedure of 1U–C/DC Power Unit on 9U–IR (DC Power Input Version)
This section explains how to change the 1U–C/DC Power Unit from a Single Power Configuration to a
Dual Power Configuration as well as replacing the power units.
Note 1: AC/DC power unit is in Single Power Configuration for shipping. Therefore, a blank unit is mounted
on the #1 side of the AC/DC power unit when shipped. There are two types of blank units: unit with two
LOCK keys and unit with one LOCK key.
Note 2: Replacement should be processed one power unit at a time. Do not cut off power for both AC/DC power
units at the same time.
Note 3: Replace the AC/DC power unit once every seven years.
Note 4: When the AC/DC power unit is in Single Power Configuration, the cover provided must be secured to
the empty slot on the unit’s front side.
Single Power Configuration (For Shipping)

Blank Unit with Two LOCK Keys
Power Switch
AC/DC power unit #0 Blank unit
LOCK key
Single Power Configuration (For Shipping)

Blank Unit with One LOCK Key
Power Switch
AC/DC power unit #0 Blank unit
LOCK key
– 586 –
Dual Power Configuration

Power Switch
AC/DC power unit #0 AC/DC power unit #1
LOCK key
2.7.1 Procedure for Upgrading to Dual Power Configuration
STEP 1 Unlock the blank unit.

Slide the LOCK key up
to unlock the unit.
LOCK key for blank unit
STEP 2 Remove the blank unit.

Blank Unit with Two LOCK Keys
– 587 –
Blank Unit with One LOCK Key
Front View
STEP 3 Slide in the new AC/DC power unit. Check that the OPE lamp light is ON and the FAN is turn-
ing.
STEP 4 Slide the LOCK key downward to lock the unit.
STEP 5 Turn the power switch ON for the newly installed #1 side of AC/DC power unit.
– 588 –
2.7.2 Procedure for Replacing #0 Side of AC/DC Power Unit
STEP 1 Turn the power switch OFF for #0 side of AC/DC power unit.
Power Switch for #0
Turn the switch to left side (OFF)
OFF ON
STEP 2 Unlock the #0 side of AC/DC power unit.
Slide the LOCK key up

to unlock the unit.
LOCK key for #0
STEP 3 Use the handle to pull the #0 side of AC/DC power unit frontward.
Front View
Note: FANs constantly turn as long as power units are inserted. Be careful not to touch the FANs.
STEP 4 Slide in the new AC/DC power unit. Check that the OPE lamp light is ON and the FAN is turn-
ing.
STEP 5 Slide the LOCK key downward to lock the unit.
STEP 6 Turn the power switch ON for #0 side of AC/DC power unit.
STEP 7 Repeat the above steps for #1 side of AC/DC power unit if necessary.
– 589 –
2.8 Replacement Procedure of Fuse
The system uses the following fuses as a protection against an overload resulting from
a short circuit.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
1.5A 25A
10A
12.5V
When excessive current is applied to a PWR circuit card, the related fuse is blown. The blown fuse after a fault
can be confirmed as shown in the following figure.
If a fuse is blown,
this area turns white.
A normal fuse A blown fuse
The purpose of fuses is to let them blow before the components are damaged. If any fuse gets blown, replace it
immediately with a new one using the following procedure:
(1) Confirm the blown fuse via System Message [6-A] or MJ lamp.
(2) Replace the fuse with the new one.
(3) Determine the cause of the blown fault.
– 590 –
The following figure shows the location of fuses for the system.
PZ-
M6
99
PA-
PW
PA- 54-
C
PW U
55- N
C
1.0 A
A F
FUS
E
FUS
E 5
.0 A
FUS
E 0
.5
A 5.0
FUS A
E 2 FUS
0A 0.5 E IR
A P
FUS
00
01
02
03
20 A E
04
05
06
07
FUS
08
09
10
E11
12
13
14 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
PZ-
M6
99
PH
-PW
14
U
1.0 N
A A
FUS FUS F
E 1 E
5A
R
15 A W
FUS S
T
00
01
02
03
04
E
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
FUS
E
3.2
A
5.0
A
BAS FUS
EU E
– 591 –
Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the RGU fuse blown fault.
Start
Visual check: No pin contacting

or backboard melting?
OPE Lamp (green) of No

each LC card remains lit?
Yes 1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key
on the LC card.
No Replace the blown fuse with a new 2. Remove the card from the PIR.
one. The fuse is blown again? 3. Replace the fuse with a new one.
Yes
Perform station-to-station The replaced fuse No

No Turn ON (UP) the MB is blown again?
connections within the PIR. keys on all LC cards,
Is any fuse blown? and remove them from the Yes
Perform station-to-station
Yes PIR. (Only PWR cards are No
connections within the PIR.
inside the PIR) Turn ON (UP) the MB Is any fuse blown?
keys on the whole LC cards,
Fault of LC card that accompanied and remove them from the Yes Fault of LC card
the fuse blowing. Replace the blown fuse PIM. (Only PWR cards are that was removed
with a new one. inside the PIR)
Fault in LC card that accompanied

Probable Cause: Not confirmed. the fuse blowing.
No The replaced fuse is
Needs further observation of the fault Replace the blown fuse
blown again?
with a new one.
Yes
No The replaced fuse

is blown again?
Insert the removed cards Yes
No
one by one (into the PIR).
Is any fuse blown? Replace the PWR card
Yes
Fuse is still blown? No

Fault in LC card that accompanied
the fuse blowing. Yes
Fault of PWR card.
Perform system initialization
after inserting all removed cards. There is a short circuit
on the backboard of the PIR.
– 592 –
Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault (PIR).
Start

OPE Lamps (green) of No

LC/TRK/NCU cards remain lit?
Yes
1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key
on the circuit card.
2. Remove the card from the PIR.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one.
The replaced fuse No

is blown again?
Yes
Make sure in which module Fault of circuit card

the fuse has blown that was removed
Turn ON (UP) the MB

keys on the whole circuit
cards, and remove them from
the PIR. (Only PWR cards
Turn ON (UP) the MB
are inside the PIR)
are inside the PIR) Replace the blown fuse
with a new one.
Replace the blown fuse

with a new one.
Insert the removed cards
No
one by one (into the PIR).
Is there any fuse blowing?
is blown again? Yes
Yes
No Perform system initialization
one by one (into the PIR). Fault of circuit card that after inserting all removed cards.
Is any fuse blown? Replace the PWR card accompanied the fuse blown.
Yes
The fuse is still blown? No

Fault of circuit card that
accompanied the fuse blown.
Yes
Fault of PWR card.
after inserting all removed cards.
There is a short circuit on the

backboard of the PIR.
– 593 –
Perform the following procedure to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault (TSWR).
Start

OPE Lamps (green) of No

TSWR cards remain lit?
Yes
1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key
on the circuit card.
2. Remove the card from the TSWR.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one.
The replaced fuse No

is blown again?
Yes
Make sure in which module Fault of circuit card

the fuse has blown that was removed
Turn ON (UP) the MB

Turn ON (UP) the MB
are inside the TSWR)
are inside the TSWR) Replace the blown fuse
with a new one.
Replace the blown fuse

with a new one.
No
one by one (into the TSWR).
Is there any fuse blowing?
is blown again? Yes
Yes
No Perform system initialization
one by one (into the TSWR). Fault of circuit card that after inserting all removed cards.
Is any fuse blown? Replace the PWR card accompanied the fuse blown.
Yes
The fuse is still blown? No

Fault of circuit card that
accompanied the fuse blown.
Yes
Fault of PWR card.
after inserting all removed cards.
There is a short circuit on the

backboard of the TSWR.
– 594 –
3. FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURE
This section provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or
equipment listed in Table 5-1 has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition.
Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference
FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

Section 3.1.3, Line Fault - When DT
Dial tone is not heard.
Cannot Be Heard
Section 3.1.4, Line Fault - When
Dialing results in a wrong
Dialing Results in Wrong
connection.
Connection
DP/PB Telephone
Section 3.1.5, Line Fault - When
Bell does not ring.
Line Fault Bell Does Not Ring
Section 3.1.6, When Call Cannot Be
Answer/speech cannot be
Answered and Speech Cannot Be
made.
Made
• Dterm cannot be operat-
Dterm ed. Section 3.1.7, Line fault - Dterm
• Operations are abnormal.
• No connections can be set up.
• PB/DP signals are erroneously received or sent out
from ORT/SND. Section 3.2.3, Trunk (ORT, SND,
Trunk Fault • No three-way calling can be made on CFT, or noise CFT) Fault and Section 3.2.4, Trunk
gets in a established connection. (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault
• A connection results in no speech.
• Noise gets in a established connection.
Section 4.4.3, Unit Fault - Fault
Faults related to speech.
Related to Speech
Section 4.4.4, Unit Fault - When
Dial tone is not heard.
Unit Fault Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard
Section 4.4.5, Unit Fault - ACT-Side
The ACT MUX card side has become faulty and system
MUX Card Is Faulty and System
changeover has been executed.
Has Changed Over
– 595 –
Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference (Continued)
FAULTY ITEM FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

Section 4.5.2, Speech Path System
Faults related to speech.
Fault - Fault Related to Speech
Dial tone is not heard. Fault - When Dial Tone (DT)
Speech System Fault
Cannot Be Heard
STBY side is faulty. Fault - STBY Side Has Become
Fault
Section 4.7.1, Control System Fault
Fault occurs occasionally
Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on
at the ACT side.
ACT side
Alarm Indication Fault Section 4.8.1, Fault That Cannot Be
Fault is not detected.
Detected
Fuse for RGU/-48V has blown. Section 4.9.2, Fuse Blown Fault
Section 4.9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF
The circuit breaker of PWR supply is off.
Power Supply Fault Fault in PWR Supply
Section 4.9.4, Fault of Alarm Lamps
Alarm lamp on the PWR supply is lit.
on PWR Supply
• Fans are not activated even if the temperature has ris-
en higher than a predetermined degree. Section 5-23, Circuit Diagram of
Fan Unit Fault
• Fans are not activated even if the FAN START switch Fan Unit and Thermal Unit
is set to AUTO position.
Tone Fault Tone is distorted. Section 4.11.2, Tone Fault
• A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. When the signal Section 4.12.3, Specific CCH/CCT
transmission line is a digital line, transmission/re- Card Is Faulty and
ceiving of control signals cannot be performed. Section 4.12.4, Fault of CCH, DTI
• When the signal transmission line is an analog line, and Related Flat Cable
transmission/receiving of control signals cannot be
CCIS Line Fault performed.
• A specific DCH/PRT card is faulty. Section 4.13.3, Specific DCH/PRT

• When the signal transmission line is a digital line, Card Is Faulty and
ISDN Line Fault
transmission/receiving of control signals cannot be Section 4.13.4, Fault of DCH, DTI,
performed. and Related Flat Cable
– 596 –
3.1 LINE FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where only one specific station line is in any of the
faulty conditions listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Line Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

When Dial Tone cannot be heard Section 3.1.3, Line Fault - When DT Cannot Be Heard
Section 3.1.4, Line Fault - When Dialing Results in Wrong
When dialing results in a wrong connection
Connection
When the bell does not ring Section 3.1.5, Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring
When call cannot be answered and speech cannot be Section 3.1.6, When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech
made Cannot Be Made
Dterm Fault Section 3.1.7, Line fault - Dterm
3.1.1 Check Point
When repairing a line fault, consider the following items:
(1) Check alarm lamps on line circuit cards.
(2) Check the fault line on the MDF.
– 597 –
3.1.2 Line Control
Each line in a specific Line Circuit (LC/ELC) card is controlled by the PM in that line circuit card. The line
circuit cards are controlled from Telephony Server via the MUX. The following figure shows the control
route of line circuit cards.
Controlling LC/ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path
MDF
LC/ELC
LT Cable
Control Signal LC
PM
MUX Speech Path LT Cable
LC
Ordinary Telephone/
Dterm
LC/ELC
LT Cable
Control Signal LC
PM
MUX
Speech Path LT Cable
LC
Ordinary Telephone/
TDSW/INT
Dterm
TSW
Control Signal
Symbols:
: Circuit Card : Speech Path

SV8500 Server : Control Signal
– 598 –
3.1.3 Line Fault - When DT Cannot Be Heard
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
until the replacement is complete.
(1) When OPE lamp on the LC circuit card does not illuminate.
(a) Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in ON position (UP).

(b) Use ASDT command to confirm that station data in the LC circuit card is assigned.
(c) Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.
(2) When BL lamp for each line is flashing or illuminating on the LC circuit card
(a) Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in ON position (UP side).

(b) Use the MBST command to confirm LC circuit card has not been placed into make-busy state.
(c) Use the ASDT command to check the station data assignment.
(d) Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.
(3) Check the faulty line on the MDF.
(a) Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring side and to the system side.
(b) Connect the test telephone to the system side and check to see if dial tone can be heard.
[When Dial Tone (DT) is heard]
• Check the in-house wirings.
• Replace the station telephone set with a spare.

[When no DT or side tone is heard]
• Check LT cables.
• Replace the station telephone set with a spare.

[When DT is not heard, but side tone can be heard.]
• Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.
– 599 –
3.1.4 Line Fault - When Dialing Results in Wrong Connection
(1) When a call addressed to a specific station has terminated to another station.
(a) Check to see if Call Forwarding-All Calls data has been deleted.
(a) On the MDF, isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring side and to the system side.
(b) Connect the test telephone to the system side.
(c) Repeat station-to-station connections and check to see if the connection is established normally.
[When the dialed station is called]
• The station telephone set is faulty. Replace the station telephone set with a spare.
[When a wrong connection occurs]
– 600 –
3.1.5 Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring
(1) Call the faulty station line by station-to-station calling and check to see if the bell of the telephone rings.
(a) Replace the telephone set and check to see if its bell rings.
(c) Call the faulty line by station-to-station calling and check to see if the bell rings.
[When the bell does not ring]

[When the bell rings]
• The in-house wiring side is faulty. Confirm that the A-wire is not short-circulating with ground.
– 601 –
3.1.6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made
(c) Call the faulty line by station-to-station calling.
[When speech can be made.]
• Replace the telephone set with a spare.

[When speech cannot be made.]
– 602 –
3.1.7 Line fault - Dterm
[1] When using LC/ELC circuit card.
Note: If any of the in-house cable wirings short-circuit, the POW ALM lamp on the ELC circuit card lights.
Remove the cause of the short-circuit and initialize the ELC circuit card.
(1) When OPE lamp on the ELC circuit card does not illuminate.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit card is not in ON position (UP).
(b) Confirm that station data (ASDT command) in the ELC circuit card is assigned.
(c) Replace ELC circuit card with a spare.
(2) When BL lamp for each line is flashing or illuminating on the ELC circuit card.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit card is not in ON position (UP).
(b) Use the MBST command to confirm that ELC circuit card has not been placed into make-busy state.
(c) Check the station data (ASDT command) assignment.
(d) Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare.
(b) Connect the test Dterm to the system side.
(c) Confirm speech by station-to-station calling.
[When speech cannot be made]
• Check LT cables.
• Replace ELC circuit card with a spare.

[When speech can be made]
• Check to see if the modular plug is firmly connected with the Dterm.
• Check the wiring inside the rosette.
• Check the in-house wiring for any abnormality.
• Replace the Dterm with a spare.
– 603 –
3.2 TRUNK FAULT
This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when a fault, shown in Table 5-3, has occurred to a spe-
cific trunk.
Table 5-3 Trunk Fault Situation
TRUNK FAULTY SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

ORT No connection can be set up.
PB/DP signals are erroneously received or cannot be received.
SND No connections can be set up.
Section 3.2.3, Trunk (ORT, SND,
PB/DP signals are erroneously sent out or cannot be sent out.
CFT) Fault
CFT No connections can be set up.
No three-way calling can be made.
Noise gets in an established connection.
COT No connections can be set up.
Section 3.2.4, Trunk (COT, TLT,
TLT A connection results in no speech.
DTI) Fault
DTI Noise gets in an established connection.
No connections can be set up. Refer to the Installation and startup
MG A connection results in no speech. procedure of MG (Media Gateway)
Noise gets in an established connection. in Peripheral Equipment Manual.
3.2.1 Check Point
When repairing a trunk fault, consider the following items:
(1) Check alarm lamps on trunk circuit cards.
(2) When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific trunk or when an incoming call cannot be
terminated from a specific trunk, check Tenant Restriction Data (assigned via ATNR command) and Route
Restriction Data (assigned via ARSC command).
(3) Three-Way Conference Trunk (CFT) is on the MUX (PH-PC36) circuit cards. If a three-way conference
call cannot be established, check the MUX cards.
(4) If the present timing for supervising the trunk/sender status is considered responsible for the fault, change
the timing. The specifications for timings that can be changed with respect to trunks and senders are shown
in Table 5-4 and Table 5-5.
– 604 –
Table 5-4 Timings for Trunks
ITEMS FOR STATUS

CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
SUPERVISION
1 • Ringdown System
Detection by ringing signal (20Hz) from Ringing signal of more than four
the opposite office. cycles is detected within 800
Detection of Call • Loop System milliseconds.
Termination Detection by loop from the opposite office.
• E&M System Detection within 16 milliseconds
Detection by incoming signal (ground or after call termination.
–48V) on E (RG2) lead.
2 • Wink Signal 160 milliseconds (standard)
Acknowledge Signal
• Delay Start Timing can be assigned using ARTD
Sending
command.
3 • E&M System 288milliseconds (standard)
Detection of Release at the • Loop System
time of Incoming 160 milliseconds (standard)
Connection Timing can be assigned using the
ARTD command.
4 After release of the user’s trunk or the trunk at 3070 milliseconds (standard)
Timing for Restricting Call
the opposite office has been detected, a new Timing can be assigned using ARTD
Origination after Release
call origination is restricted. command.
5 • Loop System
Closure of DC loop.
Seizure of Opposite Office • E&M System
Supply of outgoing call signal (ground or
–48V) onto M (DL) lead.
6 Detection of Acknowledge • Wink Signal Timing is assigned using the ARTD
Signal • Delay Start command.
7 • If DP Signal is 10 seconds
(standard) after dial pulses are sent
out
Timing can be assigned using the
Even if answer signal has not reached from the ARTD command.
Trunk Hold Time opposite office, the call is regarded as
answered. • If PB Signal is 30 seconds
(standard) after seizure of the trunk
Timing can be assigned using
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 156 (only
when 2nd Dial Tone System).
– 605 –
ITEMS FOR STATUS

SUPERVISION
8 • Loop System
Detection of Release at the Detection of polarity reversal across tip and
ring. 608 milliseconds (standard)
time of Outgoing
Connection • E&M System ARTD command.
Detection of Release Signal (ground or
–48V) on E lead.
Table 5-5 Timings for Senders
ITEMS FOR STATUS

SUPERVISION
1 Timing limit for waiting to receive connection 4 seconds (standard)
Sender Acknowledge Wait
acknowledgement signal from the opposite Timing can be assigned using the
Timer
office after seizing the opposite office. ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 130 command.
2 DP: 3 seconds (standard)
Time from sender seizure until sending of the
PB: 2.5 seconds (standard)
Sender Prepause Timer 1st digit where connection acknowledgment is
made by interface with the opposite office.
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 131 command.
3 • For DP
10 pps: 860 milliseconds
(standard)
20 pps: 460 milliseconds
(standard)
Inter-digit timing for the numbers sent out by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX. 132
Sender Inter-digit Timer command.
the sender.
• For PB
60/120 milliseconds (selected by
ONSG of ARTD command.)
Timing can be changed using the
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 133
command.
– 606 –
3.2.2 Trunk Control
Trunk circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Each trunk line in a specific trunk circuit
card is controlled by the Port Microprocessor (PM) in a trunk circuit card. Figure 5-7 shows the control
route of the trunk circuit card.
Figure 5-7 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path
ORT/SND
Control Signal TRK

PM
MUX Speech Path
TRK
MDF
COT/TLT
LT Cable
Control Signal TRK
PM
Speech Path LT Cable
TRK
CFT
Note
COT/TLT
Network
LT Cable
Control Signal TRK
PM
MUX Speech Path LT Cable
TRK
ORT/SND
Control Signal TRK

PM
Speech Path
TRK
CFT
Note
TDSW/INT
TSW
SV8500 Server
MG MG
Symbols:
: Circuit Card : Speech Path

NETWORK
: Control Signal
Note: CFT for eight party is mounted within the TSW and MUX circuit card.
– 607 –
3.2.3 Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault
(1) When only one line is faulty.
(a) Place the faulty line into make-busy state.
• For ORT/SND, set MB switch of each circuit to ON position.
• For CFT, place it into make-busy state using the MBTK command.
(2) Replace the circuit card with a spare.
(a) Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
(b) Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(c) Set MB switch DOWN.
(d) If the line is under make-busy state, cancel it.
– 608 –
3.2.4 Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault
Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, any other lines in that circuit card cannot be
used until the replacement is complete.
Note: If the polarities of the external line are reversed, it is detected in the form of Trunk Ineffective Hold.
(1) When OPE lamp on the trunk circuit card does not illuminate.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of the trunk circuit card is in ON position (UP side).
(b) Confirm that trunk data (ATRK command) in the trunk circuit card is assigned.
(c) Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.
(2) When BL lamp is flashing or illuminating on the trunk circuit card.
(a) Confirm that MB switch of trunk circuit card is in ON position (UP side).
(b) Use the MBTK command to confirm that trunk circuit card has not been placed into make-busy state.
(c) Check trunk data (ATRK command) assignment.
(d) Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.

[If the C.O./Tie Line is in Loop Start system]
(a) Isolate the faulty line to C.O. side and to the system side.
(b) Connect the test telephone to the C.O. side.
(c) Confirm that Dial Tone (DT) is heard and the call is connected to the destination party at the opposite
office.
Note: Check can be made only on temporarily opened C.O./TIE lines.

[If C.O./TIE line is any other type than Loop Start]
(a) By cross connections on the MDF, connect the faulty line to a normal trunk.
(b) By a designated connection from the ATTCON/DESKCON, seize the
trunk connected with the faulty line.
(c) After the trunk has been seized, check to see if a call can be originated.
Note: When the connection is not set up, the C.O./TIE line is faulty.
[When the connection is set up]
• Replace the Dterm with a spare.
Note: Cross connection methods are explained on the following pages.
– 609 –
Note: When performing loop-back connection tests on the trunks at the user’s office, provide cross connection
as follows:
(1) For a COT
A LC COT
C LC
B LC
• Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line.
• The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.
(2) For a MC-MG (COT)
IP Station
MC-MG (COT)
B LC
A LC
• Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line.
• The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.
(3) For a TLT (for DID)
A LC TLT
B LC TLT
• Set up a loop-back connection between the TIE Line Trunk (TLT) to be tested and another TLT.
• If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below:
– 610 –
• If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below:
TLT T T TLT
R R
• If the TLT is a 4-wire E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:
Receive T T Receive
R R
TLT T T TLT
Send Send
R R
E E
M M
• If the TLT is a 2W E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:
T T
TLT R R TLT
E E
M M
(4) For a DTI
A LC DTI
B LC DTI
• Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown
below:
R R
Receive Receive
R R
DTI DTI
T T
Send Send
T T
• If the office is the PLO-source office, perform the tests by disconnecting the PLO and M-OSC. The
mode of the PLO becomes Self Operation Mode.
• When the loop-back test is performed at the time of PCM LOSS, FRM LOSS, or MERM LOSS alarm
lamp (red) illuminates. If the alarm lamp goes out, the DTI circuit card side is normal.
• When only one DTI circuit card is to be checked, make the following connections and confirm that no
alarm lamps illuminates.
– 611 –
Loop-back
Cross Connection
RA
Receive
RB
DTI
TA
Send
TB
4. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when a specific Attendant Console (ATTCON) is in any of the
following faulty conditions.
• No speech can be made.
• No operations can be made.
4.1 Check Point
When repairing an ATTCON/DESKCON fault, consider the following items:
(1) Check the cable connections on the backplane.
(2) When replacing the ATI circuit card for primary ATTCON/DESKCON, the system is placed under Night
Mode during replacement procedure.
(3) When replacing the primary ATTCON/DESKCON, the system is placed under Night Mode during
4.2 ATTCON/DESKCON Control
Each ATTCON/DESKCON is controlled from an ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card. ATI circuit card is controlled
from the CPU card via the INT on the TSW card. Figure 5-8 shows the control route of the ATI circuit card.
ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card is used as an interface card between the SV8500 Server and ATTCON/DESK-
CON. The card is mounted in slot 12.
– 612 –
Figure 5-8 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation
Location of ATT connector ATI card mounting location
LT11/PLO LT7 LT3 12

LT10 LT6 LT2
䋨㪧㪘㪚㪊㪊䋩
ATI
LT9 LT5 LT1
LT8 LT4 LT0
PIR (Rear) PIR (Front)
MDF
Note
DESK CONSOLE
DESK CONSOLE
Note: For more detailed information on the wiring, refer to Circuit Card Description.
– 613 –
4.3 ATTCON/DESKCON Fault
Note 1: No speech can be made.
Note 2: While replacement of the ATI circuit

card for the primary ATTCON/DESK-
ATTENTION
CON is in progress, the system is placed Contents
Static Sensitive
under Night Mode. Handling
START
On the ATTCON/DESKCON, LCHK Check the ATT connector cable between the
(Lamp Check) key has been pressed but ATTCON/DESKCON and the PBX.
no lamps have illuminated.
When the OPE lamp of the ATI Confirm that MB switch of the ATI circuit
(PA-CS33) circuit card does not illuminate card is in ON position (UP side).
Confirm that trunk data (ATRK command) in

the ATI circuit card are assigned.
Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.
When the BL lamp of the ATI circuit card Confirm that MB switch of the ATI circuit
is flashing or illuminating card is in ON position (UP side).
Use the MBTK command to confirm ATI

circuit card is placed into make-busy state.
Check assignment of ATI data (ATRK

command.)
Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.
When keys cannot be operated Replace the operator’s headset.
END Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.
– 614 –
Note: No operations can be made.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
START
Replace the ATTCON/DESKCON with a Set the MB switch of ATI PA-CS33 circuit
spare. card UP.
If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse,

remove the fuse.
Disconnect the CHAMP connector of the

ATTCON/DESKCON and replace the
ATTCON/DESKCON.
If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse,

insert the fuse into its position.
Set the MB switch of the ATI circuit card

DOWN.
Confirm the PA lamp illuminates on the

END ATTCON/DESKCON.
– 615 –
4.4 UNIT FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where any of the faults shown in Table 5-6 has occurred
to all the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in a specific unit. Figure 5-6 shows the range of units.
Table 5-6 Unit Fault Situation
FAULT SITUATION REFERENCE SECTION

Noise, one-way speech, no tone. Section 4.4.3, Unit Fault - Fault Related to
Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop. Speech
Dial Tone cannot be heard. Section 4.4.4, Unit Fault - When Dial Tone
System Message “4-S”, “4-T” and “23-Y” is displayed. (DT) Cannot Be Heard
MUX card has become faulty and, as a result the CPU has changed over. Section 4.4.5, Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX
System Message “4-S”, “4-T” and “23-Y” is displayed. Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over
– 616 –
4.4.1 Check Point (1/2)
Confirm the data shown below when service features cannot be assigned or service cannot be operated:
(1) Confirm that line capacity of physical PIR and virtual PIR is set correctly.
(2) Confirm that value of ASYD command to display LP mounting status is assigned as below.
• ASYD, SYS1, INDEX198=33
• ASYD, SYS1, INDEX199=33
(3) Compare the status of “virtual PIR mounting information” with “physical/virtual PIR line capacity” dis-
played. Data is assigned as below in this system.
• ASYD, SYS1, INDEX556=F0
• ASYD, SYS1, INDEX557=FF
(4) Confirm that all units are properly mounted by using the AUNT command.
– 617 –
Unit structure of PIR is as shown below. Note that the following shows a DC type as an example.
Figure 5-9 Unit Data (1-IMG)
PIR3 U=2 U=3
PIR2 U=0 U=1
U=2 U=3
PIR1
FANU
PIR0 U=0 U=1
SV8500 Server
Figure 5-10 Unit Data (4-IMG)
U=2 U=3 U=2 U=3 U=2 U=3 U=2 U=3
U=0 U=1 U=0 U=1 U=0 U=1 U=0 U=1
FANU
U=2 U=3 U=2 U=3 U=2 U=3 U=2 U=3
TSWR
FANU FANU FANU FANU
U=0 U=1 U=0 U=1 U=0 U=1 U=0 U=1
– 618 –
4.4.2 Check Point (2/2)
When repairing a unit fault, consider the following items:
(1) Speech paths and control paths in the unit are connected to line/trunks via the MUX circuit cards. Be sure
to check the alarm lamps on the MUX circuit cards, and check to see if the front cable between each MUX
circuit card and TSW circuit card is connected correctly. Figure 5-11 and Figure 5-12 show the block dia-
gram within the unit.
(2) The MUX circuit cards are operating in the ACT/STBY modes under control of the CPU circuit. When the
ACT-side CPU has detected a fault in the ACT-side MUX circuit card, CPU changeover is executed and
the ACT/STBY mode of the Speech Path System is also changed over. When both of the MUX circuit cards
have become faulty, all the lines/trunks in that unit are placed into make-busy state. (If a PFT circuit card
is located in that specific unit, the PFT is activated.) Figure 5-13 shows the location of the MUX cards.
(3) When both units in a specific PIR are faulty, it is possible that the PWR circuit card mounted in that specific
PIR is faulty. In such a case, refer to Section 4.9, Power Supply Fault.
Figure 5-11 Unit Control Block Diagram (Dual Configuration)
MUX 0 MUX 1
Clock
Clock
(B)
(B)
TSW TSW
Speech Speech
Path Path
(A) (A)
Control of
TP
PM LC/TRK
Line/
Trunk
SYMBOLS LC/TRK
Circuit Card
: Circuit Card
(A) : Control on ACT/STBY of Speech Path Systems
(B) : Control on ACT/STBY of Clock Systems
– 619 –
Figure 5-12 Unit Control Block Diagram (Single Configuration)

MUX
Clock
TSW Speech
Path
(A)
Control of
TP
PM LC/TRK
Line/
Trunk
Circuit Card LC/TRK
Figure 5-13 MUX Card Locations
MUX card is mounted in Slot 13 13 14

and/or 14 of each PIR. Note
MUX 0
MUX 1
PIR 3 UNIT = 2 UNIT = 3
13 14
MUX 0
MUX 1
13 14
MUX 0
MUX 1
13 14
MUX0
MUX1
Front View
Note: TSW circuit card is used for 1-IMG PIR 0.
– 620 –
4.4.3 Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech
Faulty Situation:
• Noise, one-way speech, no tone, etc. occurs only within a unit.
• Even if dialing has started, dial tone does not stop.
Note: Exchange the TSW circuit card when MUX is not mounted on PIR.
<<For Dual Configuration>>
(1) Check by replacing the MUX circuit card.
• After replacement of the MUX circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if
speech is normal.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer)
Circuit Card.
(b) Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(2) Check by replacing the TSW circuit card.
• After replacement of the TSW circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if
speech is normal.
(a) Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(3) Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in the unit to see if they are faulty.
(a) Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card UP and extract it from its mounting slot.
(b) Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault occurs.
(4) Perform this check on an individual basis.
(a) If the fault has stopped occurring, the circuit card extracted at that time is faulty. Replace the circuit
card with a spare.
(b) If the fault continues, check the next circuit card.
– 621 –
<<For Single Configuration>>
<<Check by replacing the MUX circuit card.>>
(1) After replacement of the MUX circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if speech
is normal.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multi-
plexer) Circuit Card.
<<Check by replacing the TSW circuit card.>>
(2) After replacement of the TSW circuit card, make a station-to-station call in the faulty unit and see if speech
is normal.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card referring to Section 1.7, Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division
Switch) Circuit Card.
(3) Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in the unit to see if they are faulty.
(a) Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card UP and extract it from its mounting slot.
(b) Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault occurs.
(4) Perform this check on an individual basis.
(a) If the fault has stopped, the circuit card extracted at that time is faulty. Replace the circuit card with a
spare.
(b) If the fault continues, check the next circuit card.
– 622 –
4.4.4 Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard
Faulty Situation:
• Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard except within a unit.

• [4-T] Both MUX Failure / [4-S] MUX Ready Failure
• [23-Y] MUX Clock Failure
Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair the
fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIR in the other system.
(1) Check to see if the MUX circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set the MUX circuit card into STBY mode. Flip the MBR switch of ACT side TSW circuit card from
ON oOFF.
(b) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.
(c) Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
be done, repeat insertion and extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
(d) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN.
(f) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
(2) Check by replacing the MUX circuit card with a spare.
(a) Place the MUX circuit card into STBY mode. Flip the MBR switch on the ACT side TSW circuit card
from ON oOFF.
(b) Replace the MUX circuit card. Refer to Section 1.5, Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer)
Circuit Card.
(c) Change the new MUX circuit card to ACT mode.
(d) Check to see if a DT (Dial Tone) connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
– 623 –
(3) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the cards back into their
slots one after another and see if the dial tone is heard each time.
(a) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their slots.
Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card UP and extract.
(b) Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX circuit card illuminates.
(c) Set the MB switch of an extracted line/trunk circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into their
mounting slots one by one.
(d) Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN.
(e) Make a station-to-station call and see if DT can be heard.
[If Dial Tone (DT) is heard, check the next circuit card.]
[If DT is not heard, replace the circuit card with a spare.]
Note: Perform this check on the rest of the circuit cards by inserting them into their individual slots.
(1) Check to see if the MUX circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.

(b) Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
(c) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(d) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN.
(e) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
(2) Check by replacing the MUX circuit card with a spare.

Circuit Card.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up to identify a circuit card responsible for
the fault.
(3) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the cards back into their
slots one after another and see if the dial tone is heard each time.
(a) Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their slots.
Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card UP and extract.
(b) Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX circuit card illuminates.
(c) Set the MB switch of an extracted Line/Trunk circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into their
mounting slots one by one.
– 624 –
(d) Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit card illuminates by setting the MB switch DOWN.
(e) Make a station-to-station call and see if dial tone can be heard.
[If DT is heard, check the next circuit card.]
[If DT is not heard, replace the circuit card with a spare.]
Note: Perform this check on the rest of the circuit cards by inserting them into their individual slots.
– 625 –
4.4.5 Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over
Faulty Situation:
• The ACT side has become faulty and the system changeover has executed in the dual configuration system.
• [4-S] MUX Ready Failure / [4-T] Both MUX Failure
[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure
(1) Check to see if the MUX circuit card of the STBY side is making poor contact.
(a) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.

(b) Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
(c) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(d) Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card DOWN.
(e) Set the faulty system to ACT side referring to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(f) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up within the faulty unit.
(g) If the connection cannot be established, change the faulty side to ST-BY and repeat the above proce-
dure to the spare MUX circuit cards.
(2) Replace the MUX circuit card with a spare, and check it.
Circuit Card.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for
the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting each MUX circuit card individually.
– 626 –
4.5 SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-7 has occurred in
the whole system.
Table 5-7 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation

• Noise, one-way speech, no tone Section 4.5.2, Speech Path System Fault - Fault
• Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop. Related to Speech
Section 4.5.3, Speech Path System Fault - When
Dial tone cannot be heard.
Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard
A fault occurring in the STBY side TSW is indicated by a system Section 4.5.4, Speech Path System Fault - STBY
message or an alarm lamp. Side Has Become Fault
– 627 –
4.5.1 Check Point
When repairing a speech path fault, consider that when any of the faults shown in Table 5-14 have occurred
in the system, it is possible that the TSW circuit card is at fault. Always check the alarm lamps on the TSW
circuit card.
Figure 5-14 Speech Path Block Diagram (1-IMG)
PIR3
MUX MUX
PIR 2
MUX MUX
PIR 1
MUX MUX
PIR0
TSW/INT0 TSW/INT1
MUX 3 MUX 3
MUX 2 MUX 2
MUX 1 MUX 1
MUX MUX
TSW0 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK TSW1
<Symbols>
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Speech Path 㩷: Cable 㪫㪪㪮㪑㩷㩷㪧㪟㪄㪪㪮㪈㪇㪄㪘, etc.
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Circuit Card (ACT) 㩷: Circuit Card (STBY) 㪤㪬㪯㪑㩷㩷㪧㪟㪄㪧㪚㪊㪍㩷
– 628 –
㪝㫀㪾㫌㫉㪼㩷㪌㪄㪈㪌㩷㩷㩷Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG [1/2])
IMG0 IMG1
PIR3 PIR 3
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 2 PIR 2
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 1 PIR 1
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 0 PIR 0
MUX MUX MUX MUX
TSWR
INT INT INT INT
MUX 003 MUX 013
02 12 03 13
MUX 001 MUX 011
MUX 000 MUX 010
MUX/INT MUX/INT
TSW 10 TSW 11
MUX 100 MUX 110
MUX 101 MUX 111
MUX 102 MUX 112
MUX 103 MUX 113
MUX/INT MUX/INT
<Symbols>
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Speech Path : Cable 㪫㪪㪮㪑㩷㩷㪧㪟㪄㪪㪮㪈㪉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY) 㪤㪬㪯㪑㩷㩷㪧㪟㪄㪧㪚㪊㪍㩷
– 629 –
Figure 5-16 Speech Path Block Diagram (4-IMG [2/2])
IMG2 IMG3
PIR 3 PIR 3
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 2 PIR2
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 1 PIR1
MUX MUX MUX MUX
PIR 0 PIR 0
MUX MUX MUX MUX
TSWR
INT INT INT INT
MUX 023 MUX 033
00 10 01 11
MUX 021 MUX 031
MUX 020 MUX 030
MUX/INT MUX/INT
TSW 12 TSW 13
MUX 120 MUX 130
MUX 121 MUX 131
MUX 122 MUX 132
MUX 123 MUX 133
MUX/INT MUX/INT
<Symbols>
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Speech Path : Cable 㪫㪪㪮㪑㩷㩷㪧㪟㪄㪪㪮㪈㪉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷: Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY) 㪤㪬㪯㪑㩷㩷㪧㪟㪄㪧㪚㪊㪍㩷
– 630 –
4.5.2 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech
Faulty Situation:
• Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.
• Even if dialing is made, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop.
• [1-C] Both TSW Write Failure
• [1-D] TSW Write Failure
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing TSW circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch)
Circuit Card.
(b) Place the TSW circuit card in ACT mode. Refer to Changeover of CPU/TSW/PLO in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsi-
ble for the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit
Card.
(b) Place the MUX circuit card to ACT mode. Refer to How to Control Switching Block.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a circuit card responsible for
the fault.
(d) Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually
– 631 –
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing TSW circuit cards.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch)
Circuit Card.
(b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsi-
ble for the fault.
(c) Perform the above check by extracting the TSW circuit cards individually.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by replacing MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit
Card.
(b) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsi-
ble for the fault.
(c) Perform the above check by extracting the MUX circuit cards individually.
– 632 –
4.5.3 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard
Faulty Situation:
• Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard.
• [1-A] Both TSW Failure (Permanent)
• [1-E] Both TSW Clock Failure
• [4-C] Both TSW Ready Failure
• [23-Y] MUX Clock Failure
Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair the
fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIR in the other system.
(1) Check to see if the TSW circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Place the TSW circuit card in STBY mode referring to How to Control Switching Block.
(b) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
(c) Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
(d) Set TSW MBR switch, PLO MBR switch (1-IMG only), and MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
(f) Set TSW MBR switch DOWN.
(g) Check if a station-to-station connection can be normally set up.
(2) Check PCM cables.
(a) Check the Front cables.

(b) Initialize the system by pressing the INIT button on the EMA card and see if a station-to-station con-
nection can be set up.
– 633 –
4.5.4 Speech Path System Fault - STBY Side Has Become Fault
Faulty Situation:
• A fault has occurred in the STBY side of the Dual Configuration system.
• [1-B] TSW Failure (Permanent)
• [1-F] TSW Clock Failure
• [4-D] TSW Ready Failure
(1) Check to see if the TSW circuit card is making poor contact.
(a) Set TSW MBR switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
(b) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
(c) Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting slot and clean the contact portion. If cleaning cannot
(d) Set TSW MBR switch and MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into its
mounting slot.
(e) Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
(f) Set TSW MBR switch and PLO MBR switch (1-IMG only) DOWN.
(g) Check if a station-to-station connection can be normally set up.
(2) Check PCM cables.
(a) Check the PCM cables.

(b) Initialize the system by depressing the INIT button on the EMA card and see if a station-to-station
connection can be set up.
– 634 –
Faulty Situation:
• Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.
• Even if dialling is made, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop.
(1) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting TSW circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to TSW Card Replacement Procedure in this chapter.
(b) Place the TSW circuit card to ACT mode. Refer to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a Station-to-Station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card respon-
sible for the fault.
(2) Check to see if fault occurs by extracting MUX circuit cards one by one.
(a) Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to MUX Replacement: 1-IMG/MUX Replacement: 4-IMG
in this chapter.
(b) Place MUX circuit card to ACT mode. Refer to How to Control Switching Block in Chapter 2.
(c) Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card responsi-
ble for the fault.
– 635 –
4.6 CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure for the control system listed in Table 5-8.
Table 5-8 Control System Fault Situation

Section 4.7.1, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs
Fault occurs occasionally at the STBY side.
Intermittently on ACT side
– 636 –
4.7 Check Point
When repairing the control system, check the status of the following lamps:
• Telephony Server (TP/SP)TSW lamp
• Telephony Server (TP/SP) MUX lamp
– 637 –
The following figures show a block diagram of the CPU controlling block, where CPU 0 is active.
PM Bus
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR3
PM Bus
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR2
PM Bus
MUX MUX
LC/TRK LC/TRK
PIR1
PM Bus
TSW MUX MUX TSW
MUX INT MUX INT
EXB INT LC/TRK LC/TRK EXB INT
Local I/O BUS BUS0 BUS1 Local I/O BUS
PIR0
SV8500 Server
EXB0 EXB1
CPU0 CPU1
EMA
IOC
(option)
IOC
(option
PCI-Ex Bus PCI-Ex Bus
(PCI Express) (PCI Express)
TSW : PH-SW10-A, etc. : Circuit Card : Signal

MUX : PH-PC36 : CPU Controlling Route : Cable
– 638 –

IMG0 IMG1
MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS

MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS

MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS

MUX MUX
MUX MUX
PM BUS PM BUS
To IMG 2 To IMG 3 To IMG 2 To IMG 3
TSWR MUX MUX MUX MUX

M M M M M M M M /INT /INT M M M M M M M M /INT /INT
U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
003 002 001 000 013 012 011 010 TSW TSW 100 101 102 103 110 111 112 113 TSW TSW
02 03 12 13
CPU Board 0
MUX/INT MUX/INT MUX/INT MUX/INT

(PCI Express)
PCI-Ex Bus

SV8500 Server
Local I/O BUS Local I/O BUS

DLKC BUS DLKC BUS
EXB0
DLKC 0 DLKC 1
(Option)
(Option)
EMA
BUS0 DLKC BUS DLKC BUS

IOC
IOC
GT 0
Local I/O BUS
EXB1
PLO 0 PLO 1
(PCI Express)
PCI-Ex Bus
Local I/O BUS

GT 1
BUS1
CPU Board 1
Symbols:
GT : PH-GT09
TSW : PH-SW12 : CPU Controlling Routes : Cable
DLKC: PH-PC20 : Circuit Card (ACT) : Circuit Card (STBY)
PLO : PH-CK16-D, etc. : External Cable : Clock Oscillator
MUX : PH-PC36 : Signal
– 639 –
4.7.1 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently on ACT side
Faulty Situation:
• Fault occurs intermittently.
• [0-C] ~ [0-J] CPU Failure
• [3-D], [3-E] Lock-up Failure (Permanent/Temporary)

[For Dual-Configuration System]
(1) Replace the related circuit cards one by one referring to each page:
• CPU Card Replacement Procedure
• EMA Card Replacement Procedure
• EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card Replacement Procedure
• GT Card Replacement Procedure
• Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card
• Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit Card
(2) Change over the CPU or speech path referring to SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES.
(3) Make test calls (Station-to-Station call) to see if the fault occurs again.
(4) After completing all steps, place the related cards into ACT mode.
(5) Check to see that any fault information is displayed
[For Single-Configuration System]
(1) Replace the related circuit cards one by one referring to each page:
• EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card Replacement Procedure
– 640 –
• Replacement Procedure of TSW (Time Division Switch) Circuit Card
• Replacement Procedure of MUX (Multiplexer) Circuit Card
(2) Initialize the system by pressing INIT button on the EMA card.
(3) Check to see that any fault information is displayed.
– 641 –
4.8 Control System Fault - STBY Side Is Faulty
Faulty Situation:
• Fault has occurred at the STBY side of Dual Configuration system.
ATTENTION
• [0-I] STBY CPU Failure. Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
• The ACT side has become faulty, and system changeover has been executed.
• [0-C], [0-H], [0-J] Processor Failure (ACT side)
1-IMG
START
Replace STBY-side related circuit card Replace the circuit card (CPU, GT, TSW, MUX,
(CPU, GT, TSW, MUX, EMA) with a EMA) individually by referring to the following:
spare, and check.
• EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card
Replacement Procedure
• Replacement Procedure of TSW
(Time Division Switch) Circuit
Card
• Replacement Procedure of MUX
(Multiplexer) Circuit Card
Place the circuit card (CPU, GT, TSW, MUX) to

ACT mode by executing CPU or TSW change-
over. (Refer to SYSTEM CONTROL
PROCEDURES)
Check to see if a station-to-station connection can

be set up to identify the circuit card
END responsible for the fault.
When a fault is not indicated, set

the faulty systems to STBY side.
Refer to SYSTEM CONTROL
PROCEDURES in Chapter 2.
•CPU Controlling Block Diagram: See Figure 5-17, Figure 5-18 in this chapter.
– 642 –
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
4-IMG
START
Replace STBY-side related circuit cards Replace the circuit cards (CPU, GT, TSW,
(CPU, GT, TSW, MUX, EMA) with a spare, MUX, EMA) individually by referring to the
and check. following:

• EXB (EXB-PIR/EXB-TSW) Card
Replacement Procedure
• Replacement Procedure of TSW
(Time Division Switch) Circuit
Card
• Replacement Procedure of MUX
(Multiplexer) Circuit Card
Place the circuit cards (CPU, GT, TSW, MUX)
into ACT mode by executing CPU changeover.
(Refer to SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES)
Check to see if a station-to-station connection

can be set up to identify the circuit card
responsible for the fault.
When a fault is not indicated, set
the faulty systems to STBY side
in advance by executing CPU
changeover. Refer to SYSTEM
CONTROL PROCEDURES in
Chapter 2.
END
– 643 –
4.8.1 Fault That Cannot Be Detected
If the SV8500 server does not detect faults that occur in the system, do the following:
STEP 1 Check the alarm cable connections referring to the figure below.
STEP 2 Check the wiring on the MDF when Audible Visual Alarm Indicating Panel is used.
STEP 3 Make sure that “D15F EXALM CA-A” is securely inserted to “EXALM” connector on the
EMA SUB-A card.
Figure 5-19 Alarm Bus Cable Connection Diagram
The following shows an example of fully expanded 4-IMG system. The dotted lines are used for 4-IMG only.
Rear View Rear View MDF
(PIR 15) (PIR 3)
PIR PIR
ALMB ALM
PIR PIR
ALMA ALMA
(PIR 14) (PIR 2) Audible Visual

Alarm Indicating
Panel
PIR PIR
ALMB ALMB
PIR PIR
ALMA ALMA Rear View
(PIR 13) (PIR 1) D15F EXALM CA-A
䋨㪫㪪㪮㪩䋩
PIR PIR
ALMB ALMB
TSWR
PIR PIR ALMA
ALMA ALMA
(PIR 12) (PIR 0)

IMG0 MUSIC EXALM EMA SUB-A
IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 TSWR MISCR EMA SUB-B

PIR PIR
ALMB ALMB
PIR PIR
ALMA ALMA 䋨SV8500 Server)
– 644 –
4.9 Power Supply Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-9 occur.
Table 5-9 PWR Supply Fault Situation

When the “RGU” / “-48V” Fuse has Blown Section 4.9.2, Fuse Blown Fault
Section 4.9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR
DC-DC PWR Circuit Card Breaker OFF, Fault in PWR Supply
Supply
Fault of Alarm Lamps on DC-DC PWR Circuit Card Section 4.9.4, Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply
4.9.1 Check Point
When repairing a power supply fault, consider the following items:
(1) Before checking the system, check the Rectifier, Battery, and Power cables.
(2) PWR circuit card is equipped with the circuits to supply ringing signal and howler tone. When a fault oc-
curs that causes the bell of the telephone not to ring, or howler tone cannot be heard, etc., check the alarm
lamp on the PWR circuit card.
– 645 –
(3) The figures below show the block diagrams for the power supply to each module.
Figure 5-20 Block Diagram of Power Supply System
[PIR]
Power Receiving Terminal
PWR 0
PIR3
Note
LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX 0 MUX 1 LC/TRK LC/TRK
PWR 1
PWR 0
PIR2
Note
PWR 1
PWR 0
PIR1
Note
PWR 1
PWR 0
PIR0
Note
LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX 0/ MUX 1/ LC/TRK LC/TRK
PWR 1 TSW 0 TSW 1
Note
Power Module 0
SV8500 Server
PIR0 PIR1 PIR2 PIR3 Power Module 1
Power Module 1
BASEU Power Module 0
[TSWR]
Power Receiving Terminal
PWR 0
TSWR
Note
DLKC0 GT0 TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 PLO0
PWR 1
BASEU
Note 1: TSW is used for PIR 0 (1-IMG).
Note 2: Used when PWR is provided in dual configuration.
– 646 –
(4) The figures below show the power supply system for PIR and TSWR.
Figure 5-21 Power Supply to PIR
PWR 0 PWR 1
DC-DC DC-DC
CONV CONV
+5V, +12V, -5V

RGU RGU
RGU RGU
CR (for LC)
HOW HOW
HOW (for LC)

SUB SUB
PWR PWR
NFB NFB
-48V -48V
AC-DC Converter AC-DC Converter
AC AC
Note: RGU and HOW activate by ACT/ST-BY.

Figure 5-22 Power Supply to TSWR
PWR 0 PWR 1
DC-DC DC-DC
CONV CONV
+5V, +12V, -5V

-48V -48V
REL REL
-48V
-48V +80V +80V -48V
– 647 –
4.9.2 Fuse Blown Fault
(1) Check the backplane of the PIR.
(a) Make a visual check on the backplane for pin contacting, melting or burn, etc.
(2) Extract all the circuit cards from the PIR, and insert them back into their slots individually to see if the fuse
blows.
(a) Set the MB switch of the PWR supply UP.

(b) Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply DOWN.
(c) Extract all the circuit cards from their mounting slots, except PWR supply.
(d) Replace the fuse with spare.
(e) Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply UP side.
(f) Set the MB switch of the PWR supply DOWN.
(g) Insert the circuit cards into their mounting slots individually, with their MB switch to UP side.
(h) Check to see if the fuse blows when the MB switch has been set to DOWN.
4.9.3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply
(1) Check the backplane of the PIR.
(a) Make a visual check on the backplane for pin contacting, melting or burning, etc.
(2) Extract all the circuit cards from the PIR, and make a visual check of the circuit cards.
(a) Set MB switch of the PWR supply UP.

(b) Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply DOWN.
(c) Extract all circuit cards out of their mounting slots.
(d) Make a visual check of the extracted circuit cards. Check ICs, resistors, and capacitors to see if any
are burned.
– 648 –
4.9.4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply
(1) Press RESET button of the PWR supply.

[Alarm lamp goes out]
• FAULT SUPERVISION
[Alarm lamp illuminates again]
(a) Set the MB switch on the PWR supply UP.

(b) Turn circuit breaker OFF.
(c) Set MB switch on all the circuit cards, except PWR supply.
(d) Extract all circuit cards from their mounting slots.
(e) Turn circuit breaker ON.
(f) Set the MB switch to DOWN side.
(g) Check to see if the alarm lamp illuminates.
(h) If the alarm lamp does not illuminate, insert the circuit cards into their mounting slot individually to
see if the alarm lamp illuminates.
Note: Insert each PWR supply with its MB switch to UP side, and then set it back to DOWN side.
– 649 –
4.10 Fan Unit Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure where a fan in the Fan Unit (FANU) does not operate.
4.10.1 Check Point
STEP 1 If a specific fan does not work, and other fans are operating, replace the specific fan with a new
one, referring to “Replacement Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR)”.
STEP 2 If all fans do not work, do the following:
• Make sure that FAN PWR SW on the FANC (PZ-M699) is set to ON (downward).
• Make sure the voltage at the connector is -48 V. If it is less than -48 V, check the cable connection
between FANU and the PIR/TSWR.
• Replace the FANC (PZ-M699) referring to “Replacement Procedure of FANC (PZ-M699)”.

Figure 5-23 Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal Unit
FANU
FAN1 FAN2 FAN3
FAN tray
PIR
FUSE ALM
-48V
-48VR
FAN ALM
PZ-M699
– 650 –
4.11 Tone Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the various tones cannot be heard in the whole
system.
4.11.1 Check Point
When repairing a tone fault, consider that the tone generator circuit is equipped in the TSW circuit card
and supplies tone.
The figure below shows an example of the related trunking for dial tone connection.
Figure 5-24 Dial Tone Connection
TSW
DT
Dial
Tone
LC
ORT
4.11.2 Tone Fault
(1) When overall tone is faulty.
• Replace the TSW circuit card with a spare and check.
(2) When Hold Tone only is faulty.
(3) The following patters are available as a Music-On-Hold source. Check each card, equipment.
• EMA SUB-A (for 1-IMG only)
• PLO (for 4-IMG only)
• External Music-On-Hold
Perform the following procedure when external MOH is used.
STEP 1 Check the External Music-On-Hold device.
STEP 2 Check the jumper connections on MDF.
– 651 –
STEP 3 Check cable connections in the system.

Figure 5-25 Cable Connections for External Music-On-Hold (for 1-IMG)
PIR3
MDF
PIR2 External MOH Equipment
Installation Cable
PIR1
PIR0
TSW D15F EXALM CA-A

MUSIC
IMG0 MUSIC EXALM

D15 ST-FF CA-A
EMA SUB-A
Music-On-Hold
SV8500 Server
Rear View
– 652 –
Figure 5-26 Cable Connections for External Music-On-Hold (4-IMG)
MDF
D37 EXCLK CA-A
Installation Cable
External MOH Equipment
Installation Cable
Music-On-Hold
TSWR
EXCLK0
EXCLK1
(PLO)
(PLO)
EMA SUB-A IMG0 MUSIC EXALM
EMA SUB-B IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 TSWR MISCR
SV8500 Server
Rear View
– 653 –
4.12 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) Line Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-10 occur to a spe-
cific CCIS line.
Table 5-10 CCIS Line Fault Situation

A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. Section 4.12.3, Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty
When the signal transmission line is a digital line, transmitting/ Section 4.12.4, Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat
receiving of control signals cannot be performed. Cable
4.12.1 Check Point
When repairing a CCIS Line fault, consider the following items:
(1) Check alarm lamps on the CCH or CCT circuit card.
(2) Refer to Figure 5-27, and check the cable connection.
4.12.2 CCIS Line Control
The CCH/CCT circuit card controls the signal link (digital) of the interoffice common channel signaling
system and transmitting/receiving call processing information. The signal link controls permit normal
transmission and reception of call processing information.
A break in signal links is detected, then restored to establish signal links. The call processing information
is converted into signal format for Channel 1 (any channel) of the DTI before being transmitted to a distant
office. Figure 5-27 shows the CCIS line control route.
– 654 –
Figure 5-27 Controlling CCIS Line
MDF
MUX
LT Cable
DTI
Front
Cable
CCH To CCIS Line
LT Cable
CCT
4.12.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty
(1) Check by replacing CCH/CCT card with a spare.
(a) On CCH/CCT card, set the MBR switch UP.

(b) On CCH/CCT card, set MBR switch UP and extract the card from its mounting slot.
(c) Make switch settings on a new CCH/CCT card.
(d) On new CCH/CCT card, set MBR and MB switches UP and insert the card into its mounting slot.
(e) On new CCH/CCT card, set MB switch DOWN.
(f) On new CCH/CCT card, set MBR switch DOWN.
(g) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
4.12.4 Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable
(1) Check connectors and flat cables between DTI and CCH.
[Check the connector]
(a) On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On CCH card, set MBR switch UP.
(b) Check whether the connector is correctly connected or not. If the connection is found improper, plug
and unplug the connector a few times.
(c) On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH card, set MBR switch DOWN.
(d) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
[Check the Flat cable]
(a) On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On CCH card, set MBR switch UP.
(b) Test the continuity of the flat cable. If found abnormal, replace the flat cable with a spare.
– 655 –
(c) On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH card, set MBR switch DOWN.
(2) Check by replacing the DTI card with spare.
(a) On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the card from the mounting slot.
(b) On a new DTI card, make the switch setting.
(c) On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert the card into the mounting slot.
(d) On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.
(e) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
– 656 –
4.13 Integrated Service Digital Network (ISDN) Line Fault
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-11 occur to a spe-
cific ISDN.
Table 5-11 ISDN Line Fault Situation

A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. Section 4.13.3, Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty
When the signal transmission line is a digital line, transmitting/ Section 4.13.4, Fault of DCH, DTI, and Related Flat
receiving of control signals cannot be performed. Cable
4.13.1 Check Point
When repairing an ISDN Line fault, consider the following items:
(1) Check the alarm lamps on the DCH or PRT circuit card.
(2) Refer to Figure 5-28, and check the cable connection.
4.13.2 ISDN Line Control
The DCH/PRT circuit card controls the signal link (digital) of the ISDN line and transmits/receives call
processing information.
The signal link controls permit normal transmission and reception of call processing information. Figure
5-28 shows the ISDN line control route.
Figure 5-28 Controlling ISDN Line
MDF
MUX
LT Cable
DTI
Front
Cable
DCH To ISDN Line
LT Cable
PRT
– 657 –
4.13.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty
(1) Check by replacing the DCH/PRT card with a spare.
(a) On DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch UP.

(b) On DCH/PRT card, set MB switch UP and extract the card from its mounting slot.
(c) Make switch setting on a new DCH/PRT card.
(d) On new DCH/PRT card, set MBR and MB switches UP and insert the card into its mounting slot.
(e) On new DCH/PRT card, set MB switch DOWN.
(f) On new DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch DOWN.
(g) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
4.13.4 Fault of DCH, DTI, and Related Flat Cable
(1) Check the connectors and flat cables between DTI and DCH.
[Check the connector.]
(a) On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On DCH card, set MBR switch UP.
(b) Check whether the connector is correctly connected. If the connection is found improper, plug and un-
plug the connector a few times.
(c) On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On DCH card, set MBR switch DOWN.
[Check the flat cable.]
(a) On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On DCH card, set MBR switch UP.
(b) Test the continuity of the flat cable. If abnormal, replace the flat cable with spare.
(c) On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On DCH card, set MBR switch DOWN.
(2) Check by replacing the DTI card with a spare.
(a) On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the card from the mounting slot.
(b) On a new DTI card, make switch setting.
(c) On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert the card into the mounting slot.
(d) On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.
(e) Check whether the fault is still indicated.
– 658 –
5. SYSTEM OPERATION
This section explains the system operation of the system with PIR.
– 659 –
5.1 Indication of Lockout Stations
When a station is in lockout status (permanent signaling state, shorting across speech wires, etc.), it can quickly
be discovered, preventing the situation from developing into serious trouble.
(1) Indicating Method
By entering the following commands from PCPro, information pertaining to the lockout station concerned
will display.
DLSL Display of Lockout Station - LENS

DLSS Display of Lockout Station - Number
– 660 –
5.2 Recovery Procedure

Figure 5-29 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1 of 2)
Go on-hook and then go off-hook again.

Confirm the state of the handset of If dial tone is heard, the station is in permanent
the displayed station. signaling status.
System
MDF
On the MDF, connect the test
telephone to the displayed station
and confirm Dial Tone (DT). LOCKOUT STATION
SEPARATING
TEST TEL.
YES The in-house wiring (from the MDF to

Here DT? the lockout station) is shorting.
Check the wiring.
NO
– 661 –
Figure 5-29 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (2 of 2)
RLST command Forcibly release the lockout station circuit.
(Confirm: DT) Go off-hook again and confirm DT.
YES Circuit may be faulty temporarily.

Hear DT?
Observe situation for a while.
NO
Replace 16LC card

with a spare.
RLST Release Station/Trunk
– 662 –
5.3 Line Load Control
In the Telephony Server system, Line Load Control can be activated automatically or manually as a
countermeasure against abnormal traffic congestion towards the stations accommodated in the PIR.
In the case of automatic control, the system automatically monitors an overloaded situation and restricts
outgoing calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks.
In the case of manual control, the operator at an Attendant/Desk Console or PCPro restricts outgoing calls from
stations and incoming calls from trunks.
This section covers the following methods to activate Line Load Control:
• Control by dialing an access code from the ATTCON/DESKCON
• Control by entering command data from PCPro
• System automatic monitoring
5.3.1 Operating Procedure
(1) Operations on the Attendant Console

By the operations on the ATTCON, restriction is effected on an outgoing call from a station having SFC in
which the SFI = 16 (Line Load Control) of the ASFC command is set as RES=0 (incoming calls to that
station are allowed). For restricting incoming calls from a trunk, system data ASYD, SYS 1, INDEX 59,
b0=1 should be assigned.
• Setting
Figure 5-30 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Setting
Press LOOP key.
Dial the access code for setting

Line Load Control.
• Lamp (Figure 5-32) on control

panel lights.
(SST) • System Message [6-C] displays.

Note
Press CANCEL key.
Note: In System Message [6-C], the messages are displayed toward all LP.
– 663 –
• Cancelling
Figure 5-31 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Cancelling
Press LOOP key.
Dial the access code for cancelling

Line Load Control.
• Lamp (Figure 5-32) on control

panel lights.
• System Message [6-D] displays.
(SST)
Press CANCEL key.
Figure 5-32 Locations of Lamps (ATTCON)
NEC
LAMP
(2) Key Operations on the Desk Console (DESKCON)

By the operations on the Desk Console, restriction is applied on an outgoing call from a station having SFC
in which the SFI=16 (Line Load Control) of the ASFC command is set as RES=0 (incoming calls to that
station are allowed). For restricting incoming calls from a trunk, system data ASYD, SYS 1, INDEX 59,
b0=1 should be assigned.
– 664 –
• Setting
Figure 5-33 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCON—Setting
Press Lx (L1-L6) key.
Dial the access code for setting

Line Load Control.
• LLC displays on desk console

(Figure 6-12).
• System Message [6-C] displays.
(SST)
Press CANCEL key.
• Cancelling
Figure 5-34 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKCON—Cancelling
Press Lx (L1-L6) key.
Dial the access code for cancelling

Line Load Control.
• LLC displays on desk console

(Figure 6-12).
(SST) • System Message [6-D] displays.
Press CANCEL key.
– 665 –
Figure 5-35 Line Load Control Indication (DESKCON)

LLC is displayed on a Desk Console, when Line Load Control starts.
Line Load indication

LLC
L6
L5 1 2 3
L4
L3
4 5 6
L2
L1
7 8 9
* 0 #
Desk Console
(3) Operations on PCPro

Line Load Control operates by entering the ALLC command from PCPro. Stations with RES=0 assigned
for ASFC SFI=16 (Line Load Control) will be restricted to originate a call. (Call termination is available).
Assign SYS1, INDEX59, bit0=1 of System Data to restrict the call termination from the trunk.
Note: System Message [6-C] is not displayed until the restricted station goes off-hook. In this System Message,
the message is displayed toward LP which is applicable to the restricted station.
ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control
(4) Automatic Setting

If the usage rate of the CPU exceeds the system data usage rate, Line Load Control is automatically set. In
this case, System Message [6-C] displays. The station controlled and the contents of the Automatic Line
Load Control are the same as those in Step (1) Operations on the Attendant Console.
If the usage rate of the CPU drops below the system data usage rate, the Line Load Control is automatically
cancelled. In this case, System Message [6-D] displays.
– 666 –
5.4 IOC LINE MONITOR
(1) Functional Outline

This function monitors the IOC port status. As a result of the monitoring by this function, the following is
executed:
• When the connection with a port has been disconnected, it is reported by a message.
• When the connection with a port is set up, it is reported by a message.
• The port status is stored in the memory and updated continuously.
(2) Message Judgment Criteria

Table 5-12 describes the message judgement criteria.
Table 5-12 Message Judgment Criteria
MESSAGE CONTENT
Port Normal System data is assigned, and DR signal is ON.

Port Abnormal System data is assigned, and DR signal is OFF.
Output of Port Disconnected This message is output when Port Abnormal status has lasted for 30 seconds.
This message is immediately output if port abnormal occurs after the IOC card is
initialized.
Output of Port Status Restored This message is output when DR signal is ON for the port about which Output of Port
Disconnected message is output.
– 667 –
5.5 Line Management
The following explanations apply to line management:
• Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal
• Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal
• Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line
Note: Make-Busy means a status rejecting any registration so as to change its equipment, etc.
5.5.1 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal
Stations and data terminals can be put into make-busy state by the following operations:
(1) On each station basis using the MBST command.

Assign the station number in the STN parameter and choose “1” for the MB box of the MBST command.
For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.
(2) On each circuit basis using the MBLE command.

Assign LENS number in the LENS parameter and choose “1” for the MB box of the MBLE command.
For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.
(3) On each circuit card basis using the MBPM command or operating the MB (toggle) key on the card.
• Assign the required LENS number in the MG, UNIT and Group parameters and choose “1” for the MB
box of the MBPM command.
• For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.
or
• Set to UP the MB key on the circuit card (= ON).
• For make-busy cancellation, return the MB key down (= OFF).
– 668 –
5.5.2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal
Figure 5-36 shows the procedure for class change and number change of station and data terminal.
Figure 5-36 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure
START
Line Make-Busy
Class change and number • For changing class, use ASCL command
change • For changing station number, use ASTN command
Line Make-Busy Cancel
END
5.5.3 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line
Figure 5-37 shows the procedure to make-busy/make-busy cancel of C.O. line/tie line.
Figure 5-37 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Procedure
START
• For make-busy/make-busy cancellation by line basis
Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of MBLE command
C.O./Tie Line • For make-busy/make-busy cancellation by route basis
MBRT command
• For make-busy/make-busy cancellation by each circuit
card (Except for PHL)
MBPM commands or MB (toggle) switch setting on the
circuit card
END • For make-busy/make-busy cancellation by each PHL
MBPH commands or MB (toggle) switch setting on the
PHL circuit card
Note: Before make-busy/make-busy cancellation, make
sure the status by using DPHL command
– 669 –
5.5.4 Circuit Card Initialization Procedure
Circuit Card Initialization procedure for LINE/TRUNK circuit card is as follows.
(1) Turn the MB switch of circuit card to ON (upward).
(2) Turn back down the circuit card to OFF (downward) and confirm that MB lamp light green.
Note: When initialization is executed, all calls using that circuit card will be disconnected and all channels will
be make-busy state.
– 670 –
5.6 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System
This section explains the order to turn ON/OFF the power of the whole system when PIR
is mounted.
ATTENTION
Contents
Be sure to follow the procedures below to power on/off the system. Static Sensitive
Handling
5.6.1 Power ON/OFF Procedure for Telephony Server
[System Power ON]
• 1-IMG configuration
PWR/DPWR card on PIR o Power module on SV8500 server
PWR card on TSWR o PWR/DPWR card on PIR o Power module on SV8500 server
Note: To turn on the PIR modules, power on the younger number of PIR module first and then turn on the older
numbers in order (PIR0 o PIR1 o PIR2.....).
[System Power OFF]
Power module on SV8500 server o PWR/DPWR card on PIR
Power module on SV8500 server o PWR card on TSWR o PWR/DPWR card on PIR
Note: To turn off the PIR modules, power off the younger number of PIR module first and then turn off the older
numbers in order (PIR0 o PIR1 o PIR2.....).
– 671 –
5.6.2 SV8500 Server Power ON/OFF Procedure
[AC-Powered Model of SV8500 Server]
Turn ON: ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on Power module (on the rear panel of Handling
SV8500 server module).
STEP 2: Turn on the PWR switch (to left) (Note 1). PWR lamp (on the left of Power switch) lights green.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: On PCPro Tools menu [System Control], select [System Shutdown] and click the Execute button.
SV8500 server stops operating here. Note 2
STEP 2: Turn off the Power switch (to right) on the Power module.
STEP 3: Disconnect the AC power code.
[DC-Powered Model of SV8500 Server]
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and SV8500 server is connect-
ed, BASEU starts supplying the power to SV8500 server here.
STEP 2: Turn on the Power switch (to left) on the Power module (on the rear panel of SV8500 server module)
(Note 1). PWR lamp (on the left of Power switch) lights green.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: On PCPro Tools menu [System Control], select [System Shutdown] and click the Execute button.
SV8500 server stops operating here. Note 2
STEP 2: Turn off the Power switch (to right) on the Power module.
STEP 3: Stop supplying the power to BASEU.
Note 1: When you want to turn on SV8500 server right after turning off the powered system, wait for a while (about
10 seconds) before powering on the system again.
Note 2: Check the PWR lamp on the front panel of CPU card turns off. When the system is dual configuration, check
the PWR lamp goes off on both #0 and #1 CPU cards.
– 672 –
5.6.3 PIR Power ON/OFF Procedure
[Turn ON/OFF Procedure: AC-Powered Model of PIR]
Turn ON: ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
STEP 1: Connect an AC power code to AC inlet on AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power Handling
Unit is powered on here (OPE lamp lights and fans start turning).
STEP 2: Turn on the PWR switch (to right) on the front right of AC-DC Power Unit. AC-DC Power Unit starts
supplying the power to PIR here.
STEP 3: Flip the -48V SW switch up on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
STEP 2: Turn off the PWR switch (to left) on the front right of AC-DC Power Unit.
STEP 3: Disconnect the AC power code.
[Turn ON/OFF Procedure: DC-Powered Model of PIR]
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable connection between BASEU and PIR is com-
pleted, BASEU starts supplying the power to PIR here.
STEP 2: Flip -48V SW switch up on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the PWR/DPWR card in each PIR.
– 673 –
5.6.4 TSWR Power ON/OFF Procedure
Turn ON:
STEP 1: Supply the power to BASEU. When the power cable between BASEU and ATTENTION
Contents
TSWR is connected, BASEU starts supplying the power to TSWR here. Static Sensitive
Handling
STEP 2: Flip -48V SW switch up on the DC-DC power (PWR/DPWR) card.
Turn OFF:
STEP 1: Flip the -48V SW switch down on the DC-DC power (PWR/DPWR) card.
– 674 –
CHAPTER 6 Routine Maintenance Procedure
1. GENERAL
This chapter explains the routine maintenance procedure of SV8500 system.
Even if the system is operating normally, it is necessary to perform a routine check to prevent a fault occurrence
before it is too late to discover any latent cause of a fault.
This chapter categorizes the routine maintenance procedures of the Telephony Server into the following three
types, and explains the minimum required work steps and precautions pertaining to each of the following three
procedures.
• Daily Maintenance Procedure
• Monthly Maintenance Procedure
• Quarterly Maintenance Procedure
2. FLOW OF PROCEDURES
The scheduling of routine maintenance (daily, monthly, quarterly) will vary depending on each installation
and organization. Figure 6-1 shows the flow of the routine maintenance procedures.
Figure 6-1 Flow of Procedures
System Control
Routine Maintenance Procedures • SYSTEM OPERATION
• Daily Maintenance Procedures
• Maintenance Command
• Monthly Maintenance Procedures
• Quarterly Maintenance Procedures
Fault Repair Procedure

Routine Maintenance Check Lists
• Recording of checked items
– 675 –
2.1 Test Equipment and Tools
Test equipment and tools needed for routine maintenance test are shown in the list below.
Table 6-1 List of equipment and tools for routine maintenance
TEST EQUIPMENT/
NO. PURPOSE REMARKS
TOOLS
1 Telephone Set A telephone set is used when performing
connection tests on trunks, etc.
2 Blown Fuse A blown fuse is used when performing alarm
tests.
3 VOM Digital Meter VOM digital meter is used when checking
output voltages of the rectifier and the battery.
4 Phillips Screwdriver A screwdriver is used when replacing the fan
with a spare.
2.2 Routine Maintenance Procedure
Daily, monthly and quarterly maintenance procedures are explained in this section.
Collect the fault message, and operate the fault diagnosis and fault repair before the routine maintenance.
(1) Daily Maintenance
(a) Check the temperature and relative humidity in the switch room.
(b) Check the operating status of PCPro.
(c) Check to see if a system message indicating a fault is displayed.
(d) Check to see if there is any lockout station.
(e) Check whether the FANU is operating normally.
(2) Monthly Maintenance
(a) Generate an alarm and check whether an indication appears on the Telephony Server alarm lamp.
(b) Check trunk circuits individually. Also check the RGU circuit in the PWR Supply of each Module.
(3) Quarterly Maintenance

(a) Check the System
– 676 –
2.2.1 Check the Temperature and Relative Humidity in the Switch Room
(1) Temperature check in the switch room.
• Check whether the room temperature is within the range of 5°C (41°F) to 30°C (86°F).
(2) Check the humidity in the room.
• Check whether the relative humidity in the room is within the 15% to 65% range.
(3) If the temperature or the humidity goes beyond the suitable, adjust the air conditioner.
2.2.2 Check the Operating Status of PCPro
(1) Check PCPro.
(a) Turn ON PCPro.

(b) Confirm that the menu appears on the screen.
(c) Confirm that Login is available.
(2) System messages are automatically stored in HD of PCPro for output.
(a) Keep the power of PCPro to ON. Control the brightness of the display when it is not used.
2.2.3 Check To See If a System Message Indicating a Fault is Displayed
(1) Intentionally, cause the system messages to be displayed.
(2) When a system message is displayed.
(a) If the system message indicates a fault, diagnose the fault, and perform fault recovery.
(3) Check the results of routine diagnosis.
(a) System Message [7-O] indicates that the system is normal.

(b) System message [7-P] indicates that the system is abnormal. Perform fault recovery.
(4) When the system is operating normally or after a fault is restored.
(a) Use RALM command to clear the alarm indication and registered system message.
– 677 –
2.2.4 Check To See If There Is Any Lockout Station
<<Check the displays of relevant commands to locate any locked-out stations.>>
(1) Check the displays of the following commands.
(a) DLSL: Display in the order of LENS

(b) DLSS: Display in the order of station numbers
[When any station in locked-out state is displayed]
• Recover the locked-out station(s) referring to Chapter 6.
2.2.5 Check Whether the FANU Is Operating Normally
(1) When the fan is set for constant operation
(a) Confirm that the fan is running.
(2) When the fan is out of order.
(a) Refer to Fan Unit Fault, in Chapter 5.

(b) Replace the fan with a spare by referring to Replacement Procedure of FANC (PZ-M699)‫ޔ‬Replace-
ment Procedure of FANs (PIR/TSWR) in Chapter 5.
– 678 –
2.3 Routine Maintenance Check List
This section provides check lists (Maintenance Procedure Reports) used when performing routine maintenance
Routine Maintenance Check Lists consist of the following:
• Maintenance Procedure Report
• C.O. Trunk/TIE Line
• Register/Sender Trunk (RST)
• Digital Conference Function
• Speech Path for each PIR, and Ringing Generator Unit
• Attendant/Desk Console
– 679 –
User Name Signature of Supervisor Work Time

(From - )
Name of User (Company) Date: Maintenance Routine/Non-

Classification routine
Control No. Maintenance
Company
Name of Equipment Room Temperature - °C Name of Worker

°F & humidity%
Item Detail Check Item Detail Check

Check of Ambient Conditions in Ambient Trunk RGU Check SND Trunk
the Switch Room Temperature
Relative humidity DCF Function
Alarm Check TOPU Tone
PCPro/Printer Check PCPro PCPro
Printer ATTCON Check Ringing Signal
Collection of System Messages Related to Fault System Check
Result of Routine CPU

Diagnosis
Display of Locked- out Station Locked out TSW
Stations
Fan Unit Check PM
Alarm Tests TOPU
Main Power System Check Rectifier
Battery
Trunk RGU Check C.O. Trunk
TIE Trunk
ORT
IRT
– 680 –
Condition And Cause
Procedure and Parts Used
– 681 –
C.O. Trunk/TIE Line

ACCESS ROUTE TRUNK
NAME OF TRUNK ROUTE CHECK REMARKS
NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
– 682 –
Register/Sender Trunk (RST)

TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM
ORT Function • Perform the test by specifying DP/PB
an ORT with the Connection
Test Station.
• Confirm that System Message LC
[6-I] displays as a result of the ORT
test.
SENDER Function • Perform the test by specifying

an ORT with the Connection
Test Station.
• Confirm that System Message
LC ~
[6-I] displays as a result of the
test.
SND
ORT
– 683 –
RST ( / )
FUNCTION ORT
SENDER REMARKS
TRUNK NO. PB RECEIVING DP RECEIVING
ORT0 SND0
1 1
2 2
3 3
RST No.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
RST No.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
RST No.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
RST No.
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
– 684 –
Digital Conference Function

Three-way • Perform the test by specifying
Conversation an 8CFT with the Connection
Test Station. LC INT / TSW
• Confirm that System Message ~ 8CFT

[6-I] displays as a result of the
test. ~
TSTT
FUNCTION
SPEECH RELEASE REMARKS
TRUNK NO.
CFT0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Speech Path for Each PIR, and Ringing Generator Unit

NO. TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM
1 The ATTCON/ Normal speech path is confirmed
DESKCON is called by calling the attendant from a
from one station in station located in each PIR. LC
each PIR.
ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON
– 685 –
Speech Path for Each PIR, and Ringing Generator Unit (Continued)
NO. TEST TYPE TEST ITEM CONNECTION DIAGRAM
2 The operator calls After normal speech path has
the station back. been confirmed, the attendant
calls the station back. Confirm ATI
that the station rings. ATTCON/

DESKCON
PWR0, 1
RG
~
LC
(RINGING)
MOUNTING LOCATION
CHECK REMARKS
MODULE NAME UNIT NAME
0
1
PIR0
2
3
0
1
PIR1
2
3
0
1
PIR2
2
3
0
1
PIR3
2
3
– 686 –
Attendant Console (ATTCON/DESKCON)

Call Termination Test • Station dials the operator
access code and confirms that
the call termination is
indicated at all the ATTCON/ LC
DESKCON.
• Station dials the operator

access code. An attendant ATI
answers and speaks with the ATTCON/
caller. This process is repeated DESKCON
at all the ATTCON/

DESKCON.
Call Origination Test • Attendant originates a call to
the station by pressing LOOP
ATI
keys one after another.
ATTCON/
DESKCON
LC
(RINGING)
~ RG
– 687 –
FUNCTION CALL TERMINATION CALL ORIGINATION

INCOMING CALL REMARKS
ATTCON/ SPEECH RELEASE SPEECH RELEASE
DESKCON NO. INDICATION
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
– 688 –
CHAPTER 7 Maintenance Commands
1. GENERAL
This chapter explains various commands and list up commands that are used in the system administrative
management procedure. The table below shows the list of commands.
Table 7-1 Command List
COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME REMARKS
AACT Assignment of Activation Code

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control
ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data
AONE Assignment of One Activation Password Data
ASECL Assignment of Security Data (LDM)
ASSW Assignment of Soft SW Data
ATDL Assignment of Terminal for Download
ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order
ATRFN Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for FCCS Network
AVERN Assignment of Software Version Information (NDM) For Fusion Network
BOSD Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data
CADSD Continuous Assignment of Station Data
CARR Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction
CARRN Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction for NDM
CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data
CBCN Control of Broadcasting for NDM
CBCV Control of Broadcasting for VNDM
CBKS Control Backup Station
CBND Calculate Bandwidth Data
CCSE Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment
CDBU Change of Dch Backup
CFCS Control of Flash Card System
CLPB Control of Local Phone Book
CMNT Control of SR-MGC Maintenance Data (LDM)
CMOD Change of System Mode
CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp
CMWL_T Control Message Waiting Lamps – Telephone Number
– 689 –
COSSL Control of SIP Server Data for LDM

COSSN Control of SIP Server Data for NDM
CPBKN Continuous Assignment of System Phone Book for NDM
CPCP Control of PC Port
CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs
CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class
CSPAL Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for LDM
CSPAN Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for NDM
CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number
DCBD Display of Call Block Entry Data
DCEN Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM
DCON Display of Connection Status
DDMO Display of Data Memory Occupancy
DEBUG General Purpose Debug Function
DFLN Display Up of Location Free Numbering
DFTD Display of System Message Details
DHDF Display of HD File Information
DICBD Display of Individual Call Block Data
DIMG Display Information of Media Gateway
DIPI Display IP equipment Information
DISD Display of IP Station Data
DISI Display of IP Statistics Information
DISS Display of Program Issue
DLEN Display of LENS Data
DLSL Display of Lockout Station - LENS
DLSS Display of Lockout Station - Number
DLSS_T Display of Lock Out Station – Number – Telephone Number
DLTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM
DNTEL Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM
DPHL Display of PHL Package Status
DPKG Display of Setting Port Package
DPSW Display Package Switch Status
– 690 –
DPTR Display of Capacity / License

DSTN Display of Station Data
DTELN Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM
DTF101 Display of Terminal Traffic Data
DTF102 Display of Route Traffic Data
DTF103 Display of Station Peg Count Data
DTF104 Display of Attendant Peg Count Data
DTF105 Display of Route Peg Count Data
DTF201 Display of Service Peg Count Data
DTF301 Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data
DTF302 Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data
DTF303 Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data
DTF501 Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data
DTF601 Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data
DTF602 Display of Connection Route Traffic Data
DTF701 Display of Service Peg Count Data
DTF702 Display of IP Service Traffic Data
DTF801 Display of SIP Service Peg Count Data
DTF101N Display of Terminal Traffic Data for FCCS Network
DTF102N Display of Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network
DTF103N Display of Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF104N Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF105N Display of Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF201N Display of Service Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF301N Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF302N Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF303N Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF501N Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF601N Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
DTF602N Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network
FLINST File Install
HDFP HDD Format of SV8500
– 691 –
IPAN Display of IP machine status display function

MBCT Make-Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM
MBCTC Make-Busy of Connection Trunk-Continuous for LDM
MBLE Make-Busy of LENS
MBPH Make Busy of PHL Package for LDM
MBPM Make-Busy of Port Microprocessor
MBRT Make-Busy of Route
MBRT_LR Make-Busy of Route - Logical Route Number
MBSM Make-Busy of System Message Printout
MBST Make-Busy of Station
MBST_T Make-Busy of Station – Telephone Number
MBTC Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous
MBTC_LR Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous – Logical Route Number
MBTK Make-Busy of Trunk
MBTK_LR Make - Busy of Trunk – Logical Route Number
MEM_HDD Data Control Between Memory and HDD
MEM_HDD_N Data Control Between Memory and HDD for Fusion Network
MFCH Make Busy of FCCH
PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up
RALM Release Alarm
RALMN Release Alarm for NDM
RDPD Removal of Dterm IP Password
RINZ Route Initialize
RLMG Release of Media Gateway
RLST Release Station/Trunk
RLST_T Release of Station/Trunk – Telephone Number
RPID Remove of Pad Lock ID Data
SCVT Setting / Change of Virtual Trunk Operation Data
SINZ System Initialize
SINZN System Initialize for the FCCS Network
SPTS Scanning of Port Status
– 692 –
SRTS Scanning of Route Status

SRTS_LR Scanning of Route Status - Logical Route Number
TOGC Test of Originating Connection
– 693 –
AACT: Assignment of Activation Code

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to register an Activation Code. Registering the activation code clears the alarm, which
requires the user to input the activation code.
Note: Before executing this command, specify the following with ASYDL command.
SYS1 INDEX513: 01
2. Parameters
Output Data
Hardware KeyCode: Hardware Key Code
Note: Each Hardware Keycode of System0 and System1 will be shown when the System is in dual configura-
tion.
Software Keycode: CNT

Software Keycode
Software Name
Button
Get: Readout the Software Keycode of all the Software installed to the system.
Input Data
Activation Code: Specify the Activation Code.(16 digit)

The temporary activation code is labelled on the center of the back of the CD.
Button
Get: Retrieve the Activation Code with the SV8500.
Set: Register the Activation Code.
Button
File Save: Output the displayed Hardware Keycode and the Software Keycode to the text
file.
Exit: Exit this command.
– 694 –
ALLC: Assignment of Line Load Control

This command is used to specify the start and stop of Line Load Control.
2. Parameters
Input Data
ALL/ONE: Operation Mode Selection (1,2)

A=All LPs
A is not valid for 1-IMG-system.
O=Only One LP
LP: Local Partition (LP) Number
Note: This parameter appears when O (only one LP) is set in ALL/ONE input data.
The data is designated as 00 for a 1-IMG-system.

STATUS: Line Load Control Status (0-3)
0=Stop Line Load Control
1=Start Line Load Control
2=Automatic Line Load Control is in effect (display only)
3=Status of all LPs do not match (display only)
– 695 –
ALMG: Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

This command is used to make a flexible change of the system message output grade and alarm lamp grade. The
SV8500 user can give a proper output grade and alarm lamp grade to each system message according to their
requirements.
• Output grade - - - - - - - Specifies whether the fault information is output on system alarm lamp and system
message.
• Alarm lamp grade - - - Specifies how to indicate fault information.
When no data is assigned, the default alarm grades are automatically applied.
Note 1: This command cannot change the alarm grade for System Message [6-A].
Note 2: Use LLMG (Listup of Alarm Grade Data) command TYPE=3 to output the default value of alarm lamp
grade for system message.
Note 3: “Delete” in this command means to turn back the changed output grade and alarm lamp grade data
to default value.
2. Parameters
Input data
FK: Fault Message Kind (0-7, 10-17, 20-27, 30-37)

FI: Fault Message Index (A-Z)
LMP: Alarm Lamp Grade (0-3)
Specifies the lamp kind for system alarm lamp and system message output.
0=NON lamp ON
1=SUP lamp ON
2=MN lamp ON
3=MJ lamp ON
GRD: Output Grade (0-3)
Specifies the output grade for system alarm lamp and system message.
Note: When lower grade of GRD is assigned than SYSM GRD, system message is not output.
SYSM GRD: System Alarm Lamp Output Grade

Specifies the output grade of system alarm lamp and system message on a node basis,
depending on the setting on ASYD SYS1 INDEX91 bit2 and bit3.
0=Output all fault
– 696 –
1=Output the fault higher than Grade 1 (SUP/MN/MJ)

2=Output the fault higher than Grade 2 (MN/MJ)
3=Output the fault higher than Grade 3 (MJ)
LLMG (Listup of Alarm Grade Data) command
TYPE: Listup Type (1-3)

1=All data
2=Change data
3=Default data
– 697 –
AONE: Assignment of One Activation Password Data

1. Function Outline
This command is used to assign the Software Keycode of the Generic Software when login to the PCPro became
unavailable by system changeover of the dual configuration system. This command can be used only for three
days after it is last used. User needs to initialize the system when desired to use this command again after three
days of the use.
Note: This command is used when one side of the TP has fault and login to PCPro is unavailable.
2. Parameters
Input Data
<Software Keycode>
Assign the Software Keycode labeled on BASIC SOFTWARE (1/2) CD-ROM, then click the Set
button.
– 698 –
ASECL:Assignment of Security Data (LDM)

1. Function Outline
This command assigns one-time password and its available period. It also lists terminals that have completed
the SIP authentication.
2. Parameters
Input data
<Certified Terminal Assignment>
One-Time Password: Enter a one-time password. Its password should be entered with numerals
(including an asterisk [*] and a number sign [#]) from 4 to 10.
Available period is made indefinite:Selecting this box makes one-time password with no-time-limit.
Available Period: Specify the available period (Day: Hour: Minute). The time can be spec-
ified from one second to seven days.
Certified Terminal Count: Select this item and click the Get button to retrieve the total number of ter-
minals that have completed the Terminal Authentication.
Certified Terminal List: Select this item and click the Get button to display list of the terminals that
have completed the SIP authentication.
MAC Address: Enter a MAC Address to be deleted and click the Execute button.
Buttons
Get: Read out the information.
Set: Set the input data.
Del.: Delete the input data.
Execute: Make the input data valid.
Output Data
<Maintenance Function>
Select an item displayed in a list box, and click the Execute button to perform it. The Maintenance Function
tab displays only when Encryption License is valid.
Cipher key update
– 699 –
ASSW: Assignment of Soft SW Data

1. Function Outline
This command changes and displays the settings of software switches on the CPU board.
Note: The software switch data assigned by this command can be backed up by the MEM_HDD command. Us-
ing the MEM_HDD command, the backed up data can be verified.
Note: If a software switch data is backed up on CF Card when the system is initialized, upload on the memory
when loading the office data in order to assign the software switch.
2. Parameters
System Select:
• System 0
• System 1
SYSTEM SELECT 0: Note 1
SW: 1-4
STS: ON/OFF
Note 1: This parameter is for display only.
SYSTEM SELECT 1:
SW: 1-8
• 1: LAN Connector 3
• 5-8: Not used
STS: ON/OFF Note 2
• ON: Not detect fault
• OFF: Detect fault
Note 2: STS is not used and fixed to OFF when the SW is 5 to 8.
SYSTEM SELECT 2:
SW: 1-8 (Not used)

STS: OFF (Fixed)
– 700 –
SYSTEM SELECT 3:
SW: 1-8 (Not used)

STS: OFF (Fixed)
– 701 –
ATDL: Assignment of Terminal for Download

1. General
This command assigns the data for downloading the new firmware to IP terminals.
Note: Only the IP terminals that have established registration to the MGC can download the new firmware.
Note: Be sure to upload the required new firmware files to the FTP server using ADTM command before ex-
ecuting the download procedure by this command.
Note: Because a terminal can download only one firmware file, it is required to create a list file of stored firm-
ware for each type of IP terminal even if multiple versions/types of firmware are to be downloaded.
2. Parameters
<FTP Server Set up>
Select one of the radio buttons to specify the FTP server from where the new firmware is to be downloaded for
the IP terminals.
• ACT CPU (to specify the ACT side of Node as FTP server)
• STBY CPU (to specify the STBY side of Node as FTP server in dual configuration)
• External Server (to specify the FTP server connected to LAN)
IP Address:
When External Server is selected, assign the IP Address of FTP server connected to LAN (Example:
192.168.1.1).
Login Name/Password [Maximum 15 digits]:

Enter the Login Name and Password required to login to the FTP server.
<Download Method>
Click either of the radio buttons to select the download method.
• Sequential
(Automatically set to Sequential when ACT CPU or STBY CPU is selected. When firmware download
to one terminal has been completed, download to the next sequentially numbered terminal starts im-
mediately.)
• Parallel
(Used when External Server is selected. Firmware download is executed on eight terminals at a time
every four seconds.)
– 702 –
<Option>
Specify File Storage Directory:

Click this check box to specify the directory where the firmware files are stored on the FTP Server, and
enter the directory name within 63 characters.
Note: Do not use this operation in SV8500.
Specify Download Time:

Click this check box to activate automatic download at a specified time. Enter Start Day (Year, Month, Day)
and Start Time (Hour, Minute, Second) to each field.
<Terminal Information>
The information of IP terminals that are already registered are listed in this field. Pressing Exe button executes
firmware updating to the terminals listed.
Press the Insert button to register a new IP terminal and add it to the list using the “Additional Terminal
Information” screen. In this screen, terminals can be searched for by specifying Station Number, LENS, or the
Terminal Type.
How to Specify Terminal
Click one of the radio buttons to specify the type of search.
• Specify Station Number

Click this button to search for the terminal by a specific Tenant Number (TN) and Station Number
(STN).
• Specify Line Equipment Numbers

Click this button to search for a terminal by a specific Line Equipment Number (LENS).
• Specify Terminal Type

Click this button to search for a terminal by a specific Terminal Type, confirming hardware type/ver-
sion and current firmware version.
Terminal
Select the terminal type in the combo box (all the terminal types registered in the Firmware File Name field are
shown on the drop down list). Hardware Type (HWTP) and Hardware Version (HWVER) of selected terminal
type are automatically indicated. Refer to the table on the next page for HWTP and HWVER of each terminal
type.
Note: HWVER is indicated only when 2-byte firmware version of terminal is selected in Terminal Type.
– 703 –
Terminal Firmware Search
The range of firmware version is confined by designating the Firmware Version (xx.xx) and Search Condition
(‘!=’, ‘<‘, ‘<=’, ‘==’, ‘>=’, ‘>’).
Note: The function of Terminal Firmware Search is available for 2-byte firmware version of terminals only.
Result of Search
Pressing Search button lists up the retrieved terminal information after specifying the search conditions of target
terminals.
Click the check box and press Add to the Terminal List button. Selected terminals are added to the Registered
Terminal Information List.
Specify Terminal Area
In this field, target IP terminals can be searched by specifying the range. Select Station Number, Line
Equipment Numbers, or IP Address menu on the drop-down listbox to specify the range, and then click “Area
Search” button. All is provided on the drop-down listbox for searching terminals by specifying all the above
three groups. More specific search among the searched result is available by narrowing the range on the list of
Result of Search.
• Specify Station Number Area

Select Station Number on the drop-down listbox to search for terminals by specific Tenant Number
(TN) and Station Number (STN) range.
START TN: First tenant number to start searching.

END TN: Last tenant number to stop searching.
START STN: First station number to start searching.
END STN: Last station number to stop searching.
• Specify Line Equipment Numbers Area

Select Line Equipment Numbers on the drop-down listbox to search for terminals by specific Line
Equipment Number (LENS) range.
START LENS: First LENS to start searching.

END LENS: Last LENS to stop searching.
• Specify IP Address Area

Select IP Address on the drop-down listbox to search for terminals by specific IP address range.
START IP Address: First IP address to start searching.

END IP Address: Last IP address to stop searching.
[Terminals fitting the search conditions]
The information of IP terminals fitting the search conditions specified on How to Specify Terminal and
Specify Terminal Area are listed. Select an IP terminal on the list and then click “Add to List” button to
add the selected terminal to the “Already Assigned Terminals Information” list. Check the “Select All” but-
ton to select all the IP terminals on the Terminals fitting the search condition list.
– 704 –
<Firmware File Name>
The information of already registered firmware files are shown on Registered File Name List field (by reading
out “TermFile.txt” file when the ATDL command is executed). The listed firmware files are to be downloaded
to the specified terminals according to each terminal type and version.
The following table shows which IP terminals/equipment are available for this command and the necessary
information (Terminal Type, Hardware Type (HWTP), Hardware Version (HWVER) and File Name) to
download the firmware files of the available IP terminals/equipment. Pressing Insert button shows Addition of
Firmware File Name screen to add a new firmware file to the list. Enter Terminal Type, Hardware Type
(HWTP), Hardware Version (HWVER), and File Name according to the descriptions in the table.
u: Available N: Not Available

Terminal Avail-
EU HWT HWV File Name
Terms in Manual Product Name Type on abil-
Product Name P ER (Default)
PCPro ity
SN8029 MC2A-A - - N - - -
Analog 2MC Analog MC
SN8029 MC2A-B - u 21 - 2amcmwlist.txt
Note 1
SCA-8LCA 8MC SIP
8LC Card - u B1 - 8amcmwlist.txt
SCA-8LCA-EMEA Note 1
SN8032 MG15M-
- PRI1.5 MG N 64 -
XX(MGEB-A)
MG-PRI/MG-PRA
SN8023 MG2M-
- PRI2.0 MG N 65 -
XX(MGEA-A)
MG(PRI) (1.5M) MG-PRI1.5
MG-24PRIA - u A8 -
Box [MG-24PRIA] SIP
MG(PRI) (2M) Box MG-PRI2.0 mgprimwlist.txt
MG-30PRIA - u A9 -
[MG-30PRIA] SIP
MG(PRI) (1.5M)
MG-PRI1.5
Card [SCA- SCA-24PRIA SCA-PRI-SHA24 u A8 -
SIP
24PRIA]
MG(PRI) (2M)
MG-PRI2.0
Card [SCA- SCA-30PRIA - u A9 -
SIP
30PRIA]
MG-T1(SIP) Card [SCA-24DTIA] -
MG-T1[SIP] u AF - mgdtimwlist.txt
MG-T1(SIP) Box [MG-24DTIA] -
BRI MG
MG-BRI MG-2BRI-XX - u 63 - mgbrimwlist.txt
Note 1
MG(BRI) Box
MG-2BRIA -
[MG-2BRIA] MG-BRI SIP
u A3 - mgbrisiplist.txt
MG(BRI) Card Note 1
SCA-2BRIA -
[SCA-2BRIA]
– 705 –
Terminal Avail-
PCPro ity
MC4AMG2A PFT-
MC&MG with PFT - - N -
XX
MCMG Box
MG-4LC2COTA - - N 67 -
[MG-4LC2COTA]
MCMG Card
SCA-4LC2COTA - - N - mcmgmwlist.txt
[SCA-4LC2COTA]
MCMG Box
MG-7COTA - - N -
[MG-7COTA]
6A
MCMG Card
SCA-7COTA - - N -
[SCA-7COTA]
MG-COT Card
SCA-6COTA - - N -
[SCA-6COTA]
6B mgcotmwlist.txt
MG-COT Card
SCA-6COTC SCA-6COTB - N -
[SCA-6COTC]
VS-32(VSEA-A) - u
VS32 Conference vs32atdl.txt
VS-32(V)(VSEB- Voice Server 71 -
Server - u Note 2
A)
VS-32 Conference
Server [MG- MG-VS32VA - - N C1 -
VS32VA]
vs32atdl.txt
VS-32 Conference
Server [SCA- SCA-VS32VA - - N C1 -
VS32VA]
(IP Adapter)
North America/Oth-
er Countries except Dterm75/Se-
IP Enabled Dterm Australia: IPW-2U ries E w/ IP
(Dterm Series E/ (P-P) (BK) - Adaptor(P-P) u 11 02 ramhptop.hex
Dterm 75) Australia: IPW- or DtermIP(Se-
2UA-P UNIT ries E Mode)
(Telephone)
DTP-8D/16D/32D
(IP Adapter)
North America/Oth-
er Countries except
Australia: IP-R
IP Enabled Dterm UNIT Dterm Series i
- u 11 12 ramhp2pr.hex
(Dterm Series i) Australia: w/ IP Adaptor
IP-RA UNIT
(Telephone)
DTR-8D/16LD/
16D/32D
– 706 –
Terminal Avail-
PCPro ity
DtermIP (Proprie-
ITR-4D/8D/16D/
tary Protocol) - DtermIP u 11 14 ramhp2pw.out
16LD/32D
Note 3
DtermIP (SIP) ITN-4D/8D/16D/ Dterm-
- u 91 20 appsipe.tgz
Note 4 32D Note 5 SIP(ITN)
DT700 Series
DT710 - u 91 30 itlisipe.tgz
(DT710)
DT700 Series
DT700 Series DT730 - u 91 33 itlisipv.tgz
(DT730)
DT700 Series
DT750 - u 91 34 itlisips.tgz
(DT750)
DtermIP INASET
ITR-LC - DtermIP Inaset u 13 11 dpPtoP1E.ini
(Classic) Note 4
DtermIP ITR-240G (Coun-
INASET240G tries except Austra- - Inaset240G u 13 21 dp24GP1E.ini
Note 4 lia)
North America/Oth-
er Countries except
DtermIP
Australia: ITR-
INASET320C - Inaset320C u 13 31 dp32CP1E.ini
320C-1
Note 4
Australia: ITR-
320C-1A
DtermIP
ITR-320G-1 (North
INASET320G - Inaset320G u 13 41 dp32GP1E.ini
America only)
Note 4
DtermIP
INASET320C ITR-320C-1M - - u 13 51 dp32CP1ME.ini
(XML version)
DtermSP20(So
DtermSP20 DtermSP20 ENG - N 12 00 -
ftPhone)
DtermSP30 (Propri-
Dterm SP30 AE- - - N 15 00 -
etary Protocol)
DtermSP30 (SIP) Dterm SP30 FE- - - N 93 93 -
Soft Client SP350 Soft Client SP350 - - N -
Note 1: For this terminal, Internal FTP Server cannot be used.
Note 2: This default file name may appear as “vs32mwlist.txt”. In this case, manually change it to “vs32atdl.txt”.
Note 3: When upgrading this terminal from 2.99 (or below) to 3.01 (or higher), Internal FTP option cannot be used.
Note 4: When using this terminal, only External FTP is supported.
– 707 –
Note 5: Available firmware version is 3.0.0.0 or later.
Note: This command does not support the following Terminal Types even if they are displayed in the Regis-
tered File Name List. Do not use the following Terminal Types and their additional information in the
list.
Terminal Type HWTP HWVER File Name

Dterm75/Series E w/ IP
Adaptor(P-P) or Dter- 00 02 ramhptop.hex
mIP(Series E Mode)
Dterm Series i w/ IP
00 12 ramhp2pr.hex
Adaptor
DtermIP 00 14 ramhp2pw.out
IP-CS(3ch) 31 - BPRG_IPBSA.DAT
IP-CS(6ch) 32 - BPRG_IPBSA.DAT
IP-ZT 34 00 BPRG_IPZT.DAT
IPVPS 51 00 -
Analog MG 61 - -
T1 MG 62 - -
– 708 –
ATRF: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs. A request for traffic measurement is
performed when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command. The collected traffic
measurement data can be stored on the HD of the PCPro, that can be designated on the basis of the traffic
measurement type.
Note: Assign the following when setting Traffic Measurement for Terminal and Route Traffic (ATRF), Connec-
tion Route Traffic and IP Service Traffic:
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX47, bit 0= (0/1=CCS/Erlang)
bit 7=1(Execute Traffic Measurement)
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (1-22) (See Table 7-1.)
Table 7-1 ATRF - Type of Traffic Measurement Explanation
DATA MEANING DATA MEANING

1 Terminal Traffic 2 Route Traffic
3 Station Peg Count 4 ATT Peg Count
5 Route Peg Count 6 Service Peg Count
8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count
10 UCD Station Peg Count 15 ATT Answering Peg Count Note 2
17 CS Peg Count 18 Connection Route Peg Count Note 3
19 Connection Route Traffic Note 3 20 IP Service Peg Count
21 IP Service Traffic 22 SIP Terminal Peg Count
Port:Traffic Information Output Terminal Number (0-7:IOC, 8:LAN, 9:NMS)
Interval:Output interval (0, 30-120)
Assign the data (30-120) in ten minute increments. When assigning 0 (available when any of TYPE 3-22
is selected), instead specify your desired output time in the “Output TIME” parameters below.
Start TIME Note 1
End TIME Note 1
Output TIME:This data entry is valid only when INTERVAL=0.
Start RT:Start External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)
– 709 –
End RT:End External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)
Start C_RT:Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)
End C_RT:End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)
Start NODE:Start Node Number
End NODE:End Node Number
Note 1: Assign the traffic measurement time period between Start TIME and End TIME longer than an hour.
Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign the same data in both Start TIME
and End TIME parameters.
Note 3: This traffic measurement is also available for connections via IPPAD; however, incoming and outgoing
traffic both are counted as outgoing traffic in the result.
• Ringdown

(b) In the case of following Incoming Call from ISDN/MFC line to Attendant Console, these services are
not available.
• Incoming Call to Attendant Console with Remote Access to System.
– 710 –
ATRFN: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for FCCS Network

This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs available on the Ethernet. A request
for traffic measurement is performed on a network basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been
assigned by this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the PCPro
[connected to the Network Control Node (NCN)], that can be designated on the basis of the traffic measurement
type. This command can be used at the NCN only.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (1-19) (See Table 7-1)
Table 7-1 ATRFN - Type of Traffic Measurement Explanation

1 Terminal Traffic 2 Route Traffic
3 Station Peg Count Note 4 4 ATT Peg Count Note 4, Note 5
5 Route Peg Count 6 Service Peg Count Note 4
8 UCD Route Peg Count 9 UCD Group Peg Count
10 UCD Station Peg Count 15 ATT Answering Peg Count Note 3, Note 5
18 Connection Route Peg Count 19 Connection Route Traffic
Port:Traffic Information Output Terminal Number (0-7: IOC, 8: LAN, 9:NMS)
Interval:Output interval (0, 30-120)

Assign the data (30-120) in ten minute increments. When assigning 0 (available when any of TYPE 3-18
is selected), instead specify your desired output time in the Output TIME parameters below.
Start TIME Note 1, Note 2
End TIME Note 1, Note 2
Output TIME:This data entry is valid only when Interval=0.
Start LGRT:Start External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)
End LGRT:End External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)
Start C_RT:Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)
End C_RT:End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)
Note: The selected traffic measurement data, except for TYPE 1 (Terminal Traffic), is collected with the whole
network system as a single unit.
– 711 –
Note: If the data for this command is assigned, the node-level data by the ATRF command is not cleared, but
loses its validity (the network-level data takes precedence).
Note 1: When time difference exists between the nodes, confirm that the related time difference data, based on
Universal Coordinated Time (UCT) standard, has been assigned at each node via ATDF command.
Note 2: Assign the traffic measurement time period between Start TIME and End TIME longer than an hour.
Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign the same data in both Start TIME
and End TIME parameters.
• Ringdown

(a) In the case of following Incoming Call from ISDN/MFC line to Attendant Console, these services are
not available.
• Incoming Call to Attendant Console with Remote Access to System.
Note 4: To activate Station Peg Count, ATTCON Peg Count and Service Peg Count, assign the largest value of
Number of Tenants (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 8) in all nodes. Assign “FF Hex” for MDATA.
Note 5: To activate ATTCON Peg Count and ATT Answer Peg Count, assign the largest value of Number of
Attendant Consoles (ASYDN, SYS1, INDEX 9) in all nodes. Assign “FF Hex” for MDATA.
– 712 –
AVERN: Assignment of Software Version Information (NDM) For Fusion Net-

work
1. Function Outline
This command assigns/deletes the program version data to/from NDM.
Note: In order to avoid misoperation, do not open this command from multiple PCPros simultaneously.
2. Parameters
Input data
SOFTVER (NDM): The program version data assigned/to be assigned to NDM is automatically dis-
played in hexadecimal.
When assigning the program version data:

By clicking “Get” button, this parameter automatically displays the program
version data before being upgraded (the earliest version in SOFTVER (ROM)).
In this case, this data can be changed manually (In normal times, it is not neces-
sary to change the data manually).
When deleting the program version data:

By clicking “Get” button, this parameter displays the program version written in
NDM. In this case, this data cannot be changed manually. Note 1, Note 2
Note 1: At this point, if all the systems (nodes) listed in SOFTVER (ROM) indicate the same program version
(i.e. the upgrades of all systems in the FCCS network have been completed), “Del.” button becomes
valid.
Note 2: If a failure occurs after deleting the program version data from NDM (SOFTVER (NDM) displays the
new program version data), the system can return to the state that restricts the use of the new program
features (not completely same as the previous version) by reassigning the AVERN data.
Note 3: When entering the data to SOFTVER (NDM) parameter manually, the value to be entered (for example,
the version data before being upgraded) can be checked in the log file.
If an error occurs, one of the following messages appears on this command. If multiple errors occur at once, only
one message is displayed in order of precedence. (The following error messages are listed in order of
precedence.)
(a) Registered SOFTVER(NDM) is abnormal.(DATA: XXXXXXXXXX, MDATA: XXXXXXXXXX)
As a result of the data readout, SOFTVER (NDM) and its flag data or masked data are invalid. When
this message is displayed, “Del.” button becomes valid and “Set” button becomes invalid. SOFT-
VER(NDM) parameter is filled with blanks.
– 713 –
(b) NODE that SOFTVER is different exists.
As a result of the data readout, the different SOFTVER (ROM)s coexist in the same network. FPC of
the corresponding node is not indicated because it is impossible to determine which SOFT-
VER(ROM) is correct. While this message is displayed, “Del.” button is invalid.
(c) NODE to which SOFTVER can’t be read exists.(FPC: XXX)
Program version information of a node cannot be read out due to FCCS link disconnection, etc. FPC
of the corresponding node is indicated. If multiple nodes apply, the smallest FPC in the corresponding
nodes is displayed.
(d) CPU Faction to which SOFTVER can't be read exists. (FPC: XXX)
Program version information of a node cannot be read out due to power failure of one of the CPUs
(CPU#0/CPU#1), etc. FPC of the corresponding node is indicated. If multiple nodes apply, the small-
est FPC of the corresponding nodes is indicated.
Buttons
Get: Read out the information. This button is always operative. Note 4, Note 5
Note 4: By pressing this button, the following output data appears.
Note 5: If program version data has been assigned to NDM, the assigned program version is displayed in
SOFTVER (NDM) parameter and “Del.” button will be active.
If no program version data has been assigned, the earliest program version in the FCCS network is
displayed in SOFTVER (NDM) parameter and “Set” button will be active.
Set: Set the program version data displayed in SOFTVER (NDM) parameter. Note 6
Note 6: To change the program version data written in NDM, delete it first, and then assign the new version
data.
Del.: Delete the program version data written in NDM.

Exit: Exit this command. This button is always operative.
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code of each node.

CPU: CPU (CPU#0/CPU#1) of each node.
SOFTVER (SYSTEM): The currently enabled program version of each node (in hexadecimal). Note 8
Note 7: When no program version data has been assigned to NDM and each node operates without the restric-
tion of the program version data, “NO Action Limit” is displayed.
When program version data has been assigned to NDM and each node operates with the restriction of
the program version data, the assigned program version data is displayed. “No Action Limit” or the
program version data is displayed only for ACT-CPU. “-----” is displayed for STBY-CPU.
– 714 –
SOFTVER (ROM): The program version actually installed to each node (in hexadecimal).
Information: If an error occurs, the corresponding error message is displayed.
– 715 –
BOSD: Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

This command is used to save the data of One-Touch Speed Call Data into the FD or HD, and load the data from
the FD or HD. The One-Touch Speed Call Data, registered to the Dterm, is saved in the memory of the
connected ELC/DLC. Before replacing the circuit cards, use this command to back up the data.Be aware that
the data in the back up file must match the existing data in the SV8500. This means that once a back up has been
completed, you cannot perform any deletions or additions to the data (either a station number or LENS number),
or the data cannot be restored. Note: This command does not encompass One-Touch Speed Call Data for PtoP
IP Terminals.
Note: This command is not used for DtermIP Terminals. Use the MEM_HDD command for the IP Terminals.
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select: PBX Memory to MAT

MAT to PBX Memory
Verify MAT against MEM
Data Type Selection: by Station
by LENS
START TN: First Tenant Number Note 1
END TN: Last Tenant Number Note 1
START STN: First Station Number Note 1
END STN: Last Station Number Note 1
START LENS: First Line Equipment Number Note 2
END LENS: Last Line Equipment Number Note 2
Auto Verify Afterward: Verify One-Touch Speed Call DataNote 3
IP Extension Load is invalid.
Checked = On.
Unchecked = Off.
File Name: Enter the location where the data is to be stored to, verified against or loaded
from. For example, if data is stored on the hard drive of the PCPro, you would
specify a drive and folder. If the data is stored on a floppy disk, you would specify
the floppy drive, etc.
Note 1: Use this parameter when a Station is designated.
Note 2: Use this parameter when a LENS is designated.
Note 3: It takes approximately 10 seconds to load the data per extension. It is recommended that the back up
be divided per Unit or MG depending on the extension number before saving the data.
– 716 –
CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

This command can assign/delete many station data with consecutive numbers at once.
2. Parameters
Input Data
Type: Assign/Delete
[When Assign is selected in the TYPE selection list box]
TN(START): Start Tenant Number

TN(END): End Tenant Number
STN(START): Start Station Number [maximum six digits] Note 1
STN(END): End Station Number [maximum six digits] Note 1
STEP: Station Count-up Step Note 2
If using asterisk (*) and number (#) o[1-12]
If not using asterisk (*) and number (#) o[1-10]
LENS(START): First Line Equipment Number [six digits]
LENS(END): Last Line Equipment Number [six digits]
GROUP(START): First Group Number [0-31]
GROUP(END): Last Group Number [0-31]
LEVEL(START): First Level Number [0-7]
LEVEL(END): Last Level Number [0-7]
Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as
a part of the station number. If necessary, check the box.
– 717 –
Note 2: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be as-
signed. See the example below:
Example:
INPUT DATA RESULT
STN(START)=100 A Station Number is assigned by increments of 10:

STN(END)=200 -When asterisk (*) and number (#) are not used as part of STN
STEP=10 100 110 120 130... 190 200
-When asterisk (*) and number (#) are used as part of STN
10* 118 126 134... 1** 1#8
TEC: Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]

1=DP (10pps)2=PB
3=DP/PB4=DP (20pps)
5-11=Not used12=Dterm
13=Data Terminal via Dterm14=Hot Line
15=CAS Line16=Data Terminal via Data Module
17=Not used18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)
19-22=Not used23=ISDN Terminal
24-26=Not used27=8 Conference Equipment
28-31=Not used
RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15]
SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15]
Buttons
Cancel: Cancel the input data.
Output Data (after Execute button is pressed)
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Assigned Station Number
LENS: Line Equipment Number
STATUS: Data Entry Result
OK=Data Assignment is successful Note
Note: If OK is not displayed (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
– 718 –
When DELETE is selected in the TYPE selection list box
Input Data
TN(START): First Tenant Number

TN(END): Last Tenant Number
STN(START): First Station Number [maximum six digits]
STN(END): Last Station Number [maximum six digits]
STEP: Station Count-up Step Note 1
If using asterisk (*) and number (#) o [1-12]
If not using asterisk (*) and number (#) o [1-10]
Note 1: In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers deleted. See
the example below:
Example:
INPUT RESULT
STN(START)=100 Station Number is deleted by increments of 10:

STN(END)=200 When asterisk (*) and number (#) are not used as part of STN
100 110 120 130 ... 190 200
STEP=10 When * and # are used as part of STN
10* 118 126 134 ... 1** 1#8
Buttons
Execute: Delete the input data.
Cancel: Cancel the deletion.
Output Data
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
STATUS: Result of Deletion Note 2
Note 2: When the deletion is successful, OK is displayed. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), related error
message is displayed.
– 719 –
CARR: Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction
This command is used to continuously assign/delete the restriction data of relay connections between the
outgoing route and the incoming route.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Assign/Delete
ICRT (START/END:Incoming Route Number (External Route only)
OGRT (START/END:Outgoing Route Number (External Route only)
ARI A-RES: Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index-A [0/1]
Restriction of the trunk-to-trunk (tandem) connection via ATTCON or station when a
C.O./TIE line call terminates.
0 = Alternate routing is restricted.
1 = Alternate routing is allowed.
ARI D-RES: Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index-D [0-2]
Restriction of the trunk-to-trunk (tandem) connection by Direct Dial Access from a
station when a C.O./TIE line call terminates.
2 = Toll Restriction is restricted.
Output Data
ICRT: Incoming Route
OGRT: Outgoing Route
STATUS: OK or error message is displayed.
– 720 –
CARRN: Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction for NDM

This command is used to continuously assign/delete the restriction data of relay connections between the
outgoing route and the incoming route. The data assigned by this command is written in the Network Data
Memory (NDM) of the Network Control Node (NCN), updating the NDM at each Local Node (LN).
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Assign/Delete
IC LGRT (START/END):Incoming Logical Route Number [1-899]
OG LGRT (START/END):Outgoing Logical Route Number [1-899]
ARI A-RES: Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index-A [0/1]
Restriction of the trunk-to-trunk (tandem) connection via ATTCON or station when a
C.O./TIE line call terminates.
ARI D-RES: Restriction Data for Alternative Route Index-D [0-2]
Restriction of the trunk-to-trunk (tandem) connection by Direct Dial Access from a
station when a C.O./TIE line call terminates.
2 = Toll Restriction is restricted.
Output Data
IC LGRT: Incoming Logical Route Number [1-899]
OG LGRT: Outgoing Logical Route Number [1-899]
STATUS: OK or error message is displayed.
– 721 –
CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

This command can assign/delete many trunk data with consecutive numbers at once.
2. Parameters
Type/KIND: Assign/Delete
When ASSIGN is selected in the TYPE/KIND selection list box
Input Data
RT: Route Number
TK (START): First Trunk Number [1-768]
TK (END): Last Trunk Number [1-768]
STEP: Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1
LENS (START): First Line Equipment Number [six digits]
LENS (END): Last Line Equipment Number [six digits]
TN: Tenant Number
RSC: Route Restriction Class [0-15] Note 2
SFC: Service Feature Class [0-15] Note 2
GROUP (START):First Group Number [0-31]
GROUP (END): Last Group Number [0-31]
LEVEL (START): First Level Number [0-7]
LEVEL (END): Last Level Number [0-7]
TYPE: Count-up Type [1-6] Note 3
1 = LEVEL o GROUP o UNIT
2 = LEVEL o UNIT o GROUP
3 = GROUP o UNIT o LEVEL
4 = GROUP o LEVEL o UNIT
– 722 –
5 = UNIT o LEVEL o GROUP
6 = UNIT o GROUP o LEVEL
Note 1: In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers assigned. See
the example below:
Example:
INPUT DATA RESULT
TK(START)=1
A Trunk Number is assigned by increments of 2
TK(END)=21 or
STEP=2 A Trunk Number is deleted by increments of 2
STEP=2
Note 2: Data entry for this parameter is necessary when RT is 901 or 915.
Note 3: TYPE parameter determines how to arrange the trunk data. See Details on Trunk Arrangement TYPE
for details.
Buttons
Output Data
TK: Assigned Trunk Number
OK=Data Assignment is successful Note 4
Note 4: If OK is not displayed (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
– 723 –
When DELETE is selected in the TYPE/KIND selection list box
Input Data
RT: Route Number
TK(START): First Trunk Number [1-768]
TK(END): Last Trunk Number [1-768]
STEP: Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1
Buttons
Execute: Delete the input data.
Cancel: Cancel the deletion.
Output Data
TK: Trunk Number
STATUS: Result of Deletion
OK=Deletion Successful Note 2
Note 1: In this parameter, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers deleted. See the
example below:
Example:
INPUT DATA RESULT
TK(START)=1 A Trunk Number is deleted by increments of 2:

TK(END)=21
STEP=2
Note 2: When the deletion is successful, OK is displayed here. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), related
error message is displayed.
– 724 –
Details on Trunk Arrangement TYPE
When assigning the consecutive trunk data by using CATK command, select the trunk arrangement type (1-6)
in the TYPE parameter. The following are examples of accommodated 16 COT circuit cards:
U=2 U=3
00 05 10 15 20
16 16 16
C C C
PIR O O O
T T T
16 16 16
C C C
PIR O O O
T T T
U=0 U=1
TYPE=1 (Level o Group o Unit)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2 U=3
Slot No. 05 06 15 16
LV7 56 64 72 80 88 96
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0 49 57 65 73 81 89
1MG
LV7 8 16 24 32 40 48
LV6 7
LV5 6
LV4 5
LV3 4
LV2 3
LV1 2
LV0 1 9 17 25 33 41
Level No.
02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0 U=1
– 725 –
TYPE=2 (Level o Unit o Group)
U=2 U=3
Slot No. 05 06 15 16
LV7 24 56 32 64 80 96
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0 17 49 25 57 73 89
1MG
LV7 8 40 72 88 16 48
LV6 7
LV5 6
LV4 5
LV3 4
LV2 3
LV1 2
LV0 1 33 65 81 9 41
Level No.
02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0 U=1
TYPE=3 (Group o Unito Level)
U=2 U=3
Slot No. 05 06 15 16
LV7 63 64 93 96
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 51 52 69 72
LV0 49 50 65 68
1MG
LV7 29 32 47 48
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 5 8 35 36
LV0 1 2 3 4 33 34
Level No.
02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0 U=1
– 726 –
TYPE=4 (Group o Level o Unit)
U=2 U=3
Slot No. 05 06 15 16
LV7 91 92 93 96
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 19 20 21 24
LV0 7 8 9 12
1MG
LV7 85 88 89 90
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 13 16 17 18
LV0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Level No.
02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0 U=1
TYPE=5 (Unit o Level o Group)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order
.
U=2 U=3
Slot No. 05 06 15 16
LV7 31 63 32 64 80 96
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 7 39 8 40 68 84
LV0 3 35 4 36 66 82
1MG
LV7 29 61 79 95 30 62
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 5 37 67 83 6 38
LV0 1 33 65 81 2 34
Level No.
02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0 U=1
– 727 –
TYPE=6 (Unit o Group o Level)
U=2 U=3
Slot No. 05 06 15 16
LV7 87 91 89 92 94 96
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 15 19 16 20 22 24
LV0 3 7 4 8 10 12
1MG
LV7 85 89 93 95 86 90
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1 13 17 21 23 14 18
LV0 1 5 9 11 2 6
Level No.
02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03
Group No.
U=0 U=1
– 728 –
CBCN: Control of Broadcasting for NDM

This command is used to specify the destination of the NDM data broadcast from the NCN. This command is
only available at the Network Control Node (NCN).
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE: ALL=(All the nodes)/ONE (One designated node)
FPC: FPC of the designated node Note
Interval: Broadcasting Interval
Note: This parameter appears when ONE is selected as TYPE parameter.
– 729 –
CBCV: Control of Broadcasting for VNDM

This command is used to broadcast the VNDM data from the C-VNDM to all of the L-VNDMs on the FCCS
network. Note 1, Note 2, Note 3
This command is available only at the node that has the C-VNDM.
(ASYDN/ASYDL: SYS1, INDEX533)
2. Parameters
Input data
INTERVAL: Interval time of Scan (1-99 seconds)
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253)
Green: Normal End
Red: Abnormal End
White: No Broad Cast Request
Note 1: Variable Network Data Memory (VNDM)

-VNDM is the memory associated with monitored number and available OAI Facilities (Subscribe) in-
formation.
-VNDM is controlled by one node (VNDM Primary Node) in an FCCS network and broadcasted to the
other nodes.
Note 2: Center-VNDM (C-VNDM)

This is the primary VNDM. It is only present in the VNDM center node in an FCCS network.
Note 3: Local-VNDM (L-VNDM)

This is the copy of VNDM located in all other local nodes in an FCCS network.
– 730 –
CBKS: Control Backup Station

This command is used to display information of terminals that are registered within the backup node. Also this
command can reset those registered terminals.
2. Parameters
<STATION>
ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED: Selects all IP terminals/SIP terminals that are registered to the node
which CBKS command is used toward. When “Selected terminal is re-
set” is clicked, all terminals that are read out can be reset.
TOTAL: Displays number of terminals that are read out.
List: Displays the registered terminal information such as UGN, TELN, TN,
STN, FPC, LENS, HOME NODE FPC, IPKIND, TEC, and Reset Sta-
tus when “Get” is clicked.
When performing the reset of the specified terminal, click the check
box of appropriate terminal, and then click “Selected terminal is re-
set”.
Note: TN and STN are not displayed for terminal information that are not registered to the node which CBKS
command is used toward.
Note: Cannot reset the terminals (or Non-IP/SIP terminals) that are not registered to the node which CBKS
<ROUTE>
ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED: Selects all IP terminals/SIP terminals that are registered to the node
which CBKS command is used toward. When “Selected terminal is re-
set” is clicked, all terminals that are read out can be reset.
List: Displays the registered terminal information such as LGRT, RT, TK,
TN, FPC, LENS, HOME NODE FPC, and Reset Status when “Get” is
clicked.
When performing the reset of the specified route, click the check box
of appropriate route, and then click “Selected terminal is reset”.
Note: TRK, TN and LENS are not displayed for terminal information that are not registered to the node which
CBKS command is used toward.
Note: Cannot reset the terminals that are not registered to the node which CBKS command is used toward.
– 731 –
<IP-BS>
ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED: Selects all IP-BSs that are registered to the node which CBKS com-
mand is used toward. When “Selected terminal is reset” is clicked, all
IP-BSs that are read out can be reset.
List: Displays the registered IP-BS information such as FPC, TN, PCN,
ERN, GRN, CSN, LENS, HOME NODE FPC, and Reset Status when
“Get” is clicked.
When performing the reset of the specified IP-BS, click the check box
of appropriate IP-BS, and then click “Selected terminal is reset”.
<PS>
ALL ITEMS ARE SELECTED: Selects all PSs whose operations are controlled by the node which
CBKS command is used toward. When “Selected terminal is reset” is
clicked, all PSs that are read out can return to Primary Node.
List: Displays the PS information such as UGN, TELN, TN, STN, FPC,
LENS, HOME NODE FPC, and Reset Status when “Get” is clicked.
Click the check box of appropriate PS, and then click “Selected termi-
nal is reset” to place the PS back into Primary Node.
Note: TN and LENS are not displayed for terminal information that are not registered to the node which CBKS
Note: Cannot reset the terminals that are not registered to the node which CBKS command is used toward.
– 732 –
CBND: Calculate Bandwidth Data

This command is used to calculate bandwidth data.
2. Parameters
Input data
START LOC-ID: Start location ID (0-4095)
END LOC-ID: End location ID (0-4095)
Cycle: Observation Cycle (10-300 seconds)
Start time: Start time of observation (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second)
DisplayRange: Transit graph display time range of bandwidth.
Select the time (30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours).
Output Data
Start time: Start time of observation
Last time of acquisition:Last time of observation
Current bandwidth data
A LOC-ID:Location ID A
B LOC-ID:Location ID B
Used bandwidth [Kbps]:Current used bandwidth value
Limit value [Kbps]:Current limit value of bandwidth
Average value [Kbps]:Average value of bandwidth in the observing period
Maximum value [Kbps]:Maximum value in the observing period
Maximum time:Time recorded maximum value (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Sec-

ond)
Restriction:Restriction counter
Buttons
Start: Calculate bandwidth data.
Stop: Stop the process.
– 733 –
Exit: Exit the command.
Clear: Clear the values.
Recalc: Re-calculate bandwidth data.
– 734 –
CCSE: Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment

This command is used to set/reset the make-busy state of CCH circuit card.
2. Parameters
LENS: Line Equipment Number of CCH circuit card [five digits]
MG=XX, UNIT=X, GROUP=XX
LINK: Link Status [0-2]
0=Link Open
1=Link Close
2=Not Available
MB: Make-Busy Information [0-2]
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
2=Not Available
Note: This command cannot be used for ISDN-related circuit card (such as PRT, DCH card).
– 735 –
CDBU: Change of Dch Backup

This command is used to execute the D-Channel route changeover, associated with the D-CHANNEL
BACKUP-PRI feature (for AT&T/NT/N-ISDN2).
2. Parameters
Input Data
MG: Module Group Number [00-07] Note
CNT: Number of Dch Backup Route [1-32] Note
Buttons
Get: Get information on the Dch Routes.
Change: Execute the Dch route changeover.
Stop: Cancel the Dch route changeover.
Output Data
RT: External Route Number
STS0: Primary-side DCH Status [ACT/STBY/OOS (out of service)]
STS1: Backup-side DCH Status [ACT/STBY/OOS (out of service)]
P-LENS: Primary DCH LENS (six digits)
B-LENS: Backup DCH LENS (six digits)
CHG-STS: Change Status [Completed/Executing]
Note: Data entry procedure by this command is as follows:

1. Specify the Module Group number in MG parameter.
2. Click Get button. The related Dch data appears in the display data field.
3. Referring to the display data, enter CNT number attached to the Dch to be changed over.
4. Click the Change button.
o Now, the Dch changeover starts automatically.
– 736 –
CFCS: Control of Flash Card System

This command is used to perform SVI loading and checksum verification.
2. Parameters
• Main Screen
Input Data
System: Select the system to be executed.
System 0
System 1
Control Type: (Not used)
SVI Load and Checksum verify: SVI Load and checksum are performed.
Buttons
Execute: Execute the selected item on the screen. Selecting “Option “from “Drive Select” menu
displays Drive Selection Screen, which enables you to select the drive to be verified.
Display Issue: Display the program file issue.
Verify Checksum: Verify the checksum manually.
• Display Screen
This screen is displayed when clicking Display Issue button.
Output Data
System 0: The detailed information on each program is displayed on the screen.
System 1: The detailed information on each program is displayed on the screen.
Buttons
Close: Close this screen.
• Manual Checksum Verification Screen

This screen is displayed when clicking Verify Checksum button.
– 737 –
Input Data
System: Select the system to be executed.
System 0
System 1
Drive: Select the drive to be executed.
Drive A
Drive D
Drive A/D
Program Data Kind: Select the program data to be verified.
Main Memory
MAT
TCP/IP
ACDP
PHDP
Buttons
Read: Read the detailed information.
Execute: Verify the checksum.
Stop: Stop the checksum.
Close: Close this screen.
– 738 –
CLPB: Control of Local Phone Book

1. Function Outline
This command enables deletion, copy and move of Local Phone book data. Phone book data (names and dial
numbers) are not displayed during each operation.
2. Parameters
Input Data
Process Type
Phone book data delete: Select to delete Local Phone book data.
All Local Phone book data for either of specified STN, TELN(LDM),
TELN(NDM) or LENS can be deleted. For the FCCS System, data deletion is
available only for Local Phone book data of a terminal accommodated in node
to which PCPro logins.
Phone book data copy: Select to copy Local Phone book data.
All Local Phone book data can be copied by specifying either of STN,
TELN(LDM), TELN(NDM) or LENS as the original data and destination for
copy. For the FCCS System, data copy is available only for Local Phone book
data between terminals accommodated in node to which PCPro logins. Note 1
Phone book data move: Select to move Local Phone book data.
All Local Phone book data can be moved to the specified destination by speci-
fying either of STN, TELN(LDM), TELN(NDM) or LENS as the original data
and moving destination. For the FCCS System, moving data is available only
for Local Phone book data between terminals accommodated in node to which
PCPro logins. Note 2, Note 3
Note 1: “Phone book data copy” is not available if Phone book data exists in the destination.
Note 2: “Phone book data move” is not available if Phone book data exists in the destination.
Note 3: If “Local Phone book data move” is executed, all of originally moved data will be cleared.
Parameter Type
STN: Select to delete/copy/move the data for specified Physical Station Number.
TELN(LDM): Select to delete/copy/move the data for specified Telephone Number (LDM).
TELN(NDM): Select to delete/copy/move the data for specified Telephone Number (NDM).
LENS: Select to delete/copy/move the data for specified Line Equipment Number.
– 739 –
Readout or input data are different depends on Parameter Type. The data in each Parameter Type are shown
below.
<Deleting data, Original data (for copy), Destination Copy, Original data (for move), Destination Move>
• Parameter Type=STN is selected, read out or input the following data:

TN: Tenant Number
STN: Physical Station Number (0-9, #, * [Maximum 6 digits])
Phone book Data Num: Number of Local Phone book Data (0-100) is displayed.
• Parameter Type=TELN(LDM) is selected, read out or input the following data:

UGN: User Group Number (1-255)
TELN(LDM): Telephone Number (0-9, #, * [Maximum 16 digits])
• Parameter Type=TELN(NDM) is selected, read out or input the following data:

UGN: User Group Number (1-255)
TELN(NDM): Telephone Number (0-9, #, * [Maximum 16 digits])
• Parameter Type=LENS is selected, read out or input the following data:

Buttons
Get: Read out the data.
Execute: Start the process.
– 740 –
CMNT: Control of SR-MGC Maintenance Data (LDM)

1. Function Outline
This command controls the Survivable Remote MGC (SR-MGC) in the remote office. SR-MGC Number, IP
address and office name are specified by this command to recognize the SR-MGC allocated to the MGC in the
main-office. It can also initialize the SR-MGC and display the operation state of the SR-MGC. Office data copy
and changeover can be executed by this command.
Note 1: When the Update button is clicked, operating state of all the SR-MGCs in the network managed by the
logged-in MGC can be indicated on the list. All the SR-MGCs’ data displayed on the list is output as
a CSV file by clicking the Output CSV File button.
Note 2: The SR-MGC data cannot be over written on this command.
Note 3: The following conditions must be considered when performing office data copy.
• Do not perform any PCPro operations other than CMNT command during office data copy. The
PCPro operation such as login/logoff can cause a copy failure.
• When using the manual copy function of CMNT command, it must be completed until the office data
copy after the periodic Health Check starts. The manual copy function is canceled when the periodic
Health Check starts. Once the office data copy was canceled, it would not be performed on that day
regardless of ASYDL, SYS1, Indexes 844 and 845 settings.
* To work around the above problem, assign data FF HEX to both ASYD SYS1 INDEX 87 and INDEX
88 to stop the periodic Health Check program before starting the manual office data copy.
2. Parameters
Input Data
Select any of the tabs, Set, Initialize, Office Data Copy, or Operation Mode Changeover to activate the required
operation.
<Setting Tab>
SR-MGC No. [0-255]:
Assign a unique SR-MGC Number to each SR-MGC equipment in remote office.
Office Name [Maximum 20 characters]:
Enter the Office Name of the remote office to which the corresponding SR-MGC belongs.
PBI:
Select the corresponding Local Module Group (LMG). For 1-IMG and 4-IMG system, data 0 is displayed
on the list.
IP Address:
– 741 –
Enter the IP address of SR-MGC, not the default IP address but the actual IP address to be allocated to the
target SR-MGC. In the case of two-unit SR-MGC, assign IP address of the SR T.
Mode:
The type of changeover and recovery is to be executed.
1 = Automatically switched to SR-MGC operation when communication failure has been detected be-
tween MGC and SR-MGC.
Automatically switched back to MGC operation when communication recovery has been detected be-
In FCCS Cluster network, if SR-MGC detects normality of communication between SR-MGC and
Primary node or SR-MGC and Backup nodes, SR-MGC will switch the rescued terminals back to the
recovered node.
2 = Automatically switched to SR-MGC operation when communication failure has been detected be-
Automatically switched back to MGC operation when communication recovery between MGC and
SR-MGC, and normality of communication between MGC and a selected terminal have been detect-
ed.
In FCCS Cluster network, if SR-MGC detects normality of communication between SR-MGC and
Primary node, Primary node and a selected terminal, SR-MGC will switch the rescued terminals back
to the Primary node.
3 = Not used.
C_MGC:
Select an Operating Mode for SR-MGC.
0 = Normal Operation
1 = Office data cannot be copied from the MGC when FCCS Cluster feature is used. This value must be
assigned to the Backup nodes used in FCCS Cluster network.
<Initialize Tab>
Initialization of SR-MGC can be activated on this tab.

Click either of the radio buttons and press the Execute button to execute initialization on the target SR-MGC.
All Initial:
Select this button to execute the initialization on all the SR-MGCs in the network (default setting).
Individual Initial:
Specify the SR-MGC Number when this button is selected.
<Change Operating Tab>
– 742 –
The operation changeover between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC is manually executed. Select the operation
mode in Kind and Condition parameters, then click the Execute button. A dialog appears to confirm the
changeover execution.
Kind:
Select either of the operations by radio button.
• All
Changeover to all the SR-MGCs in the network is executed.
• Individual SR300 No.

Changeover to a specified SR-MGC is executed. Enter the SR-MGC Number (0~255) of the target SR-
MGC.
Condition:
Select the direction of the operation changeover for SR-MGC. This command is executed in the MGC side.
• MGC oSR-MGC
Turns the SR-MGC to operation mode, which allows terminals to register to the SR-MGC. Note 1
• SR-MGCo MGC
Turns the SR-MGC to stand-by mode, which does not allow terminals to register to the SR-MGC. Use
this parameter to switch into stand-by mode after “MGC oSR-MGC” or manual changeover (ASYDL
SYS1 INDEX852 Bit=0) is executed. Note 2
Note 1: This parameter forcibly switches SR-MGC into operation mode from stand-by mode, which means SR-
MGC allows terminals to register to SR-MGC. This parameter does not help all the terminals regis-
tered in MGC to switch to SR-MGC.
Note 2: After the mode of SR-MGC has been switched by this command, the SR-MGC will stay in operation
mode. To switch the SR-MGC into stand-by mode, use “SR-MGC o MGC” of Condition in the CMNT
command. Note that the ASYDL setting (ASYDL SYS1 INDEX852 Bit 5) is not valid to these operations.
When SR-MGC enters stand-by mode, the MGC starts to operate.
<Office Data Copy Tab>
Manual Copy:
Select either of the radio buttons, Specifying SR-MGC or All SR-MGC (en bloc specifying) to execute of-
fice data copy manually.
• Specifying SR-MGC
Click the Execute button after specifying the target SR-MGC number (0-255).
• All SR-MGC (en bloc specifying)

Click the Execute button to execute office data copy to all the SR-MGCs in the network. Note 1
Note 1: The meaning of the indication is:

Gray = SR-MGC Number is not accommodated
– 743 –
White = No copy request

Yellow = On standby (already requested to copy)
Blue = Under copying
Green = Succeeded in copying
Red = Failed to copy
Magenta = Backup MGC is ready with Location Diversity.
Note 2: When the Clear button is clicked, all the SR-MGC Numbers return to the state of No Copy Request.
Note 3: The following kinds of office data is copied from SV8500 MGC to SR-MGC:
-DM (Data Memory)
-LDM (Local Data Memory)
-NDM (Network Data Memory)
-CF (Call Forwarding Data)
-SPD (Speed Dialing Data)
-RCF (Wireless Call Forwarding Data)
-ND (Name Display Data)
-ACD DM (ACD Data Memory)
-GPLP (Application Data Memory managed by LP)
-GPSP (Application Data Memory managed by SP)
-GPCM (Application Data Memory managed by CM)
* When accommodating SR300 to the MGC, the office data cannot be copied from the MGC to SR-MGC.
In this case, you have to assign the MGC office data to SR-MGC by your self.
Note 4: When the Break button is pressed during office data copy, the operation is cut off after the currently
copying file is completely copied. However, when DM/LDM/NDM copy is executed, the operation is
cut off after all the DM/LDM/NDM files are copied.
File copy operation takes about two minutes per file. (The time varies depending on the connection sta-
tus of the network.)
Output Data
SR-MGC No.: SR-MGC Number [0-255]
STS: State of SR-MGC:
State of SR-MGC is indicated as follows:

OK: Connection between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC has been established normally
(SR-MGC is in stand-by mode)
??: While reading the state of SR-MGC
NG: SR-MGC power OFF, or communication error between SV8500 MGC and SR-MGC
Connect CNT: A total number of Terminals:
A total number of IP terminals and the channels for network equipments such as IP-BSs and MGs under
the registration of the SR-MGC.
– 744 –
In the case of SIP/IP terminal, it is counted as “1” per terminal.

In the case of network equipment except for MG-PRI (Proprietary Mode), it is counted as “1” per channel
(MG-PRI (Proprietary Mode) is counted as “1” per terminal).
Office Name [Maximum 20 characters]
LMG Designation:
PBI number is displayed when the office is configured by 16-IMG system. For 1-IMG and 4-IMG system,
data 0 is displayed on the list.
IP Address: SR-MGC IP Address
Mode: Changeover/Recover Mode set in SR-MGC [1-2]
Office Data Copy Status: Office Data Copy Status in SR-MGC
Office Data Copy Time: Office Data Copy Starting Time
– 745 –
CMOD: Change of System Mode

This command is used to execute ACT/STBY change of the processor (CPU)/TSW and display the status of
CPU/TSW/PLO/F-BUS.
Note: A System failure may occur if this command is used in an improper way. Pay close attention when oper-
ating this command.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Type of Process (1,2)

1/2=Change Operating Mode/Make Busy of TDSW Note 1
DEVICE: Device to be changed (1,2) Note 2

1=CPU
2=TSW
SW: Type of Switch Note 3
1=TSW (fixed)
SYSTEM: System of Switch (0,1) Note 3

Note 1: When the status of TSW is ACT, “Make Busy of TDSW” for TYPE is invalid. Select “Change Operating
Mode” to change the status of TSW from ACT to STBY before executing “Make Busy of TDSW”.
Note 2: This parameter appears only when “1” is selected in TYPE.
Note 3: This parameter appears only when “2” is selected in TYPE.
Output data
<Upper field>
Parameter:
• CPU
• TSW
• PLO
• PIR (Available since FP85-104 S1E) Note 4, Note 5
• MISCR (Not used)
– 746 –
Note 4: “ACT” or “ST-BY” is output in PIR field in the following conditions. However, this parameter does
not output connection status of BUS cables between PIRs and between PIR and TSWR.
• At least one actual PIR is mounted by assignment of PIR mounting status (ASYDL, System 1, Index 512-
513) and Unit status (ASYDL, System 1, Index 1026-1027).
• BUS cable is connected between EXB card and PIR0 or TSWR
Note 5: The followings are details of PIR output data.

• “ACT” or “ST-BY” output for PIR will be the same as that of CPU.
• When BUS cable is not connected between EXB card and PIR or TSWR, “Disconnect” will be output.
• When only virtual PIR is mounted, “Not Mount” will be output.
System 0: Status of each parameter in System 0 side
• 0=Not Mount
• 1=ACT
• 2=ST-BY
• 3=MB
• 4=Disconnect Note 6
System 1: Status of each parameter in System 1 side
• 0=Not Mount
• 1=ACT
• 2=ST-BY
• 3=MB
• 4=Disconnect Note 6
Note 6: This data is output in the case of PIR only (Available since FP85-104 S1E).
Note 7: When EXB card of STBY CPU and BUS cable in PIR are not connected (“Disconnect” will be output)
and trying to execute CPU mode changing, the following message will be output in a pop-up menu:
“STBY PIR is improper. Execute mode changing?”. When “Yes” is selected, the mode changing is ex-
ecuted. When “No” is selected, it is not executed (Available since FP85-104 S1E).
Note 8: When EXB card of ACT CPU and BUS cable in PIR are connected correctly (“ACT” will be output)
and EXB card of STBY CPU and BUS cable in PIR are not connected (“Disconnect” will be output),
if CPU mode changing is executed, the mode will be returned to the mode before the execution. It is
held by new ACT side faulty recovery to check the irregular between EXB card=PIR 0 and the discon-
nection of BUS card in PIR. This action is done while the output message of the mode change executing
is displayed (“Changing” will be output). Therefore, at the time of CPU mode is output again, dis-
played mode is not changed yet (Available since FP85-104 S1E).
<Lower field>
Parameter:
• F-BUS
– 747 –
A Side: Status of F-BUS in A Side

• 0=Not Mount
• 1=ACT
• 3=MB
B Side: Status of F-BUS in B Side
• 0=Not Mount
• 1=ACT
• 3=MB
– 748 –
CMWL: Control Message Waiting Lamp

This command indicates ON/OFF status and controls the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFF (MW Lamp) at the
station. If the station is a Dterm, this command can also control Message Waiting Display on the Dterm.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Type of Input (1,2)
1=Designation by Station Number
2=Designation by LEN
TN: Tenant Number Note 1
STN: A maximum of five digits for a Business system, and six digits for a Hotel system.
Note 1
LENS: Line Equipment Number Note 2
MCI: Message Center MW Status (0,1)
0=OFF
1=ON
ATT: Attendant Console MW Status (0,1)
0=OFF
1=ON
STA: Station MW Status (0,1)
0=OFF
1=ON
VMM: Voice Mail Module MW Status (0,1)
0=OFF
1=ON
Note 1: This parameter appears when “1” is selected in TYPE.
Note 2: This parameter appears when “2” is selected in TYPE.
– 749 –
CMWL_T: Control Message Waiting Lamps – Telephone Number

This command is used to control/display the Message Waiting Lamp’s ON/OFF status, by using Telephone
numbers. When the station is a Dterm, this command can also be used to control the Message Waiting Lamp
Display. This command is only available at NCN (for FCCS network).
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Designation by Telephone Number/Designation by LEN
UGN: User Group Number Note 1
TELN: Telephone Number (maximum 16 digits) Note 1
MWLAMP: MW Lamp Status OFF/ON
MCI: Message Center MW Status OFF/ON
ATT: Attendant Console MW Status OFF/ON
STA: Station MW Status OFF/ON
VMM: Voice Mail Module MW Status OFF/ON
Note 1: This parameter is valid when TYPE =1 is selected.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when TYPE =2 is selected.
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253) Note 3
STN: Physical Station Number
(a maximum of five digits for a Business system, and six digits for a Hotel system)
Note 3: These parameters are for display only.
Buttons
Get: Get information on the MW status.
– 750 –
Set: Execute the assigned MW lamp control.
– 751 –
COSSL:Control of SIP Server Data for LDM

This command can display the link status of SP. Use COSSL for stand-alone system or COSSN in the FCCS
network.
2. Parameters
Input Data
<Channel Status>
SIP Server ID: ID of SP [1-127]
CNT Specified Type: Select the way to specify the CNT
Individual: Execute the reset transaction for Specified individual CNT
Continuation: Execute the reset transaction for Specified continuous CNT
ALL: Execute the reset transaction for all listed CNT
CNT: When the Specified Type of CNT is selected, input CNT (Count) to execute reset transaction with fol-
lowing the procedure.
Note: If ALL is selected, CNT input is not required.
Output Data
<SIP Server Status>
LINK: Status of link on the SP
ACHANNEL: Already assigned number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
OCHANNEL: Operating number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
NAME: SP Name
IP Address: IP address of SP
<Channel Status>
CNT: Count
LENS: Equipment Number
– 752 –
Control: Status of Control Channel
ST-B1: Status of Speech Channel (ST-B1)
PH LENS: Accommodation of PH
Buttons
Get: Retrieve the information.
Execute: Execute the reset transaction.
<Redundancy>
ACT Server ID: Server condition is operated in Active-mode
STBY Server ID: Server condition is operated in Stand-by mode
WAIT Server ID: Server condition is operated in changing
OFF Server ID: Server condition is operated in suspending
Buttons
Reset: Reset specified SP in SIP Server ID.
Note 1: Only when the SP is in Active mode or Standby mode, reset will be executed, if in other conditions, reset
will not be executed.
Note 2: On Single SP, reset can be executed.
Note 3: When reset transaction is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if reset transaction
is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying “Time-out”.
SP mode change: Execute forcible system changeover between Active-side SP and Standby-side
SP.
– 753 –
Note 1: Only when system ID is specified in SIP Server ID and the system is redundant, this button is displayed.
Note 2: Only when the SP is in Active mode and another SP is in Standby mode, system changeover can be ex-
ecuted.
Note 3: When system changeover is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if system change-
over is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying “Time-out”.
Stop: Back to the screen that operating status is not loaded.
– 754 –
COSSN:Control of SIP Server Data for NDM

This command can display the link status of SP. Use COSSL for stand-alone system or COSSN in the FCCS
network.
2. Parameters
Input Data
<SIP Server Status>
FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253]
<Channel Status>
CNT Specified Type: Select the way to specify the CNT
Individual: Execute the reset transaction for Specified individual CNT
Continuation: Execute the reset transaction for Specified continuous CNT
ALL: Execute the reset transaction for all listed CNT
CNT: When the Specified Type of CNT is selected, input CNT (Count) to execute reset transaction with the
following procedure.
Note: If ALL is selected, CNT input is not required.
Output Data
<SIP Server Status>
LINK: Status of link on the SP
ACHANNEL: Already assigned number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
OCHANNEL: Operating number of Speech Channels [3-1200]
NAME: SP Name
IP Address: IP address of SP
– 755 –
<Channel Status>
CNT: Count
LENS: Equipment Number
Control: Status of Control Channel
PH LENS: Accommodation of PH
Buttons
Execute: Execute the reset transaction.
<Redundancy>
ACT Server ID: Server condition is operated in Active-mode
STBY Server ID: Server condition is operated in Stand-by mode
WAIT Server ID: Server condition is operated in changing
OFF Server ID: Server condition is operated in suspending
Buttons
Reset: Execute the reset transaction for specified SP in SIP Server ID.
Note 1: Only when the SP is in Active mode or Standby mode, reset will be executed, if in other conditions, reset
will not be executed.
– 756 –
Note 2: On Single SP, reset can be executed.
Note 3: When reset transaction is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if reset transaction
is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying “Time-out”.
SP mode change: Execute forcible system changeover between Active-side SP and Standby-side
SP.
Note 1: Only when system ID is specified in SIP Server ID and the system is redundant, this button is displayed.
Note 2: Only when the SP is in Active mode and another SP is in Standby mode, system changeover can be ex-
ecuted.
Note 3: When system changeover is executing, the remaining time until Time-out is displayed, if system change-
over is not completed within 3 minutes, the task will be stopped with displaying “Time-out”.
– 757 –
CPBKN:Continuous Assignment of System Phone Book for NDM

This command is used to assign/delete System Phone Book data in a lump (Batch Assignment) by drawing up
text format database file. The data assigned by this command is written in the Network Data Memory (NDM)
of the Network Control Node (NCN), updating the NDM at each Local Node (LN).
2. Parameters
Input Data
Input the following data to text format database file. For the details of database file, refer to “Database File
for Batch Assignment”.
INDEX: Index of Row [Number/Character string]

This field is not registered to the system. Input the index of row in the database. Do not
leave a blank in this field.
RESULT: Result of File Check or Data Assignment/Deletion

Result of file check or data assignment/deletion is displayed. No data input is required
in this field.
TN: Tenant Number [1-63]

Input Tenant Number. Do not leave a blank in this field.
UGN: User Group Number [1-255]

Input User Group Number. Do not leave a blank in this field.
NAME: Name [Maximum 24 characters]

Input the name to register to System Phone book. Do not leave a blank in this field. Do
not leave a blank space at the end of name.
CNT: Count of DC [0-20]

Input the number of DC to register to System Phone book. Do not leave a blank
in this field.
DC_01 - DC_20: Digit Code 01 - Digit Code 20 [Maximum 32 digits (0-9, #, *)]
Input the DC (dial number) to register to System Phone book.
Buttons
Read File: Read out the information.
– 758 –
Output Data
RESULT field:
F_OK: Database file is normal. (Execute button is active.)
F_ERR: Database file error occurs. (Execute button is not active. Data assignment is not
available.)
The error occurs when database file is read out because of the following causes.
Input Data Cause of Error
INDEX • Data is not input.
TN • Data is not input.

• “0-9” is not input with single byte.
• TN is not input correctly in the range of 1-63 (ASYD command
SYS1, INDEX 8).
UGN • Data is not input.

• “0-9” is not input with single byte.
• UGN is not input correctly in the range of “1-255”.
NAME • Data is not input.

• Input character is not available for PCPro.
• A blank space is left at the end of name.
• Input name is beyond 24 characters.
CNT • Data is not input.

• 0-9 is not input with single byte.
• Input name is beyond “20”.
DC • The number of input DC is fewer than CNT.

• Digit Code (0-9, #, *) is not used.
• Input data is beyond 32 digits.
• The same DC exists in the same row.
R_OK: Data assignment/deletion is finished.
R_ERR: Data assignment/deletion error occurs.

For the details of error, refer to the operation log file (“PBX Alias name”Op.log)
stored in Maintenance Console (PC).
R_NOT: No deleting data exists.
– 759 –
Database File for Batch Assignment
To draw up the database for System Phone Book data, the database file should be made under conditions below.
Sample Format of Database File
CPBKN_DATAFILE [CR+LF]
;
;Database File for Batch Assignment
;
;INDEX RESULT TN UGN NAME CNT DC_01 DC_02 DC_03 ... DC_20[CR+LF]
0001 63 255 Abiko 3 1000 2000 3000 [CR+LF]
0002 20020 [CR+LF]
63 100 Suzuki 20 20001 20002 20003 ...
Note 1
Input one-tab character between data.
Note 1: Two-tab character input is required between INDEX and TN data input field because RESULT
field is not used while drawing up the database.
Note 2: Above data input is an example.
Conditions:
• The database file is drawn up with text file only. The file extension should be “*.txt”.
• Data needs to be input to the file with the “tab delimited” text format.
• All data for one case should be included in a row.
• The end of a row is recognized by inputting “[CR+LF]”.
• “CPBKN_DATAFILE ‘[CR+LF]’” needs to be input in the first row of the file by all means.
• Data for DC needs to be input to left justify.
• Data for CNT takes priority over the number of input DC. For example, only five DCs can be as-
signed if “5” is input in CNT field even though seven DCs have been already input in database.
• When “0” is input in CNT field, whole data in relevant row will be deleted.
• When “;” is input in left most part of each row, the row is regarded as comment row.
• One-tab character needs to be input between data to separate each data. However, Two-tab character
input is required between INDEX and TN data input field because RESULT field is not used while
drawing up database.
• Input data will be active only when data are input in the following order.
– 760 –
INDEX
RESULT
TN
UGN
NAME
CNT
DC_01 - DC_20
• To input NAME, do not use characters and marks that cannot be used by PCPro. If input, error will
occur. The following shows available characters and marks for PCPro.
A-Z, a-z, 0-9, !, ?, -, +, %, &, /, (,), =, ., ,, :, ", ', ;, *, #, @, [, ], SP (blank space)
À, Á, Â, Ã, Ä, Å, Æ, Ç, É, Ê, Ñ, Ö, Ü, à, á, â, ä, å, æ, ç, è, é ,ê, ë,
ì, í, î, ï, ñ, ò, ó, ô, õ, ö, ù, ú, û, ü, ¿, ¡
<To Input Special Characters>
Special characters such as characters having an umlaut can be input in NAME field by changing input language
using function of Windows 2000/Windows XP/WindowsServer 2003. To change input language, follow the
procedure below.
• When OS is Windows 2000
STEP 1 Open Regional Options in Control Panel, click the [Add...] button in Installed input locals
field on Input Locals tab.
STEP 2 Add input locale window appears. For Input locale and Keyboard layout/IME, select the lo-
cation of input language from the pull down menu. Then press [OK] button.
Note: When desired language does not exist in the pull down menu:
Open Regional Options in Control Panel, click the check box of area that includes the location for
desired input language in Language settings for the system field on General tab.
• When OS is Windows XP or WindowsServer 2003
STEP 1 Open Regional and Language Options in Control Panel, click the [Details...] button in Text
services and input languages field on Language tab.
STEP 2 Text Services and Input Languages window appears. Click the [Add...] button in Installed
services field on Settings tab.
STEP 3 Add input locale window appears. For Input language and Keyboard layout/IME, select the
location of input language from the pull down menu. Then press [OK] button.
To confirm Hot keys for input languages, click [Key Settings...] button in Preferences field
on Settings tab of Text Services and Input Languages window.
– 761 –
Note: When desired language does not exist in the pull down menu:
Open Regional and Language Options in Control Panel, click the check box of area that includes the
location for desired input language in Code page conversion tables field on Advanced tab.
<To Open and Save Database File through Microsoft Office Excel>
The database file can be edited also using the Microsoft Office Excel. Refer to the followings to open and save
the database through the Microsoft Office Excel.
• To open database file
STEP 1 Startup the Microsoft Office Excel.
STEP 2 Click File o Open....
STEP 3 Select “Text Files (*.prn; *.txt; *.csv)” in pull down menu of Files of type. Select the relevant
database file and click [Open] button.
STEP 4 Do not change data in Text Import Wizard - Step 1 of 3 and Text Import Wizard - Step 2 of
3. Click [Next >] button.
STEP 5 Text Import Wizard - Step 3 of 3 window appears. After selecting all columns in Data pre-
view field, click the radio button of Text in Column data format filed. Then click [Finish] but-
ton.
STEP 6 File is opened. Right-click on the top-left box of the sheet to select all cells in the sheet, and se-
lect Format Cells... from the menu.
STEP 7 Select “Text” in Category filed on Number tab of Format Cells window, and click [OK] but-
ton.
STEP 8 Edit the database file.
• To save database file
STEP 1 Click File o Save As... on the menu.
STEP 2 Select “Text (Tab delimited) (*.txt)” in pull down menu of Save as type. Select the relevant da-
tabase file and click [Save] button after input the file name.
STEP 3 The following dialogue appears. Click [Yes] button.
– 762 –
Note: “CPBKN_DATA.txt” is used here for file name of the database as an example.
STEP 4 The database file is saved.
STEP 5 Open the database file with the text editor and go through the content.
Note: When quotation marks (“) and colons (,) are used in NAME field, they may be enclosed in quotation
marks on the database. In that case, delete the enclosing quotation marks.
– 763 –
CPCP: Control of PC Port

This command is used when the maintenance personnel disconnects/connects the PC port of DtermIP from/to
the network.
2. Parameters
Input Data
<For the data readout>
Kind of Specification: Select one of the following items:
All Data: Specifies all the DtermIP’s PC ports.
IP Address Specification: Specifies the IP address of DtermIP that has been completed the
Registration process.
STN Specification: Specifies the Tenant Number and Station Number.
TELN (NDM) Specification: Specifies the UGN and Telephone Number (NDM).
TELN (LDM) Specification: Specifies the UGN and Telephone Number (LDM).
IP Address START/END: Specify the range of IP addresses (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254). This parameter
is valid when Kind of Specification = “IP Address Specification”.
TN START/END: Specify the range of IP addresses (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254). This parameter

is valid when Kind of Specification = “STN Specification”.
STN START/END: Specify the range of Station Numbers (Up to six digits (0-9, *, #)).
This parameter is valid when Kind of Specification = “STN Specification”.
UGN START/END: Specify the range of User Group Numbers (1-255). This parameter is valid
when Kind of Specification = “TELN (NDM) Specification” or “TELN (LDM)
Specification”.
TELN START/END: Specify the range of Telephone Numbers (Up to 16 digits (0-9, *, #)).
This parameter is valid when Kind of Specification = “TELN (NDM)
Specification” or “TELN (LDM) Specification”.
– 764 –
<For the execution of the process>
PC Port Control: Select either “Connection” or “Disconnection”.
<Others>
All Select: Mark the checkbox when selecting all data in the list.
Auto Scroll: By marking the checkbox, the data in the list is automatically scrolled to the
end.
Note: By marking the checkboxes next to the numbers in the list, the individual readout data can be selected.
Output Data
No.: Each data in the list is numbered. (1-n)
Result: Status of the system
TN: Tenant Number (1-63)
STN: Station Number (Up to 16 digits (0-9, *, #))
LENS: Line Equipment Numbers
UGN (NDM): User Group Number (NDM) (1-255)
TELN (NDM): Telephone Number (NDM) (Up to 16 digits (0-9, *, #))
UGN (LDM): User Group Number (LDM) (1-255)
TELN (LDM): Telephone Number (LDM) (Up to 16 digits (0-9, *, #))
IP Address: IP address of Terminal (0.0.0.1 - 255.255.255.254)
Connection Status: Current status of the PC port (Connection/Disconnection)
Connection Status (LDM):Status of the PC port on the office data (Connection/Disconnection)
Buttons
Get: Readout the data
Execute: Start the process.
Skip: Cancel the data readout or the execution of the process.
– 765 –
CPRS: Controlled Alternate PRSCs

This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. It either selects the class used between
two priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent), or indicates the class used. This command is allowed only
when Bit1 of SYS 1, INDEX 59 is “1” (Controlled Alternate PRSCs in service).
2. Parameters
N/U: Priority Restriction Class [N/U]
N=Normal
U=Urgent
– 766 –
CSCL: Continuous Change of Station Class

This command can change the station class information (TEC, RSC, SFC) for a group of stations by specifying
the range of the station number.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TN: Tenant Number
STN(START): First Station Number [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note 1
STN(END): Last Station Number [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)]Note 1
TEC(OLD): Telephone Equipment Class before change [1-31] Note 2, Note 3
TEC(NEW): Telephone Equipment Class after change [1-31] Note 2
RSC(OLD): Route Restriction Class before change [0-15] Note 3
RSC(NEW): Route Restriction Class after change [0-15]
SFC(OLD): Service Feature Class before change [0-15] Note 3
SFC(NEW): Service Feature Class after change [0-15]
Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as
a part of the station number. If necessary, check the box.
Note 2: Details on Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) are shown below:

1=DP (10pps) 2=PB
3=DP/PB 4=DP (20pps)
5-11=Not used 12=Dterm
13=Data Terminal via Dterm 14=Hot Line
15=CAS line 16=Data Terminal via Data Module
17=Not used 18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)
19-22=Not used 23=ISDN Terminal
24-26=Not used 27=8 Conference Equipment
– 767 –
28-31=Not used
Note 3: If changing all classes of all specified stations, enter “**” for this parameter.
Buttons
Output Data
STN: Station Number
Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
– 768 –
CSPAL:Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for LDM

This command collectively lists/deletes the special access code data (LDM) assigned by the ASPAL command.
Note 1: During activating this command, be sure not to run any other commands.
Note 2: To delete the data collectively, first readout the registered data by either of the following ways:
- Read out the registered data from the saved CSV file.
or
- Refresh the list of registered data on Data field specifying the range by GET TYPE.
When deleting the data collectively with CSV file, be sure to check the difference between the actual
assigned data and the data in CSV file beforehand.
Note 3: In the case of failing in collective deletion, the command shows error message in STATUS field. Data
deletion is proceeded to the end even when error message appears.
Note 4: To specify the range in GET TYPE, Connection Status Index (CI) cannot be selected. N (Normal), H
(Hooking), and B (Busy) are all listed.
Note 5: In FCCS network, when changing the tenant table development by the system data (ASYDN SYS1
Index800 bit1), delete all the data assigned by ASPAL/ASPAN command on NCN and delete all the data
assigned by ASPAL command on each LN as well.
Note 6: Refer to the table below for the required time to execute data deletion by CSPAL command. The running
time may vary depending on the network condition.
NUMBER OF DATA ENTRY RUNNING TIME
100 150 seconds
1,000 1,450 seconds
10,000 14,500 seconds
Note 7: This command cannot be used on Hotel System.
– 769 –
2. Parameters
CSV File
File Name: Read out CSV file name is displayed.

File Read button
When using the saved CSV file already having got the registered data, read the CSV file out on
PCPro. Click File Read button to open File Open dialog box, and then specify the target CSV file.
File Write button
The data listed on the Data field is saved as a CSV file on PCPro. Click File Write button to open
Save As dialog box, and then save the CSV file.
GET TYPE
Select ALL TYPE or RANGE TYPE in the drop-down list to set the range of registered data to be read out
and listed in Data field.
• ALL TYPE: All the registered data is to be listed.
• RANGE TYPE: Registered data is to be listed specifying the range by TN and ACC.
TN (Tenant Number): Set the range by entering START TN and END TN [1-63].
ACC (Access Code): Set the range by entering START ACC and END ACC [Up to six digits].
Data
ALL SELECT
Place a checkmark to delete all the listed data.
Indicate from CNT to SRV
Place a checkmark to set the parameters CNT through SRV are to be listed.
Note: Regardless of the checkmark ON/OFF selected, STATUS field is always displayed.
<Details on parameters listed>

CNT: Number of lines Note 1
TN: Tenant Number
ACC: Access Code
CI: Connection Status Index
SRV: Kind of Service
SID: Service Index
SIDA: Service Index A
NND: Necessary Digit
– 770 –
NND1: Necessary Digit for Speed Calling

FPC: Fusion Point Code
STATE: Hotel Service Code
NO1: Kind of Assignment Number
KIND: Kind of Function
PNO: Pattern Number for AOSP command
A/G: Admin/Guest
LGRT: Logical Route Number
2nd DT: Second Dial Tone
AH: Authorization Code
SUB: Sub Address Dialing
SKIP: Skip Digits
TN: Tenant Number
EQP: Announcement Equipment Number
LGRT1~15: External Logical Route Number
STATUS: Deletion result, error message, and error message for abnormal parameter value are dis-
played.
Note 1: Deletion target data can be selected individually by the CNT check box.
– 771 –
CSPAN:Continuous Delete of Special Access Code for NDM

This command collectively lists/deletes the special access code data (NDM) assigned by the ASPAN command.
Note 1: During activating this command, be sure not to run any other commands.
Note 2: To delete the data collectively, first readout the registered data by either of the following ways:
- Read out the registered data from the saved CSV file.
or
- Refresh the list of registered data on Data field specifying the range by GET TYPE.
When deleting the data collectively with CSV file, be sure to check the difference between the actual
assigned data and the data in CSV file beforehand.
Note 3: In the case of failing in collective deletion, the command shows error message in STATUS field. Data
deletion is proceeded to the end even when error message appears.
Note 4: When NDM data broadcasting comes up between the FCCS nodes during executing the collective de-
letion by CSPAN command, the error message “Cannot write data because broadcast or Office Data
copy is executing.” is displayed in STATUS field. Data deletion is proceeded to the end even when error
message appears.
Note 5: To specify the range in GET TYPE, Connection Status Index (CI) cannot be selected. N (Normal), H
(Hooking), and B (Busy) are all listed.
Note 6: In FCCS network, when changing the tenant table development by the system data (ASYDN SYS1
Index800 bit1), delete all the data assigned by ASPAL/ASPAN command on NCN and delete all the data
assigned by ASPAL command on each LN as well.
Note 7: Refer to the table below for the required time to execute data deletion by CSPAN command. The run-
ning time may vary depending on the network condition.
• Stand-alone
100 160 seconds
1,000 1,630 seconds
10,000 16,500 seconds
– 772 –
• FCCS
100 160 seconds
1,000 1,630 seconds
10,000 16,300 seconds
• FCCS over IP (P2P)
100 160 seconds
1,000 1,630 seconds
10,000 16,300 seconds
• FCCS with FCH card
100 160 seconds
1,000 1,640 seconds
10,000 16,300 seconds
Note 8: In FCCS over Multiple Program Versions [F-39] configuration, NCN cannot execute CSPAN com-
mand. Error message “Data cannot control. (Fusion version coexistence)” appears when CSPAN com-
mand is executed on NCN.
Note 9: This command cannot be used on Hotel System.
2. Parameters
CSV File
File Name: Read out CSV file name is displayed.

File Read button
When using the saved CSV file already having got the registered data, read the CSV file out on
PCPro. Click File Read button to open File Open dialog box, and then specify the target CSV file.
File Write button
The data listed on the Data field is saved as a CSV file on PCPro. Click File Write button to open
Save As dialog box, and then save the CSV file.
GET TYPE
– 773 –
Select ALL TYPE or RANGE TYPE in the drop-down list to set the range of registered data to be read out
and listed in Data field.
• ALL TYPE: All the registered data is to be listed.
• RANGE TYPE: Registered data is to be listed specifying the range by TN and ACC.
TN (Tenant Number): Set the range by entering START TN and END TN [1-63].
ACC (Access Code): Set the range by entering START ACC and END ACC [Up to six digits].
Data
ALL SELECT
Place a checkmark to delete all the listed data.
Indicate from CNT to SRV
Place a checkmark to set the parameters CNT through SRV are to be listed.
Note: Regardless of the checkmark ON/OFF selected, STATUS field is always displayed.
<Details on parameters listed>

CNT: Number of lines Note 1
TN: Tenant Number
ACC: Access Code
CI: Connection Status Index
SRV: Kind of Service
SID: Service Index
SIDA: Service Index A
NND: Necessary Digit
NND1: Necessary Digit for Speed Calling
STATE: Hotel Service Code
KIND: Kind of Function
PNO: Pattern Number for AOSP command
A/G: Admin/Guest
LGRT: Logical Route Number
2nd DT: Second Dial Tone
AH: Authorization Code
– 774 –
SUB: Sub Address Dialing

SKIP: Skip Digits
TN: Tenant Number
EQP: Announcement Equipment Number
LGRT1~15: External Logical Route Number
STATUS: Deletion result, error message, and error message for abnormal parameter value are dis-
played.
Note 1: Deletion target data can be selected individually by the CNT check box.
– 775 –
CSTN: Continuous Change of Station Number

This command can change the consecutive station numbers for a group of stations by specifying the station
number range.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TN: Tenant Number
OLD STN(START): First Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note
OLD STN(END): Last Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note
NEW STN(START): First Station Number after change [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note
NEW STN(END): Last Station Number after change [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)] Note
Note: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as a
part of the station number. If necessary, check the box.
Buttons
Output Data
OLD STN: Station Number before change
NEW STN: Station Number after change
Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
– 776 –
DCBD: Display of Call Block Entry Data

This command is used to display the following Call Block data, assigned to a station:
• Number of station/trunk whose call is to be blocked (in the remainder of this page, denoted as Restriction
Number)
• Registered Restriction Numbers in total
Data can be obtained by entering any of the station’s telephone number (TYPE 1), physical station number
(TYPE 2) or LENS (TYPE 3) in the parameters below:
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:Selection of Input Data Type

TYPE 1 (Input Data = UGN, TELN)Note
TYPE 2 (Input Data = FPC, TN, STN)Note
TYPE 3 (Input Data = FPC, LENS)Note
READ (button to view the Display Data)
EXIT (button to exit)
Note: When using this command, first choose the input data type (TYPE 1 - 3) in TYPE selection list box. Then
the following parameters appear, according to the selected data type.
• When TYPE 1 is selected : User Group Number [UGN]

Telephone Number [TELN (maximum 16 digits)]
• When TYPE 2 is selected : Fusion Point Code [FPC (1-253)]

Tenant Number [TN (maximum three digits)]
Physical Station Number [STN (maximum six digits)]
• When TYPE 3 is selected : Fusion Point Code [FPC (1-253)]

Line Equipment Number [LENS]
– 777 –
Output Data
CNT:Registered Restriction Numbers in total (1-5)

DC:Each Restriction Number
•When Physical Station Number is registered (maximum six digits)
•When Telephone Number is registered (maximum 16 digits)
•When Trunk Call Number is registered (maximum 32 digits)
– 778 –
DCEN: Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM

This command is used to display the registered connection trunk/route data by designating LENS.
2. Parameters
Input Data
C_LENS: Line Equipment Number [six digits]
Output Data
C_RT: Connection Route Number [1-1023]
C_TK: Connection Trunk Number [1-4095]
TK: Trunk Number [1-255]
TN: Tenant Number
– 779 –
DCON: Display of Connection Status

This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks. If the specified station or trunk is busy,
the connected party is displayed. The activation of this command does not affect calls in progress. Encryption
status for voice data is displayed in SEC as follows:
O: encrypted, X: not encrypted, blank: the system or the terminal is not available for encryption. Note 1
Note 1: Data in SEC is displayed on a LENS basis. For more detailed information on SEC, see The Relation-
ship between SEC value and Encryption on the next page.
2. Parameters
Input data
Type: Kind of Connection Status (1-4)
1=Station of Connection Status
2=Trunk of Connection Status
3=LENS of Connection Status
4=Connection Trunk of Connection Status (FCCS Network)
STN: Maximum number of digits is five for Business system, and six for Hotel system.
Note 2
RT: Route Number Note 3
TK: Trunk Number Note 3
LEN: Line Equipment Number Note 4
C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 5
C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 5
Note 2: This data entry is valid when TYPE=1.
– 780 –
The following shows the relationship between SEC value and encryption on a connection pattern basis.
Figure 7-6 The Relationship between SEC value and Encryption
[1] non-IP terminal and non-IP terminal
Encryption Not Provided SEC = blank

Terminalo
specified by DCON
[2] IP terminal and IP terminal (SV8500: encryption is valid)
Encryption = OK SEC = O
Terminalo
specified by DCON
[3] IP terminal and IP terminal (SV8500: encryption is invalid)
Encryption = NG SEC = blank

Terminalo
specified by DCON
Encryption Not Provided SEC = blank

Terminalo
specified by DCON
Encryption Not Provided SEC = X

Terminalo
specified by DCON
[6] non-IP terminal and IP terminal (SV8500: encryption is valid)
Encryption Not Provided Encryption = OK SEC = O

Terminalo
IPPAD
specified by DCON
[7] non-IP terminal and IP terminal (SV8500: encryption is invalid)
Encryption Not Provided Encryption = NG SEC = blank

Terminalo
specified by DCON IPPAD
[8] IP terminal and non-IP terminal (SV8500: encryption is valid)
Encryption = OK Encryption Not Provided

Terminalo SEC = blank
specified by DCON IPPAD
Legend:
: IP terminal (with encryption) : IP terminal (without encryption) : non-IP terminal : DCON target station
– 781 –
DDMO: Display of Data Memory Occupancy

1. Function Outline
This command displays the data memory occupancy (used area size, free area size, maximum area size, and
usage rate of data memory).
Note: When there are unassigned memory blocks, their sizes are not to be displayed.
2. Parameters
Output Data
Execute the DDMO command, and click “Get” button; the following area sizes of the data memory are to be
displayed.
DM: Data Memory
Used-size: the size of the used area of the data memory
Free-size: the size of the free area of the data memory
Max-size: the maximum area size of the data memory
Usage: the usage rate (proportion of the used area size to the maximum area size)
LDM: Local Data Memory
NDM: Network Data Memory
Click the “Detail” button, and the detailed information of the data memory size is displayed.
– 782 –
DEBUG:General Purpose Debug Function

This command is used to set necessary data for outputting debug information and displaying it on terminals
connected with LAN.
2. Parameters
Input data
SP/LMG
SP: System Processor
<Trigger>
TRIGGER NUMBER CONTENTS
0 TCP/IP Module Information

1 Fault Message
2 Digital Telephone Claims
3 IP Telephone RTP Statistics
4 TCP/IP Data Trace
5 SMTP Information
6 SIP Authentication
7 Synchronization (Location Diversity)
8 Registration (Location Diversity)
9 Station Data (Location Diversity)
10 Inter-node IP Address Notification
11 Inter-node Query Process
12 Protocol Handler Error Log
13 TCP/IP module Heap memory Information
14 Node watching information (Location Diversity for PHS)
15 XML IMAT-Various H/I Error Log
16 PHS/SIP station movement log
17 PHS/SIP station error log
19 Extend IP Address Inquiry
– 783 –
TRIGGER NUMBER CONTENTS
22 Phone Book Error Log
Note: The other trigger numbers will be added as appropriate.
<Remote Host>
Store debug info inside MGC (output later)

: If not checked, debug information is stored into main memory only. If checked, the information is stored
into main memory and designated remote host.
Output debug info immediately:
Receive on this PCPro

: Debug information is displayed on this PCPro.
Transmit to remote host

: Debug information is displayed on a remote host specified by IP Address and Port Number.
IP Address: IP address of remote host
Port Number: Port number of remote host
– 784 –
<TCP/IP>
Output Device
None
Fault printer: Debug information is output to fault printer.
IO Port: IO port of fault printer [1-7]
Remote Host: Debug information is output to a remote host.
TCP/IP Debug information output
None: Suspend TCP/IP trace data.
Warnings: Only warning messages are output.
TX/RX data and Warnings:
Protocol Filter
:This group box is displayed only when TX/RX data and Warnings is checked. The following can be spec-
ified for output of trace information.
UDP: Information such as registration and signaling speech between system and IP terminals.
ICMP: Information regarding PCPro, SMDR, and OAI server
TCP: Information such as PING
ARP: Information regarding Address Resolution Protocol
IP Address and Port Number Filter

:This group box is displayed only when TX/RX data and Warnings are checked. The following can be spec-
ified for output of trace information.
Number of bits to check (0=No Filter)
Filtering Address:
UDP or TCP port number (0=No Filter)
Port No. Protocol Usage
3456 UDP Registration

60000 TCP PCPro
– 785 –
Port No. Protocol Usage
60001 UDP A/S

60010 TCP SMDR
60020 TCP MCI
60030 TCP OAI
60040 TCP MIS
60050 TCP PMS
60060 TCP NMS
60070 TCP CS Report
60090 UDP Internal PHD
60110 UDP Receive Health Check between MGC and SR-MGC
(Server)
60120 UDP Send Health Check between MGC and SR-MGC (Client)
60130 UDP Internal PHE
60140 TCP SR-MGC Billing on MGC
60150 TCP SR-MGC Billing on SR-MGC
60180 UDP Internal PHF
64000 TCP/UDP Internal PHI-PRI (TCP) / Internal PHI-BRI (UDP)
57000 TCP Internal PHC (Server)
65030 TCP Internal PHC (Client)
53 UDP DNS
123 UDP SNTP
<DRS>
Registration Failed: Information of registration failed is output.
Registration Succeeded: Information of registration succeeded is output.
Sending Terminal Reset: Information of Sending Terminal Reset is output.
Fault notification from terminals: Information of Fault notification from terminals is output.
Buttons
Add Open TRIGGER_LIST to Add items.
– 786 –
Delete: Delete items specified.
Apply: Apply a change to the system.
Cancel: Close the window.
<Reference> How to Capture Call Statistics using DEBUG Command
1. To capture Call Statistics on the local host in the PCPro session enter DEBUG command (or select it from
the Tool folder).
2. Select SP radio. Press Get button.
3. On the Trigger tab press List Edit button.
– 787 –
4. From the Unchosen Trigger area, select item 3 (Notification of IP station RTP statistics information).
Press Seto button.
5. Item 3 is transferred to the Chosen Trigger area. Press Close button.
– 788 –
6. Item 3 is displayed in the Setting Trigger area.
7. Select Remote Host window. Check Send Remote Host box.
– 789 –
8. To capture Call Statistics on the local host, check Receive on the PCPro box. Local PC IP Address will
appear automatically in the IP Address field as well as Port Number (UDP) 40000. Press Apply button
and Open window button.
9. After pressing Open window button the following console appears. Make IP type of call. The first CALL
STATISTICS message will appear. On the Option menu, check Show IP Addr. The DRS address appears
in the front of CALL STATISTICS message.
– 790 –
DFLN: Display Up of Location Free Numbering

This command is used to check the assigned data of Location Free Numbering Service. When this command is
activated, the assigned data are displayed on a basis of each designated station number.
2. Parameters
Input data
FUNCTION: Function Type
•ID-No
•STN
L-STN: Logical number (ID-No) [Maximum six digits] Note 1
TN: Tenant Number [1-63] Note 2
P-STN: Physical Number (Station Number) [Maximum six digits] Note 2
Output data
DC: Digit Code [0-9,*,#]
Note 1: This parameter is entered/displayed only when F=0.
Note 2: This parameter is entered/displayed only when F=1.
– 791 –
DFTD: Display of System Message Details

This command is necessary to print the system messages detected by Fault Diagnostic programs.
When the fault scanning (Scanning SV8500) is effective, PCPro can scan SV8500 status by polling every 20
seconds, (default setting is effective.) If the SV8500 has faults, this command executes automatically.
Up to 512 messages can be compiled on PCPro. After the number of compiled messages reaches the maximum
number, the coming message can not be obtained.
2. Parameters
Input data
New/Old
Show Details: Yes/No
– 792 –
DHDF: Display of HD File Information

This command is used to display or delete the Program/Office Data files preserved on the specified SV8500
Hard Disk.
2. Parameters
Input Data
System: 0: System 0
1: System 1
Data: 11 - Data Memory Files (DM)
12 - Call Forwarding Data Files (CFD)
13 - Speed Calling Data Files (SPD)
14 - Remote Call Forwarding Data File (RCF) (JAPAN only)
15 - Name Display Data Files (ND)
16 - Data Memory Files (NDM)
17 - Data Memory Files (LDM)
18 - User Assign Key Data
19 - Number Sharing Data
22 - ACD Data Memory
23 - Call Block Data
26 - ICB and DR
27 - Expanded Speed Calling Data
28 - Logout Transfer
29 - One Touch Speed Calling Data for DtermIP
32 - H.323 Terminal Call Transfer (Not used)
33 - Message Area ID Data
34 - SR-MGC Data
– 793 –
35 - SIP Terminal Call Transfer
36 - SPD Name Data
37 - Mobility Access Data
38 - Day/Night Data
39 - Local Phone book Data
40 - Soft Switch Data
LP No.: Designate the LP number. (Required when 12, 13, 18, 19, 23, 26, 27, 28 or 37 is selected
in the Data parameter.)
Drive Select: Designate the Drive of HDD.

•When 11 - 19, 22, 23, 26 - 29, 32 - 40 is selected in the Data parameter:
Drive B
Drive C
File Name: After assigning the parameters above and then pressing the Get button, the related file
names are listed in the display field at the bottom part of the command screen. By
double-clicking any of the file names, the name is listed in this parameter.
Output data
CNT (Count No.)
File Name
Date
Size
Buttons
Get: Display the related Program/Office Data file information.
Del.: Delete the Program/Office Data file specified in the File Name parameter.
– 794 –
DICBD: Display of Individual Call Block Data

This command is used to display the information of Individual Call Block Data.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Select the item to input data.
1: UGN/TELN
2: FPC/TN/STN
3: FPC/LENS
When “1: UGN/TELN” is selected in TYPE:
UGN: Enter the User Group Number.
TELN: Enter the Telephone Number (Maximum 16 digits).
When “2: FPC/TN/STN” is selected in TYPE:
FPC: Enter the Fusion Point Code.
TN: Enter the Tenant Number.
STN Enter the Station Number.
When “3: FPC/LENS” is selected in TYPE:
FPC: Enter the Fusion Point Code.
LENS: Enter the Equipment Number.
Output Data
CB ACT: Call Block List

0: Inactive
1: Active
AN BLK ACT: Anonymous Call Block
0: Inactive
1: Active
BIN NO: Bin Number [00-15]
DC: Denial DC Number (Maximum 16 digits)
Buttons
– 795 –
Get: Get the Individual Call Block Data.

– 796 –
DIMG: Display Information of Media Gateway

This command is used to display the information of the Media Gateway that is managed by SV8500 (PHI).
2. Parameters
Input Data
View Type: Select the item to be displayed.
Media Gateway Information: Information of Media Gateway belonging to SV8500.

ISDN Trunk (PRI) Information:Information of MG(PRI) belonging to SV8500.
PH LENS: Equipment Number (Even Number, Five Digits)
Output Data
CNT: Counter
LENS: Line Equipment Number Note
MG Type: Media Gateway Type
Status: Registration Status
IP: IP Address assigned to Media Gateway
MAC: MAC Address of Media Gateway
SEC: Encryption status for voice data [O (encrypted) / X (not encrypted) / Readout Failed /
Blank (system or terminal does not support encryption)]
TN: Tenant Number

RT: B-Channel Route Number of Media Gateway
TK: Trunk Number
ISDN Status: ISDN Status of Media Gateway
Action Mode: Operation Mode of Media Gateway
Reference Reference Information
Note: For MG(PRI) (SIP), the first channel of HW assigned by AMGIL command is displayed.
Buttons
Get: Retrieve the line information.

CSV File Output: Output the report in CSV format.
– 797 –
DIPI: Display IP equipment Information

This command is used to display the information of IP terminals. Information can be displayed by pressing the
Execute button. Information displayed can be output to the CSV file by pressing the CSV File Output button.
2. Parameters
[Output Key Data]
Terminal
DtermIP: DtermIP
SoftPhone (SP20): DtermSP20 and DtermSP30 used as ACD terminal
Inaset: DtermIP INASET
SoftPhone (SP21): Not used
Softphone (SP30): Not used
Media Converter
Analog MC: Analog 2 port MC
CS
IPCS/IPZT: IP-BS
Gateway
Gate Keeper: GK(Gatekeeper)

SIP Server: SIP Server
VPS
IPVPS: Not used
Media Gateway
ISDN Trunk(BRI): MG(BRI)

ISDN Trunk(PRI 1.5M): MG-PRI/PRA
ISDN Trunk(PRI 2.0M): MG-PRI/PRA
SIP-MG: MG(SIP)
MG(COT): MC & MG with PFT
MC-MG(7COT): Not used
MG(6COT): Not used
B2BUA-SIP GW-4ch: Back-to-Back User Agent (4 channels)
– 798 –
B2BUA-SIP GW-32ch: Back-to-Back User Agent (32 channels)

Multi-Function Server
Voice Server: VS-32

Multi Protocol Handler: MPH
SIP
SIP Multi-Function Telephone: SIP Multi-Function Telephone

SIP Soft-Phone: SIP Multi-Function Softphone
SIP-VPS: IP-UMS
SIP Media Gateway
ISDN Trunk (BRI) [SIP]: MG(BRI)

ISDN Trunk (PRI 1.5M) [SIP]: MG(PRI)
ISDN Trunk (PRI 2M) [SIP]: MG(PRI)
MG(6COT) [SIP]: MG(6COT)
MG-T1 [SIP]: MG-T1(SIP)
SIP Media Converter
8MC [SIP]
SIP Multi-Function Server
Voice Server[SIP]
[Displayed Data]
Terminal Information
No.: Number
LENS: Accommodated location (Line Equipment Numbers)
Equipment Name
Firmware Information
SP/SW No.: Software Number(4 digits)/Firmware Number
ISS: Firmware version
IP CH KIND: Channel kind of VS-32
IP Address
MAC Address
SEC: Encryption status for voice data
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
– 799 –
UGN(NDM): User Group Number (NDM)

TELN(NDM): Telephone Number (NDM)
UGN(LDM): User Group Number (LDM)
TELN(LDM): Telephone Number (LDM)
RT: Route Number
TK: Trunk Number
ISDN STATUS: Line Status at this time
MODE: Operation mode used at this time
PCN: PHS Community Number
ERN: Calling Area Number (1-32)
GRN: Group Number (1-8)
CSN/ZTN: IP-BS Number (1-32)
GKID: Gate Keeper Identifier (1-255)
SIPID: SIP Server ID
MPH LENS: Accommodated Location (LENS) of MPH
MPH ID: MPH Identifier (1-4095)
PH LENS: Line Equipment Number of PHL Card [MG, U, G]
PH TYPE: Type of PHL Card
[Detailed Information]
No.: Number
SP/SW No.: Software Number (4 digits)
ISS: Firmware Version
– 800 –
DISD: Display of IP Station Data

This command is used to display the Registration status of IP Stations. This command is usually used to check
the Registration status of IP Stations before the replacement of PH circuit card.
Note: Assign Station Number or LENS of PH, then click the Get button to display the status of the appropriate
IP Stations in Detail data list.
Note: When displaying the status of terminals connected to Analog MC, MAC field in Detail data list shows
“STN MAC”.
Note: To reset WLAN Handset (MH Series), select “Station” on the View Type parameter and “Tele-
phoneNumber (NDM)/Telephone Number (LDM)” on the Kind of Station parameter.
2. Parameters
Input Data
ViewType: Select the item to be displayed.
• Station
• PH Control
• IPCS/IPZT
• Gate Keeper
• Voice Server
• SIP Server
• MPH
• PHI
When ViewType = Station:
Kind of Station: Select the item to be displayed:
• StationNumber: Physical Station Number

• TelephoneNumber (NDM): Telephone Number for Network Data Memory
• TelephoneNumber (LDM): Telephone Number for Local Data Memory
TN: Enter Tenant Number Note 1
STN: Enter Station Number Note 1
Note 1: This parameter is valid when “Station Number” is selected as Kind of Station.
UGN: Enter User Group Number Note 2
– 801 –
TELN: Enter Telephone Number Note 2
Note 2: This parameter is valid when “TelephoneNumber (NDM)/(LDM)” is selected as Kind of Station.
KIND: Kind of Release Note 3
• Soft Reset
• PH Control Data Clear and Soft Reset
• PH Control Data Clear
Note 3: To display this parameter, select an item in the Detail data list, and then click the Execute button. Avail-
able terminals in this parameter varies depending on the IP KIND. (IP KIND is displayed in the Detail
data list.)
<IP KIND>
DtermIP X IP terminal
Soft Dterm X Soft Phone (Proprietary Protocol)
Smart Phone -
Analog MC X Analog 2MC
Digital MC -
IP-CS NA IP-BS
IP-VPS -
MG (Analog) -
MG (Digital) -
MG (ISDN BRI) NA MG (BRI)
MG (ISDN PRI 1.5M) NA MG (PRI) [MG-24PRIA], MG-PRI
MG (ISDN PRI 2M) NA MG (PRI) [MG-30PRIA], MG-PRA
SIP-MG NA MG (SIP)
MCMG_COT NA Trunk side of MC&MG-COT
MCMG_aMC X Terminal side of MC&MG-COT
Voice Server X VS-32 (Proprietary Protocol)
SIP Station X DtermIP (SIP)
MPH NA
SPterm X DT700 Series
Soft SPterm X Soft Phone (SIP)
SIP-VPS -
MCMG (7COT)_COT NA Trunk side of MCMG [SCA-7COTA]
MCMG (7COT)_aMC X Terminal side of MCMG [SCA-7COTA]
8MC (SIP) X 8LC Card
– 802 –
VS32 (SIP) X VS-32 (SIP)

X: Available to operate on this parameter
NA: Not available to operate on this parameter
-: Not used
When ViewType = PH Control:
PH LENS: Specify the first Group of PH accommodated Location.
PH TYPE: Type of Circuit Card (Display only)
• PHA
• PHD
• PHE
• IPPAD
• Internal PHI
• Internal PHD
• Internal PHE
• MPH
• PHI
REGMAX: Number of ports registered by PH (Display only)
REGCNT: Number of the connected Terminals (Display only)
• Soft Reset
Note 4: To display this parameter, select an item in the Detail data list, and then click the Execute button. Op-
eration on tis parameter is available for the login terminals.
When ViewType = IPCS/IPZT:
PCN: PHS Community Number (1-1024)
ERN: Area Number (1-32)
CSN: CS Number (1-32)
When ViewType = Gate Keeper:
– 803 –
GKID: Identifier of Gate Keeper (1-255)
GKIP: IP address of Gate Keeper (Display only)
When ViewType = Voice Server:
VS-ID: MAC address of Voice Server
• Soft Reset
Note 5: To display this parameter, select an item in the Detail data list, and then click the Execute button. Op-
eration on this parameter is available for the login terminals.
When ViewType = SIP Server:
SIP Server ID: Identifier of SP (1-255)
SIP Server IP: IP Address of SP (Display only)
When ViewType = MPH:
MPH ID: Identifier of MPH (1-4095)
MPH LENS: Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) of MPH (Display only)
Output Data
The following data is displayed in the Detail data list.
When ViewType = Station:

Status: Status of the terminal
PH LENS: Line Equipment Number of PH
PH TYPE: Kind of PH
IP: IP address
MAC: MAC address
SEC: Encryption status for signaling data
IP KIND: Kind of IP Equipment
IP CH KIND: Channel Kind of VS-32
– 804 –
MPH LENS: Line Equipment Number of MPH

MPH ID: Identifier of MPH
When ViewType = PH Control:

IP: IP address
MAC: MAC address
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
UGN (NDM): User Group Number
TELN (NDM): Telephone Number
UGN (LDM): User Group Number
TELN (LDM): Telephone Number
PCN: PS Community Number
ERN: Calling Area Number
GRN: Group Number
CSN: IP-BS Number
GK ID: Gate Keeper Identifier
RT: Route Number
TK: Trunk Number
SIP ID: SIP Server ID
MPH ID: Identifier of MPH
PH KIND: Kind of PH
When ViewType = IPCS/IPZT:
IP: IP address
MAC: MAC address
When ViewType = Gate Keeper:

– 805 –
TN: Tenant Number

STN: Station Number
When ViewType = Voice Server:

IP: IP address
MAC: MAC address
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
RT: Route Number
TK: Trunk Number
PH TYPE: Kind of PH
When ViewType = SIP Server:

SIP Station IP: IP address of SIP Station
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
– 806 –

When ViewType = MPH:
PH TYPE: Kind of PH
REGMAX: Capacity of Registration
MGC PORT: Control Signal Port for TP
TERM PORT: Control Signal Port for IP Equipment
– 807 –
DISI: Display of IP Statistics Information

This command is used to output the statistic information corresponding to the LENS data of the designated
IPELC or IPTRK card.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Type of IPTRK Control [1-8]
Select the type from combo box;
1=Internal Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read
2=External Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read
3=Signal Control Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read
4=Voice Control Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Data Read
5=IP Trunk Status Read
6=Terminal Data of IPELC Read
7=Traffic Data of IPELC Read
8=Traffic Data of PHG Read (External Ether)
IPTEN: Line Equipment Number of IPTRK (available for TYPE=1-5)
PHGEN: Line Equipment Number of PHG (available for TYPE=8)
DST_IP: IP address of destination IPTRK/PHG (Available for TYPE=3)
LENS: Enter the Line Equipment Number of the IPELC card [six digits] (available for
TYPE=6-7)
KIND: Read Kind (available for TYPE=7)
1=Ether Driver Statistics data of circuit card
2=PROTIMS/RTP Packet Information
DATA CLEAR: Designated kind statistics data of circuit card clear flag (available for TYPE=7-8)
Clear Data/Not Clear Data
– 808 –
Note: If any wrong data is input, error message “SP H/I Error (Error Code 0x0D05)” is displayed.
Output Data
(a) When 1: Internal Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected;

Frequency of:
Memory Error (CSR0)

Missed Frame (CSR0)
Collision Error
Send Timeout
Send Delay
Retry Once (Send Error)
Retry more than Once (Send Error)
Retry 16 times (Send Error)
Carrier Loss
Late Collision
FIFO Underflow
Buffer Error
Receive Buffer Error
CRC Error
FIFO Overflow
Framing Error
Jabber Error
Data Transfer Error
Send Timeout
RMDI-STP bit Error
Illegal Long Packet Receive Error
Target FPC Abnormal
No Routing Target
Send Waiting Queue Overflow
TTL Overflow
Transfer Error by Line Break
IP Header Checksum Error
Receive Frame Length NG (over 1500 bytes)
Receive LLC Data NG
User Data Area NG
Broadcast Packet (Receive)
Broadcast Packet (Send)
Average Length of Packet (Receive)
Average Number of Packet (Receive)
Maximum Length of Packet (Receive)
Minimum Length of Packet (Receive)
Average Length of Packet (Send)
Average Number of Packet (Send)
Maximum Length of Packet (Send)
Minimum Length of Packet (Send)
– 809 –
(b) When 2: External Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected;

Frequency of:
Memory Error (CSR0)

Collision Error
Send Timeout
Send Delay
Retry Once (Send Error)
Retry More than Once (Send Error)
FIFO Underflow
Framing Error
RMDI-STP bit Error
IP Packet (Receive Total)
IP Packet (Receive Success)
IP Packet (Next Level Protocol Support)
IP Packet (Send Success)
IP Packet (Get Host data no assign)
Fragment Packet Resume Process Starting (Receive)
Fragment Packet Resume Process Complete (Receive)
Fragment Process Starting (Send)
Fragment Packet (Send Total)
ICMP Packet (Receive Total)
ICMP Packet (Receive Failure)
ICMP Type 0 (Receive Echo Reply)
ICMP Type 3 (Receive Destination Unreachable)
ICMP Type 4 (Receive Source Quench)
ICMP Type 5 (Receive Redirect)
ICMP Type 8 (Receive Echo Request)
ICMP Type 11 (Receive Time Exceeded)
ICMP Type 12 (Receive Parameter Problem)
ICMP Type 17 (Receive Address Mask Request)
ICMP Type 18 (Receive Address Mask Reply)
ICMP Packet (Send Total)
ICMP Packet (Send Failure)
ICMP Type 0 (Send Echo Reply)
ICMP Type 3 (Send Destination Unreachable)
ICMP Type 4 (Send Source Quench)
ICMP Type 5 (Send Redirect)
ICMP Type 12 (Send Parameter Problem)
ICMP Type 17 (Send Address Mask Request)
ICMP Type 18 (Send Address Mask Reply)
ICMP Socket
Active Open Executing (TCP Connection)
Passive Open Executing (TCP Connection)
TCP Connection Total (Active/Passive)
TCP Packet (Receive Total)
TCP Packet (Send Retry1)
TCP Header Checksum Error
RST Packet (Send)
– 810 –
Datagram (Receive Total)

UDP Packet (Receive Failure)
Datagram (Send Total)
Port Number and the Frequency of Status Mismatch
(c) When 3: Signal Control Traffic Data of IP Trunk Read is selected;
Target IP Address
Target Port Number
Self IP Address
Self Port Number
Average Delay Time of TCP Packet (Send)
Maximum Delay Time of TCP Packet (Send)
Average Delay Time of TCP Connection Open
Frequency of:
TCP Packet (Send)

TCP Packet (Receive)
TCP User Packet (Send Total)
TCP User Packet (Receive Total)
TCP User Packet (Select Failure)
TCP User Packet Byte (Select Failure)
TCP Packet (Send Retry)
TCP Link Lost
ICMP Packet (Send)
ICMP Packet (Receive)
(d) When 4: Voice Control Ether Traffic Data of IP Trunk Data Read is selected;
CNT
Target IP Address
Target Port Number (RTP Receive Port)
Session Start Time
Session End Time
Maximum Frequency of RTP and RTCP Packet (Self Node Send)
Maximum Frequency of RTP and RTCP Packet Octet (Self Node Send)
Maximum Loss Factor of Arrived Packet (Target Node Receive)
Maximum Frequency of Arrived Packet Loss (Target Node Receive)
Maximum Jitter Arrival Interval (Target Node Receive)
Maximum Frequency of RTP and RTCP Packet (Target Node Send)
Maximum Frequency of RTP and RTCP Packet Octet (Target Node Send)
Maximum Loss Factor of Arrived Packet (Self Node Receive)
Maximum Frequency of Arrived Packet Loss (Self Node Receive)
Maximum Jitter Arrival Interval (Self Node Receive)
Average Delay of Packet (Send and Receive)
Minimum Delay of Packet (Send and Receive)
Maximum Delay of Packet (Send and Receive)
Current Capacity of Jitter Buffer
Maximum Capacity of Jitter Buffer
Frequency of Abandoned Packet by Jitter Buffer Control
Option Data
– 811 –
(e) When 5: IP Trunk Status Read is selected;

CNT
Target IP Address
Target Port Number
Self Port Number
Active Mode
Connect Mode
Time of Connection Lost (minute)
Connection Status
(f) When 6: Terminal Data of IPELC Read is selected;
IP Address
Jitter Buffer Minimum (x 10 milliseconds)
Jitter Buffer Maximum (x 10 milliseconds)
Jitter Buffer Size (x 10 milliseconds)
Jitter Buffer Consumption (x 10 milliseconds)
(g) When TYPE = 7: Traffic Data of IPELC Read and KIND = 1 are selected;
[Receive]
Packets
CRC Error (RMD)
Collision
Ethernet Controller Framing Error
No Receive Buffer
No PCI Bridge SDRAM Space
Bus Parity Error
[Send]
Packets
No PCI Bridge SDRAM Space TMD
Ethernet Controller FIFO Underflow
Ethernet Controller Delay
Ethernet Controller Carrier Loss
Ethernet Controller Retry NG
Bus Parity Error
[Receive Packet Details]
Receive Packet (less than 64 bytes)

Receive Packet (64-127 bytes)
Receive Packet (more than 1528 bytes)
(h) When TYPE = 7: Traffic Data of IPELC Read and KIND = 2 are selected;
– 812 –
The number of packets to be sent out or received is displayed via channel 0 to 31 on PROTIMS
and RTP.
– 813 –
DISS: Display of Program Issue

This command is used to output program information in the main memory and the Port Microprocessor (PM)
memory into a printer and PCPro: The program information includes Version, Issue No., Date, etc.
Note: DISS command should be run during low traffic only.
2. Parameters
Input data
Type of Issue: Main Memory
Port Microprocessor
Module Group (Module Group Number) Note 1
Unit (Unit Number) Note 1
Output data
<When “Main Memory” is selected for “Type of Issue”>
Type (Program Name)
Version
Issue
Date (Year/month/Day)
<When “Port Microprocessor” is selected for “Type of Issue”>
Group (Group Number) [00-31]
SP/SW No. (SP/SW Number)[4 digits]
Issue
Note 1: This data is valid when Port Microprocessor is designated.
– 814 –
DLEN: Display of LENS Data

This command is used display the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN. For Hotel
system, Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)] displays
also.
2. Parameters
Input data
LENS Line Equipment Number
Output data
TN Tenant Number
STN: Physical Station Number (maximum six digits)
TEC: Telephone Equipment Number (1-31) (See Table 7-1.)
Table 7-1 Telephone Equipment Number Explanation

1 DP (10pps) 2 PB
3 DP/PB 4 DP (20 pps)
5-11 Not used 12 Dterm
13 Data Terminal via Dterm 14 Hot line
15 CAS line 16 Data Terminal via Data Module
17 18 Virtual Line Appearance
Not used
(for Dterm Multi-line)
19-22 Not used 23 ISDN Terminal
24-26 Not used 27 Eight Conference Equipment
28-31 Not used
RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)
SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)
ROOM CLASS: (0-15)
ANX: Annex (0-3)
– 815 –
G: 0=Ground
1=Underground
FLR: Floor (1-127)
RT: Internal Route Number (See Table 7-2.)
Table 7-2 Internal Route Number Explanation

901 Attendant Console 902 Originating Register Trunk
903 Incoming Register Trunk 904 MF Receiver
905 Sender Trunk DP/PB 906 PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service
907 AMP 908 Not used
909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 910, 911 Not used
913 Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON 914 Not Used
915 Night Attendant Console 916 MFC Register
917 MFC Sender 918 Not used
919 DLINT (for Hotel) 920-926
Modem Polling Trunk
MODEM (for Business)
927, 928 Not used 929 Data Signaling Trunk-Option
930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk 933 CRT
937 Caller ID Modem Sender Trunk 938 Data Link MUX TRUNK
939 Continuity Check Sender Trunk 940 Call Waiting Caller ID Register Trunk
941-947 Not used
TK: Trunk Number (1-768)
C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023)
C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095)
– 816 –
DLSL: Display of Lockout Station - LENS

This command is used to print the LENS of stations in lockout state.
2. Parameters
Input data
Type: Type of Printout (1-3)

1=Printout of all LEN in lockout
2=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Module Group
3=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Unit
MG: Module Group Number Note 1, Note 2
UNIT: Unit Number Note 2
Note 1: The parameter is valid only when TYPE=2.
Output data
Index Index Number
– 817 –
DLSS: Display of Lockout Station - Number

This command is used to print the stations in lockout state by station number.
2. Parameters
Input data
Type: Type of Printout (1-3)

1=Printout of all lockout stations
2=Printout of lockout stations by tenant
3=Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number.
TN: Tenant Number Note 1, Note 2
Start STN: Maximum six digitsNote 2
End STN: Maximum six digitsNote 2
Output data
CNT: Count
TN Tenant Number
STN Physical Station Number
– 818 –
DLSS_T: Display of Lock Out Station – Number – Telephone Number

This command is used to print out stations in lockout state, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is only
available at NCN (for FCCS network).
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Printout of all lockout stations

Printout of lockout stations by tenant
Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number
UGN: User Group Number Note 1, Note 2
Start TELN: First Telephone Number (maximum 16 digits) Note 2
End TELN: Last Telephone Number (maximum 16 digits) Note 2
Note 1: This parameter is valid when Type =Printout of lockout stations by tenant is selected.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when Type =Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station
numbers is selected.
Output Data

TN: Tenant Number
Start STN: First Physical Station Number
End STN: Last Physical Station Number
CNT: Count
UGN: User Group Number
TELN: Telephone Number (maximum 16 digits)
Buttons
Get: Get information on the lockout status.
– 819 –
DLTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM

This command, available at each Local Node (LN), is used to display the Telephone Number or other station
data by designating a specific LEN.
2. Parameters
Input Data
LENS: Line Equipment Number [six digits]
Output Data
TELN: Telephone Number [maximum 16 digits]
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number [maximum six digits]
– 820 –
DNTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM

This command, available at Network Control Node (NCN) only, is used to display the Telephone Number or
other station data by designating a specific FPC and LEN.
2. Parameters
Input Data
LENS: Line Equipment Number [six digits]
Output Data
UGN (NDM): User Group Number for NDM
TELN (NDM): Telephone Number for NDM [maximum 16 digits]
NID: Network ID Note
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number [maximum six digits]
TEC: Telephone Equipment Number [1-31]
UGN (LDM): User Group Number for LDM
TELN (LDM): Telephone Number for LDM
Note: Network ID (NID) is allocated automatically when the Module Group/Unit data is assigned by the
AFMU command. For detailed information, refer to the SV8500 FCCS Network System Manual.
– 821 –
DPHL: Display of PHL Package Status

This command is used to display the status of PHL.
2. Parameters
Output Data
PKG TYPE: PHA

PHD
PHE
Internal PHI
Internal PHD
Internal PHE
MPH
PHI
LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
REGMAX: Registration Maximum
REGCNT: Number of Connected Terminals
LOGIN CNT: Number of Login-Terminals
SPECIFIC HUNT: Number of Terminals assigned by ARICL
MPH ID: Index Number of MPH
Buttons
Get: Get information on a selected circuit card.
Stop: Stop the process.
– 822 –
DPKG: Display of Setting Port Package

This command is used to display the circuit card name accommodated in each Group of a specific UNIT.
Note: When using this command, make sure that each circuit card’s related database file has already been in-
stalled to the PCPro. (See the FLINST command for more information.)
Note: DPKG command should be run during low traffic only.
2. Parameters
Input Data
MG: Module Group Number [00-07]
UNIT: Unit Number [0-3]
Buttons
Get: Get information on mounted circuit cards.
Close: Exit this command.
Note: When the Input Data above is entered and the Get button is pressed, the related circuit card name is dis-
played on a Group basis. However, if the name is not found for some reason, the following mark may
appear in the relevant display field.
• # o Unidentifiable firmware type.
• ## o Data not found in FMID (database).
• ### o Group data not assigned.
• * o Circuit card name not found (for the card is in make-busy state, etc.).
– 823 –
DPSW: Display Package Switch Status

This command is used to display the following information on a Line/Trunk or Control circuit card:
When PCPro is in On-line Mode (=connected to the system)
• Current status of each switch
• Explanation of each switch function

When PCPro is in Off-line Mode (= not connected to the system)
• Explanation of each switch function
Note 1: When using this command, make sure that each circuit card’s related database file have already been
installed to the PCPro. (See the FLINST command for more information.)
2. Parameters
Input Data
KIND: Display Kind (selection)
• (PCPro=) On-line Mode
• (PCPro=) Off-line Mode
TYPE: Circuit Card Type (selection)
• Line Trunk Package
• Control Package
PMN: Port Micro Processor Number
PKG NAME: Circuit Card Name
LP: Local Partition Number [00-06 (even number only)] Note 2
SYSTEM: System Note 2
0=System 0
l=System 1
MG: Module Group Number [00-07] Note 2
UNIT: Unit Number [0-3] Note 2
– 824 –
ACT/STBY: ACT/STBY information Note 2
0=ACT
l=STBY
2=Not used
No: IOC Card Number [0/1] Note 2
Note 2: This parameter may appear when Control Package is selected in the TYPE parameter.
Buttons
Get: View the display data.
Next Page: View the next page data (when next page exists).
Previous Page: Return to the previous page data.

Output Data
PKG Name: Circuit Card Name
Firm Name/Issue: Firm Name/Issue of the circuit card

Each switch data is also displayed on the dedicated display page.
– 825 –
DPTR: Display of Capacity / License

This command is used to display the line capacity of the system and the license number of the Soft Phones.
Also license registration information such as the number of registered licenses and IP terminals is displayed for
each IP terminal type.
Note: In addition to System Capacity License and IP Line Capacity, the number of Soft Phone Licenses is re-
quired to be obtained.
2. Parameters
Read Type: CAPACITY

LICENSES
<When CAPACITY is selected>
Capacity Type:
System Capacity
Client License
Capacity [0-4294967295]
Capacity and number of Client License provided for the System will be indicated.
<When LICENSES is selected>
Device Type:
Hard Phone Type-A
Softphone Type-A
Standard SIP
Standard SIP Softphone
Number of installed Licenses [0-65535]
Number of programed IP Ports [0-65535] Note 3
Note 3: The total number of IP terminals programed for each device listed below will be indicated for Hard
Phone Type-A. “-” will be indicated for other three devices.
• Hard Phone Type-A
• Softphone Type-A
• Standard SIP
• Standard SIP Softphone
Number of registered Licenses [0-65535]
– 826 –
DSTN: Display of Station Data

This command is used to display the registered Station Data corresponding to the designated Tenant and Station
Number. In addition, the information of Hot Line, Dterm Key Layout, Hunting, and Call Pickup, etc., can also
be displayed as the data related to the designated stations.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number [0-9, #, * (maximum six digits)]
Buttons
For display data selection
SHP: Station Hunting Group-Pilot Note
KYD: Key Data for Dterm Note
CPG: Call Pickup Group Note
CPE: Call Pickup Expand Group Note
PHN: Phantom Station Number Note
SHC: Station Hunting-Circular Note
SHU: Station Hunting-UCD Note
HLS: Hot Line Station Note
Note: When the designated station has any of the above listed data, the corresponding button(s) can be
selected. If the data is necessary, click the button(s).
For execution order
Get: View the display data.
Output Data (by Parameters)
ETN: Effective Tenant Number
– 827 –
LENS: Line Equipment Number (six digits)
l=DP (10pps) 2=PB
3=DP/PB 4=DP (20pps)
5-11=Not used 12=Dterm
13=Data Terminal via Dterm 14=Hot Line
15=CAS Line 16=Data Terminal via Data Module
17=Not used 18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)
19-22=Not used 23=ISDN Terminal
24-26=Not used 27=8 Conference Equipment
28-31=Not used
– 828 –
DTELN: Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM

This command is used to display the registered station data corresponding to a specified User Group Number
(UGN) and Telephone Number (TELN). The following data related to the Number Group can be displayed by
clicking the selection button for each data. This command can be used only when logging in to Network Control
Node (NCN).
• ACPGN: Call Pickup Group (NDM)
• ACPEN: Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM)
• ASHUN: Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM)
• ASHCN: Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM)
• AHLSN: Hot Line Station (NDM)
• ASHPN: Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM)
• AKYD: Key Data for Dterm
2. Parameters
Input Data
TELN: Telephone Number
Output Data

TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
LENS: Line Equipment Number (six digits)
MG: Module Group Number
UNIT: Unit Number
G: Group Number
LV: Level Number
TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)
RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)
SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15)
– 829 –
Selection Button
CPGN: Call Pickup Group (NDM)
CPEN: Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM)
SHUN: Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM)
SHCN: Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM)
HLSN: Hot Line Station (NDM)
SHPN: Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM)
KYD: Key Data for Dterm
– 830 –
DTF101: Display of Terminal Traffic Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned
by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105
Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201
Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303
Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answer Peg Count-DTF501
Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602
Traffic Data 7: IP Service Peg Count - DTF701
IP Service Traffic - DTF702
Traffic Data 8: SIP Service Peg Count - DTF801
Each Server Peg Count
– 831 –
DTF102: Display of Route Traffic Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=2 (Route Traffic) assigned
2. Parameters
– 832 –
DTF103: Display of Station Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=3 (Station Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
– 833 –
DTF104: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned
2. Parameters
– 834 –
DTF105: Display of Route Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=5 (Route Peg Count) assigned
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 5: Attendant Ans. Peg Count-DTF501
– 835 –
DTF201: Display of Service Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=6 (Service Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 836 –
DTF301: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=8 (UCD Route Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 837 –
DTF302: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=9 (UCD Group Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 838 –
DTF303: Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=10 (UCD Station Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 839 –
DTF501: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=15 (ATT Answering Peg
Count) assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
– 840 –
DTF601: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=18 (Connection Route Peg
Count) assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
– 841 –
DTF602: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=19 (Connection Route
Traffic) assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
– 842 –
DTF701: Display of IP Service Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=20 (IP Service Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 843 –
DTF702: Display of IP Service Traffic Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=21(IP Service Traffic)
2. Parameters
– 844 –
DTF801: Display of SIP Service Peg Count Data

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=22(SIP Service Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 845 –
DTF101N: Display of Terminal Traffic Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1: Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N
Traffic Data 2: Service Peg Count-DTF201N
Traffic Data 3: UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N
Traffic Data 5: Attendant Answer Peg Count-DTF501N
Traffic Data 6: Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N
– 846 –
DTF102N: Display of Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=2 (Route Traffic) assigned
2. Parameters
– 847 –
DTF103N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=3 (Station Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
– 848 –
DTF104N: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned
2. Parameters
– 849 –
DTF105N: Display of Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=5 (Route Peg Count) assigned
2. Parameters
– 850 –
DTF201N: Display of Service Peg Count Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=6 (Service Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 851 –
DTF301N: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=8 (UCD Route Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 852 –
DTF302N: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=9 (UCD Group Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 853 –
DTF303N: Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=10 (UCD Station Peg Count)
2. Parameters
– 854 –
DTF501N: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=15 (ATT Answering Peg
Count) assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
– 855 –
DTF601N: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for FCCS Network
This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=18 (Connection Route Peg
Count) assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
– 856 –
DTF602N: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for FCCS Network

This command is used to display the result of traffic measurement data for TYPE=19 (Connection Route
Traffic) assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
– 857 –
FLINST: File Install

This command is used to install the DPSW-dedicated database files to your PCPro. This command is necessary
to provide each circuit card’s various information (such as circuit card name, equipped switch names, etc.) when
your system uses the DPSW/DPKG command.
2. Parameters
Input Data
None
Buttons
Copy:Start the data file install.
Exit:Exit this command.
<Data Install Procedure>
(1) Start up the FLINST command from the Start menu.
(2) Initial Display of the FLINST command appears. Make sure the proper Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) name is
selected in the FDD parameter.
(3) Click the Copy button. A message appears, indicating insert FD into the FDD.
(4) Insert the FD into the FDD of the PCPro. Click OK.
(5) File copy starts automatically. The Copy End message appears upon completion.
(6) Click OK. Another message asks whether the next FD is to be installed or not.
(7) Click OK.
(8) A message, requiring insertion of another FD into the FDD drive is displayed. Insert the FD into the FDD,
and click OK.
(9) File copy starts automatically. The Copy End message appears upon completion.
(10) Click OK. A message asks whether the next (fourth) FD is to be installed.
(11) Click Cancel.
– 858 –
HDFP: HDD Format of SV8500

This command is used to format the Flash card of SV8500.
2. Parameters
Input Data (Selection by check)
System 0: HDD of System 0

System 1: HDD of System 1
Buttons
Execute: Execute the formatting.
– 859 –
IPAN: Display of IP machine status display function

This command is used to analyze the connection status between MGC and IP devices; executing ping test,
verifying the station data, and displaying IP equipment information.
(a) Item to be displayed on “Note” field differs by which Tab is chosen.

(b) When “Stn Verify” tab has been chosen, result will be displayed on “Status” field. Meanings of each
item are as shown below.
Display Meaning
Non Data coincide

Add Adding new station data
Change Changing LENS or IP Address
Delete Deleting station data
(c) When you execute “ping” in this command, it is only System-LAN2 that you can set as an origin of
ping packet transmission.
2. Parameters
[Input Data]
MGC (origin of ping packet transmission)
System-0/System-1/Both system
Processing type
Individual/All equipment Note
The number of times of ping
One Time/Four Times
Change button is provided. Click the radio button SP or LP when changing the origin of ping packet
transmission. Enter the LP number when LP is selected.
Note: When the processing type “All equipment” is selected, all the connected device data on the tabs of MGC,
IP Terminal, Package, and PHC Point Code are intended to affect. When “Individual” is selected, op-
eration is executed on the basis of each tab.
– 860 –
[Output Data]
System-0 operating status Note 1
System-1 operating status Note 1
System-Act IP address Note 2
System-0 IP address Note 2 Note 3
System-1 IP address Note 2 Note 3
Subnet Mask (default: 255.255.0.0) Note 2
Note: Information of LAN2 will be displayed.
Note 1: The color for the operating status means as shown below.
COLOR STATUS ping

Green Operating normal (ACT) Available
Yellow Operating normal (STBY) Available
Red Stop Not available
Gray Not mounted Not available
Note 2: When the IP address of MGC is not assigned by the ADTM command or assigned to 0.0.0.0, the default
data is indicated as follows.
SP/LP LP Number Default IP Address (System-0) Default IP Address (System-1)

SP - 172. 16. 253. 0 172. 16. 253. 1
LP 0 172. 16. 253. 30 172. 16. 253. 31
LP 4 172. 16. 253. 38 172. 16. 253. 39
LP 8 172. 16. 253. 40 172. 16. 253. 41
LP 12 172. 16. 253. 48 172. 16. 253. 49
LP 16 172. 16. 253. 50 172. 16. 253. 51
LP 20 172. 16. 253. 58 172. 16. 253. 59
LP 24 172. 16. 253. 60 172. 16. 253. 61
LP 28 172. 16. 253. 68 172. 16. 253. 69
Note 3: In single configuration, the blank is indicated.

• Buttons
– 861 –
Get:Reads out and displays the connected IP device data.
Ping Execute:Executes ping test to verify that a particular IP address exists and can accept request, and to
see how long it takes to get response. Ping test is executed to the IP address marked in the check box on
the list.
File output:Outputs the listed data as a CSV file format.
Exit:Exits the command window.
<MGC tab>
[Output Data]
MGC Kind:1U MGC
System-ACT/System-0/System-1
IP Address Note 4
Ping result (system-0)
Note 4: When the IP address of MGC is not assigned by the ADTM command or assigned to 0.0.0.0, only Lan2
indicates the default data.
<IP Terminal tab>
[Input Data]
View Type
• Equipment Kind
LENS Input Type: All / Collective
Specify the range of LENS in the START and END box when Collective is selected.
Click the type of target IP device. The check box “All Equipment” is provided to select all the types.
• Terminal
DtermIP
Soft Phone (SP20) Note 5
Inaset
Soft Phone (SP21)
Soft Phone (SP30) Note 5
• Media Converter
– 862 –
Analog MC
• CS
IPCS/IPZT
• Gateway
Gate Keeper
SIP Server
• VPS
IPVPS
• Media Gateway
ISDN Trunk (BRI)
ISDN Trunk (PRI 1.5M)
ISDN Trunk (PRI 2M)
SIP-MG
MG (COT)
MC-MG (7COT)
MG (6COT)
B2BUA-SIP GW-4ch
B2BUA-SIP GW-32ch
• Multi-Function Server
Voice Server
Multi-Protocol Handler
• SIP
SIP Multi-Function Telephone
SIP Soft-Phone
SIP-VPS
• SIP Media Gateway

ISDN Trunk (BRI) [SIP]
ISDN Trunk (PRI 1.5M) [SIP]
ISDN Trunk (PRI 2M) [SIP]
MG(6COT) [SIP]
MG-T1 [SIP]
– 863 –
• Other
SIP Station
• SIP Media Converter

8MC [SIP]
Note 5: To display DtermSP30 used as ACD agent position, select Soft Phone (SP20).
• Station
• “Station Kind” Field
• Station Number
Specify the range of Tenant Number in the START TN and END TN
Specify the range of Station Number in the START STN and END TN
• Telephone Number (NDM)

START UGN and END UGN (fixed to 1)
Specify the range of Telephone Number in the START TELN and END TELN
• Telephone Number (LDM)

START UGN and END UGN (fixed to 1)
Specify the range of Telephone Number in the START TELN and END TELN
• Trunk
Specify the range of Route Number in the START RT and END RT
Specify the range of Trunk Number in the START TK and END TK
• IPCS/IPZT
PCN: PCS / PHS Community Number [1-1024]
Specify the range of Calling Area Number in the START ERN and END ERN [1-32]
Specify the range of Group Number in the START GRN and END GRN [1-8]
Specify the range of IPCS Number in the START CSN / ZTN and END CSN / ZTN [1-32]
• GateKeeper
GKID: Gate Keeper ID [1-255]
• PH Control
Specify the PH LENS.
– 864 –
Note: Click the “Version detailed display” button to display the detail firmware information of the selected PH
card on the list.
• SIP Server
Specify the SIP Server ID [1-255].
• MPH
Specify the Multi-Protocol Handler ID[1-4095]
[Output Data]
Items to be displayed will vary depending on the View Type chosen. Items displayed for each View Type are shown in the
table listed below.
Equipment Station Trunk IPCS/IPZT Gatekeeper PH Control SIP Server MPH

Kind
Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment Equipment

-
Name Name Name Name Name Name Name
IP CH KIND IP CH KIND IP CH KIND - - IP CH KIND - -
IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address -
LOC-ID LOC-ID LOC-ID LOC-ID LOC-ID LOC-ID LOC-ID -
MAC Address MAC Address MAC Address MAC Address - MAC Address - -
SEC SEC SEC SEC - SEC - -
LENS LENS LENS LENS LENS LENS LENS LENS
TN TN Note 1 - - TN TN TN -
STN STN Note 1 - - STN STN STN -
UGN(NDM) UGN(NDM) UGN(NDM) UGN(NDM) UGN(NDM)

- - -
Note2
TELN(NDM) TELN(NDM) TELN(NDM) TELN(NDM) TELN(NDM)

- - -
Note 2
UGN(LDM) UGN(LDM) UGN(LDM) UGN(LDM) UGN(LDM)

- - -
Note 3
TELN(LDM) TELN(LDM) TELN(LDM) TELN(LDM) TELN(LDM)

- - -
Note 3
RT - RT - - RT - -
TK - TK - - TK - -
Line Status - Line Status - - Line Status - -
Operation Operation Operation

- - - - -
Mode Mode Mode
PCN - - PCN - PCN - -
ERN - - ERN - ERN - -
– 865 –
Equipment
Station Trunk IPCS/IPZT Gatekeeper PH Control SIP Server MPH
Kind
GRN - - GRN - GRN - -
CSN/ZTN - CSN/ZTN - CSN/ZTN - -
GKID GKID - - GKID GKID - -
SIP Server ID SIP Server ID - - - SIP Server ID SIP Server ID -
MPH LENS MPH LENS - - - MPH LENS - -
MPH ID MPH ID - - - MPH ID - -
PHIN PHIN - - PHIN - PHIN -
PH LENS PH LENS PH LENS PH LENS PH LENS PH LENS PH LENS -
PH TYPE PH TYPE PH TYPE PH TYPE PH TYPE PH TYPE PH TYPE -
Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware Firmware

- - -
Information Information Information Information Information
SP/SW No. SP/SW No. SP/SW No. SP/SW No. - SP/SW No. - -
ISS ISS ISS ISS - ISS - -
Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware Hardware

- - -
Information Information Information Information Information
ISS ISS ISS ISS - ISS - -
Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result
-
(system-0) (system-0) (system-0) (system-0) (system-0) (system-0) (system-0)
Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result Ping Result
-
(system-1) (system-1) (system-1) (system-1) (system-1) (system-1) (system-1)
- - - - - - - REGMAX
- - - - - - - MGC PORT
- - - - - - - TERM PORT
- - - - - - - MPH LENS
Note 1: This item appears only when “Station Number” was chosen for “Station kind” field.
Note 2: This item appears only when “Telephone Number (NDM)” was chosen for “Station kind” field.
Note 3: This item appears only when “Telephone Number (LDM)” was chosen for “Station kind” field.
– 866 –
Meanings of each item is shown below:
Equipment
Name of the equipment. GRN Group Number
Name
IP CH KIND Kind of channel for VS-32. GKID Gatekeeper ID
IP Address IP Address SIP Server ID SIP Server ID
LOC-ID Location ID MPH LENS MPH Accommodation Location Information (LENS)
MAC
MAC Address MPH ID MPH ID
Address
SEC Encryption status for voice data PHIN Virtual Accommodation Location
LENS Accommodation Location Information (LENS) PH LENS Accommodation Location Information of PH
TN Tenant Number PH TYPE Type of PH
Firmware
STN Station Number Firmware Information
Information
UGN(NDM) User Group Number SP/SW No. Service Package/Software Number
TELN(NDM) Telephone Number ISS Firmware Version Issue
Hardware
UGN(LDM) User Group Number Hardware Information
Information
TELN(LDM) Telephone Number ISS Hardware Version Issue
Ping Result
RT Route Number Ping result of system-0 side
(system-0)
Ping Result
TK Trunk Number Ping result of system-1 side
(system-1)
Line Status Line Status REGMAX Maximum Number of Registration Permitted
Operation
Operation Mode TERM PORT Port Number used for IP Terminal Control
Mode
PCN PHS Community Number MGC PORT Port Number used for TP Control.
ERN Calling Area Number MPH LENS Accommodation Location Information for MPH
– 867 –
<Package tab>
[Input Data]
Specify the range of LENS in the START PH LENS and END PH LENS [five digits].
[Output Data]
PH LENS
IP Address
PH Type: PHA, PHE, PHD, PHC, IPPAD, PHI, Internal PHE, Internal PHD, Internal PHC, Internal PHI
REGMAX: The maximum number of registration
REG CNT: The number of terminals under the registration of the corresponding PH card
LOGIN CNT: The number of terminals logging in to the MGC
Firmware Information Note
SP / SW Number
ISS
Note: Click the “Detail” button to display the detail firmware information of the selected PH card on the list.
– 868 –
<PHC Point Code tab>
[Input Data]
Specify the range of Point Code in the START Remote PC and END Remote PC [1-16367].
[Output Data]
Office: Self office / Destination office
PC: Point Code of the office
IP Address
PH LENS: LENS of the PHC card in the self office (displayed for self office only)
<SR-MGC tab>
[Output Data]
SR-MGC Number [1-255]
IP Address
Connect CNT: The number of connected IP terminals in the remote office
Office Name
– 869 –
<IP Address Input tab>
[Input Data]
Set Type: Input/File
• When Input is selected:

IP Address Input Type
When Individual is selected:
IP Address: Enter the target IP address.
When Collective is selected:
Enter the range of IP addresses in the START IP Address and END IP Address boxes.
• When File is selected:

File Name
Select a saved CSV file by pressing “Reference” button for specifying the target IP addresses. The
kind of CSV file is indicated in the File Kind box. Note
Note: CSV files output by the STN Verify tab cannot be selected.
[Output Data]
IP Address
Note
– 870 –
<STN Verify tab>
[Input Data]
Verify Type: File l Memory / File l File
Verify Key Data: Station Number / Telephone Number (NDM) / Telephone Number (LDM)
File 1: Select the CSV file clicking the “Reference” button.
File 2: Select the CSV file clicking the “Reference” button (for the Verify Type File l File only).
[Output Data]
File 1 / File preservation time: The directory and the saved time of the selected CSV file is displayed.
Data: This field shows the search conditions when the CSV file is output.
File 2 / File preservation time: The directory and the saved time of the selected CSV file is displayed.
Status
TN (for the Verify Key Data “Station Number”)
STN (for the Verify Key Data “Station Number”)
UGN (for the Verify Key Data “Telephone Number (NDM)” or “Telephone Number (LDM)”
TELN (for the Verify Key Data “Telephone Number (NDM)” or “Telephone Number (LDM)”
LENS
IP Address
– 871 –
<Registration Log tab>
[Input Data]
LENS Input Type: All / Collective
Specify the range of LENS in the START and END box when Collective is selected.
• Equipment kind [Registration/License Capacity]
• Terminal
DtermIP
Soft Phone (SP20)
Inaset
Soft Phone (SP21)
Soft Phone (SP30)
[Output Data]
Equipment Name
IP CH KIND: Kind of channel for VS-32
IP Address
LOC-ID: Location ID
MAC Address
LENS: Accommodation Location Information (LENS)
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
RT: Route Number
– 872 –
TK: Trunk Number
ISDN STATUS: Line Status
MODE: Operation mode
PCN: PHS Community Number
GRN: Group Number
CSN/ZTN: IP-BS Number
GKID: Gatekeeper ID
SIP Server ID
MPH LENS: MPH Accommodation Location Information (LENS)
MPH ID
PHIN: Virtual Accommodation Location
PH LENS: Accommodation Location Information of PH
PH TYPE: Type of PH
Status: Registration Status
REG Result: Result of Registration
Channel Status: Channel Status
Error Factor
[Buttons]
Get: Get information of selected Equipment Kind of Registration Log. Note 1 Note 2
Note 1: To display Equipment Kind [Registration/License Count], choose the equipment from the list of Equip-
ment, and get the registration information with pressing “Get” button. When the information is ob-
tained with this command, if registration figure is “0”, Equipment Kind [Registration/License Count]
will be displayed.
Note 2: To delete Equipment Kind [Registration/License Count], change the location of terminal accommoda-
tion or change the Equipment Kind.
– 873 –
MBCT: Make-Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM

This command is used to set/reset the make-busy state of a connection trunk.
2. Parameters
Input Data
C_RT: Connection Route Number [1-1023]

C_TK: Trunk Number [1-4095]
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy (Outgoing)
– 874 –
MBCTC:Make-Busy of Connection Trunk-Continuous for LDM

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of connection trunks. By using this command, multiple
trunks can be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a Connection route designated in C_TK
parameter.
2. Parameters
Input data
C_RT: Route Number
C_TK: Trunk Number Note
MB: Make-Busy Information (0-2)
0=Make Idle
2=Make Busy (Bothway)
Note: Multiple trunks can be assigned simultaneously per a route designated in TK parameter.
– 875 –
MBLE: Make-Busy of LENS

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of Line Equipment Numbers (LENS).
2. Parameters
Input data

0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
– 876 –
MBPH: Make Busy of PHL Package for LDM

This command is used to set the make-busy state of the PHL circuit card due to a card replacement. Executing
this command transfers the terminals belonging to the PHL circuit card to another PHL card which has unused
ports. Once the registration is transferred to another PHL circuit card, and make-busy on the previous circuit
card is cancelled, the registrations do not move back to the previous one. Selecting the circuit card lists the
related extension numbers and status on the display.
Note 1: If the port number on the PHL circuit card to be transferred is not enough, the lines over restriction
become disabled.
Note 2: This command is not available for IP PAD.
Note 3: This command is not available for Internal PHD.
2. Parameters
Input data
UNIT: Unit Number
GROUP: Group Information
MB: Make-Busy Information
Make Idle: Set a circuit card to idle status
Make Busy: Set a circuit card to busy status
MB Request: Make-Busy Request
Normal:
The registrations of idle terminals on the applicable PHL card are moved to another PHL circuit
card while the busy terminals remain on the existing PHL card until they become idle. After the
busy terminals are released, their registrations are moved to another PHL circuit card as the idle
terminals were.
Compulsion release:
The registrations of all terminals on the applicable PHL card are compulsorily moved to another
PHL, regardless of the status.
– 877 –
Output data
After clicking “Get” button, the latest status is displayed at ten second intervals.
PKG TYPE: Circuit Card Name
STATUS: Status of the IP Station
PCN: PS Community Number
GRN: Group Number
CSN: CS Number
GKID: Gate Keeper ID
SSID: SIP Server ID
– 878 –
MBPM: Make-Busy of Port Microprocessor

This command is used to set and reset the make-busy state of the circuit card that contains the port
microprocessor. This setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. If the location of the
circuit card containing the port microprocessor is specified in this command, the operating state of all circuit
cards in the associated unit is displayed.
2. Parameters
Input data
Unit: Unit Number
Group: Group Information
Output data

0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
Note: Idle/Busy status can be displayed and assigned by the MB parameter.
– 879 –
MBRT: Make-Busy of Route

This command is used to assign IDLE/BUSY status for all the trunks in the route designated.
2. Parameters
Input data
RT: Route Number of the external route/internal route. Table 7-1 provides the meaning of
the internal route number.

0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
Table 7-1 Route Number Explanation

901 Attendant/Desk Console 902 Originating Register Trunk
909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 910-912 Not used
913 Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON 914 Not used
915 Night Attendant Console 916 MFC Register
919-926 Modem 927, 928 Not used
929 Data Signaling Trunk-Option 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk
931-947 Not used
– 880 –
MBRT_LR:Make-Busy of Route - Logical Route Number

This command is used to assign Idle/Busy status of all the trunks in the logical route designated. Route number
of the MBRT command can be assigned by using logical route.
Note: When logging in to the NCN (Network Control Node), the data of other LN (Local Node) can be changed.
If logging in to a LN, only the DM of self-Node can be changed by this command.
2. Parameters
Input data
LGRT: Logical route number allocated to the external/internal route. Refer to the MBRT com-
mand as to the Internal route number and its meaning. Note 1

Make Idle
Make Busy
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code [1-253] Note 2
Note 1: Prior to this command, logical route number must be allocated by using the ALRTN command.
Note 2: After entering attributes in LGRT and MB then clicking Write button, this parameter becomes avail-
able.
– 881 –
MBSM: Make-Busy of System Message Printout

This command is used to allow and inhibit the system message printer to output system messages.
2. Parameters
Input data
Port No.: Port Number of the printer
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
– 882 –
MBST: Make-Busy of Station

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations.
2. Parameters
Input data
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Physical Station Number (a maximum of five digits for Business system, and six digits for Hotel sys-
tem.)
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
– 883 –
MBST_T: Make-Busy of Station – Telephone Number

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations, by using Telephone Numbers. This
command is only available at NCN (for FCCS network).
2. Parameters
Input Data

TELN: Telephone Number (maximum 16 digits)
Output Data
FPC: Fusion Point Code (1-253) Note

TN: Tenant Number Note
(a maximum of five digits for Business system, and six digits for Hotel system)
Note
Note: This data is for display only.
Buttons
Get: Get information on the station.
Set: Execute the IDLE/BUSY performance.
– 884 –
MBTC: Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. By using this command, multiple trunks can
be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a route designated in RT parameter.
2. Parameters
Input Data
RT: Route Number

TK: Trunk Number Note Note:
0=Make Idle
Note: Multiple trunks can be assigned simultaneously per a route designated in RT parameter.
– 885 –
MBTC_LR: Make-Busy of Trunk-Continuous – Logical Route Number

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. By using this command, multiple trunks can
be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a logical route designated in LGRT parameter. Route
number of the MBTC command can be assigned by using logical route.
Note: When logging in to the Network Control Node (NCN), the data of other Local Node (LN) can be changed.
If logging in to a LN, only the DM of self-node can be changed by this command.
2. Parameters
Input Data
LGRT: Logical route number allocated to the Route Number. Note 1
START
END
0=Make Idle
Note 1: Prior to this command, logical route number must be allocated by using the ALRTN command.
Note 2: The status of plural trunks can be changed simultaneously, according to the range of trunk number as-
signed and per a logical route.
Output Data
RT: Route Number
– 886 –
MBTK: Make-Busy of Trunk

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks.
2. Parameters
RT: Route Number

TK: Trunk Number
0=Make Idle
2=Make Busy (Bothway) Note
Note: For Business system, the data is valid for the ACIS/CCIS line (TCL=4, 5, 7). For a Hotel system, the data
is invalid.
– 887 –
MBTK_LR: Make - Busy of Trunk – Logical Route Number

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. Route number of the MBTK command can
be assigned by using logical route number.
Note: When logging in to the Network Control Node (NCN), the data of other Local Node (LN) can be changed.
If logging in to a LN, only the DM of self-node can be changed by this command.
2. Parameters
Input Data
LGRT: Logical route number [1-899] Note 1
0=Make Idle
2=Make Busy (Bothway) Note 2
Note 1: Prior to this command, a logical route number must be allocated to the route number by the ALRTN
command.
Note 2: For a Business system, the data is valid for the ACIS/CCIS line (TCL=4, 5, 7). For a Hotel system, the
data is invalid.
Output Data
RT: Route Number
STATUS: Make Busy Status for MB=2
Self trunk MB
Other trunk MB
Both trunk MB
Self trunk MB ready
Both trunk MB ready
– 888 –
MEM_HDD: Data Control Between Memory and HDD

This command is used to load the Office Data from the SV8500 Flash Card to the SV8500 Memory, back up
the Office Data from the SV8500 Memory to the SV8500 Flash Card, and verify the Office Data between the
SV8500 Memory and the SV8500 flash Card.
2. Parameters
Input Data
Direction Select: Memory to Hard Disk

Hard Disk to Memory
Verify HDD against MEM
Data Type Select: Data Memory Note 1

Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding (JAPAN only)
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Key
Number Sharing Note 2
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
One Touch Speed Calling for DtermIP
SPD Name Data
H.323 Terminal Call Transfer (Not used)
Message Area ID Data
SR-MGC Data
SIP Terminal Call Transfer Note 4
Mobility Access Data
Day/Night Data
Local Phone book Data
Soft Switch Data
LP Select: Designate the LP number. (Required when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User As-
sign Key, Number Sharing, Call Block, ICB and DR, Expanded Speed Calling, Call
Forwarding-Logout, or Mobility Access Data is selected in the Data Type Select param-
eter.)
All Select: Check this box when selecting all the data types listed in the Data Type Select field.
When individually selecting only a specific number of the data types, leave the box un-
checked (and specify the TYPEs in the Data Type Select field).
Auto Verify Afterward:Check this box to verify the data automatically after backup or restore.
– 889 –
Auto Scroll: Check this box to refresh the Processing Status Log.
< For Redundant Data Memory Backup on Individual Hard Drive > Note 3
Click Option in the menu bar, and select Drive Select. A window, with the following parameter, appears.
In the window, designate the affected Drive:
Office Data: Drive B (default setting)

Drive C
Drive B/C
Note 1: When Data Memory is selected, Network Data Memory (NDM) and Local Data Memory (LDM) are
also loaded/backed up/verified simultaneously.
Note 2: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concerning Dual Station Calling Over FCCS is also
installed/saved/verified simultaneously.
Note 3: This data must be specified only when using the Redundant Data Memory Backup on Individual Hard
Drive function. When specifying the data here (to use the function), consider the following:
•When Drive B/C is specified in the Office Data parameter while Hard Disk to Memory or Verify HDD
against MEM is designated in the Direction Select parameter, the data is automatically adjusted as
Drive B.
Note 4: This data is for WLAN Handset (MH Series) and SIP standard terminals.
Buttons
Start: Execute the specified file load/backup/verification.
Close: Exit the command.
– 890 –
MEM_HDD_N: Data Control Between Memory and HDD for Fusion Network
This command, available at the NCN only, is used to save/verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of all
Local Nodes to the Flash Card of each same node.
Note: You can install/verify the data onto the Flash Card of all the node on the FCCS network (Maximum 64
nodes).
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select: Memory to Hard Disk

Data Type Selection: Data Memory Note 1

Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Soft Key
Number Sharing Note 2
ACD Data Memory
Call Block
ICB and DR
Expanded Speed Calling
Call Forwarding-Logout
One Touch Speed Calling for DtermIP
Message Area ID Data
SR-MGC Data
SIP Terminal Call Transfer Note 4
Mobility Access Data
Day/Night Data
Local Phone book Data
All Select: Check this box when selecting all the data types listed in the “Data Type Select” field.
When individually selecting a specific number of data types, leave the box unchecked
(and specify the type(s) in the “Data Type Select” field).
LP Select: The parameter is valid when “Call Forwarding”, “Speed Calling”, “User Assign Soft
Key”, “Number Sharing”, “Call Block”, “ICB and DR”, “Expanded Speed Calling”,
“Call Forwarding-Logout” or “Mobility Access Data” is designated.
Auto Verify Afterward: Automatically verify the data after being copied.
Auto Scroll: Refresh the Processing Status Log
< For “Redundant Data Memory Backup on Individual Hard Drive” > Note 3
– 891 –
Click “Option” in the menu bar, and select “Drive Select”. Then, a window, with the following parameter,
appears. On the window, designate the affected Drive:
Office Data: Drive B (default setting)

Drive C
Drive B/C
Note 1: When Data Memory is selected, Network Data Memory (NDM) and Local Data Memory (LDM) are
also saved/verified simultaneously.
Note 2: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concerning Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS is also
saved/verified automatically.
Note 3: This data must be specified only when using the “Redundant Data Memory Backup on Individual Hard
Drive” function. When using this feature, consider the following:
•When “Drive B/C” is specified in the “Office Data” parameter when “Verify HDD against MEM”
has been selected for in the “Direction Select” parameter, the data is written to Drive-D only.
Note 4: This data is for WLAN Handset (MH Series) and SIP standard terminals.
Output data
Information:
FPC of Node in which saving/verifying is executed
Result of the execution
Direction:
MEM to HDD
Data Type:
Selected Data Type
– 892 –
MFCH: Make Busy of FCCH

This command is used to set or reset the make-busy state of FCH card.
2. Parameters
Input Data
FCHN: FCH Number [1-255]

0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
– 893 –
PMBU: Port Microprocessor Back Up

This command is used to save the contents of the Port Microprocessor (PM) onto a Floppy Disk (FD) or verify
them. Information of firmware (Program Code) also appears on the screen.
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select: Port Microprocessor to PCPro
Verify Port Microprocessor
Verify PM with Error List Auto Verify Afterward can be performed when designating Port Micropro-
cessor to PCPro.
PM Information:Module Group
Unit
Group
Data Size (1-6)
1=2 kbytes
2=4 kbytes
3=8 kbytes
4=16 kbytes
5=32 kbytes
6=64 kbytes
Output data
Office
SP Number: Information of firmware (Program Code)
SP Issue: Information of firmware (Program Code)
– 894 –
RALM: Release Alarm

This command is used to clear the fault indications.
2. Parameters
Input data
WRT:
Y=Alarm is released
N=Not released
RETURN TO MENU?:
Y=Return to MENU
N=Start operation again
Output data
Alarms Released
– 895 –
RALMN: Release Alarm for NDM

This command, available at the NCN only, is used to clear the fault indications of all the Nodes by clicking the
release button on the display.
2. Parameters
Output data
FPC: FPC of alarm released nodes
STATUS: Result of releasing the alarm (OK/NG)
– 896 –
RDPD: Removal of Dterm IP Password

This command is used to delete the password of IP Enabled Dterm. The IP Enabled Dterm assigns the password
for logging in to the SV8500 for security use. This is a command to delete the IP Enabled Dterm’s password
from PCPro side.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: Input Station Type
STN: Station Number

When STN is selected in Type
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number (Physical Number)

When TELN is selected in Type
Output Data
DPD: Password for IP Enabled Dterm
Note: When the IP Enabled Dterm has already assigned a password, for personal security, asterisks (*) are
displayed on the screen instead of the password.
Buttons
Get: Display a password assigned on the station/tenant.

Delete: Delete a password assigned on the station/tenant.
– 897 –
RINZ: Route Initialize

This command is used to initialize virtual trunk data used for Protocol Handler (PH) cards. When in-progress
virtual trunk is not able to recover from a fault, this command is used to disconnect the in-progress call forcefully
due to the recovery.
2. Parameters
Input data
RT: Route Number

Details of a color:
Not Assign: GRAY (Status/Result2: 0)
Idle: WHITE (Status: 1)
Busy: RED (Status: 2)
Initialize Start: YELLOW (Result: 1)
Initialize Success: GREEN (Result2: 1)
Initialize Failure: BLUE (Result: 2)
Initialize Executing: YELLOW (Result2: 2)
Note: The numbers shown in brackets are used for printout data.
STATUS indicates the trunk status.
Result indicates the result for the initial setting request.
Result 2 indicates the result for the initial setting execution.
– 898 –
RLMG: Release of Media Gateway

This command is used to check which channel of MG(PRI) is retaining an ongoing call (Initial setting is
incomplete). Also, the channel retaining an ongoing call can be reset (Forceful Switchover).
2. Precautions
(a) Only the channel retaining an ongoing call can be switched over forcefully by this command. For other
channels, use RLST command.
(b) This command supports the following MG(PRI).
• MG(PRI) (1.5M) [SCA-24PRIA/MG-24PRIA] (SP-3884 MG PRI PROG-A Issue 10 or later)
• MG(PRI) (2M) [SCA-30PRIA/MG-30PRIA] (SP-3884 MG PRI PROG-A Issue 10 or later)
3. Parameters
Input data

Enter the LENS (six digits) assigned by AMGIL command to read out the information of MG(PRI).
Channel Number to reset: Channel Number (0-31)

Enter the channel number to switch over forcefully.
Note: Each channel data is displayed as follows.
Display Meaning
Gray Not registered

Yellow Initial setting is complete.
Red Initial setting is incomplete.
– 899 –
RLST: Release Station/Trunk

This command is used to release a station, trunk, or virtual trunk when using PHG circuit card.
When in-progress virtual trunk is not able to recover from a fault, this command is used to disconnect the in-
progress call forcefully due to the recovery.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE: Type of Select (1-5)
1=Stations
2=Trunk
3=LENS
4=Connection Trunk
5=Virtual Trunk Note 1
STN: Station Number (maximum six digits) Note 2
RT: Route Number Note 3
Connection RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 5
Connection TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 5

Note 1: This option is valid when assigning 1 or 2 on CDN68: VIR by the ART command, indicating that the
WAN or MG connections are specified as virtual trunk identification data.
Note 2: This parameter is valid only when TYPE=1.
Output data
STATUS: Status of Station/Trunk (1-4)
0=Not Assigned
1=Idle
– 900 –
2=Busy
3=Lockout
4=Make Busy
5=Call Now (PHS system only)
Information: Information of the connected party Note
Note: This parameter appears only when STATUS=2.
CNT: Count
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
RT: External/Internal Route Number
C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023)
C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095)
PCN: PHS Community Number (1-1024)
ERN: Area Number (1-32)
CSN: CS Number (1-32)
INTERVAL: Interval time of scan (seconds) (30-180)
RESULT: After release result (1, 2)
1=Release complete
2=Release executing
Details of a color:
Not Assigned= GRAY (Status: 0)
Idle, Make Busy= WHITE (Status: 1)
Busy = WHITE (Status: 2)
Lockout = WHITE (Status: 3)
Make Busy = GRAY (Status: 4)
Call Now = GRAY (Status: 5)
Release complete = GREEN (Result: 1)
Release executing = YELLOW (Result: 2)
Note: The Numbers shown in brackets are used for printout data.
RESULT indicates the result of data entries.
– 901 –
RLST_T: Release of Station/Trunk – Telephone Number

This command is used to release a station/trunk, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is only available
at NCN (for FCCS network).
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:
Telephone Number
Trunk
LENS
Connection Trunk
UGN: User Group Number Note 1
TELN: Telephone Number (maximum 16 digits) Note 1
RT: External/Internal Route Number Note 2
C_RT: Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 4
C_TK: Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 4
Note 1: This parameter is valid when Telephone Number is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when Trunk is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Note 3: This parameter is valid when LENS is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Note 4: This parameter is valid when Connection Trunk is designated in the TYPE selection list box.
Output Data

STN: Physical Station Number (a maximum of five digits for a Business system, and six digits for a Hotel
system) Note 1
– 902 –
STATUS: Status of Station/Trunk (1-5)
1=Idle
2=Busy
3=Lockout
4=Make Busy
5=Now Calling
Information: Information on the connected party Note 5
ERN: Area Number (1-32) Note 6
GRN: Group Number (1-8) Note 6
CSN/ZTN: CS/ZT Number (1-32) Note 6
PCN: PHS Community Number (1-1024) Note 6
Note 5: This data is displayed when STATUS=2 (Busy).
Note 6: This data is for Wireless System only.
Buttons
Get: Get information on the station/trunk.
Release: Execute the station/trunk release.
– 903 –
RPID : Remove of Pad Lock ID Data

This command is used to release the PAD LOCK ID Code setting of each analog/Dterm station by the PCPro
operation.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TN: Tenant Number

Enter the Tenant Number in which the target station belongs.
STN: Station Number [Max. 6 digits]
Designate the station number whose PAD LOCK ID Code setting is to be re-
leased.
Output Data
PID: PAD LOCK ID Code

Note: It is not available to display and list up the ID codes on the PCPro screen.
Buttons
Get: Get information for the PAD LOCK ID Code assigned to the station/tenant.
Del.: Delete information for the PAD LOCK ID Code assigned to the station/tenant.
– 904 –
SCVT: Setting / Change of Virtual Trunk Operation Data

This command is used to initialize memory due to changing virtual trunk data of the Protocol Handler (PH)
cards. Memory initialization starts when trunk status is Idle and Bothway Make-Busy.
Note: Virtual trunks indicated here become available only when virtual channels via PHC are used with CCIS
over IP. Virtual channels via Media Gateway is not available.
2. Parameters
Input data
RT: Route Number

INTERVAL: Interval time of scan (seconds) [0-120]
Details of a color:
Not Assigned: GRAY (Status: 0)
Idle: WHITE (Status: 1)
Busy: RED (Status: 2)
Bothway Make-Busy/Not Mounted: YELLOW (Status: 3)
Initialize Success: GREEN (Result: 1)
Initialize Failure: BLUE (Result: 2) Note
Note: The numbers shown in brackets are used for printout data.
RESULT indicates the memory initialization result.
[Read]
• Enter the route number.
• Click the Read button.
• Current trunk status is displayed in different colors.

[Execute]
• Click the Execute button.
• When the trunk is idle and Bothway Make Busy/Not Mounted, memory initial starts.
– 905 –
SINZ: System Initialize

This command is used to initialize the system from PCPro.
WARNING: Do not use this command when the system is in normal operation since this command ex-
ecutes the system initialization.
Note: When the system is initialized, PCPro is disconnected. After initialization is complete, log back into
PCPro.
2. Parameters
<TYPE tab>
System Initialize
The system initialize is executed for ACT side with the current office data of MEM without loading
from the CF card.
Office Data Load & System Initialize
The system initialize is executed for ACT side by loading the office data from the CF card to MEM.
Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize
The system initialize is executed for ACT side by loading the program and the office data from the CF
card to MEM.
<OPTION tab>
Calling keep restore
The system initialize is executed for ACT side while maintaining a call in progress.
Restart
The system initialize is executed for ACT side by restarting the system.
Shutdown
The system initialize is executed for ACT side by shutting the system down.
<Standby> System Initialize Note 1
The system initialize is executed for STBY side with the current office data of MEM without loading
from the CF card.
<Standby> Office Data Load & System Initialize Note 1
The system initialize is executed for STBY side by loading the office data from the CF card to MEM.
<Standby> Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize Note 1
– 906 –
The system initialize is executed for STBY side by loading the program and the office data from the CF
card to MEM.
<Standby> Restart Note 1
The system initialize is executed for STBY side by restarting the system.
<Standby> Shutdown Note 1
The system initialize is executed for STBY side by shutting the system down.
Note 1: This parameter is only available for North America.
< For Redundant Data Memory Backup on Individual Hard Drive > Note 2
Click Option in the menu bar, and select Drive Select. A window, with the following parameters, appears.
On the window, designate the affected drive:
Program:
Drive A (default setting)
Drive D
Office Data:
Drive B (default setting)

Drive C
Note 2: This data must be specified only when using the Redundant Data Memory Backup on an Individual
Hard Drive function.
Buttons
Execute: Execute the specified system initialization.

– 907 –
SINZN: System Initialize for the FCCS Network

This command is used to simultaneously initialize the SV8500 systems on the same FCCS (Fusion) network.
At the time of each system initialization, specify whether to load the Program/Office Data, depending on the
data setting below.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE: System Initialize
Office Data Load & System Initialize
Program Load & System Initialize
Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize
OPTION: Phase 1 Restart: Calls in progress are held during system initialization.
Note 1: Regardless of using or not using the Redundant Data Memory Backup on an Individual Hard Drive func-
tion, the affected Hard Disk Drive is fixed to the following:
For Program Load: Drive A
For Office Data Load: Drive B
By using this command (SINZN), Drive Selection of Drive C or Drive D is not available.
Buttons
Execute: Execute the specified system initialization. Note 3
Note 3: When the system initialization is executed by this command, PCPro is disconnected. After initialization
is complete, log back into PCPro.
– 908 –
SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

This command is used to display momentarily the working status of Port Microprocessor (PM) on Module
Group (MG), Unit, and Group basis.
2. Parameters
Input data
Unit: Unit Number
Group: Group Information
Interval: Unit for this parameter is in seconds.
Entry Procedure
Type 1: By MG
Display of Scanning by Designating MG (Figure 7-7)
Package Status
PM: Not Mounted Note
ID: Idle at least one
BY: All Busy
MB: Under Make-Busy Status
Note: This information appears when the circuit card is in Make-Busy status (MB key is set upward) or when
the designated location has no circuit card.
– 909 –
Figure 7-7 Port Status Report (MG) Display
Scanning of Port Status (SPTS)

Type
MG Interval SCAN
1: by MG 3: by MG, Unit, Group
0 10
2: by MG, Unit STOP EXIT
Dynamic Port Status Report (MG)

Package Status PM: Package is not Mounted or Package is make Busy.
ID: More than one port in a Group is Idle.
BY: All Port in a Group is Busy.
MB: All Port in a Group is Hard Make Busy or Soft Make Busy.
4: —
Group 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- RS RS DT DT -- DT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Unit 0 PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM ID ID ID ID ID ID PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM
-- -- -- -- -- -- DL -- -- -- -- TK -- DT -- DT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Unit 1 PM PM PM PM PM PM ID ID PM PM MB MB ID ID MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Unit 2 PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM MB MB PM PM PM PM PM PM
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Unit 3 PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM PM
Table 7-1 provides a list of the circuit cards and the working status of the PM in each group.
Table 7-1 Type of Circuit Cards
TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARD FUNCTION NAME

LC Line Circuit
TK Analog Trunk
RS Register Sender
AI Attendant Interface
DL Digital Line Circuit
CF 3-Party Conference
MO Modem Pool Trunk
DT Digital Interface Trunk
DS DST
DT Digital Trunk
– 910 –
Type 2: By MG, Unit

Display of Scanning by Designating Unit (Figure 7-8)
Port Status on
Circuit Card Basis
ID: On-line Status
BY: Make Busy/Not Mounted

Port Status on
Circuit Level Basis
0: Not Assigned
1: Line Idle
2: Line Busy
3: Make Busy
4: Lockout
5: Status 5
Figure 7-8 Port Status Report (MG, Unit) Display

Type
MG Unit Interval SCAN
0 1 10
Dynamic Port Status Report (MG/UNIT)

Port Status
0: Not Assigned 1: Line Idle
2: Line Busy 3: Make Busy
4: LockOut 5: Status5
Group 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Type -- -- -- -- -- -- DL -- -- -- -- TK -- DT -- DT -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Status BY BY BY BY BY BY ID BY BY BY BY ID BY ID BY ID BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY BY
Level
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
– 911 –
Type 3: By MG, Unit, Group

Display of Scanning by Designating Group
When Group is Designated (Figure 7-9)
STATUS:
Idle = Idle
-- = Unassigned Port
TN: Tenant Number
STN: Station Number
TEC: Telephone Equipment Class
Figure 7-9 Port Status Report (MG, Unit, Group) Display—Designating Group

Type
MG Unit Group Interval SCAN
0 1 06 10
Dynamic Port Status Report (MG/UNIT/GROUP)
PKG Type: DL
PKG Status: ID
SP No: 3124
Issue: 5
Level STATUS TN STN TEC RT TK TCL

7 --
6 --
5 --
4 --
3 Idle 1 2002 Dterm
2 Idle 1 2001 Dterm
1 Idle 1 2000 Dterm
0 --
– 912 –
When Group-Trunk is Designated (Figure 7-10)

RT: See Table 7-2.
TK: Trunk Number
TCL: Trunk Class
Figure 7-10 Port Status Report (MG, Unit, Group) Display—Designating Group-Trunk

Type
MG Unit Group Interval SCAN
0 0 13 10
Dynamic Port Status Report (MG/UNIT/GROUP)
PKG Type: TK
PKG Status: ID
SP No: 3010
Issue: 5
Level STATUS TN STN TEC RT TK TCL

7 --
6 --
5 --
4 --
3 Idle 10 4 TIE Line
Table 7-2 Route Number Explanation

901 Attendant Console 902 Originating Register Trunk
909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 910, 911 Not used
913 Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON 914 Not used
915 Night Attendant 916 MFC Register
919-926 Modem 927, 928 Not used
929 MFC Sender 930 Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk
931 Not used 932-947 Not used
– 913 –
SRTS: Scanning of Route Status

This command is used to display the designated trunk status (IDLE/BUSY) at predetermined intervals. A
maximum of 15 routes can be scanned.
2. Parameters
Input data
RT: Route Number

Interval Time
Output data
Number of Idle TK
Number of Busy
– 914 –
SRTS_LR: Scanning of Route Status - Logical Route Number

This command is used to display the designated trunk status (IDLE/BUSY) at predetermined intervals. A
maximum of 15 routes can be scanned. Route number of the SRTS command can be assigned by using a logical
route number.
Note: When logging in to the Network Control Node (NCN), the data of the other Local Node (LN) can be
changed. If logging in to a LN, only the DM of self-node can be changed by this command.
2. Parameters
Input Data
LGRT: Logical route Number [1-899] Note

Interval: Interval Time of two scan [2-999]
Note: Prior to this command, a logical route number must be allocated by the ALRTN command.
Output Data

RT: Route of Route Number
Number of IDLE/BUSY TK
– 915 –
TOGC: Test of Originating Connection

This command is used to execute originating connection tests by specifying the self-trunk/station number and
the destination route/trunk number on the PCPro display.
By using this command, the following is available:
• Capable of observing both originating and incoming trunks, you can perform the tests even involving the
Tandem connection.
• Different from Individual Trunk Access that uses a specific access code, this test can involve the register/
sender, etc., thereby enabling the test condition the same as that in the normal connection.
Also, the following shows service conditions for this test:
(a) The originating side must be a station, ICT/BWT or Attendant Console.

(b) Accessible trunks are REG, SND, CFT or OGT/BWT.
Note: Designed trunk connection is available for ISDN trunks (Q.931a).

(c) The test observation by this command is effective for approximately three minutes since the test was
initiated.
(d) When the test result is abnormal, due to a factor such as PCPro power failure, etc., the existing data
for test connection may remain on the SV8500 side. To clear the data, activate the TOGC command
again.
(e) Test results can be observed only on the trunks accommodated in the same SV8500 node even if
CALLING STN TYPE = TELN(NDM)/TELN(LDM) or CALLING RT TYPE = LGRT.
(f) This connection test is restricted for FCCS trunk.
(g) When testing Dterm with this command, be sure to choose My Line. Once the Dterm belongs to My
Line, it is possible to perform a test from the terminal with Sub Line.
2. Parameters
[When STN is selected in the TYPE selection list box]
Input Data
CALLING STN TYPE: Station Type of Calling Party
STN=Station Number
TELN(NDM)=Telephone Number (NDM)
TELN(LDM)=Telephone Number (LDM)
CALLED RT TYPE: Route Type of Called Party
– 916 –
RT=Physical Route of Called Party
LGRT=Logical Route of Called Party
CALLING TN: Tenant Number of Calling Party
CALLING STN: Station Number of Calling Party
CALLING UGN: User Group Number of Calling Party
Note 1: This parameter appears when CALLING STN TYPE = TELN (NDM)/TELN (LDM).
CALLING TELN: Telephone Number of Calling Party
Note 2: This parameter appears when CALLING STN TYPE = TELN (NDM)/TELN (LDM).
CALLED RT: Route Number of Called Party
Note 3: This parameter appears when CALLED RT TYPE = RT (Physical Route).
CALLED LGRT: Logical Route Number of Called Party
Note 4: This parameter appears when CALLED RT TYPE = LGRT (Logical Route).
CALLED TK: Trunk Number of Called Party
[When TRUNK is selected in the TYPE selection list box]
Input Data
CALLING RT TYPE: Route Type of Calling Party
RT=Physical Route of Calling Party
LGRT=Logical Route of Calling Party
CALLED RT TYPE: Route Type of Calling Party
RT=Physical Route of Called Party
LGRT=Logical Route of Called Party
CALLING RT: Physical Route Number of Calling Party
Note 5: This parameter appears when CALLING RT TYPE = RT (Physical Route).
CALLING LGRT: Logical Route Number of Calling Party
Note 6: This parameter appears when CALLING RT TYPE = LGRT (Logical Route).
– 917 –
CALLING TK: Trunk Number of Calling Party
Note 7: This parameter appears when CALLING RT TYPE = RT (Physical Route)/LGRT (Logical Route).
CALLED RT: Route Number of Called Party
Note 8: This parameter appears when CALLED RT TYPE = RT (Physical Route).
CALLED LGRT: Logical Route Number of Called Party
Note 9: This parameter appears when CALLED RT TYPE = LGRT (Logical Route).
CALLED TK: Trunk Number of Called Party
For test procedure details, refer to Section 10.3, Designated Connection Test (PCPro) in Chapter 6 of this
manual.
– 918 –
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A Minor Version Update for Online Software
CAUTION
Follow this procedure only when instructed to do so by the service technician.
1. GENERAL
This feature is used to apply patches to the Telephony Server’s program.
Telephony Server
[1]
[2]
Maintenance Console
1. Use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony Server.

2. Use XPAT command to apply uploaded patch files to the Telephony Server.
2. PRECAUTIONS
(1) For dual–CPU system, apply patches to STBY side as well as ACT side. Otherwise, after system change-
over to STBY side occurs, the system will operate on a program without the patch applied.
(2) Maximum of 255 patches can be retained in the Telephony Server.
(3) When applying multiple patches, application will fail unless all files are in correct format.
3. APPLYING THE PATCH FILES
(1) Use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony Server. Note 1
Note 1: Make sure to upload the patch files to each Telephony Server side (ACT side and/or STBY side) targeted
for patch application.
STEP 1 Copy the obtained patch files to the desired directory of the maintenance console. Note 2
Note 2: Designate a folder to save the patch files to. NEVER place files other than patch files in the designated
folder.
– 919 –
APPENDIX A
STEP 2 Start up maintenance console’s PCPro Tools.

Select “Tool” — “Install Data Registration Setting” from the menu bar.
This opens “Install Data Registration Setting” window.
STEP 3 In “Install Data Registration Setting” window:
1. From “Install Data List,” select data you wish to install. Note 1
2. Press “Detail” button.
3. This opens “Install Data Detail” window.
Note 1: Follow the procedures below when wishing to add a new directory in “Install Data List.”
1. In “Install Data Registration Setting” window:

a. Press “Add” button in “Install Data List” field.
b. This opens “Setting Install Data Name” window.
2. In “Setting Install Data Name” window:

a. Enter desired name in “Install Data Name” box.
b. Press “Setting” button.
c. This takes you back to “Install Data Registration Setting” window.
STEP 4 In “Install Data Detail” window:
1. Select “Patch” from “Data Kind” pull–down menu.

2. Press “Import” button.
3. This opens “Data Import” window.
STEP 5 In “Data Import” window:
1. For “Import Data” field, select the directory used in STEP 1.

2. Enter desired data name in “Install Data Name” box.
3. Press “Import” button.
4. This will save the patch files to the maintenance console.
STEP 6 Make sure the data name entered in STEP 5–2 appears in “Install Data List” of “Install Data De-
tail” window.
STEP 7 In PCPro Tools’ Main menu:
1. Select the following:

• Operation: Patch
• System Side: System 0/System 1
• Drive: A/D
• Connection Account Name: Destination for connection (pre–registered)
2. Press “Execute” button.
– 920 –
APPENDIX A
STEP 8 In PCPro Tools’ Patch menu:
1. Select the following:

• Operation: Write
• Install Data Name: Data selected in STEP 3–1
• Patch Selection: Data Name set in “Install Data Name” box of STEP 5–2
2. Press “Execute” button.
(2) Use XPAT command to apply uploaded patch files to the Telephony Server.
STEP 1 Start up XPAT command.
STEP 2 Select target Telephony Server side to apply patches using radio buttons in “Mode: ACT/ST-
BY.”
STEP 3 Press “Get” button to display “Patch Information List” (list of uploaded patch files).
• When application for all uploaded patch files have been completed:
Message “Everything has been applied.” appears.
Press “Exit” button to end XPAT command.
STEP 4 Press “Check” button to check formats for patch files.
• When all files are in correct format:

“Apply” button becomes active.
• When an incorrect file format exists:

Error message is displayed in “Check Result” column of “Patch Information List.”
“Apply” button does not become active.
STEP 5 Press “Apply” button.

Message “Do you apply patch?” appears.
Press “OK” to start applying the patch. Note 1
• When all patch file application was successful:

Message “Patch application success. Display information is updated.” appears.
• When patch application failed:

Message “Patch application failed. Display information is updated.” appears.
Note 1: Pressing the “OK” button automatically executes readout to update the Patch Information List. When
patch application failed, the first patch file in “Applied Status” column displayed as “Unapplication”
failed to have the patch applied. Contact the patch provider when this problem occurs.
STEP 6 Press “Exit” button to end XPAT command when patch application is complete.
– 921 –
APPENDIX A
4. Deleting Patch Files
Delete patch files that cannot be applied by XPAT command using the following steps.
STEP 1 Delete all patch files using PCPro Tools.
STEP 2 Excluding files that are not applicable, use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony
Server.
5. Canceling Applied Patch Files
Cancel patch files applied by XPAT command using the following steps. System initialization is required for
this procedure.
STEP 1 Delete all patch files using PCPro Tools.
STEP 2 Excluding files to be canceled, use PCPro Tools to upload patch files to the Telephony Server.
STEP 3 Use SINZ command of PC Pro to execute “Program Load & System Initialize.”
– 922 –
APPENDIX A
XPAT: On–line Patch Install

This command applies the patches, uploaded to the Telephony Server using PCPro Tools, at once rather than
one at a time.
2. Parameters
Input Data
Mode:
Select target CPU to perform patch application by radio button.
• ACT
• STBY
Patch Information List: Note 1
Patch Number: List of patch number
Target Process: Program targeted for patch application

– main
– mph
– phi
– phd
– b2bua
– sp_boot
– sipsv_phe
– sipsv_sip
Applied Status: Status of applied patch

– Application
– Unapplication
Check Result: Result of patch check

– Format OK
– Format NG
– Process Name NG
– Base LM Version NG
– Patch Number NG
– File Open Failure
Note 1: When pressing “Get” button, if readout cannot be correctly processed for an existing patch file, columns
“Target Process” and “Applied Status” will remain blank.
– 923 –
APPENDIX A
Buttons
Get: Read out a list of patch files uploaded to the Telephony Server.
Check: Check format of the patch file.
Apply: Apply the patch file.
– 924 –
REVISION SHEET
UNIVERGE SV8500
NWA-041693-001
Revision Sheet
S1E:DATE JANUARY,2009
Chapter 1
1, 4, 7, 8
Chapter 2
49, 51, 54, 54, 63, 63, 63, 66,
68, 69, 72, 74, 76, 113, 168
Chapter 3
200, 201, 244, 245, 345, 346,
355, 356, 357
Chapter 5
593, 663
Chapter 7
690, 690, 690, 690, 690, 699,
699, 699, 700, 713, 713, 713,
714, 714, 718, 718, 737, 741,
742, 744, 746, 764, 765, 782,
794, 814, 823, 826,
REV-1
Printed in Japan
0901-020

Univerge sv8500 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Univerge sv8500 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Univerge sv8500 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FP85-104 S1E

Operations and Maintenance Manual

The related Service/Technical Information Bulletin should be read in

NEC Australia Pty Ltd.

NEC Infrontia Corporation reserves the right to change the specifica-

Copyright 2008 - 2009

NEC Infrontia Corporation

Incorrect use of the equipment may cause personal injury or death.

The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries.

Carefully read all the manuals that relate to the system.

If lightning causes a fault, contact the dealer.

Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries:

Do not place any equipment in the following environments:

1. CUSTOMER INFORMATION FOR TELEPHONE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT (TTE)

1.1 TELEPHONE/SERVICE PROVIDER COMPANY NOTIFICATION

• Your telephone number.

• FCC registration number:

For SV8500 system, use the following number:

FCC Product Identifier: US:NIFMF21BSN8153, US:NIFPF21BSN8153, US:NIFKF21BSN8153

Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 2.1B

USOC jacks required: RJ21X, RJ2EX, RJ2GX

1.3 REPAIR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

1.4 PRIVATE (LEASED) LINES

1.5 TOLL RESTRICTION AND LEAST COST ROUTING EQUIPMENT

1.6 DIRECT INWARD DIALING

Note: ALLOWING THIS EQUIPMENT TO BE OPERATED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO NOT PROVIDE

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) must contain the following:

• Answered by the called station.

• Answered by the Attendant.

• Routed to a dial prompt.

• A busy tone is received.

• A reorder tone is received.

1.7 VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT/MONITORING OVER DID LINES

1.9 ELECTRICAL SAFETY ADVISORY

1.10 HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY

1.11 MUSIC ON HOLD

2. RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE

In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules, the following statement is provided:

4. INDUSTRY CANADA REQUIREMENTS

(1) Your telephone number.

(2) IC registration number: IC: 140L-SN8153

(3) Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the equipment: 2.1

Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades

Unit Name Type of Battery Quantity

MH250 (WLPS3(E)-A) Lithium-ion 1

PSIII (PS3D) Lithium-ion 1

CT-12 Headset Cordless Nickel Metal-Hydride 1

DTH-4R-2 Nickel Metal-Hydride 1

DTL-8R-1 Nickel Metal-Hydride 1

DTR-1HM-1 TEL Lithium 1

DTR-4R-2 TEL Nickel-Cadmium 1

DTU-4R-1 TEL Lead Acid 1

Headset Cordless II Nickel Metal-Hydride 1

Bluetooth® Cordless Handset Lithium-ion 1

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY.

CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY.

CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE

This manual is valid for the UNIVERGE SV8500 telephone system.